ScanMaster User Guide v1.02 - Quality Business Machines, LLC

ScanMaster User Guide v1.02 - Quality Business Machines, LLC
ScanMaster User Guide v1.02
ScanMaster 1.02 User Guide
Date of Issue
Product
Identification
Number
March 2005
Part Number
Brief Description
First-Release
Copyright© StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC 1995-2005
All rights reserved
This publication is protected by federal copyright law into any human or computer language in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual. No part of this publication may be copied or
distributed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the
express written permission of StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC.
StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof
and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. StoreNext
Retail Technologies LLC further reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to
time in the contents hereof without obligation of Fujitsu Transaction Solutions, Inc. to notify any person or
organization of such revision or changes.
StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC has prepared this manual for use by users, authorized third parties and
personnel of StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC as a guide to the proper installation, operation, customization
and/or maintenance of StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC equipment and software. The drawings and
specifications contained herein are the property of StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC.
Address comments and corrections to:
StoreNext Retail Technologies LLC
ISS45 Program Director
1250 East Arques Avenue
M/S 363
Sunnyvale, CA 94085
User Guide
i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Open Systems Architecture...............................................................1-2
Supported Configurations ..........................................................1-2
Front End POS ...................................................................................1-4
Suspend/Resume....................................................................1-5
In-Store Charge........................................................................1-5
Customer Information Display (CID)....................................1-5
Electronic Coupons .................................................................1-5
Frequent Shopper Program ....................................................1-5
Back Office Software..........................................................................1-6
Logging Into ScanMaster ..................................................................1-7
ScanMaster I Menu Options .............................................................1-9
User Manual Organization .............................................................1-12
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Employee Menu...........................................................................2-2
Employee Maintenance .....................................................................2-4
Field Descriptions....................................................................2-5
Button Options ........................................................................2-6
Adding, Modifying, or Deleting an Employee Record ........2-7
Active Cashier List.............................................................................2-8
Field Descriptions....................................................................2-9
Button Options ........................................................................2-9
Employee List ..................................................................................2-10
Field Descriptions..................................................................2-11
Button Options ......................................................................2-11
Cashier Monitoring..........................................................................2-12
Monitoring a Cashier ............................................................2-13
ii
User Guide
Button Options ......................................................................2-14
Force Cashier Logoff........................................................................2-15
Field Descriptions..................................................................2-16
Button Options ......................................................................2-16
Using the Force Cashier Logoff Screen................................2-16
Enhanced Security ...........................................................................2-17
Field Descriptions..................................................................2-18
Button Options ......................................................................2-21
Performing Enhanced Security ............................................2-22
Active Cashier Status Editor ...........................................................2-23
Field Descriptions..................................................................2-24
Button Options ......................................................................2-24
Using the Active Cashier Status Editor ...............................2-24
Chapter 3: Performing Department/ Sub-department
Maintenance
The Department/ Subdepartment Menu ..................................3-2
Department Maintenance..................................................................3-3
Field Descriptions....................................................................3-4
Button Options ........................................................................3-6
Performing Department Maintenance...................................3-7
Subdepartment Maintenance............................................................3-8
Field Descriptions....................................................................3-9
Button Options ......................................................................3-10
Performing Subdepartment Maintenance ...........................3-11
Department Restriction Matrix.......................................................3-12
Using the Daily Restriction Matrix ......................................3-14
Using the Holiday Restriction Matrix..................................3-16
Field Descriptions..................................................................3-17
Button Options ......................................................................3-18
Group Descriptor Maintenance ......................................................3-19
Field Descriptions..................................................................3-20
User Guide
iii
Button Options ......................................................................3-20
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Item Maintenance Menu ...................................................................4-2
Item File Menu Options ..............................................................4-3
Direct Item Maintenance ...................................................................4-5
Expanded UPC Fields .............................................................4-5
Field Descriptions....................................................................4-7
Status Flags ..............................................................................4-8
General Tab Field Descriptions ............................................4-11
Enhanced Tab Field Descriptions ........................................4-17
Button Options ......................................................................4-20
Accessing/Adding UPC Numbers ......................................4-21
Linking Items.........................................................................4-21
Pricing Deal Examples ..........................................................4-22
Create/Edit Batches.........................................................................4-23
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-24
Button Options ......................................................................4-25
Accessing Existing Batches...................................................4-26
Creating Shelf Label Files .....................................................4-26
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-27
Button Options ......................................................................4-29
Accessing Item Maintenance Fields.....................................4-30
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-31
Button Options ......................................................................4-31
Editing Existing Batches .......................................................4-35
Adding New Items to a Batch ..............................................4-35
Creating Local Batches..........................................................4-37
Automatically Activating Batches........................................4-37
Activate Batches...............................................................................4-38
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-39
iv
User Guide
Button Options ......................................................................4-39
Manually Activating Batches ...............................................4-40
Delete Batches ..................................................................................4-41
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-42
Button Options ......................................................................4-42
Deleting Batches ....................................................................4-43
Print Batches.....................................................................................4-44
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-45
Button Options ......................................................................4-45
Printing Batches.....................................................................4-46
Button Options ......................................................................4-47
Mass Attribute Batch .......................................................................4-48
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-49
Button Options ......................................................................4-49
Changing Mass Attributes....................................................4-50
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-51
Button Options ......................................................................4-52
Convert PLU Report to Batch .........................................................4-53
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-54
Button Options ......................................................................4-55
Converting a PLU Report to a Batch....................................4-56
Mix & Match Maintenance..............................................................4-58
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-59
Button Options ......................................................................4-60
Performing Mix & Match Maintenance ...............................4-61
Flip Chart Maintenance...................................................................4-62
Button Options ......................................................................4-64
Miscellaneous Maintenance............................................................4-65
Miscellaneous Maintenance Options .......................................4-66
Promotion/Coupon Editor...................................................4-67
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-68
User Guide
v
Button Options ......................................................................4-68
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-69
Button Options ......................................................................4-70
Bottle Link Editor ..................................................................4-73
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-74
Button Options ......................................................................4-74
Report Code Editor ...............................................................4-76
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-77
Button Options ......................................................................4-77
Tare Table Maintenance........................................................4-79
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-81
Button Options ......................................................................4-81
Variable Tare Maintenance...................................................4-82
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-83
Button Options ......................................................................4-83
Electronic Coupon Maintenance ..........................................4-85
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-86
General Tab Field Descriptions ............................................4-87
Frequent Shopper/General Information Tab Field
Descriptions ...........................................................................4-89
Button Options ......................................................................4-90
Using the Electronic Coupon Editor ....................................4-91
Creating Multiple Electronic Coupons for the Same
Lookup Value ........................................................................4-93
Electronic Coupons by Weight.............................................4-95
Setting Up Random Weight Discounts (By Unit of
Measure) ................................................................................4-96
Setting Up Limited Quantity Discounts (By Unit of
Measure) ................................................................................4-97
Bundle File Maintenance ......................................................4-98
Field Descriptions..................................................................4-98
Button Options ......................................................................4-99
vi
User Guide
Using the Bundle File Maintenance Option ...................... 4-100
Adjective Price Maintenance .............................................. 4-101
Field Descriptions................................................................ 4-102
Button Options .................................................................... 4-103
Adjective Pricing by Level.................................................. 4-104
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Customer Maintenance Menu ..........................................................5-2
Customer Maintenance Menu Options......................................5-3
Negative Check File Maintenance ....................................................5-5
Field Descriptions....................................................................5-6
Button Options ........................................................................5-7
Performing Negative Check File Maintenance .....................5-8
Negative Check Report .....................................................................5-9
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-10
Button Options ......................................................................5-10
Creating a Negative Check Report ......................................5-11
Customer File Maintenance ............................................................5-12
Field Definitions ....................................................................5-13
History Tab Field Definitions...............................................5-14
Frequent Shopper Tab Field Definitions .............................5-15
Frequent Shopper Tab Field Definitions .............................5-20
Button Options ......................................................................5-21
Adding, Editing, or Deleting a Customer in the
Customer File.........................................................................5-22
Creating a Customer Range..................................................5-23
Transferring Customer Charge Information .......................5-24
Adding or Editing Customer Charge Information .............5-25
Setting Up an In-Store Charge Program..............................5-25
Check/Charge Reason Codes.........................................................5-29
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-30
Button Options ......................................................................5-30
User Guide
vii
Adding or Editing Customer Reason Codes.......................5-31
Clear Customer Totals.....................................................................5-32
Field Definitions ....................................................................5-33
Button Options ......................................................................5-35
Immediate Tab Button Options............................................5-36
End of Day Tab Button Options...........................................5-36
Export Tab Button Options...................................................5-37
Clearing Customer Totals Immediately ..............................5-38
Clearing Customer Totals During End of Day....................5-38
Clearing Customer Totals During Export ...........................5-39
Customer Report..............................................................................5-40
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-41
Points Tab Field Descriptions...............................................5-43
Historical Tab Field Descriptions.........................................5-44
Discounts Tab Field Descriptions ........................................5-45
Button Options ......................................................................5-46
Creating a Customer / Frequent Shopper Report ..............5-46
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix................................................5-49
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-50
Button Options ......................................................................5-50
Setting Up Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix ..................5-51
Accounts Receivable Menu.............................................................5-52
Performing A/R Functions.......................................................5-54
Post A/R Payments...............................................................5-55
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-56
Button Options ......................................................................5-56
Post A/R Finance Charges ...................................................5-58
Field Definitions ....................................................................5-59
Button Options ......................................................................5-59
A/R Month-End Close..........................................................5-60
Field Definitions ....................................................................5-61
viii
User Guide
Button Options ......................................................................5-61
Closing Month-End...............................................................5-61
A/R Statement Printing........................................................5-62
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-63
Button Options ......................................................................5-63
A/R Aging Report ................................................................5-65
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-66
Button Options ......................................................................5-66
A/R Activity Report .............................................................5-68
Field Definitions ....................................................................5-69
Button Options ......................................................................5-69
Level Code Maintenance.................................................................5-71
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-72
Button Options ......................................................................5-72
Using the Level Code Maintenance Screen .........................5-72
Host Customer File Configurator...................................................5-73
Field Descriptions..................................................................5-74
Button Options ......................................................................5-74
Launching the Host Customer File Configurator ...............5-76
Using the Host Customer File Configurator .......................5-78
Host Customer File Record Layout......................................5-79
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Record Layouts .........................................................................6-3
Customer Hosting ...................................................................6-4
Host Customer File .................................................................6-4
Host Customer File Record Layout............................................6-6
Host Negative Check File Record Layout ...............................6-10
Host In-Store Charge File .....................................................6-11
Host In-Store Charge File Record Layout................................6-13
Host Batch Conversion File ..................................................6-14
User Guide
ix
Host Batch File Record Layout .................................................6-16
Host Batch File Header Record ................................................6-19
Host Electronic Coupon File.................................................6-20
Host Electronic Coupon ASCII File Record Layout
(SMWECACT.EXE) ...................................................................6-22
Host Electronic Coupon ASCII File Record Layout
(SMWECAC2.EXE)................................................................6-25
Auditing Changes to the Item File and Host Batches.............6-26
ITRAIL.LOG Record Layout ................................................6-27
Chapter 7: System Services
System Services Menu Options ..................................................7-2
View Security Log..............................................................................7-4
Field Descriptions....................................................................7-5
Button Options ........................................................................7-5
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files....................................................7-6
Menu Options for ScanMaster View/Delete Logs and
Unlock Flag Files .........................................................................7-7
Using the View/Delete Logs and Unlock Flag Files
Options.....................................................................................7-8
Unlock Notfound ....................................................................7-8
Unlock Random.......................................................................7-8
Unlock Suspend.......................................................................7-9
View/Print Error Log .............................................................7-9
Delete Error Log ....................................................................7-10
View/Print EOD Log ............................................................7-10
View/Print ARC Log ............................................................7-11
View/Print FC Rate Log .......................................................7-11
Field Descriptions..................................................................7-12
Button Options ......................................................................7-12
View/Delete Suspends .........................................................7-13
Field Descriptions..................................................................7-14
x
User Guide
Button Options ......................................................................7-14
User Defined Menu .........................................................................7-15
Editing the User-Defined Menu ...........................................7-16
Label Printing...................................................................................7-17
Field Descriptions..................................................................7-18
Button Options ......................................................................7-18
Printing ScanMaster Shelf Labels.........................................7-19
Third Party Menu ............................................................................7-20
Third Party Software .................................................................7-21
Electronic Journal Back-Up .............................................................7-22
Field Descriptions..................................................................7-23
Button Options ......................................................................7-23
Performing Electronic Journal Back-up...............................7-24
System Back-Up ...............................................................................7-25
Field Descriptions..................................................................7-26
Button Options ......................................................................7-26
Performing System Back-up (Workstation Only) ...............7-27
Performing System Back-up (Server Only) .........................7-28
Performing System Back-up (On Data Files).......................7-29
View/Print Error Logs ....................................................................7-30
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Personalization Menu........................................................................8-2
Personalization Menu Options .........................................................8-3
Control File Options by Function .....................................................8-5
Accounting – Functional Groups......................................................8-7
Balancing/Reports ......................................................................8-7
Back Office Control File ..........................................................8-7
Register Control File ...............................................................8-8
Discounts (Key Discounts)..........................................................8-9
Register Control File ...............................................................8-9
User Guide
xi
Electronic Journal ......................................................................8-11
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-11
In-Store Charge..........................................................................8-11
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-11
Register Control File .............................................................8-11
Override / Refund / Void / Media Swap...............................8-12
Register Control File .............................................................8-12
Tax ..............................................................................................8-13
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-13
Register Control File .............................................................8-13
Tender Media (Checks / WIC / Charge / EFT / EBT) ..........8-14
Back office control file ...........................................................8-14
Register Control File .............................................................8-14
Maintenance .....................................................................................8-17
Customer Receipt and Display.................................................8-17
Register Control File .............................................................8-17
Department / Subdepartment..................................................8-20
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-20
Register Control File .............................................................8-20
Employees and Security............................................................8-21
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-21
Register Control File .............................................................8-21
Tare / Weighed Items ...............................................................8-24
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-24
Register Control File .............................................................8-24
Item (PLU) File/Item Movement .............................................8-25
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-25
Register Control File .............................................................8-25
POS Functions (Miscellaneous) ......................................................8-27
Register Control File .............................................................8-27
Promotions .......................................................................................8-30
xii
User Guide
Electronic Coupons ...................................................................8-30
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-30
Register Control File .............................................................8-30
Frequent Shopper ......................................................................8-31
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-31
Register Control File .............................................................8-31
Manufacturer Coupons.............................................................8-33
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-33
Register Control File .............................................................8-33
Store Coupons............................................................................8-35
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-35
Register Control File .............................................................8-35
Store Coupons (Print)................................................................8-36
Register Control File .............................................................8-36
Third Party Software .......................................................................8-37
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-37
Register Control File .............................................................8-37
Workstation Peripherals..................................................................8-38
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-38
Register Control File .............................................................8-38
Do Not Apply to 7452 with DynaKey and Thermal Printer.........8-39
Back Office Control File ........................................................8-39
Register Control File .............................................................8-39
Register Control File........................................................................8-40
Register Control File Configuration ...............................................8-43
Register Control Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List .....8-43
Register Control File Option Descriptions ..............................8-43
Back Office Control File................................................................. 8-111
Back Office Control File Configuration........................................ 8-112
Back Office Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List............ 8-112
Banner File...................................................................................... 8-126
User Guide
xiii
Customizing the Banner File .............................................. 8-127
Reason Code Maintenance............................................................ 8-128
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-129
Button Options .................................................................... 8-129
Creating/Editing the Reason Code Table ......................... 8-130
Tax Table Maintenance ................................................................. 8-131
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-132
Button Options .................................................................... 8-132
Performing Tax Table Maintenance................................... 8-133
Keyboard Configurator ................................................................. 8-134
Keyboard Configurator Menu Options ................................. 8-135
Using the Keyboard Configurators.................................... 8-135
Using the 7452 DynaKey Configurator .......................... 8-137
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-138
Button Options .................................................................... 8-138
Using the NCR 56 & 64 Key Configurators....................... 8-141
Using the NCR 7445 Key Configurator ............................. 8-143
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-144
Button Options .................................................................... 8-144
Media Configurator....................................................................... 8-145
Media Control File Configuration ................................................ 8-146
Media Control Settings – Functional List .............................. 8-146
Cash...................................................................................... 8-146
Check.................................................................................... 8-146
Foreign Currency ................................................................ 8-148
ACH (Electronic Check)...................................................... 8-148
Debit Card............................................................................ 8-150
Master Card ......................................................................... 8-151
Visa ....................................................................................... 8-153
American Express................................................................ 8-155
In-store Charge .................................................................... 8-157
xiv
User Guide
Discover Card ...................................................................... 8-158
Gift Certificate ..................................................................... 8-160
Food Stamps ........................................................................ 8-161
WIC ...................................................................................... 8-161
Master Credit....................................................................... 8-162
Visa Credit ........................................................................... 8-164
Amex Credit ........................................................................ 8-165
In-store Chg Credit.............................................................. 8-166
Discover Credit.................................................................... 8-167
Store Coupon ....................................................................... 8-169
MFG Coupon ....................................................................... 8-170
Electronic Food Stamps ...................................................... 8-170
Electronic Benefit Transfer.................................................. 8-171
Media Control Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List ...... 8-173
Media Control File Option Descriptions ............................... 8-173
Button Options .................................................................... 8-179
Using the Media Configurator ........................................... 8-179
Foreign Currency Rate Editor....................................................... 8-180
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-181
Button Options .................................................................... 8-181
Using the Foreign Currency Rate Editor ........................... 8-182
Tax Code Editor ............................................................................. 8-184
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-185
Button Options .................................................................... 8-185
Using the Tax Code Editor ................................................. 8-185
SRR Editor ...................................................................................... 8-186
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-187
Button Options .................................................................... 8-188
Using the SRR Editor .......................................................... 8-189
Communication Parameters ......................................................... 8-192
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-192
User Guide
xv
Customer CRT Promo Editor........................................................ 8-195
Field Descriptions................................................................ 8-195
Button Options .................................................................... 8-196
Using the Customer CRT Promo Editor ............................ 8-197
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Operator Display (CRT) ....................................................................9-2
Operator Display (LCD - DynaKey) .............................................9-3
Customer Display ..............................................................................9-5
Beginning the Transaction ................................................................9-6
Item Entry...........................................................................................9-7
Scanning an Item .....................................................................9-8
Entering a UPC Number Manually .......................................9-8
Entering a Preset....................................................................9-10
Entering an Amount to a Department .................................9-10
Entering an Amount to an Open Department Key.............9-10
Total/Tendering ..............................................................................9-11
Department/Item Status .................................................................9-12
Customer Receipt.............................................................................9-13
Function Keys ..................................................................................9-15
Function Keys ........................................................................9-15
ACCOUNT # Key..................................................................9-17
AT/FOR Key .........................................................................9-18
CANCEL Key ........................................................................9-19
CASH CHECK Key ...............................................................9-20
CLEAR/NO Key ...................................................................9-22
COUPON PAIDOUT Key.....................................................9-22
DEPARTMENT Keys ............................................................9-24
DISCOUNT Key ....................................................................9-24
DOUBLE COUPON/DOUBLE COUPON EXCEPTION
Key..........................................................................................9-26
ENTER/REPEAT/YES Key..................................................9-26
xvi
User Guide
FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION Key .......................................9-27
GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER Key.......................9-28
GIFT CERTIFICATE / MONEY ORDER (DynaKey™) .....9-29
MANUFACTURER COUPON Key .....................................9-31
MEDIA SWAP Key ...............................................................9-31
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION Key (Down Arrow
Key) ........................................................................................9-34
OPEN DEPARTMENT Key ..................................................9-35
PAIDOUT Key.......................................................................9-38
PRICE INQUIRY Key............................................................9-39
REFUND Key.........................................................................9-40
REPORT MENU Key ............................................................9-42
RETURN Key.........................................................................9-43
SCALE/TARE Key................................................................9-44
SCAN VOID Key...................................................................9-45
SIGN ON/OFF Key...............................................................9-46
SIGN ON/OFF Key (Idle Mode)..........................................9-48
STATUS Key (on DynaKey)..............................................9-49
STORE COUPON Key ..........................................................9-50
SUSPEND/RETRIEVE Key ..................................................9-51
Retrieving a Transaction .......................................................9-53
TAX EXCEPTION Key..........................................................9-54
TOTAL/NO SALE Key.........................................................9-55
VOID/ERROR CORRECT Key ............................................9-56
Tender Keys .....................................................................................9-58
CASH Key..............................................................................9-60
CHARGE Key ........................................................................9-61
IN-STORE CHARGE Key .....................................................9-63
CHARGE PAYMENT (DynaKey™) ....................................9-66
Performing an Account Balance Inquiry (DynaKey™) ......9-67
CHECK Key...........................................................................9-68
User Guide
xvii
Negative or Positive Check File ...........................................9-68
Check Limits ..........................................................................9-69
EBT Key..................................................................................9-71
FOOD STAMP Key ...............................................................9-72
FOREIGN CURRENCY Key.................................................9-73
GIFT CERTIFICATE Key ......................................................9-74
WIC Key.................................................................................9-75
Report Menu Key.............................................................................9-76
Cashier Report .................................................................................9-77
Register Report ................................................................................9-79
Utilities .............................................................................................9-81
UTILITIES - Update Register................................................9-82
UTILITIES - Off-line Cashier Report....................................9-83
UTILITIES - Non-Resettable Totals......................................9-83
UTILITIES - Set Date .............................................................9-84
UTILITIES - Set Time ............................................................9-85
UTILITIES - Change to Online Mode ..................................9-86
UTILITIES - Change to Off-line Mode.................................9-87
UTILITIES - Display Available Memory .............................9-88
UTILITIES - Display Error Log ............................................9-89
UTILITIES - Change Register Number ................................9-90
UTILITIES - Enable Payment Systems.................................9-91
UTILITIES - Disable Payment Systems................................9-91
UTILITIES - Clear Error Log ................................................9-92
UTILITIES - Shutdown Register...........................................9-92
Conversion Rate...............................................................................9-93
End-of-Day .......................................................................................9-94
Training Mode .................................................................................9-95
xviii
User Guide
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back
Office
Office Procedures.............................................................................10-2
Lane Accountability ..............................................................10-4
Media Counts ........................................................................10-4
Activating the Media Counts Feature..................................10-4
Using the Media Counts Feature .........................................10-5
Pickups and Loans...........................................................................10-6
Field Descriptions..................................................................10-7
Button Options ......................................................................10-8
Performing Cashier Pickups.................................................10-9
Performing Cashier Loans .................................................. 10-10
Cashier Settlements ....................................................................... 10-11
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-12
Button Options .................................................................... 10-12
Performing Cashier Settlements......................................... 10-13
Delay Cashiers ............................................................................... 10-14
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-15
Button Options .................................................................... 10-15
Delaying Cashiers ............................................................... 10-15
Office Reconciliation...................................................................... 10-16
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-17
Button Options .................................................................... 10-17
Performing Office Reconciliation ....................................... 10-18
Deposits .......................................................................................... 10-19
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-20
Button Options .................................................................... 10-20
Initiating Deposits ............................................................... 10-21
Performing A Deposit ......................................................... 10-22
ScanMaster Reconciliation Report................................................ 10-23
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-24
User Guide
xix
Button Options .................................................................... 10-25
Using the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report .................... 10-26
Accessing the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report ............. 10-27
Adjust Settled Cashiers ................................................................. 10-28
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-29
Button Options .................................................................... 10-29
Adjusting Settled Cashiers ................................................. 10-30
Active Cashier List......................................................................... 10-31
Checking Active Cashiers................................................... 10-32
End of Day Procedure ................................................................... 10-33
Media Flash Report........................................................................ 10-35
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-36
Button Options .................................................................... 10-36
Printing Media Flash Reports............................................. 10-37
Report Field Descriptions ................................................... 10-38
Office Adjustments ........................................................................ 10-39
Field Descriptions................................................................ 10-40
Button Options .................................................................... 10-41
Performing An Office Adjustment..................................... 10-42
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Financial Reports Menu ..................................................................11-3
Department Flash Report .....................................................11-4
Button Options ......................................................................11-5
Enhanced Department Report..............................................11-7
Button Options ......................................................................11-8
Department Historical Report............................................ 11-10
Button Options .................................................................... 11-11
Department Activity Report............................................... 11-14
Button Options .................................................................... 11-15
Report Field Descriptions ................................................... 11-17
xx
User Guide
Hourly Activity Report....................................................... 11-18
Button Options .................................................................... 11-18
Consolidated TLOG Reports .............................................. 11-21
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-23
Button Options .................................................................... 11-23
Summary Audit Trail Reports............................................ 11-40
Cashier Audit Report Options................................................ 11-41
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-43
Button Options .................................................................... 11-43
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-45
Button Options .................................................................... 11-45
Detail Audit Trail Reports .................................................. 11-46
Button Options .................................................................... 11-47
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-49
Cashier Report ..................................................................... 11-50
Button Options .................................................................... 11-55
Additional Cashier Report Fields ...................................... 11-56
Additional Store Totals Report Fields ............................... 11-56
Cashier Reports ................................................................... 11-58
Scenario 1 ............................................................................. 11-58
Scenario 2 ............................................................................. 11-59
Scenario 3 ............................................................................. 11-60
Scenario 4 ............................................................................. 11-61
Scenario 5 ............................................................................. 11-62
Scenario 6 ............................................................................. 11-63
Scenario 7 ............................................................................. 11-64
Scenario 8 ............................................................................. 11-65
Store Totals Reports ............................................................ 11-66
Scenario 1 ............................................................................. 11-67
Scenario 2 ............................................................................. 11-68
Scenario 3 ............................................................................. 11-69
User Guide
xxi
Scenario 4 ............................................................................. 11-70
Scenario 5 ............................................................................. 11-71
Scenario 6 ............................................................................. 11-72
Scenario 7 ............................................................................. 11-73
Scenario 8 ............................................................................. 11-74
Lane Productivity Report ................................................... 11-77
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-77
Button Options .................................................................... 11-79
Producing a Lane Productivity Report.............................. 11-80
Non-Resettable Totals Report............................................. 11-81
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-82
Button Options .................................................................... 11-82
Producing a Non-Resettable Totals Report ....................... 11-83
Non-Resettable Totals Calculations ................................... 11-84
Scenario 1 ............................................................................. 11-84
Scenario 2 ............................................................................. 11-85
Scenario 3 ............................................................................. 11-85
Scenario 4 ............................................................................. 11-86
Scenario 5 ............................................................................. 11-86
Scenario 6 ............................................................................. 11-87
Scenario 7 ............................................................................. 11-87
Scenario 8 ............................................................................. 11-88
Electronic Coupon By Department Report........................ 11-89
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-90
Button Options .................................................................... 11-90
Item File Reports............................................................................ 11-92
PLU File Report ................................................................... 11-93
Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-93
Button Options .................................................................... 11-96
PLU Movement Report..................................................... 11-100
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-101
xxii
User Guide
Button Options .................................................................. 11-103
Ad Movement Report ....................................................... 11-107
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-108
Button Options .................................................................. 11-108
Clear Item Movement ....................................................... 11-110
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-111
Button Options .................................................................. 11-112
Electronic Coupon Reports ......................................................... 11-114
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-114
Button Options .................................................................. 11-116
Creating Electronic Coupon Reports ............................... 11-116
Delete Electronic Coupons.......................................................... 11-119
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-119
Button Options .................................................................. 11-120
Deleting Electronic Coupons............................................ 11-120
Print End-of-Day Reports ........................................................... 11-121
Producing End-of-Day Reports........................................ 11-121
EJ By Transaction......................................................................... 11-122
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-123
Button Options .................................................................. 11-123
Producing Electronic Journal Reports ............................. 11-124
EJ By Cashier................................................................................ 11-127
Field Descriptions.............................................................. 11-128
Button Options .................................................................. 11-128
Producing Electronic Journal Reports ............................. 11-129
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Customer Survey........................................................................A-1
Set-Up Preparation .....................................................................A-2
Customer Data Sheet ........................................................................A-4
Customer Information................................................................A-4
Installation Information .............................................................A-4
User Guide
xxiii
Store Information........................................................................A-5
Comments / Requirements .......................................................A-5
Item File.............................................................................................A-6
Mix & Match Maintenance ........................................................A-7
Flip Chart Maintenance..............................................................A-8
Promotion / Coupon Editor ......................................................A-9
Bottle Link Editor .....................................................................A-10
Report Codes ............................................................................A-11
Tare Table..................................................................................A-12
Variable Tare Tables.................................................................A-13
Electronic Coupon Maintenance .............................................A-14
Bundle File Maintenance .........................................................A-15
Adjective Price Maintenance ...................................................A-16
Employee File..................................................................................A-17
Enhanced Security....................................................................A-18
Enhanced Security Worksheet.................................................A-20
Department File ..............................................................................A-24
Subdepartment Maintenance...................................................A-25
Department Restriction Matrix................................................A-26
Group Descriptors ....................................................................A-27
Customer File ..................................................................................A-28
Negative Check File Maintenance...........................................A-29
Customer File Maintenance .....................................................A-30
Check/Charge Reason Codes..................................................A-31
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix.........................................A-32
Register Control File Survey ..........................................................A-33
Register Control File Options ..................................................A-34
Back Office Control File Survey.....................................................A-51
Back Office Control File Options.............................................A-51
Banner File.......................................................................................A-55
Reason Code Maintenance.............................................................A-56
xxiv
User Guide
Reason Code Reasons...............................................................A-57
Tax Table Maintenance ..................................................................A-58
Keyboard Configurator ..................................................................A-59
Keyboard Options ....................................................................A-59
Media Configurator........................................................................A-62
Cash ...........................................................................................A-62
Check.........................................................................................A-62
Foreign Currency......................................................................A-64
ACH (Electronic Check)...........................................................A-65
Debit Card.................................................................................A-67
Master Card, Visa, American Express & Discover.................A-69
In-store Charge .........................................................................A-71
Gift Certificate...........................................................................A-72
Food Stamps .............................................................................A-73
WIC............................................................................................A-74
Master Card, Visa, American Express & Discover Credit.....A-75
In-store Chg Credit...................................................................A-76
Store Coupon ............................................................................A-78
MFG Coupon ............................................................................A-78
Electronic Food Stamps............................................................A-79
Electronic Benefit Transfer.......................................................A-80
Foreign Currency Rate Editor........................................................A-82
Tax Code Editor ..............................................................................A-83
SRR Editor .......................................................................................A-84
Communication Parameters ..........................................................A-85
Communication CRT Promo Editor..............................................A-86
User Guide
Revision Record
Issue
Date
Remarks
E
Feb 2000
Fifth issue
xxv
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for
Windows NT
Welcome to ScanMaster. ScanMaster I (Release 1.2) for Windows
NT is a state of the art solution for the grocery industry designed to
address the challenges facing today’s retailers. Each day grocery
retailers face increasing pressure to better serve and retain customers,
increase productivity, reduce checkout errors, reduce training costs,
and successfully manage for change.
ScanMaster is designed with the integrated components needed
to solve these problems and maintain the retailer’s advantage in
today’s competitive marketplace:
•
An open, industry-standard architecture
•
A fast and intuitive front-end POS workstation
•
A back office software application that effectively and efficiently
manages operations and information
1-2
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Open Systems Architecture
With ScanMaster, a store can easily install a customized
hardware configuration that will meet the store’s specific needs. A
standard Ethernet LAN hub controls communication between the back
office server and the front-end POS workstations. Optional back office
PCs can also be added. For ease of operation, the back office is based
on Microsoft’s Windows NT Operating System and the front-end
POS workstations run on DOS.
Written in Microsoft Visual Basic for speed and efficiency,
ScanMaster provides the following benefits:
•
Task switching. You can have many programs or tasks running at
the same time and you can switch between them.
•
Ease of use and fast training. Since Microsoft Windows is the
largest selling Graphical User Interface (GUI), many users already
know how to use it. Even if they do not, once they learn to use one
ScanMaster function, they can quickly learn the others. Users
spend less time learning to use ScanMaster, and more time in
productive work.
•
Windows device support. ScanMaster can use inkjet and laser
printers, high resolution monitors, sound cards, or any other device
that has a Windows driver.
Supported Configurations
ScanMaster can be configured with a single PC, with the server and
back office software on the same computer. ScanMaster can also be
configured with two or more PCs, using one as a server and the others
as Back Office Workstations.
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Figure 1-1: Combined Server/Back Office Workstation Configuration
Figure 1-2: Individual Server & Back Office Workstation Configuration
1-3
1-4
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Front End POS
The heart of the ScanMaster configuration is the Point-of-Sale (POS)
workstation, where customers and employees interact. Many of the
daily challenges the retailer face begins and ends here.
With ScanMaster, each PC-based workstation contains all of the system
critical files necessary to operate the front-end should the server ever
fail. This ensures basic system functionality at all times.
All NCR keyboards and displays have been designed to be easy-tolearn and simple-to-use with the goal of reducing operating errors and
on the job training time. NCR’s high performance printers produce
receipts containing graphics and barcodes as well as providing
integrated micro reading of check numbers for validation.
Electronic Flip Charts that appear on the display make it easy for the
checker to locate PLU numbers to speed throughput. The
ScanMaster POS workstation has many features:
•
Account Balance Inquiry
•
Adjective Pricing by Quantity or Level
•
Automatic Coupon Linking
•
Automatic Promotional Pricing Application
•
Flexible Tender Options (including Foreign Currency)
•
Media Swapping (for tender correction after a completed
transaction)
•
Price Inquiry
•
Price Overrides (with reason codes)
•
Security Logon
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
1-5
Suspend/Resume
Using the suspend and resume function, transactions can be
temporarily suspended. The customer is handed a bar-coded receipt
that contains the unique suspended transaction identifier. This allows
the customer to finish the shopping trip and return to any checkout
lane where the receipt can be scanned and the transaction resumed.
Additional items can be purchased prior to finalizing the transaction.
In-Store Charge
ScanMaster also supports customer in-store charge accounts. Credit
limits and interest rates are set on a customer by customer basis. Full
accounts receivable support (with the back office software application)
includes statement printing, payment posting, aging report and finance
charge posting.
Customer Information Display (CID)
With the CID, customers can simultaneously view each line item of the
receipt as the transaction is processed including the running dollar
total. Promotional messages may be displayed on the CID as well.
Electronic Coupons
The transaction can be finalized by placing customized coupons on the
bottom of customer’s receipts. This may be used to promote certain
items or to automatically provide discounts to randomly chosen
winners.
Frequent Shopper Program
ScanMaster’s Frequent Shopper Program encourages customer loyalty
and can be customized to fit the store’s merchandising plan. This
program automatically gives frequent shoppers electronic discounts on
certain items purchased. Rewards can be scaled so that more profitable
customers earn larger discounts or additional points. Each frequent
shopper’s receipt displays summarized totals showing dollars or points
earned.
1-6
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Back Office Software
ScanMaster’s back office software application contains an intuitive
menu structure with readable and well-designed screens to keep track
of store operations and analyze customer information.
ScanMaster’s back office software contains a host of functions to
provide among other things:
•
Automatic Price Calculations (based on Margin or Markup)
•
Batch Maintenance (with automatic off-sale activation)
•
Cashier Monitoring
•
Customer Maintenance (with purchase activity monitoring)
•
Customer Receipt Formatting
•
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
•
Employee Security and Program Access Control
•
End of Day Processing
•
Financial Reporting
•
Full PLU File Maintenance
•
Hosting
•
Item Movement Reports
•
Label Printing
•
Loans and Pickups
•
Office and Checker Settlement
•
Register and Back Office Customizations
•
System Backup
•
Tender Media Configuring
•
Third-Party Interfaces
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Logging Into ScanMaster
Locate and double-click the ScanMaster icon that resides on your
workstation’s (or server’s) Windows desktop.
Figure 1-3: ScanMaster Desktop Icon
Note: If the ScanMaster Desktop Icon does not appear on your
desktop, click the Window's Start button and choose, Programs,
ScanMaster, Start ScanMaster.
ScanMaster launches the login screen.
1-7
1-8
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Figure 1-4: ScanMaster’s Login Screen
The login screen displays the date and time of the last successful Endof-Day process as well as the amount of free hard disk space on both
the workstation and server drives.
Key in your assigned Employee ID number and either press ENTER or
TAB to move to the Password field. Key in your assigned password
and press ENTER. The ScanMaster Main Menu will appear.
Note: ScanMaster installs a pre-configured default Employee Number
of “111” with a default Password of “111”. Once your employee IDs
and passwords have been assigned, please remove this Employee ID or
change its security level (through Employee Maintenance, Employee
Maintenance) for security purposes.
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
1-9
Logging Off
If you are leaving the workstation for any extended period of time,
click the Exit to Login button found at the bottom of any ScanMaster
Menu. The ScanMaster Login screen displays.
To completely exit ScanMaster, close the ScanMaster Login screen by
clicking the X in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
1-10
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
ScanMaster I Menu Options
There are ten options on the ScanMaster Main Menu. They are:
•
Item Maintenance Menu
•
Employee Maintenance
•
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance
•
Customer Maintenance
•
System Personalization
•
Communications Menu
•
Reports Menu
•
Office Procedures
•
System Services
•
End of Day Procedure
You can access a menu option by simply clicking on that menu button
or pressing the ALT key in combination with the underscored letter on
that key.
Note: An informational message indicating the number of suspended
sales is also displayed at the bottom of the Main Menu screen.
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
1-11
Figure 1-5: ScanMaster’s Main Menu
Item Maintenance Menu: Item Maintenance is where the Item File,
Batch Files and supporting files are maintained.
Employee Maintenance: Employee Maintenance creates and
maintains the Employee File. You can add, modify, delete, or display
cashiers on the system through this option. In addition, employee
maintenance enables you to monitor cashiers, and force cashier logoffs
as well.
1-12
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance: Through
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance, you can add, edit, or delete
departments/subdepartments and set associated parameters for those
departments.
Customer Maintenance: Customer Maintenance enables the stores to
create a user-defined customer database. Through this option, a store
can maintain the negative/positive check file, define frequent shopper
discount levels, observe customer sales history and provide
maintenance and reports for the in-store charge program.
System Personalization: System Personalization enables the user to
personalize POS workstations and Back Office PCs on the ScanMaster
/ NT System.
Communications Menu: Communications Menu enables you to
communicate via modem with the host. It also allows for system
support via modem as well.
Reports Menu: Reports Menu enables you to view or print a wide
variety of financial, item file and customer reports.
Office Procedures: Office Procedures enables you to perform back
office accounting tasks.
System Services: System Services enables you to perform the various
system services of the ScanMaster System. System Services include
View Security Log, View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files, User-Defined
Menu, Label Printing, Third Party Menu, Electronic Journal Back-Up
and System Back-Up.
End of Day Procedure: End of Day Procedure enables you to close out
daily sales for the current day and reset the system for next day
processing.
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
1-13
User Manual Organization
The Using ScanMaster Release 1.02.00 User Guide is organized into
eleven chapters and one Appendix.
Chapter 1 ScanMaster NT System Overview: This chapter provides a
high-level look at the ScanMaster System.
Chapter 2 Maintaining Employee Data: This chapter details how to
add, edit, delete, or view the store employee file, as well as monitor
cashier activity and force logoff of a cashier. It explains each field
associated with employee maintenance, as well as how to generate and
interpret a list of all employees and a list of currently active employees.
Chapter 3 Performing Department / Subdepartment Maintenance: This
chapter details how to create and define departments/subdepartments.
There can be up to 99 departments and 999 subdepartments on the
ScanMaster System.
Chapter 4 Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance: This
chapter details how to perform immediate and batch maintenance on
the PLU file.
Chapter 5 Maintaining Customer Data: This chapter details how to
create and maintain the negative or positive check file, the frequent
shopper file, and the customer charge file. It also discusses how to
perform return code maintenance, clear customer totals, and accounts
receivable.
Chapter 6 Using Supported Communication Protocols: This chapter
details various communication options available with the ScanMaster
System, including host connections and remote troubleshooting via
modem.
Chapter 7 Performing System Services: This chapter details how to
perform system services on the ScanMaster System. System Services
include View Security Log, View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files, UserDefined Menu, Label Printing, Third Party Menu, Electronic Journal
Back-Up and System Back-Up.
1-14
Chapter 1: Introduction to ScanMaster I for Windows NT
Chapter 8 Personalizing Workstations: This chapter details how to
personalize workstations on the ScanMaster NT System using the
Register Control File, the Back Office Control File, Keyboard
Configurator and Media Configurator. In addition, the Foreign
Currency Rate Editor, Banner File, Reason Codes and Tax Table
maintenance programs are also discussed.
Chapter 9 Performing POS Operations: This chapter details how to
perform POS operations. It covers the features and functionality
provided at POS workstations, as well as security features, data
redundancy, POS Utilities, and POS recovery procedures.
Chapter 10 Performing Back Office Accounting Procedures: This
chapter details how to perform back office accounting tasks, including
pickups, loans, cashier settlement, delayed cashiers, office
reconciliation, deposits, and end-of-day procedures.
Chapter 11 Producing and Interpreting Financial Reports: This
chapter details how to produce and interpret financial, item file and
customer reports.
Appendix A Personalization Survey and Setup Guide: This chapter
helps document the configuration choices for customizing ScanMaster.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
The purpose of this chapter is to enable you to add, edit, delete, or
view the store employee file, as well as monitor cashier activity and
force logoff of a cashier. It explains each field associated with
employee maintenance, as well as how to generate and interpret a list
of all employees and a list of active employees.
Employee Maintenance is the second option on the ScanMaster Main
Menu. Click on the Employee Maintenance button (or press Alt-E) to
access the Employee Menu screen. There are seven options on the
Employee Menu:
•
Employee Maintenance
•
Active Employee List
•
Employee List
•
Cashier Monitoring
•
Force Cashier Logoff
•
Enhanced Security
•
Active Cashier Status Editor
2-2
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Employee Menu
Figure 2-1: Employee Menu Screen
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-3
Employee Maintenance permits you to add, modify, delete, or display
employees.
Active Cashier/Lane List displays all cashiers/lanes currently on a
POS workstation and any cashiers/lanes that have not been settled.
Employee List displays all cashiers in the file.
Cashier Monitoring monitors a cashier from the back office PC. The
Cashier Monitoring screen replicates the customer’s receipt. Audible
tones on the back office PC sound to indicate an uncommon function
on the POS workstation.
Force Cashier Logoff permits you to log a cashier off a POS
workstation from the back office when a malfunction prevents the
cashier from logging off at the POS workstation.
Enhanced Security limits employee access to menu options on the
ScanMaster System.
Active Cashier Status Editor governs which cashiers are permitted
(and not permitted) to sign onto POS workstations on the ScanMaster
system.
2-4
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Employee Maintenance
Employee Maintenance is the first option on the ScanMaster Employee
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-E) to access the ScanMaster
Employee Maintenance screen.
Employee Maintenance creates and maintains the Employee File. You
can add, modify, delete, or display cashiers on the system through this
option.
Figure 2-2: Employee Maintenance Screen
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-5
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Employee Maintenance
screen.
Employee Number: Three (3) digit numeric field. The Employee
Number is a unique number. The only number that cannot be used is
999. That number is reserved for training mode.
Employee Name: Twenty (20) digit field. Enter the employee’s name.
Security Level (0-9): One (1) digit numeric field. The Security Level
determines the modules a cashier can access from the ScanMaster Main
Menu. The lowest security level is zero (cashier level) and the highest
is nine (manager level). The Back Office Control File, located on the
ScanMaster System Personalization Menu, defines the modules that are
accessed by each security level unless enhanced security is being used.
An employee with a 5 security level can access all modules with a 0-5
security level.
Active on Register: The Active on Register field displays the POS
workstation number the cashier is on. It may also display “NZ,”
meaning a cashier is signed off but not settled.
Birth Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY). This is an optional
field. It is used for establishing cashier age restrictions. The Birth Date
is checked if the Enable Sales Restriction Table option in the Register
Control File is enabled and a Department Restriction Matrix table is
created. For more information on Department Restriction tables, see
the section titled “Department Restriction Matrix” in Chapter 3:
“Performing Department/Subdepartment Maintenance.”
Password: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This field can only be
accessed if the security level of the employee being entered is a
manager level. Manager levels are 1-9. The password must be a
unique 12-digit number.
2-6
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Employee Maintenance
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Maintenance Menu.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous employee on the employee list.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
employee on the employee list.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made on
the ScanMaster Employee Maintenance screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the current
employee from the employee list.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Employee Maintenance screen.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-7
Adding, Modifying, or Deleting an Employee Record
Creating an employee list and adding employees are the first
maintenance functions you perform when setting up the ScanMaster
System.
If you are adding a new employee, enter a unique employee number in
the Employee Number field and complete the remaining data fields on
this screen. When you are finished, click on the SAVE button to save
the employee record information. The NEXT button permits you to
advance to the next employee record, while the PREVIOUS button
displays the previous employee record. Employee number 999 is
reserved for store training.
If you are modifying an employee record, enter the employee number
in the Employee Number field and enter the desired changes to that
employee record. When you are finished, click on the SAVE button to
save the employee record information. The NEXT button permits you
to advance to the next employee record, while the PREVIOUS button
displays the previous employee record.
If you are deleting an employee record, enter the employee number in
the Employee Number field and press ENTER. Click on the DELETE
button. A message warning the user that this function deletes the
record displays. Click on the YES button to delete the record or NO to
return to the Employee Maintenance screen.
Note: When you initially install ScanMaster, there is a default
employee, 111, with all priveledges. Do not delete this employee until
you have created a new employee with total priveledges.
If the employee is active or has active totals, the message “Employee is
Active. Can’t Delete” displays, indicating you cannot delete the record
until totals have been reset. This is done when the cashier has been
settled and End of Day has been run.
2-8
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Active Cashier List
Active Cashier List is the second option on the ScanMaster Employee
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-V) to access the ScanMaster
Active Employee List screen.
The Active Cashier List displays all cashiers currently on a POS
workstation and cashiers that have not been settled.
Figure 2-3: Active Cashier List Screen
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-9
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Active Employee List
screen.
ID #: This field displays the employee logon ID number.
Employee Name: This field displays the employee’s full name.
Secret #: This field displays the secret number that the cashier used to
sign on.
Security Level (0-9): This field displays the employee’s security level.
Active on Register: This field displays the register number on which a
cashier is active. It may display “NZ,” which means the cashier is
signed off a POS workstation but not settled.
Password: This field displays the number of positions for the
employee’s unique number. An asterisk displays for each number for
security purposes.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Active Employee List
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Active Employee List screen.
2-10
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Employee List
Employee List is the third option on the ScanMaster Employee Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-L) to access the ScanMaster
Employee List screen.
The Employee List displays the entire Employee File.
Figure 2-4: Employee List Screen
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-11
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Employee List screen.
ID #: This field displays the employee logon ID number.
Employee Name: This field displays the employee’s full name.
Secret #: This field displays the secret number that the cashier used to
sign on.
Security Level (0-9): This field displays the employee’s security level.
Act. on Reg. #: This field displays the register number on which a
cashier is active. It may display “NZ,” which means the cashier is
signed off a POS workstation but not settled.
Password: This field displays the number of positions for the
employee’s unique number. An asterisk displays for each number for
security purposes.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Employee List screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Menu.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy
of the Employee File.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Employee List.
2-12
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Cashier Monitoring
Cashier Monitoring is the fourth option on the ScanMaster Employee
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to access the ScanMaster
Cashier Monitoring screen.
Cashier Monitoring monitors a POS workstation from the back office.
Figure 2-5: Cashier Monitoring Screen
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-13
Monitoring a Cashier
After selecting Cashier Monitoring, the screen displays the available
POS workstations to monitor.
Click on the scroll bar to scroll through the list of available cashiers to
monitor. Select the cashier(s) you want to monitor and press the
MONITOR button. You can monitor up to four cashiers. The
monitoring session starts at the beginning of a new transaction. Once
this feature is active, the operator can view the entire transaction online.
The Cashier Monitoring screen replicates the Customer Receipt. It
displays on the back office screen when the cashier(s) begins a new
transaction at the POS workstation. Different colors are used
depending on what function is performed at the POS workstation:
•
Heading - Black
•
Line Items - Cyan
•
Hi/Lo Errors - Cyan
•
Refunds - Black
•
Coupons - Blue
•
Voids - Red
•
Coupon Total - Blue
•
Tenders - Blue
•
Number of Items - Yellow
An audible tone sounds on the back office PC if Hi/Lo Errors occur.
2-14
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Cashier Monitoring
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Maintenance Menu.
MONITOR: Click on this button (or Alt-M) to begin monitoring the
highlighted cashier.
PRINT: Click on this button (or Alt-P) to print a hard copy of the
selected monitoring session.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Cashier Monitoring screen.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Force Cashier Logoff
Force Cashier Logoff, the fifth option on the ScanMaster Employee
Menu, permits you to log a cashier off a POS workstation from the
back office when a malfunction prevents logoff at the workstation.
Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the ScanMaster Force
Cashier Logoff screen.
Figure 2-6: Force Cashier Logoff Screen
2-15
2-16
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Force Cashier Logoff
Screen.
Enter the Cashier Number to Logoff: Two (2) digit numeric field.
Enter the cashier number of the cashier involved in the force logoff.
Cashier: Click on this radio button to force a cashier logoff on a POS
workstation.
Office Status: Click on this radio button to force a cashier logoff on a
back office PC.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Force Cashier Logoff
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to return to the ScanMaster
Employee Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Force Cashier Logoff screen.
Using the Force Cashier Logoff Screen
Use the Force Cashier Logoff screen to log a cashier off a POS
workstation that has malfunctioned and will not allow the cashier to
logoff.
Upon accessing the Force Cashier Logoff Screen, perform the following
steps:
1. Enter the cashier number of the cashier involved in the force logoff.
2. Select the desired logoff type (Cashier or Office Status). Choose the
Cashier radio button to force a cashier logoff on a POS workstation.
Choose the Office Status radio button to force a cashier logoff on a
back office PC.
3. Click Process to force the cashier logoff.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-17
Enhanced Security
Enhanced Security is the sixth option on the ScanMaster Employee
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the ScanMaster
Security Edit. Enhanced Security limits employee access to menu
options on the ScanMaster System.
This feature is used in conjunction with the Use Enhanced Security
option, found in the Back Office Control File. Set this option to Yes to
use ScanMaster’s Enhanced Security feature.
Figure 2-7: Security Edit Screen
2-18
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Security Edit screen.
Employee Name: This field displays the employee number and name.
Click on the down arrow to display a list box of employees. Click on
the desired employee to select security options for that employee.
Item Maintenance Menu: Click on this radio button to access Item
Maintenance Menu security levels for the selected employee. These
options are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They
include: Direct Item Maintenance; Create/Edit Batches; Activate
Batches; Delete Batches; Print Batches; Mass Attribute Batches; Convert
PLU Report to Batch; Mix & Match Maintenance; Flip Chart
Maintenance; Miscellaneous Maintenance; and FM Shelf Verification.
Employee Maintenance: Click on this radio button to access Employee
Maintenance security levels for the selected employee. These options
are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Employee Maintenance; Active Employee List; Cashier Monitoring;
Force Cashier Logoff; and Security Edit.
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance: Click on this radio button
to access Department/Subdepartment security levels for the selected
employee. These options are found in the Menu Information section of
the screen. They include: Department Maintenance; Subdepartment
Maintenance; Department Restriction Matrix; and Group Descriptor
Maintenance.
Customer Maintenance: Click on this radio button to access Customer
Maintenance security levels for the selected employee. These options
are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Negative Check File Maintenance; Negative Check Report; Customer
File Maintenance; Check/Charge Reason Codes; Clear Customer
Totals; Frequent Shopper Reports; and Frequent Shopper Discount
Matrix.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-19
System Personalization: Click on this radio button to access Employee
Maintenance security levels for the selected employee. These options
are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Register Control File; Back Office Control File; Banner File; Reason
Code Maintenance; Tax Table Maintenance; Keyboard Configurator;
Media Configurator; and Tax Code Editor.
Reports Menu: Click on this radio button to access Reports Menu
security levels for the selected employee. These options are found in
the Menu Information section of the screen. They include: Electronic
Coupon Reports; Delete Electronic Coupons; APT Coupon Report;
Print End-of-Day Reports; and Electronic Journal Reports.
Office Procedures: Click on this radio button to access Office
Procedures security levels for the selected employee. These options are
found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Pickups and Loans; Cashier Settlement; Delay Cashiers; Office
Reconciliation; Deposits; ScanMaster Reconciliation Report; Adjust
Settled Cashiers; Active Cashiers List; Media Flash Report; Office
Receipts; and SRR Editor.
System Services: Click on this radio button to access System Services
security levels for the selected employee. These options are found in
the Menu Information section of the screen. They include: View
Security Log; View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files; Label Printing;
Electronic Journal Backup; and System Backup.
Miscellaneous Maintenance: Click on this radio button to access
Miscellaneous Maintenance security levels for the selected employee.
These options are found in the Menu Information section of the screen.
They include: Promotion/Coupon Editor; Bottle Link Editor; Report
Code Editor; Tare Table Maintenance; Variable Tare Maintenance;
Electronic Coupon Maintenance; and APT Coupon Maintenance.
Accounts Receivable Menu: Click on this radio button to access
Accounts Receivable Menu security levels for the selected employee.
These options are found in the Menu Information section of the screen.
They include: Post A/R Payments; Post A/R Finance Charges; A/R
Month-End Close; A/R Statement Printing; A/R Aging Report; and
A/R Activity Report.
2-20
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Financial Reports Menu: Click on this radio button to access Financial
Reports Menu security levels for the selected employee. These options
are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Department Flash Report; Department Historical Report; Hourly
Activity Report; Consolidated TLOG Report; Audit Trail Reports;
Cashier Report; Enhanced Department Report; and Non-Resettable
Totals Report.
Item File Reports Menu: Click on this radio button to access Item File
Reports Menu security levels for the selected employee. These options
are found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
PLU File Reports; PLU Movement Reports; Ad Movement Reports; and
Clear Item Movement.
Special Menu Access: Click on this radio button to access Special
Menu security levels for the selected employee. These options are
found in the Menu Information section of the screen. They include:
Keyboard Configurator; User-Defined Menu; Third Party Menu; and
End-of-Day Procedures.
SRR Security: Click on this radio button to access SRR Security levels
for the selected employee. They include: View SRR, Print SRR, Export
SRR, Edit Hand-Keyed Totalizers (500), and Edit Imported Totalizers.
Note: When a specific radio button is selected, the various submenus
for the selected item display in the Menu Information section of the
screen. Click on the desired menu security levels for the selected
employee. An “X” in the check box indicates the employee has
security clearance to access that menu.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-21
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Security Edit screen.
CLEAR ALL: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to clear all security
levels for the selected employee. If this button is pressed, the selected
employee will not be able to access the ScanMaster System.
FULL ACCESS: Click on this button (or press Alt-F) to grant full access
to the ScanMaster System for the selected employee.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save security levels
assigned to the selected employee.
CLONE: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to duplicate security
levels for employees. A dialog box displays when this button is
pressed. Click on the down arrow to display a list box of employees.
Click on an employee to select that employee.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Security Edit screen.
2-22
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Performing Enhanced Security
From the ScanMaster Security Edit screen, enter the desired Employee
Number in the Employee Number field and press Enter. The
ScanMaster security options for that employee display. When a specific
radio button is selected, the various submenus for the selected item
display in the Menu Information section of the screen. Click on the
desired menu security levels for the selected employee. An “X” in the
check box indicates the employee has security clearance to access that
menu.
Click on CLEAR ALL to clear all security levels for the selected
employee. Click on FULL ACCESS to grant full access to the
ScanMaster System for the selected employee.
Click on SAVE to save an employee’s specific security levels and
CLONE to duplicate those options for other employees. Click on EXIT
to exit to the ScanMaster Employee Menu.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
2-23
Active Cashier Status Editor
The Active Cashier Status Editor is the seventh option on the
ScanMaster Employee Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to
access the ScanMaster Active Cashier Status Editor.
Use this screen to govern which cashiers are permitted (and not
permitted) to sign onto POS workstations on the ScanMaster system.
This screen is used in conjunction with the Check Cashier Active Status
feature, a Yes or No option, located in the Register Control File. If this
Register Control File option is set to No, all employees on the employee
list are eligible to log on to POS workstations. If this option is set to
Yes, only those displayed in the Permitted to Sign onto the System field
can log on.
Figure 2-8: Active Cashier Status Editor
2-24
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Active Cashier Status
Editor.
NOT Permitted to Sign Onto the System: All cashiers on the
employee list are automatically displayed in this column. Cashiers
listed in this column are not permitted to sign onto the system. Names
are transferred from column to column by clicking on the cashier
name.
Permitted to Sign Onto the System: Cashiers listed in this column are
permitted to sign onto the ScanMaster POS systerm. Names are
transferred from column to column by clicking on the cashier name.
Settled: Display only. This column displays all cashiers that are settled.
Delayed: Display only. This column displays any cashiers that are
delayed.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Active Cashier Status
Editor.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Employee Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Security Edit screen.
Using the Active Cashier Status Editor
Use this screen to govern which cashiers are permitted (and not
permitted) to sign onto POS workstations on the ScanMaster system.
1. Set the Check Cashier Active Status option in the Register Control
File to Yes.
2. Select the cashier to be permitted to sign onto the system by
clicking on that name from the NOT Permitted to Sign Onto the
System column. All cashiers on the employee list are automatically
displayed in this column.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
3. Select the cashier NOT permitted to sign onto the system by
clicking on that name from Permitted to Sign Onto the System
column. The name then transfers to the NOT permitted to Sign
Onto the System column.
2-25
2-26
Chapter 2: Maintaining Employee Data
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
The purpose of this chapter is to enable the user to define up to 99
departments and up to 999 subdepartments on the ScanMaster System.
Department Maintenance enables the user to create, edit, and delete
departments and subdepartments. In addition, you can configure
memo departments, link POS workstation-printed coupons to a
department, configure memo departments, configure subtracting
departments, and configure a validation department. Department
restriction maintenance and group description maintenance are
detailed in this chapter as well.
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance is the third option on the
ScanMaster Main Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to access
the ScanMaster Department/ Subdepartment Menu screen. There are
four options on the ScanMaster Department/Subdepartment Menu:
•
Department Maintenance
•
Subdepartment Maintenance
•
Department Restriction Matrix
•
Group Descriptor Maintenance
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Main Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
3-2
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
The Department/ Subdepartment Menu
Figure 3-1: Department/ Subdepartment Menu Screen
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-3
Department Maintenance
Department Maintenance is the first option on the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance Menu screen. Click on that
button (or press Alt-D) to access the ScanMaster Department
Maintenance screen.
Through Department Maintenance, you can add, edit, or delete
departments and set associated parameters for those departments.
There can be up to 99 departments on the ScanMaster System.
Departments must exist on the system before you can create an item
file.
Figure 3-2: Department Maintenance Screen
3-4
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Department
Maintenance screen. (Optional fields do not require entries.)
Department #: Two (2) digit numeric field. There can be a maximum
of 99 departments in the file.
Description: Fifteen (15) character alpha/numeric field. Enter the
description of the department.
HALO: Optional six (6) digit numeric field. This field represents the
highest amount that can be key entered for a department before a
warning displays on the POS workstation.
LALO: Optional six (6) digit numeric field. This field represents the
lowest amount that can be key entered for a department before a
warning displays on the POS workstation.
Quantity Limit: Optional two (2) digit numeric field. This field sets the
limit on quantities that can be sold from this department before a
warning appears on the POS workstation.
Group Link #: Two (2) digit numeric field. This field groups
departments together to produce subtotals on the department report.
See the section on “Group Descriptor Maintenance” for more
information.
Coupon Link #: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the coupon number
you want to print at the end of the customer’s receipt. The coupon
must be created in the Coupon Editor under Miscellaneous Item
Maintenance and enabled in the Register Control File Maximum # field
of Coupons to Print.
Coupon Over/Under Amount: Six (6) digit numeric field. This field
sets a minimum or maximum amount for a customer to buy before a
coupon prints at the end of the receipt. The Coupon Over/Under
Selected box determines if the amount is a maximum or a minimum.
SRR G/L Account #: Ten (10) digit numeric field. This field enables
you to link a department to the designated SRR G/L Account Number
entered in this field.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-5
Food Stamp: Click on this box to place an X to enable the department
to have food stamp status.
Tax 1, Tax 2, and Tax 3: Click on this box to place an X to enable the tax
status. The system supports up to three different tax tables.
Discount 1 and Discount 2: Click on this box to place an X to enable
discount status. This box determines if the department can have a
discount applied.
Frequent Shopper: Click on this box to place an X to enable the
department to have frequent shopper status.
Discount 4 and Discount 5: Click on this box to place an X to enable
discount status. This box determines if the department can have a
discount applied.
Negative Department: Click on this box to make the listed department
a negative department. All sales rung to this department are negative
sales.
Memo Department: Click on this box to make this department a memo
department. A memo department is a department on the system
which keeps totals separate from a regular department.
Validating Department: Click on this box to make this department
validate at the POS workstation when anything is sold to this
department. This includes both scanned or key entered items to a
department.
Coupon Under Selected: An X in this box causes the system to
generate a coupon for over the sale amount specified in the Coupon
Under Amount field. If it is not checked, the system generates a
coupon for under that sale amount. This function toggles between
coupon under and coupon over being displayed.
Exclude from Minimum Purchase: Click on this box to exclude items
from this department from the ScanMaster minimum purchase option.
3-6
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Department Maintenance
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Menu screen.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous department.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
department.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to the ScanMaster Department Maintenance screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a department
record.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print the
department file.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Department Maintenance screen.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-7
Performing Department Maintenance
To display a department, enter the department number in the
Department # field or click on the NEXT or PREVIOUS button at the
bottom of the screen. Specific information about the selected
department appears in the Department Maintenance screen fields. Use
the TAB or ENTER key to move from field to field in Department
Maintenance.
Upon completing edits to the Department Maintenance fields, you
must click on the SAVE button to save any changes. Click on the EXIT
button to return to the ScanMaster Department/Subdepartment Menu
screen without saving changes.
To delete a department, click on the DELETE button. A dialog box
prompts the user to select YES to delete the department or NO to
return to the ScanMaster Department Maintenance screen.
You cannot delete a department that has totals, item movement , or
coupons linked to it. You must wait until End of Day.
Note: The dialog box “Department in Use! Can’t Delete!”
displays when you select a department that is active.
3-8
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Subdepartment Maintenance
Subdepartment Maintenance is the second option on the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance Menu screen. Click on that
button (or press Alt-S) to access the ScanMaster Subdepartment
Maintenance screen.
Through Subdepartment Maintenance, you can add, edit, or delete
subdepartments from the system and set associated parameters for
those subdepartments. There can be up to 999 subdepartments on the
ScanMaster System.
Figure 3-3: Subdepartment Maintenance Screen
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-9
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Subdepartment
Maintenance screen. (Optional fields do not require entries.)
Subdepartment #: Three (3) digit numeric field. There can be a
maximum of 999 subdepartments in the file.
Description: Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Enter the
description of the subdepartment.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric field. There can be a maximum of
99 departments in the file. This field links the subdepartment back to a
major department.
HALO: Optional six (6) digit numeric field. This field represents the
highest amount that can be key entered for a department before a
warning displays on the POS workstation.
LALO: Optional six (6) digit numeric field. This field represents the
lowest amount that can be key entered for a department before a
warning displays on the POS workstation.
Quantity Limit: Optional two (2) digit numeric field. This field sets the
limit on quantities that can be sold from this subdepartment before a
warning appears on the POS workstation.
Food Stamp: Click on this box to place an X to enable the
subdepartment to have food stamp status.
Tax 1, Tax 2, and Tax 3: Click on this box to place an X to enable the tax
status. The system supports up to three different tax tables.
Discount 1 and Discount 2: Click on this box to place an X to enable
the discount status. This box determines if the department can have a
discount applied and selects the discount.
Frequent Shopper: Click on this box to place an X to enable the
subdepartment to have frequent shopper status.
Discount 4 and Discount 5: Click on this box to place an X to enable
the discount status. This box determines if the department can have a
discount applied and selects the discount.
3-10
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Subdepartment
Maintenance screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Menu screen.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous subdepartment.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
subdepartment.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to the ScanMaster Department Maintenance screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a
subdepartment record.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print the
subdepartment file.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Subdepartment Maintenance screen.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-11
Performing Subdepartment Maintenance
To display a subdepartment, enter the subdepartment number in the
Subdepartment # field or click on the NEXT or PREVIOUS button at
the bottom of the screen. If the subdepartment number doesn’t exist,
the following message displays: “Record for ### is New. Add
Subdepartment?” Click YES to add the subdepartment. Specific
information about the selected subdepartment appears in the
Subdepartment Maintenance screen fields. Use the TAB or ENTER key
to move from field to field in the Subdepartment Maintenance screen.
Upon completing edits to the Subdepartment Maintenance fields, you
must click on the SAVE button to save any changes. Click on the EXIT
button to return to the Department/Subdepartment Menu screen
without saving changes.
To delete a subdepartment, click on the DELETE button. A dialog box
prompts you to select YES to delete the department or NO to return to
the ScanMaster Department Maintenance screen.
3-12
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Department Restriction Matrix
The Department Restriction Matrix is the third option on the
ScanMaster Department/Subdepartment Maintenance Menu screen.
Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to access the ScanMaster Daily
Restriction Matrix or the Holiday Restriction Matrix maintenance
screen.
The Department Restriction Matrix enables you to place restrictions on
specific departments, cashiers, and customers. It can be used to restrict
the cashier from selling items if the cashier is under age or it can be
used to restrict the sale of certain items to customers under a certain
age. For example, you can restrict a cashier under 18 from selling
cigarettes or you can restrict the sale of cigarettes to customers under
18 years old. The matrix can also be used to restrict the sale of certain
items to cashiers under a certain age. For example, you can restrict the
selling of beer to customers if the cashier is under 21.
This option must be enabled in the Register Control File before it is
available on the system and the cashier age must be entered in
Employee Maintenance.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Figure 3-4: Daily Restriction Matrix
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Daily and Holiday Restriction
Matrix screens can be found at the end of this section.
3-13
3-14
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Using the Daily Restriction Matrix
There can be up to 99 department restrictions on the ScanMaster
System. You can create new department restrictions or edit existing
department restrictions from the Daily Restriction Matrix screen.
When creating new department restrictions, enter in the Department #
field the department number on which you want to place restrictions
and press ENTER. If no restrictions are currently associated with that
department, the message, “Do You Want to Create a Restriction?,”
appears. Click on YES to create a restriction or NO to return to the top
of the department restriction list. Complete the desired matrix data
fields and click the SAVE button to save the matrix.
Note: The department must exist on the ScanMaster System before
restrictions can be established.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-15
When editing existing department restrictions, use the Department List
button to access a list of ScanMaster Departments. (See below Figure 34A: Department List ). Double click the desired department to access
the restriction matrix for that department. You can also use the up and
down arrows next to the Department name to scroll through the
departments individually. Upon accessing the restriction matrix for the
desired department, make the desired restriction changes and click on
the SAVE button to save those changes. If you want to make restriction
changes to another department, click on the NEXT or PREVIOUS
button to select the desired department.
Figure 3-4A: Department List
Department restrictions can be established for cashier age, customer
age, or each day of the week. In addition, you can set up two different
restriction periods per day, using the Primary and Secondary
restriction fields. Enter the time ranges in these fields using the
military time format.
Example: Midnight appears as “0000”
9 a.m. appears as “0900”
Noon appears as “1200”
9 p.m. appears as “2100”
3-16
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Figure 3-5: Holiday Restriction Matrix
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Daily and Holiday Restriction
Matrix screens can be found at the end of this section.
Using the Holiday Restriction Matrix
Department restrictions can also be established for holidays. To access
the ScanMaster Holiday Restriction Matrix, click on the CHANGE
MATRIX button in the top right corner of the ScanMaster Daily
Restriction Matrix screen.
The procedure for establishing holiday restrictions is similar to the
procedure for setting up daily restrictions. The only difference is that
you can set up 10 holiday restriction dates per each department.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-17
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Daily and Holiday
Restriction Matrix screens.
Department #: Two (2) digit number of the department on which you
want to place restrictions. Use the up/down arrow buttons or key
enter the desired department number to select the desired department.
Description: This field lists the name of the department description on
which you want to place restrictions.
Cashier Age: Two (2) digit field where you can restrict the age of the
cashiers for that department.
Customer Age: Two (2) digit field where you can restrict the age of the
customers for that department.
Day of the Week: The day of the week the restrictions for that
department are enforced. You can select just one day or an entire
week.
Holiday Date: (Holiday Restriction Matrix) Enter the six (6) digit date
of the holiday when restrictions for that department are enforced.
Primary/Secondary Restriction: You can set up two different
restriction periods per day or holiday using these fields. Enter the time
ranges in these fields using the military time format.
Note: After creating the Department Restriction Matrix, you must
activate the Enable Restriction Table in the Register Control File and
the cashier age must be entered in Employee File if restricting the
cashier age.
3-18
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster Daily and Holiday
Restriction Matrix screens.
DEPARTMENT LIST: This button is located in the top right corner of
both screens. Click on this button (or press Alt—D) to access a list of
existing departments on the ScanMaster system.
CHANGE MATRIX: This button is located in the top right corner of
both screens. Click on this button to change from the Daily Restriction
Matrix to the Holiday Restriction Matrix.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Menu screen.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
Department Restriction Matrix on the system.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous Department Restriction Matrix on the system.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
selected department’s restriction matrix.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a Department
Restriction Matrix.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Department Restriction Matrix screen.
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
3-19
Group Descriptor Maintenance
Group Descriptor Maintenance is the fourth option on the
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance Menu screen. Click on that
button (or press Alt-G) to access the ScanMaster Group Descriptor
Maintenance screen.
This screen enables you to create group link headings for system
reports. You can create group descriptions, memo descriptions, or
both.
Figure 3-6: Group Descriptor Maintenance Screen
3-20
Chapter 3: Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Group Descriptor
Maintenance screen.
Group #: Two (2) digit numeric field. Creating a group number
enables you to group departments together to produce subtotals on the
department report. To link departments to this group, enter this group
number in the Group Link field in Department Maintenance. See the
section on “Department Maintenance” for more information.
Group Description: Enter the description of the group that you want
to appear on system reports. If the department is a regular
department, select Group Description.
Memo Description: Enter the description of the group that you want to
appear on system reports. If the department is a memo department,
select Memo Descriptor.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Group Descriptor
Maintenance screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Department/Subdepartment Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to the ScanMaster Group Descriptor Maintenance screen.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous group descriptor.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
group descriptor.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a group
descriptor.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print a list of
group descriptors if a hard copy is desired.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) for software information
about the ScanMaster Group Descriptor Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item
Maintenance
The purpose of this chapter is to enable you to perform immediate and
batch maintenance on the PLU file. It includes these topics:
•
PLU record fields
•
Supported item codes
•
PLU file locations
•
How PLU file updates are handled
•
Miscellaneous item maintenance
•
Editing the Promotion/Coupon file
•
Editing the bottle link file
•
Defining report codes
•
Tare Table Maintenance
•
Variable Tare Maintenance
•
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
•
Mix and match maintenance
•
Electronic flip chart maintenance
•
Batch maintenance
•
Creating or editing local batches
•
Editing host and off-sale batches
•
Editing not found batches
•
Printing batches
•
Activating batches
•
Deleting batches
•
Performing a mass attribute change
•
Converting a PLU report to a batch
4-2
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Item Maintenance Menu
The Item Maintenance Menu is the first option on the ScanMaster Main
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-I) to access the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
Item Maintenance is where the Item File and supporting files are
maintained.
Figure 4-1: Item File Menu Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Item File Menu Options
There are ten options on the Item File Menu. They are:
•
Direct Item Maintenance
•
Create/Edit Batches
•
Activate Batches
•
Delete Batches
•
Print Batches
•
Mass Attribute Batch
•
Convert PLU Report to Batch
•
Mix & Match Maintenance
•
Flip Chart Maintenance
•
Miscellaneous Maintenance
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Main Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
4-3
4-4
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Direct Item Maintenance: Adds, updates or deletes items in the Item
File. All changes or additions immediately affect the Item File on the
File Server PC. All updates and changes are placed in the
F:\GROCERY\FILES directory called GRCITEM.REG for the POS
workstation’s item file to be updated manually or at End-of-Day.
Create/Edit Local Batches: Creates or edits a group of UPC numbers in
a batch that can be applied to the Item File at any time.
Activate Batches: Applies the item information in the batch to the Item
File.
Delete Batches: Deletes local/host and offsale batches off the system.
If a batch selected for deletion was never applied to the Item File, the
screen prompts “Batch never applied, Are You Sure?”
Print Batches: Produces a printout of batch information on a selected
batch. The operator selects the desired batch from a batch list and has
the ability to view the batch before printing it.
Mass Attribute Batch: Permits field changes to be made, which affects
all items in the batch.
Convert PLU Report to Batch: Creates a batch by a range or common
denominator. The Convert PLU Report to Batch can create an
Add/Replace Batch, a Zero-Mover Batch, and a Delete Batch.
Mix & Match Maintenance: Lists all the Mix & Match codes on the
system and enables you to perform maintenance on those records.
Flip Chart Maintenance: Permits you to add, delete, or modify the
department’s electronic flip chart used at the POS workstation.
Miscellaneous Maintenance: Includes the Promotion/Coupon Editor,
Bottle Link Editor, Report Code Editor, Tare Table Maintenance,
Variable Tare Maintenance, Electronic Coupon Maintenance, Bundle
File Maintenance, APT Coupon Maintenance and Adjective Price
Maintenance. All of these Tables support the Item File.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-5
Direct Item Maintenance
Direct Item Maintenance is the first option on the ScanMaster Item File
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to access the ScanMaster
Item Maintenance screen.
Direct Item Maintenance permits entry of new UPC numbers or
changes to existing UPC numbers in the Item File on both the back
office PC and the server PC. Arrow buttons appear on the department
field to select the desired department, and the user can select options
from list boxes on the Item Type, Enforce Qty., Bottle Link, Freq.
Shopper, and Sale Level fields. Status flag fields can be chosen by
simply clicking in the desired check box.
Expanded UPC Fields
UPC fields throughout ScanMaster have been expanded to twenty (20)
digits to accommodate internationally-used product codes such as
EAN (European Article Number), JAN (Japanese Article Number) and
SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) to name a few.
This feature is especially beneficial to stores that sell products made
internationally. Goods manufactured in Europe traditionally have
longer product codes than those made in the United States and are
therefore are too long for the 12-digit UPC system. ScanMaster’s
expanded UPC field enables store to sell these goods without coming
up with new product codes.
4-6
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Figure 4-2: Item Maintenance Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-7
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Item Maintenance
Screen.
WTD Qty/Amount: System generated fields that show the number of
items and total dollar amount sold week-to-date. There are two ways
these fields are updated: real time movement, or End-of-Day. If real
time movement is enabled, these fields are updated as items are sold at
the POS workstation. If real time movement is disabled, movement is
processed on cashiers that are settled throughout the day when there is
no activity on the back office PC. All movement is completed (on
settled cashiers ) at End-of-Day. These fields reset when week-to-date
totals are cleared in the PLU Reports.
Note: Defaults for real time movement are set in the Back Office
Control File.
SLP Qty/Amount: System generated field that shows the number of
items and the total dollar amount sold since the last price change.
There are two ways these fields are updated: real time movement, or
End-of-Day. If real time movement is enabled, these fields are updated
as items are sold at the POS workstation. If real time movement is
disabled, movement is processed on cashiers that are settled
throughout the day when there is no activity on the back office PC. All
movement is completed (on settled cashiers )at End-of-Day. This field
resets when a price change takes effect or may be reset in PLU Reports.
PTD Qty/Amount: System generated field that shows the number of
items and the total dollar amount sold in the current period. There are
two ways these fields are updated: real time movement; or at End-ofDay. If real time movement is enabled, these fields are updated as
items are sold at the POS workstation. If real time movement is
disabled, movement is processed on cashiers that are settled
throughout the day when there is no activity on the back office PC. All
movement is completed (on settled cashiers ) at End-of-Day. These
fields reset when period-to-date totals are cleared in the PLU Reports.
Last Maintained: This field displays the date the UPC was last
maintained.
4-8
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Items in the File: This field displays the total number of items in the
Item File.
Current UPC: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the UPC (or other
product identification code such as EAN, JAN or SKU) to be displayed,
added, updated, or deleted from the Item File. You do not have to
enter a check digit when entering a UPC code.
Master Item / Linked To: This is a read-only field that changes
depending on whether the item is linked to another item or group of
items. There are several ways this field could display.
•
Master Item – No—This is the default setting. This is the setting
that displays when an item stands alone and is not linked to
any other items in the ScanMaster item file.
•
Master Item – Yes—This setting means the item is linked to a
group of other items and that it is the master item for that
group.
•
Linked To—Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the UPC of
the master item to which this item is linked.
Description: Sixteen (16) digit alpha/numeric field. Enter the
description of the Item.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric field. Spin buttons enable you to
scroll through the available departments on the system.
Subdepartment: Three (3) digit numeric field. Spin buttons enable you
to scroll through the available subdepartments on the system. This
field is only available if subdepartments are active in the Back Office
Control File.
Status Flags
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Item Maintenance
Screen’s Status Flags.
Food Stamps: Click on this check box to select the Food Stamp status
flag. An “X” appears in the box when selected. You can deselect the
“X” by clicking on that check box again.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-9
W.I.C.: Click on this check box to select the W.I.C. status flag. An “X”
appears in the box when selected. You can deselect the “X” by clicking
on that check box again. Selecting this status enables the item to be
purchased under the W.I.C. program. Enable W.I.C. Sale Mode must
be turned on in the Register Control File to use the W.I.C. status flag
when the item is scanned. If W.I.C. is enabled, only items with this
status can be scanned into this order.
Tax 1, Tax 2, and Tax 3: This determines which Tax Table to apply to
the item. Click on these check boxes to select the Tax 1, Tax 2, or Tax 3
status flags. An “X” appears in the box when selected. You can
deselect the “X” by clicking on that check box again.
Discount 1, Discount 2, Discount 4, and Discount 5: This determines if
the item can have a discount and a discount level applied to it. Click
on these check boxes to select the Discount 1, Discount 2, Discount 4,
and Discount 5 status flags. An “X” appears in the box when selected.
You can deselect the “X” by clicking on that check box again.
Free Item: This flag is only available when a price is not in that item’s
Unit Price field. Click on the checkbox to make the item a free item.
When that item is scanned at the register, the system recognizes it as a
free item.
Visual Verify: Click on this check box to activate the visual verify
option. If this is active, the cashier is prompted to enter the price at the
POS workstation. An “X” appears in the box when selected. You can
deselect the “X” by clicking on that check box again.
Restrict Sales: Click on this check box to restrict sales. If this is active,
the item is restricted from being sold at the POS workstation. An “X”
displays in the box when selected. You can deselect the “X” by clicking
on that check box again.
No Coupon: Click on this check box to prohibit using coupons for this
item. An “X” displays in the box when selected. You can deselect the
“X” by clicking on that check box again.
No Cpn Multiple: Click on this check box to prohibit multiplying the
coupon amount for this item. An “X” displays in the box when
selected. You can deselect the “X” by clicking on that check box again.
4-10
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Exclude Minimum Purchase: When this status flag is selected,
ScanMaster does not count this item toward any frequent shopper
minimum purchase requirements. For example, if a customer is
required to spend $10 to receive a particular discount and purchases an
item with this status flag attached, the item is not counted toward the
minimum purchase requirement.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-11
General Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Item Maintenance
Screen’s General Tab. It is the default tab and it details pricing
information about an item. The General Tab is broken into four
sections: Item Type, Pricing, Margin/Markup, and Codes.
Figure 4-3: Item Maintenance Screen – General Tab
Item Type: Click on the radio button for the desired Item Type. The
following item types are available: Unit, Split, Scale, Str Cpn, Mfg Cpn
or Linked Coupon.
•
A Unit item type uses the Item Price Field. It reflects the price
of an item. Other fields that work with a Unit are: Split Price,
Limited Qty, and Limited Qty Price. A Split Price Type item
permits you to sell multiple quantities of an item to reach a
certain price.
•
A Split Qty type item divides the Split Price into the Split
Quantity. Other fields that work with a Split Price Type are:
Item Price, Limited Qty, and Limited Qty Price.
•
A Scale type item requires the item to be placed on the scale. A
scale type reads the Item Price field. The Item Price field
reflects the price per pound. The system takes the price per
pound and calculates the price based on the weight. The price
per pound is set in Item File maintenance.
4-12
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
•
To create a Variable Weight item, (this is a Unit Type) the UPC
number must begin with 02 then the next five digits should be
the unique identification number followed by five zeros. The
Item Price field may be zero. When a Variable Weight Item is
scanned at the POS workstation, the scanner reads 02##### and
then reads the last five digits from the barcode which is the
price of the item.
•
A Store Cpn type permits a store coupon to have an assigned
UPC number. When the coupon UPC number is entered at the
POS workstation, the amount of the store coupon is deducted
from the transaction.
•
A Mfg Cpn type permits a manufacturer’s coupon to have an
assigned UPC number. When the coupon UPC number is
entered at the POS workstation, the amount of the
manufacturer’s coupon is deducted from the transaction.
•
Double - click on either the Str Cpn or Mfg Cpn option to access
the Coupon Linking screen. Enter the twenty (20) digit UPC
code into the field in the Coupon Linking screen to register a
coupon in the file. Press Enter to save changes and close the
screen.
Note: This feature permits you to promote the proper use of coupons
by your customers. If a coupon is registered in the Coupon Linking
File, a customer receives the value of the coupon discounted from the
total sale if the corresponding item is purchased. To activate the
Coupon Linking feature, this option must be set to “Yes” in the Back
Office control file. Coupons can also be linked directly to vendors or
family codes and will activate if items carried by the specified vendor
or if items existing under the specified family code are purchased,
respectively.
Figure 4-4: Coupon Linking Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-13
Unit Price: Six (6) digit numeric field. This is the unit price of an item.
Split Qty/Tare: Two (2) digit numeric field. This field can only be
accessed if the Item Type is a Split or Scale item. If the item is a Split,
this field is the split quantity of the split price. If the item is a scale
item, this field is the tare code number of the weighted item from the
Tare Table.
Note: Tare is the weight of the package that contains the item (such as
a plastic bag, Styrofoam, or no bag). The tare weight automatically
deducts from the weight of the item. If the item is a weighed item and
tare code 99 is entered in this field, the POS workstation prompts the
cashiers to enter a tare code number (codes 80-98 are reserved for the
accelerated tare feature) at the time of selling the item.
Split Price/Weight - LB: Six (5) digit numeric field. This field can only
be accessed if the Item Type is a Split or Scale item. If the item is a Split,
this field is the split price of the split price. If the item is a scale item,
this field is the price per pound of the weighted item.
Ltd Qty / Ltd Qty Price: Two (2) digit field and six (6) digit field. This
field shows the limited quantity and the limited quantity price. The
price reverts to the unit price once the limited quantity is reached. The
Ltd Qty field can also be used with the Unit Price and Split Price fields
to limit how many split transactions can occur before reverting back to
Unit Price.
Mix & Match: Four (4) digit field. This field displays the item’s Mix &
Match code. This field can only used if the item is a split price. The
Mix & Match field permits non-identical UPCs (on such items such as
Kool-Aid, baby food, or dog food) to be sold together for the same split
price. Double click the Mix & Match button (or press Alt-H) to choose
a code from a displayed list of Mix & Match Codes and their
descriptions. Valid Mix & Match Codes (matching the item’s split
quantity and split price) are listed in black.
Enforce Qty: Click on the arrow to access a list box. Available options
include: NO, ENFORCE, and INHIBIT. No enforce quantity permits
the cashier to enter a quantity but does not require it. Enforce quantity
requires the cashier to enter a quantity amount. Inhibit does not
permit a quantity amount to be entered.
4-14
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Bottle Link: Click on the arrow to access a list box. There are 99 userdefined bottle link options available. The list box contains the Bottle
Link Numbers and Amount. When the item is scanned at the POS
workstation, the bottle link amount is automatically added to the item
in the sale.
Ad/Sale Level: Select the sales level status by clicking on the field list
box. There are nine (9) sales levels and a No Sale selection option.
Sales level permits items to be tracked for ad or sale movement
information based on the time the sale level was active to the time the
sales level was deactivated. The sale level reports are found under
PLU Reporting - Ad Movement Reports. The sales level reports are
kept separate from the week-to-date movement file. This permits
actual sale movement to be tracked.
On Ad: A check in this box indicates the item is on sale. The box is
automatically checked when an Ad/Sale Level is chosen.
Case Qty: Two (2) digit numeric field. This field displays the number
of units in a case.
Case Cost: Nine (9) digit numeric field. The field displays the cost of a
case.
Unit Cost: Read-only field. The unit cost of an item is automatically
calculated by dividing the Case Cost by the Case Quantity.
Current Markup: This field enables you to determine the profit margin
for a specific product. Enter the desired profit margin and press this
button. The system automatically determines the selling price.
Cost Calculator: This button activates the Cost Calculator. The Cost
Calculator is an automated pricing feature used to designate a certain
margin or markup on a particular item. The Margin or Markup is
automatically calculated depending on how the register control file
option is set specifying whether to use margin or markup in calculating
the price of an item. Simply enter price information in the Case
Quantity and Case Cost fields and click the Accept button. The system
automatically calculates the Unit Cost and lists the Margin and
Markup.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-15
To designate a certain Margin or Markup, enter the cost and quantity
information along with the preferred percentage and click the Accept
button. The Cost Calculator automatically determines the Unit Price
based on the preferred percentages.
Figure 4-5: Cost Calculator Screen
Note: Margin is the difference in percentage between total sales and
the cost of those sales. In other words, the profit percent of the item.
It is calculated using the following formula:
GM% = (Unit Price - Unit Cost) / Unit Price * 100
Markup is the percentage added to the cost of the item to arrive at the
selling price of the item.
It is calculated using the following formula:
MU% = (Unit Price - Unit Cost) / Unit Cost * 100
4-16
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Example: Margin and Markup are often confused. The reason for this
is that both values represent the same amount of money, but have a
different percentage. For example if an item with a $1.00 unit cost, and
a $2.00 selling price has a $1.00 margin, and a $1.00 markup, but it has
a 50% Margin and a 100% markup. This is because margin is figured as
a percentage of the selling price, while markup is figured as a
percentage of the unit cost.
Report Code: Four (4) digit numeric field accompanied by a
description. This field is used as a sorting field that permits reports to
be generated based on the report code number.
Commodity Code: Eight (8) digit numeric field. This field supports the
host/warehouse code.
Family Code #1: Three (3) digit numeric field. The item’s Family Code
is used to determine the exact product and size when matching a
coupon to the item. On a coupon U.P.C., the three digits following the
5-digit manufacturer ID represent the family code
Family Code #2: Three (3) digit numeric field. A secondary Family
Code field used to determine the item’s exact product and size.
Enhanced Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Item Maintenance
Screen’s Enhanced Tab. From this tab, users can enter product label
information, configure enhanced pricing or attach frequent shopper
points or coupons to an item. This tab is separated into three sections:
Label Information, Enhanced Pricing, and Promotional Information.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-17
Figure 4-6: Item Maintenance Screen – Enhanced Tab
Vendor #: Eight (8) digit numeric. Enter the number of the vendor
providing this item to the store.
Pack/Size: Four (4) digit numeric. Enter the quantity of that item in a
pack.
Unit Measure: Two (2) digit numeric. This field describes the product’s
unit of measure. For example, 16 oz., or 32 oz.
Aisle #: Three (3) digit numeric. Enter the aisle number where the
product is located in the store.
Unit Size: Nine (9) digit Alphanumeric. The size of the unit.
Shelf #: Three (3) digit numeric. Enter the shelf number where the
product is located in the store.
Reorder #: Ten (10) digit numeric. Enter the reorder number for the
item.
Location: Three (3) digit numeric. Enter the location on the shelf where
the product is located in the store.
Long Desc: Thirty (30) character alphanumeric. Use this field to enter a
full-length description of the product for shelf label purposes. The
regular Item Maintenance description field is 16 characters. This field
permits stores to identify the product with more specific wording.
4-18
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Adjective Code: Four (4) digit numeric. Enter a unique code for an
item that has multiple prices. Use the Adjective Price Maintenance
Screen to set up multiple level pricing for a single UPC. This code
must match exactly with the one created on the Adjective Price
Maintenance screen.
Regular Price: Read only field. This field displays the item’s regular
price.
Unit Cost: Read only field. The Unit Cost is the cost for one item in a
case.
Points: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the number of frequent
shopper points a customer is issued if this product is purchased. This
field is used in conjunction with the Freq. Shopper field. Depending on
how the Freq. Shopper field is set, the customer receives item pricebased points from this field or multiples of the price (2XXX or 3XXX).
There are several Register Control File options that govern how
frequent shopper points are accumulated. They are: Use Item Price
Based Points, Add FS Dollrs to Special Promo, Add Points to Special
Promo and Add Bonus Points to Special Promo.
Bonus Points: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the number of frequent
shopper bonus points a customer is issued if this product is purchased.
This field is used in conjunction with the Freq. Shopper field.
Depending on how the Freq. Shopper field is set, the customer receives
the item price-based bonus points from this field or multiples of the
item price (2XXX or 3XXX). There are several Register Control File
options that govern how frequent shopper points are accumulated.
They are: Use Item Price Based Points, Add FS Dollrs to Special Promo,
Add Points to Special Promo and Add Bonus Points to Special Promo.
Coupon Code: Four (4) digit numeric field. There can be up to 9999
coupons in the coupon file. After a coupon layout is created in the
Promotion Coupon Editor, the coupon may be entered in this field.
When the item is sold at the POS workstation, the coupon prints on the
customer receipt.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-19
Freq. Shopper: Select the frequent shopper status by clicking on the list
box. Available options include: NO $$$, 1X $$$ (Shopper), 2X $$$
(Double Shopper), or 3X $$$ (Triple Shopper). Frequent shopper
dollars/points are not awarded when NO $$$ is selected. Selecting 1X
$$$ applies the original item price to the customer’s frequent shopper
points; 2X $$$ doubles the item price and applies double the dollar
amount to the customer’s frequent shopper points; and 3X $$$ triples
the item price and applies triple the dollar amount to the customer’s
frequent shopper points.
List valid Electronic Coupons on this item: Click on this button to
view the list of electronic coupons associated with this item.
4-20
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster Item Maintenance
screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete an item from
the Item File.
LINK ITEM: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to link a UPC
number with an item. The Item Maintenance screen prompts for the
UPC number of the master item.
PRICE MODE: Click on this check box to activate the Price Mode
feature. When Price Mode is activated, enter only the UPC number
and press ENTER to have the cursor automatically advance to the
pricing fields.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made on
the Item Maintenance screen. If you move to the next item without
saving the changes made, those changes are not accepted.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous item in the Item File.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next item
in the Item File.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes you
have made to that particular item.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Item Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-21
Accessing/Adding UPC Numbers
The first UPC number in the Item File automatically displays when the
ScanMaster Item Maintenance screen is accessed. Click the NEXT
button to display the next item in the file, or enter the desired UPC
number and press ENTER. If the UPC number is not found, the screen
displays “Item Not Found. Do you want to create a new
item?”
To add a new item click Yes, enter the UPC number and complete the
desired data fields. The required item record fields are UPC Number,
Description, Department, Item Type, and Price. The system recognizes
UPC-E types of UPC codes. This six-digit code automatically expands
when entered. It expands at the back office and the POS workstation
when scanned. A UPC number under five digits is considered a store
code. The store code numbers do not expand.
Linking Items
To link a UPC number with an item, simply click on the LINK ITEM
button and enter the master item UPC number. When an item is a
linked item, the UPC number of the master item is displayed in the
description field of the linked item. Radio buttons indicate if the item
is linked.
A warning message appears if you try to edit linked items. All prices
must be changed on the master item, not on the linked item. The
system uses the master item pricing structure, while using the actual
item’s descriptions.
To remove the link status of an item, you must change the item type
and complete the description field. Upon completing changes, click on
SAVE to remove the link.
4-22
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Pricing Deal Examples
Unit Price with Split Price: Item Price = .40, Split Qty = 3, Split Price =
$1.00. This sets the first two items at .40 cents and the third item at .20
cents.
Unit Price with Split Price with Limited Qty: Item Price = .40, Split
Qty = 3, Split Price = $1.00, Limited Qty. = 1. This sets the first two
items at .40 cents and the third item at .20 cents, with all same items
after that at .40 cents.
Split Price: Split Qty = 3, Split Price = $1.00. The first items sell for .34
cents, the next two items are .33 cents. If Enhanced Split Qty is active
in the Register Control File, the first two items are set at .34 cents while
the third item is set at .32 cents. The Enhanced Split Qty gives the price
break on the last item sold.
Unit Price With a Limited Quantity and a Limited Quantity Price:
Unit Price = $1.29; Limited Quantity = 2; and Limited Quantity Price =
.89. The first two items sell at .89 and then revert to $1.29 after that.
Buy One Get One Free (BOGO): There are two ways the system
records BOGOs. The first method sets the price of the first item at full
price and the second item at zero. The second method cuts the price of
the item in half.
Example: Item price = 1.99. Split Quantity Price = 2/1.99. The item
price is set up as a spilt price.
Example: Split Quantity Price = 2/1.99.
First item = $1. Second item = .99
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-23
Create/Edit Batches
Create/Edit Batches is the second option on the ScanMaster Item File
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the ScanMaster
Batch Create/Edit screen.
You can create or edit a group of UPC numbers in a batch using this
function. A batch may be applied to the Item File at any time and
remains on the system until it is manually deleted. The Create/Edit
Batch screen displays a list of all available batches on the system.
Figure 4-7: Batch Create/Edit Selection Screen
4-24
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Batch Create/Edit
Selection Screen. The column heading will display a down arrow next
to the field in which an ascending sort exists. An up arrow will display
next to the field in which a descending sort exists. To toggle between
the two, double-click on the column heading bar.
Batch Number: Unique three (3) digit number that identifies a batch.
The number is preceded by a local, host or offsale tag and followed by
a .BTR extension. This is a display-only field.
Act. Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY format) that displays
the batch activation date.
Batch Description: Thirty (30) character alphanumeric field. This field
displays the name of the batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. There are four types
of batches: Add/Replace, Delete, Zero Mover, and Offsale.
# of Items: This field displays the number of items in a batch.
Applied: This field displays whether or not the batch has been applied
to the Item File. Y = Yes and N = No.
Offsale: This field indicates that an offsale batch will be created during
batch activation. Y = Yes and N = No.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-25
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Batch Create/Edit
Selection Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
EDIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to edit the selected batch.
LABELS: Click this button (or press Alt-L) to generate shelf labels for
the highlighted batch. This button becomes active when the Label
radio button is pressed.
CREATE BATCH: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to create a new
batch.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) for software information
about the ScanMaster Batch Create/Edit screen.
BATCHES/LABELS: Click on these buttons to toggle between batch
creating/editing (default) and label printing.
4-26
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Accessing Existing Batches
The ScanMaster Batch Create/Edit Selection screen details the list of
available batches on the ScanMaster System. This screen details the
batch number, the date it was created, the batch description, the batch
type, the number of items in that batch, and if that batch has been
applied to the system.
The types of batches that can exist are:
•
Add/replace batch (items can be added to the batch then
modified)
•
Delete batch (items in this batch are deleted from the item file
when the batch is activated)
•
Offsale batch (created automatically after activating a batch
flagged to make Offsale batch)
•
Zero mover (items in this batch are deleted from the item file
when the batch is activated)
To access an existing batch, double click on the desired batch from the
Create/Edit Batch list. ScanMaster will display the “Edit Batch?”
prompt. Click “Yes” and the ScanMaster Batch List screen (see below)
for that batch is displayed. It contains a list of every item in that batch.
Creating Shelf Label Files
Creating shelf labels is performed from the ScanMaster Batch
Create/Edit Selection screen. To print labels for a batch, first click the
Label radio button. This will activate the Labels button. Highlight the
batch for which you want to generate labels and click Labels (or press
Alt -L). ScanMaster will display the “Create/Edit a Label File?” message.
Click “Yes” and the label file will be generated.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-27
Figure 4-8: Batch List Screen
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Batch List screen are abbreviations for those
in the Direct Item Maintenance screen, detailed earlier in this chapter.
Drag the scroll bar to the right to see all (display only) fields. Status
Flag settings are read vertically with “N” for No (or Not On) and “Y”
for Yes (or On).
Abbreviation
DESCRIPTION
MS
LINKED TO:
Field
Item Description
Master Item (X = Yes)
Linked to UPC
DP
Department Number
SD
Subdepartment Number
Abbreviation
Field
4-28
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
IT
Item Type
UP
Unit Price
SQ
Split Quantity
SP
Split Price
LQ
Limited Quantity
LP
Limited Price
MM
Mix Match Code
ADJ
Adjective Price Level
FS
T123
D1245
Food Stamp Flag
Tax 1, 2 and 3
Discount 1, 2, 4 and 5
EC
Electronic Coupon
VV
Visual Verify
RS
Restrict Sales
CC
Coupon Code
FH
Frequent Shopper
EQ
Enforce Quantity
BT
Bottle Link
RC
Report Code
AD
Ad/Sale Level
CQT
Case Quantity
COST
Case Cost
CD
Commodity Code
FC1
Family Code 1
FC2
Family Code 2
UD
Last Update Date
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Abbreviation
EMP
AC
4-29
Field
Exclude Minimum Purchase
Adjective Code
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Batch List Screen.
UPC # - CHECK TO IGNORE: Check this box to ignore maintenance
for this UPC when the batch is activated.
EXIT BATCH MAINTENANCE: Click on this button (or press Alt-X)
to exit to the ScanMaster Batch List Menu.
4-30
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Accessing Item Maintenance Fields
The Batch Maintenance Screen provides access to the ScanMaster item
maintenance fields. This screen details the current settings for all item
fields as they currently exist within the batch as well as the Item Status,
Activation Date, Make Offsale setting, and the date of the item’s last
maintenance.
To access an existing batch, double click on the desired item from the
Batch List screen.
Figure 4-9: Batch List Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-31
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Batch List screen are the same as those for the
Direct Item Maintenance screen, detailed earlier in this chapter. In
addition are the following fields:
Item Status: This field displays the status of the item within the batch.
Possible status levels include ADD (when an item is added to the
batch), UPDATE (when the item is being changed), DELETE (when the
item is being deleted) and IGNORE (when the ignore flag to disregard
the maintenance is active). In addition, this field displays the number
of items in the batch.
Date Of Last Maintenance: This field displays the date the item was
added to the batch.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Batch Maintenance
screen.
ACTIVATION DATE: The date the maintenance is due to be applied.
MAKE OFFSALE: This button is located at the top of the ScanMaster
Batch Maintenance screen. Click on this button to make an offsale
batch. Yes or No appears on the button to indicate the batch status.
USE P&S LIST: The Use Point and Shoot List option is located near the
top of the screen. By clicking on this button (or pressing Alt-U), the
option is activated and the button becomes highlighted. Upon
completing edits and saving, this option returns the user to the batch
item list where the next item to maintain may be chosen.
If this option is not activated (by default) the user is kept at the Batch
Maintenance screen for that item after saving. You can then select the
NEXT button for the next batch item, the PREVIOUS button for the
previous batch item, or the BATCH LIST button to return to the batch
list.
4-32
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
SHOW PRICE: Click this button (or press Alt-H) to display the Item
File Pricing window when editing is being performed on the pricing
fields. The information displayed is from the Item File (the current
scan file) regardless of what changes have been made to the pricing
fields within the batch.
IGNORE / UNIGNORE: Click on this button (or press Alt-I) to ignore
or unignore an item in a batch. When ignore is selected, the system
disregards that item in the batch and that item is not activated. When
Unignore is selected, the item is activated.
LINK ITEM / UNLINK ITEM/ UNLINK MSTR: Click on this button
(or press Alt-L) to link a UPC number with an item. The Batch
Maintenance screen prompts for the UPC number of the master item.
If the item is already linked, the button will display as Unlink Item.
Clicking this button will unlink the item. If the items is the master
item, click the button to activate the Unlink Master Item window
where the user can choose all or select items for unlinking.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-33
Figure 4-10: Unlink Master Item Screen
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made on
the Item Maintenance screen. If you move to the next item without
saving the changes made, those changes are not accepted.
NEXT>>: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
item in the Item File.
<<PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous item in the Item File.
BATCH LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to return to the
Batch List screen of the batch being edited.
4-34
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
PRICE MODE: Click on this button ( or press Alt-M) to activate the
pricing maintenance tab feature. The cursor will move to the pricing
fields (Item Type, Unit Price, Split Qty / Split Price, Ltd Qty / Price,
Adjective Pricing) by pressing Enter or Tab keys.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Item Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-35
Editing Existing Batches
Editing batches is performed from the ScanMaster Batch Maintenance
screen. This screen is similar to the Direct Item Maintenance screen.
To edit a batch, simply double click on that batch to access the
ScanMaster Batch List screen. The dialog box “Edit Batch?”
displays. Select the YES button to edit the batch. To edit a particular
item in that batch, simply double click on that item to access the
ScanMaster Batch Maintenance screen. This screen details specific
information about that item. From this screen you can make changes
to information about that item as well as insert additional items into
the batch. In addition, you can set up a batch activation date and
create an offsale batch
Upon completing edits to this batch item, click on the SAVE button to
save those changes. You must save batch item changes before moving
to another screen or those changes are not applied to that batch item.
Button options at the bottom of the screen enable the user to exit this
screen, advance to the next batch item, return to the previous batch
item, or access the batch list.
Adding New Items to a Batch
To add a new item to an existing batch, enter the UPC number in the
Current UPC field and press ENTER. The dialog box, “Item Does
not exist in the Item File. Do you wish to add it
anyway?” displays. Select the YES button to create a new item. A
blank Batch Maintenance screen appears.
Fill in the data for that screen and press the SAVE button to save those
changes. You must save batch item changes before moving to another
screen or those changes are not applied. Button options at the bottom
of the screen enable the user to exit this screen, advance to the next
batch item, return to the previous batch item, access the batch list, or
link an item.
When an item is displayed on the screen, the system also displays the
UPC Code, Status Code (which shows whether the Item status is add,
edit, delete, or ignore), and the Activation Date along with additional
field information.
4-36
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Caution: It is recommended that a batch should contain no more than
100 Items. The batch is easier to handle, and in an extremely rare case
if the file should get damaged, there are only 100 items to recover.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-37
Creating Local Batches
New batches are created from the ScanMaster Batch Create/Edit
screen. This screen lists all existing batches, including an option to
create a new local batch file.
To create a new local batch, simply click on the Create Batch
button. The dialog box, “Enter a Batch Number” appears. Type in
a unique batch number -- up to three digits -- and press ENTER. If the
batch number is already in use, the screen prompts for another
number.
The New Batch Header screen appears when a new batch number is
entered. Fill in a batch description, an activation date (if desired), and
select the batch type. There are two types of batches: Add/Replace or
Delete. Select the Add/Replace radio button to create a batch to add or
update existing items. Select the Delete radio button to create a delete
batch containing items you want to delete from the system.
Click on the ACCEPT button upon completing this screen. The Batch
Maintenance screen appears. Enter the items you want in the batch,
pressing the SAVE button after adding each item.
Automatically Activating Batches
You can activate a batch automatically or manually. To activate a batch
automatically, an activation date must be entered in the batch
activation date field, located in the top left corner of the screen. The
batch is automatically activated on that date during End of Day
processing. The date in the activation field is compared to the PC’s
date. If the dates match or the activation field date is one day behind
and is not activated yet, the batch activates during the end of day
procedure.
4-38
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Activate Batches
Activate Batches is the third option on the ScanMaster Item File Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-V) to access the ScanMaster Batch
Activation screen.
The Activate Batches option applies the information within the batch to
the Item File. After a batch is activated, it remains on the system until
it is manually deleted or overwritten by the host. When a batch is
activated, a “Y” displays in the Applied column. A batch can be reactivated as many times as necessary.
Figure 4-11: Batch Activation Selection Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-39
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Batch Activation
screen. The column heading will display a down arrow next to the
field in which an ascending sort exists. An up arrow will display next
to the field in which a descending sort exists. To toggle between the
two, double-click on the column heading bar.
Batch Name: A batch identifier containing a unique three (3) digit
number. The number is preceded by a local, offsale or host tag and
followed by a .BTR extension. This is a display-only field.
Act Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY format). This field
displays the batch activation date, the date the batch will be
automatically applied during end of day processing. If the batch was
created without an activation date, 00/00/00 will appear. This is a
display-only field.
Batch Description: This field displays the name of the batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. There are four types
of batches: Add/Replace; Delete; Offsale; or Zero Mover.
# of Items: This field displays the number of items in a batch.
Applied: This field displays whether or not the batch has been applied
to the Item File. Y = Yes and N = No.
Offsale: This field displays whether or not an offsale batch is created
during batch activation. Y = Yes and N = No.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Batch Activation screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu without activating any batches.
ACTIVATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) after selecting the
batch(es) you want to activate.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) for software information
about the ScanMaster Batch Information screen.
4-40
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Manually Activating Batches
Single or multiple batches can be activated at the same time. Select the
desired batch or batches from the batch list on the ScanMaster Batch
Activation screen by clicking on the batch. A checkmark will be placed
in the box next to the batch number. Click on the Activate button (or
press Alt-A) to immediately activate the selected batches.
The message “Activate the Selected Batch(es),” displays.
Select “Yes” to activate the batches or “No” to return to the Batch
Activation screen.
If the batch was tagged as an off-sale batch ScanMaster automatically
creates an offsale batch and assigns it a batch name based on the next
available batch number. The offsale batch contains item information
currently in the Item File before the batch is applied.
When a batch is activated, it updates the item file on the server PC
(SRV). If a problem occurs when the item is applied, the screen
displays NG, which means no good. NG items are then transferred to
the Local000 Error Batch. Both host and local exceptions transfer to
this batch. If errors occur while a batch is applied, the following
message appears: “Print Exception Report Y/N?”
Answer “Yes” if you wish to print the exception report. Choose “No”
to print at a later time. The exception report is saved until another
batch is activated that contains exceptions. The exception report is a
printout of detailed information of the problem that occurred when the
system had tried to apply the item to the item file. When the exception
report is printed, the exception information is cleared, but the items
still remain in the local000 error batch. The local000 error batch may be
edited, then applied to the item file. Once the local error batch has
been activated with no errors, items are automatically removed from
the local error batch.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-41
Delete Batches
Delete Batches is the fourth option on the ScanMaster Item File Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-L) to access the ScanMaster Delete
Batch screen.
From this screen, you can delete a batch off the ScanMaster system.
Local, host or offsale batches can be purged from the system using this
function.
Figure 4-12: Delete Batch Selection Screen
4-42
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Delete Batch Screen.
The column heading will display a down arrow next to the field in
which an ascending sort exists. An up arrow will display next to the
field in which a descending sort exists. To toggle between the two,
double-click on the column heading bar.
Batch Name: A batch identifier containing a unique three (3) digit
number. The number is preceded by a local, offsale or host tag and
followed by a .BTR extension. This is a display-only field.
Act Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY format). This field
displays the batch activation date, the date the batch will be
automatically applied during end of day processing. If the batch was
created without an activation date, 00/00/00 will appear. This is a
display-only field.
Batch Description: This field displays the name of the batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. There are four types
of batches: Add/Replace; Delete; Offsale; or Zero Mover.
# of Items: This field displays the number of items in a batch.
Applied: This field displays whether or not the batch has been applied
to the Item File. Y = Yes and N = No.
Offsale: This field displays whether or not an offsale batch is created
during batch activation. Y = Yes and N = No.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Delete Batch screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu without deleting any batches.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the selected
batch or batches.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Delete Batch screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-43
Deleting Batches
You can delete single or multiple batches from the system. Select the
desired batch or batches from the batch list on the Delete Batch screen.
Click on the DELETE button (or press Alt-D) to delete the batches.
The Delete File dialog box, with the message “Delete Selected
Batch(s),” appears. Select “Yes” to delete the batches or “No” to
return to the Delete Batch screen. If never applied, the message
“Batch Not Applied! OK to Delete?” appears. Select “Yes” to
delete.
4-44
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Print Batches
Print Batches is the fifth option on the ScanMaster Item File Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-P) to access the ScanMaster HostLocal Batch Report screen. Print batches produces an on-screen
display or hard-copy printout of information on all items in the batch.
Through this option, you can select the local or host batch you want to
view or print.
Figure 4-13: Batch Printing Selection Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-45
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Batch Printing Selection Screen.
The column heading will display a down arrow next to the field in
which an ascending sort exists. An up arrow will display next to the
field in which a descending sort exists. To toggle between the two,
double-click on the column heading bar.
Batch Name: A batch identifier containing a unique three (3) digit
number. The number is preceded by a local, offsale or host tag and
followed by a .BTR extension. This is a display-only field.
Act Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY format). This field
displays the batch activation date, the date the batch will be
automatically applied during end of day processing. If the batch was
created without an activation date, 00/00/00 will appear. This is a
display-only field.
Batch Description: This field displays the name of the batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. There are four types
of batches: Add/Replace; Delete; Offsale; or Zero Mover.
# of Items: This field displays the number of items in a batch.
Applied: This field displays whether or not the batch has been applied
to the Item File. Y = Yes and N = No.
Offsale: This field displays whether or not an offsale batch is created
during batch activation. Y = Yes and N = No.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Host-Local Batch Report
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Item File Menu.
DISPLAY: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to view that batch online before sending it to print.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press ALT -A) for software
information about the Batch Printing Selection screen.
4-46
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Printing Batches
Click on the desired local, host or offsale batch from the batch list.
Select the desired batch and click on the DISPLAY button (or press AltD) to view that batch. This enables the operator to view the report online before sending it to print. From this screen, click on the PRINT
button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of that batch.
Note: Before printing a batch, make sure the printer is on-line and
ready to print. To interpret the report, refer to the Batch List screen
abbreviation table (above) for cross-referencing similar column
headings.
Figure 4-14: Batch Printing Selection Screen
Note: Use the scroll bars on the side and bottom of the screen to view
the entire report online.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-47
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Batch Printing Selection
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to return to the batch list.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the selected batch.
LABELS: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print shelf labels for
the selected batch.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about printing batches.
4-48
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Mass Attribute Batch
Mass Attribute Batch is the sixth option on the ScanMaster Item File
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the ScanMaster
Mass Attribute Batch screen.
The mass attribute option enables you to globally modify a batch based
on an individual field changed. A listing of all batches -- local, host
and offsale -- on the ScanMaster System is displayed when the Mass
Attribute Batch option is selected.
Figure 4-15: Mass Attribute Batch Selection Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-49
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Mass Attribute Batch
Screen. The column heading will display a down arrow next to the
field in which an ascending sort exists. An up arrow will display next
to the field in which a descending sort exists. To toggle between the
two, double-click on the column heading bar.
Batch Name: A batch identifier containing a unique three (3) digit
number. The number is preceded by a local, offsale or host tag and
followed by a .BTR extension. This is a display-only field.
Act Date: Six (6) digit numeric field (MMDDYY format). This field
displays the batch activation date, the date the batch will be
automatically applied during end of day processing. If the batch was
created without an activation date, 00/00/00 will appear. This is a
display-only field.
Batch Description: This field displays the name of the batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. There are four types
of batches: Add/Replace; Delete; Offsale; or Zero Mover.
# of Items: This field displays the number of items in a batch.
Applied: This field displays whether or not the batch has been applied
to the Item File. Y = Yes and N = No.
Offsale: This field displays whether or not an offsale batch is created
during batch activation. Y = Yes and N = No.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Mass Attribute Batch
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Item File Menu.
MASS ATTRIBUTES: Click on this button (or press Alt-M) to apply
selected changes to an entire batch.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Mass Attribute Batch screen.
4-50
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Changing Mass Attributes
The ScanMaster Mass Attributes screen is similar to the Direct Item
Maintenance screen with the exception of movement information. The
mass attribute program permits any of the item fields to be edited. The
edited fields update each item in the batch without requiring you to
edit each item individually.
To apply mass attribute changes to a local or host batch, first select that
batch from the batch list on the ScanMaster Mass Attribute Batch
screen. You can select only one batch at a time. Then click on the
MASS ATTRIBUTES button at the bottom of the screen. The dialog
box, “Mass Attribute Batch?” appears. Select “Yes” to access the
Mass Attribute changes screen or “No” to return to the batch list. After
selecting a batch, the ScanMaster Mass Attribute screen displays.
This screen displays the batch description and activation date. Enter
new information and click on the Execute Changes button to execute
the changes made on the Mass Attribute screen. If an item in the batch
is tagged as an ignore, the mass attribute change does not affect this
item. After a mass attribute change, the batch can be modified or
applied to the Item File.
Note: When changing mass attributes, status flag options are colorcoded to signify a change was made. Yellow indicates no change was
made, green indicates the status flag turned on, while red signifies that
status flag was turned off.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-51
Figure 4-16: Mass Attributes Screen
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Mass Attributes screen are the
same as those for Direct Item Maintenance, covered earlier in this
chapter, in addition to the following:
Pricing =: This is the default price change type setting. Mass attribute
price changes will override the previous price.
Pricing +: Click this radio button to add the designated amount placed
in the specified pricing fields below to the existing item file settings.
Pricing -: Click this radio button to subtract the designated amount
placed in the specified pricing fields below to the existing item file
price settings.
4-52
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Pricing $: This is the default price change amount setting. Used in
conjunction to the change type above, mass attribute changes will
override, add or subtract a dollar amount.
Pricing %: Used in conjunction with the change type above, click this
radio button to add or subtract a designated percentage to the existing
item file price settings.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Mass Attributes Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
EXECUTE CHANGES: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to apply
selected changes to an entire batch.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Mass Attributes Batch screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-53
Convert PLU Report to Batch
Convert PLU Report to Batch is the seventh option on the ScanMaster
Item File Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-U) to access the
Report to Batch screen.
This option creates a local batch by ranges. This is useful when
creating zero movement batches. The operator can be very selective
about which items are pulled into the batch by using the selection
criteria of the PLU reporting program.
Figure 4-17: Report to Batch Screen
4-54
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Report to Batch screen.
Batch Number: Unique three (3) digit number that identifies a batch.
This number will be included in the Batch Name.
Batch Description: Thirty (30) character alphanumeric field. This field
displays the name of the batch. The default name assigned by
ScanMaster is “Auto Create Batch” but is allowed to be changed.
Activation: Six (6) digit numeric field. Optional. This field displays
the date the system will activate this batch.
Batch Type: This field displays the type of batch. The four types of
batches are Add/Replace, Delete, Offsale and Zero Mover.
Speed Index: This option selects the order in which the item file is
searched based on the criteria selected. The search criteria is: 1 = UPC
Code; 2 = Department; 3 = Subdepartment; 4 = Item Type; 5 = Mix &
Match; 6 = Report Code; 7 = Ad Level/VV; 8 = Coupon Code; 9 =
Commodity.
Note: For best results, match the speed index with the field used in
the selection range below prior to creating the batch
UPC Code: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired UPC codes for the batch.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired departments for the batch.
Subdepartment: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired subdepartments for the batch.
Item Type: Enter the starting and ending range of desired item types
for the batch. Defined Item Types are: 0 = Unit; 1 = Split; 2 = Scale; 4 =
Coupon; and 9 = Linked.
Report Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired report codes for the batch.
Commodity: Eight (8) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired commodity codes for the batch.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-55
Mix & Match: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired mix & match numbers for the batch.
Coup Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
range of desired coupon codes for the batch.
Price Range: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
price range for the batch. The system automatically places the decimal
point.
Bottle Link: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
bottle link range for the batch.
Ad Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending ad
level range for this batch.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Report to Batch screen are:
CREATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to create the batch based
on the search criteria entered in the data fields.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the PLU Reports to
Batch Screen.
DEFAULT: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to set all fields to the
default settings (start = all zeros, end = all 9s.).
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Report to Batch screen.
4-56
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Converting a PLU Report to a Batch
There are three types of batches that can be created: 1 - Add/Replace,
2 - Delete, 3 - Zero Mover.
An Add/Replace batch generates a local batch based on ranges
selected from this menu. A Delete batch generates a local delete batch
based on ranges selected from this menu. When this batch is activated,
all items in this batch are deleted from the item file. A Zero Mover
batch generates an auto-delete batch. The zero mover batch is based on
items that have had no recent item maintenance and no movement in
the PTD movement file. The user is prompted to exclude any new or
recently maintained items on or after a specified date. When this batch
is activated, all items within this batch are deleted from the Item File.
To create a batch, begin by entering a batch number. The batch
number must be a unique number. If the batch number entered is
already in use, the screen displays: “Batch ### already exists.”
The next field is the batch description field. List the batch description
in this field. The Activation Date is the next field. Enter the desired
activation date. This field is optional. Activation date is automatic
during the day-end. Then select the batch type from the Batch Type
list box. There are three batch types: Add/Replace, Delete, or Zero
Mover batch. Click on the desired batch type. The Speed Index field
speeds up the batch creation program by eliminating PLUs that do not
fall in the selection criteria. For example, when creating a batch for
Department 10, select the speed index for departments. This eliminates
all PLUs that are not in Department 10.
The selection criteria are: 1 = UPC Code; 2 = Department; 3 =
Subdepartment; 4 = Item Type; 5 = Mix & Match; 6 = Report Code; 7 =
Ad level/VV; 8 = Coupon Code; and 9 = Commodity. All selections
show the default ranges that include every item within the item file.
Entering a specific beginning sorting number and an ending sorting
number has the batch sort on the item file on the specific sorting range.
When finished selecting the sorting ranges, click on CREATE to begin
processing.
As the batch is processing, the screen displays all the items being
placed in the batch. During this process, the available option is EXIT to
stop the process. Items that have scrolled by are retained in the batch.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
After the batch is created, the batch can be modified, then applied to
the item file.
4-57
4-58
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Mix & Match Maintenance
Mix & Match Maintenance is the eighth option on the ScanMaster Item
File Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to access the
ScanMaster Mix & Match Maintenance screen.
This feature lists all the Mix & Match records on the system and
enables the user to perform maintenance on those records.
Figure 4-18: Mix & Match Maintenance Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-59
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Mix & Match
Maintenance Screen.
CURRENT #: Three (3) digit numeric modifiable field that lists the Mix
& Match number for that item.
QUANTITY: Two (2) digit modifiable field that lists the quantity for
that Mix & Match number.
PRICE: Six (6) digit modifiable field that lists the price for that Mix &
Match item.
DESCRIPTION: Sixteen (16) digit display-only field that lists the
description for that Mix & Match item.
MM#: Three (3) digit display-only field that lists the Mix & Match
number for that item.
QTY: Two (2) digit display-only field that lists the quantity for that Mix
& Match number.
PRICE: Six (6) digit display-only field that lists the price for that Mix &
Match item.
DESCRIPTION: Sixteen (16) digit display-only field that lists the
description for that Mix & Match item.
4-60
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Mix & Match
Maintenance Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Item File Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
Mix & Match fields.
FIRST: Click on this button (or press Alt-F) to go to the top of the Mix
& Match list.
LAST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to go to the bottom of the
Mix & Match list.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next item
on the Mix & Match list.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the
highlighted Mix & Match item.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous item on the Mix & Match list.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to display the Mix &
Match table. The operator can select the PRINT button to print the
desired Mix & Match list.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Mix & Match Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-61
Performing Mix & Match Maintenance
There are two ways to perform Mix & Match Maintenance: click on the
Mix & Match record list or type in the exact Mix & Match record
number.
Use the mouse to select the desired Mix & Match record from the Mix
& Match record list. The selected record displays in the data fields to
the left of the Mix & Match list. You can edit the Mix & Match edit
fields from this screen.
There are nine hundred and ninety-nine (999) Mix & Match records
available. The purpose of the Mix & Match file is to permit scanning of
different UPCs with the same price to be associated together for split
price or limited quantity price breaks (such as Kool-Aid or Jell-O). The
Mix & Match file permits a descriptor to be associated with the Mix &
Match record.
The Mix & Match pop-up window displays in the item file when the
Mix & Match field is accessed. A Mix & Match record may also be
created in Direct Item Maintenance.
4-62
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Flip Chart Maintenance
Flip Chart Maintenance is the ninth option on the ScanMaster Item File
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the ScanMaster
Flip Chart Maintenance screen.
Electronic flip charts build the Preset Menus that display store code
numbers at the POS workstation. There are two ScanMaster Flip Chart
Maintenance screens. The first screen displays a list of available
departments. The second screen enables the user to assign look-up
codes to the selected department.
From the Flip Chart Maintenance screen, you can select the desired
department on which you want to perform flip chart maintenance.
Simply click on the desired department and the ScanMaster Flip Chart
Maintenance edit screen displays.
Figure 4-19: Flip Chart Maintenance Screen (List)
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-63
Creating or Editing Electronic Flip Charts
From the ScanMaster Flip Chart Maintenance screen, select the desired
department number for that flip chart by clicking on that department.
The list may be sorted by Department Name or Department Number
(default) by clicking the desired radio button. The system advances to
the second Flip Chart Maintenance screen. Next, enter the desired
Current UPC number and tab to the Description field. If the Current
UPC number is already on the system, the Description and Item Type
fields are pre-filled. If the item code is a new item to the preset menu
the screen prompts, “Item Not on Menu. Do You Want To
Add Item.” Click “Yes” to add or “No” to cancel. Item code
numbers must exist in the item file before the item code is assigned to a
preset menu. When the DEPARTMENT key is pressed on the POS
workstation, the screen displays all the assigned item codes in the flip
chart menu in alphabetical order.
Figure 4-20: Flip Chart Maintenance (Edit Screen)
4-64
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Flip Chart Maintenance
Edit Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Flip Chart
Maintenance department selection screen.
UPDATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to read updates from
the Item File to the flip chart.
DISPLAY/PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to display items
on the flip chart. The display list can be sorted by UPC or Department.
Select Print List to route the displayed list to the printer.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next item
on the flip chart.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-V) to return to the
previous item on the flip chart.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the current
item from the flip chart.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to display the
available flip charts. The operator can select the PRINT button to print
the desired flip chart list.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about Flip Chart Maintenance.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-65
Miscellaneous Maintenance
Miscellaneous Item Maintenance is the tenth option on the ScanMaster
Item File Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-I) to access the
ScanMaster Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Miscellaneous Item
Maintenance is where the system’s supporting item files are
maintained.
Figure 4-21: Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu
4-66
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Miscellaneous Maintenance Options
There are nine options on the ScanMaster Miscellaneous Maintenance
Menu. They are:
•
Promotion/Coupon Editor
•
Bottle Link Editor
•
Report Code Editor
•
Tare Table Maintenance
•
Variable Tare Maintenance
•
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
•
Bundle File Maintenance
•
APT Coupon Maintenance
•
Adjective Price Maintenance
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Item File Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-67
Promotion/Coupon Editor
The Promotion/Coupon Editor is the first option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltC) to access the ScanMaster Coupon Editor screen.
Through Promotion/Coupon Editor, you can create and edit coupons
or promotional advertisements that print at the end of the customer’s
receipt if the transaction meets the system criteria.
Figure 4-22: Promotion / Coupon Editor Screen
4-68
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Coupon Editor Screen.
Create/Edit Promotion/Coupon #: There can be up to nine-thousand
nine-hundred ninety-nine (9999) coupons generated on the ScanMaster
System. To create a new coupon, simply enter a unique coupon
number in the Create/Edit Coupon # field at the top of the Coupon
Editor screen.
Description: An alpha/numeric field that enables the user to create or
edit the description of the coupon.
Lines 1-7: Create or Edit the Promotion/Coupon from these lines. You
can use up to thirty-eight (38) alpha/numeric characters per line.
Line 8: If you are creating a PLU coupon, ScanMaster reserves this line
8 to print the scannable PLU number for the coupon. This line may also
be used with lines 1-7 if you choose not to produce a scannable coupon.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Coupon Editor Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made on
the ScanMaster Coupon Editor screen.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
coupon record.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous coupon record.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a coupon
record.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to display all
available coupons. The operator can select the PRINT button to print
the desired coupon.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Coupon Editor screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-69
CREATE COUPON PLU: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to
launch the Coupon Creation Screen to generate a PLU for a specific
coupon that can be manually keyed or scanned like a manufacturers
coupon.
Figure 4-23: Coupon Creation Screen
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Coupon Creation
Screen.
Enter 20 Digit PLU: A numeric field that holds the PLU number of the
coupon. This number will be printed on line 8 of the coupon.
Enter PLU Description: A sixteen (16) character alpha/numeric field
that holds the PLU description for the coupon.
Enter Department #: The department number to which the coupon is
assigned.
Enter Coupon Value: A three (3) digit numeric field that holds the
dollar amount of the coupon.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Coupon Creation Screen.
4-70
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-V) to save changes made on
the ScanMaster Coupon Creation screen.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes you
have made to that particular coupon.
Creating Coupons
There can be up to nine-thousand nine-hundred ninety-nine (9999)
coupons generated on the ScanMaster System. To create a new
coupon, simply enter a unique coupon number in the Create/Edit
Coupon # field at the top of the ScanMaster Coupon Editor screen. The
New Coupon dialog box, with the message “Create New Coupon?,”
displays. Select “Yes” to create a new coupon or “No” to return to the
Coupon Editor screen.
Enter a coupon name and fill in Lines 1-8 with information you want to
appear on the coupon. You can enter up to 38 characters of
information on each line. Upon completing the coupon, click on the
SAVE button to save your new coupon.
Creating a PLU for a Coupon
From the ScanMaster Promotion/Coupon Editor Screen, click on the
CREATE COUPON PLU to create a Coupon PLU.
1. Enter a PLU number of up to twenty (20) digits.
2. Enter the PLU description.
3. Enter the Department number.
4. Enter the coupon value.
Click on SAVE to save the assigned PLU for that coupon or ABORT to
abort any changes made to the coupon. The PLU displays in the lower
right corner of the coupon when saved. This PLU generates a bar code
on the customer receipt if the NCR 7156 thermal printer is used. This
bar code can then be scanned at the POS workstation when the coupon
is redeemed.
Note: The coupon PLU number is automatically created in the item
file when the coupon is saved.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
There can be up to nine-thousand nine-hundred ninety-nine (9999)
promotion/coupons on the system. The coupon criteria and the
priority in which they print are:
•
Random Winner
•
Frequent Shopper
•
Over / under Total Sale Amount
•
Over / under Department Amount
•
Link to a UPC
Figure 4-24: Sample Coupon
4-71
4-72
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Printing Coupons
There are three places to assign coupons to print:
•
The Register Control File handles assignment of coupons for
random winners, frequent shoppers, over/under total sale
amounts, and maximum number of coupons to print per
transaction.
•
Direct Item Maintenance permits a coupon to print when a specific
item is sold.
•
Department Maintenance permits a coupon to print over or under
a department sale amount.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-73
Bottle Link Editor
The Bottle Link Editor is the second option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltB) to access the ScanMaster Bottle Link Maintenance Screen.
The Bottle Link Editor permits the user to link a bottle deposit amount
to an item and to different departments. There can be up to ninetynine (99) bottle links created on the system. The bottle link table can be
viewed from the Direct Item Maintenance screen. It is found in the
lower left corner above the button options.
Figure 4-25: Bottle Link Maintenance Screen
4-74
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Bottle Link
Maintenance screen.
Link #: Two (2) digit number assigned to the bottle deposit.
Dept. Link: Two (2) digit number identifying the department receiving
the bottle link deposit.
Price: The deposit amount.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Bottle Link Maintenance
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the ScanMaster Bottle
Link Maintenance screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
ScanMaster Bottle Link Maintenance screen.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to display all
available bottle links. The operator can select and print the desired
link.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Bottle Link Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-75
Performing Bottle Link Maintenance
To edit the bottle link table, click on the desired link number. Link
information displays in the fields below the table. Edit the department
link and price fields. Click on SAVE and the bottle link is updated.
To edit the bottle link department, click on the desired bottle link
number. Bottle link information displays to the right of the Bottle Link
table. Complete and save your edits.
Note: Linking a bottle deposit to an item is performed in Direct Item
Maintenance. From the ScanMaster Direct Item Maintenance screen,
click on the spin button next to the bottle link field to display the bottle
deposit table. Click on the deposit you want to link to an item. Click
on SAVE. The deposit is automatically added to this item when it is
scanned.
4-76
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Report Code Editor
The Report Codes option is the third option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltR) to access the ScanMaster Report Code Maintenance screen.
The report code table associates a descriptor to a report code number.
There are ninety-nine report codes available through Item
Maintenance. Report codes can be used to group items into specific
categories. For example, all products from Company A can be grouped
under a specific report code.
Figure 4-26: Report Code Maintenance Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-77
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Report Code
Description Maintenance Screen.
Enter Report Code: A number assigned to specific reports. Up to 99
reports codes are available.
Enter Description: Description of a selected report code.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Report Code Description
Maintenance Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Miscellaneous
Maintenance Menu screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
ScanMaster Report Code Maintenance screen.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
Report Code.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous Report Code.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to display all
available report codes. The operator can select and print the desired
report code.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Report Code Description Maintenance screen.
4-78
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Performing Report Code Maintenance
From the ScanMaster Report Code Maintenance screen, enter the
Report Code number and description. Click on SAVE to save the
change and return to the ScanMaster Miscellaneous Maintenance
screen.
Note: Linking a report code with an item is performed in Direct Item
Maintenance. From the ScanMaster Direct Item Maintenance screen,
enter the report code in the codes section of the General Tab, located at
the lower right portion of the screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-79
Tare Table Maintenance
Tare Table Maintenance is the fourth option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltT) to access the ScanMaster Tare Code Maintenance screen.
This feature permits you to assign up to 99 associated weight values to
specific tare items. Tare items are products that must be weighed to
determine their price. The tare value is the weight of the package the
product is placed in. Tare codes 1 through 79 are reserved for Fixed
Tare Codes, where the weight of the package is consistent regardless of
the amount of product purchased. Tare codes 80-98 are reserved for
Variable Tare Codes, where the weight of the package varies with the
amount of product purchased. An item with a tare code of 99 prompts
the cashier to manually enter a tare code.
Figure 4-27: Tare Code Maintenance Screen
4-80
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Tare Codes can be automatic or manual. The system defaults to
automatic. Using the manual tare code option is enabled in the
Register Control File.
Note: Assigning a tare code to an item is performed in Direct Item
Maintenance. From the ScanMaster Direct Item Maintenance screen,
enter the desired tare code in the Split Qty/Tare field. The tare
automatically deducts this weight when the item is weighed.
Example: Fresh vegetables, peanuts, and other bulk items are
considered tare items. The plastic bags in which they are packaged
must have a tare value (a pre-determined weight). That value is
deducted when the product is weighed at the POS workstation.
Performing Tare Code Maintenance
Click on the desired Tare # and enter the pre-determined package
weight (in 1/1000 of a pound) in the Tare value data field. Click on
the SAVE button to save Tare settings or the EXIT button to abort
changes and return to the ScanMaster Miscellaneous Maintenance
screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-81
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Tare Code Maintenance
screen.
Tare #: This field displays the different tare numbers on the
ScanMaster System.
Tare Value: This field displays the value assigned to a specific tare
number.
Enter Tare Value in 1/1000 of a Pound: Four (4) digit numeric. Enter
the value of a tare in this field.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Tare Code Maintenance
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance screen without saving changes.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save Tare settings.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Tare Code Maintenance screen.
4-82
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Variable Tare Maintenance
Variable Tare Maintenance is the fifth option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltV) to access the ScanMaster Variable Tare Maintenance screen.
If this option is enabled in the Register Control File, the system will
support multiple package weights per individual product.
Figure 4-28: Variable Tare Maintenance Screen
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-83
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Variable Tare Code
Maintenance screen.
Weight (XXX.XX): Five (5) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum
weight of the product in pounds or kilograms up to this amount to be
assigned this tare code.
Tare Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the fixed tare number
assigned to the weight of a specific package in this range.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Tare Code Maintenance
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to exit to the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance screen without saving changes.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save Variable Tare
settings.
PREVIOUS: Click on the Previous button (or press Alt-P) to return to
the previous Variable Tare number on the Variable Tare Maintenance
Table.
NEXT: Click on the Next button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
Variable Tare number on the Variable Tare Maintenance Table.
DELETE /DELETE SELECTED TARE CODE: Click on either button
(or press Alt-D) to delete the highlighted Variable Tare code.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Variable Tare Maintenance screen.
4-84
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Using the Variable Tare Option
There can be 19 variable codes (tare codes 80-98). Each variable tare
can have up to ten (10) weight ranges and tares assigned. The weights
must be entered in ascending order.
Note: Assigning a tare code to an item is performed in Direct Item
Maintenance. From the ScanMaster Direct Item Maintenance screen,
enter the desired tare code in the Split Qty/Tare field. The tare
automatically deducts this weight when the item is weighed.
When the system recognizes an item as a variable tare, the system
weighs the item and refers to the variable tare table to see the total
weight of the package and the tare code to use. The system looks at the
fixed tare table for the weight of the package to deduct.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-85
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
Electronic Coupon Maintenance is the sixth option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltE) to access the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen.
These options enables store to generate electronic coupons and
provides electronic discounts and frequent shopper benefits.
Figure 4-29: Electronic Coupons Screen - General Coupon Information Tab
4-86
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon
Screen.
UPC: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic coupon with
the designated UPC number (20 character numeric) Lookup Value
field. This UPC number is the same as in the Item File.
Mix & Match: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic
coupon with the designated Mix & Match number (4 character
numeric) Lookup Value field.
Report Code: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic
coupon with the designated Report Code number (4 character numeric)
Lookup Value field.
Bundle Code: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic
coupon with the designated Bundle Code number (2 character
numeric) Lookup Value field.
Department: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic
coupon with the designated Department number (2 character numeric)
Lookup Value field.
Total Sale: Click on this radio button to connect the electronic coupon
with the designated Total Sale Amount (7 character numeric) Lookup
Value field.
Lookup Value: The value associated with each of the six Coupon
Lookup Type settings above.
Item Description: Display only. This field displays the description of
the specified lookup value: UPC description, Mix & Match Code
description, Report Code description, Bundle Code description or
Department description.
Min FS Level: Enter the frequent shopper level the customer must
have before the electronic coupon is applicable. Click on the down
arrow to access a pull-down list (0-9) of levels.
Level Description: Display only. This field displays the frequent
shopper level description associated with the selected level.
Descriptions are created from the Frequent Shopper Descriptor
Maintenance screen, located off the Customer Maintenance Menu.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-87
General Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon
Screen’s General Coupon Information Tab.
EC Description: Thirty (30) digit alpha/numeric field that identifies
the electronic coupon.
Sort Depart: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the department from
which electronic coupons will be deducted. If this field is left blank,
electronic coupons will be deducted from the default electronic coupon
department, set in the Back Office Control File (Default Elec. Coupon
Dept.).
Vendor Number: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This field holds the
vendor number providing this coupon to the store.
Coupon Code: Four (4) digit numeric field. This field holds the
Coupon Code for this Electronic Coupon. There can be up to 9999
coupons in the coupon file.
Commodity Code: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This field holds the
host/warehouse code.
Coupon Type: Click on this radio button to indicate if the electronic
coupon is a manufacturer or store coupon.
Coupon is by Weight: lick on this checkbox to indicate that the
Electronic Coupon is being issued for random weight item. If this
checkbox is activated, the Buy and Get fields change to “pounds.”
Discount Type: Click on this radio button to select the discount type ($
= dollars, % = percent). If dollars is selected, the dollar amount for the
electronic coupon is subtracted. If percent is selected, the desired
percentage amount is deducted.
Weighted Coupons Favor: Click on the down arrow to access a pulldown list (0 – Not Applicable, 1 – Store, 2 – Customer). For example,
an electronic coupon can be issued to have a customer get a free roast if
a roast of equal or greater value is purchased. If the weighted coupon
favored the store, the cheaper of the two roasts would be listed as the
free roast. If the weighted coupon favored the customer, the most
expensive roast would be listed as the free roast.
4-88
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Buy: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of product items
the customer must purchase to receive the electronic coupon discount.
Get: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of product items
to which the electronic coupon will be applied.
At Discount: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the dollar
amount/percentage the customer receives with the electronic coupon.
Limit: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum number of
coupons per customer.
Start/End Dates: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the start/end dates
the coupon is valid.
Dept Total: Seven (7) digit numeric field. This option is only active on
Department electronic coupons. When setting up a department
electronic coupon, use this field to enter the minimum amount a
customer must spend in that department to trigger this electronic
coupon.
Minimum Purchase: Seven (7) digit numeric field. Enter the minimum
purchase amount necessary for the customer to receive the electronic
coupon discount.
Start/End Times: Four (4) digit numeric field. Enter the start/end time
the coupon is valid.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-89
Frequent Shopper/General Information Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon
Screen’s Frequent Shopper/General Information Tab.
Figure 4-30: Electronic Coupons Screen - Frequent Shopper/General Information Tab
Points per Coupon: Six (6) digit numeric field. This field displays the
amount of frequent shopper points awarded to a customer when this
electronic coupon item is purchased.
Promotion Code: Reserved for future use.
Bonus Points per Coupon: Six (6) digit numeric field. This field
displays the amount of frequent shopper bonus points awarded to a
customer when this electronic coupon item is purchased.
Special Promotion Points: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the
number of points a frequent shopper customer needs to redeem a
special promotional item. For example, if 250 is entered in this field, a
frequent shopper customer must accumulate 250 special promotional
points to redeem this item.
4-90
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Current / Period Points: These fields display the current and periodto-date points issued by this coupon, respectively.
Current / Period Bonus Points: These fields display the current and
period-to-date bonus points issued by this coupon, respectively.
Current / Period Quantity: These fields display the number of current
and period-to-date issues of this coupon, respectively.
Current / Period Amount: These fields display the dollar amounts of
current and period-to-date issues of this coupon, respectively.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon
Maintenance Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Miscellaneous
Maintenance Menu screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous Electronic Coupon.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
Electronic Coupon
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete that electronic
coupon from the ScanMaster System.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-91
Using the Electronic Coupon Editor
Electronic Coupon programs are generally set up to reward frequent
shopper customers for their patronage. Through the Electronic
Coupon Editor, stores can attach electronic coupons to a certain UPC or
group of UPCs.
When a qualified frequent shopper customer purchases a product or
group of products linked to an electronic coupon, the electronic coupon
amount (defined through this screen) is automatically deducted from
the purchase price when the transaction is completed. In addition,
frequent shopper points (or dollars) may be awarded.
There are six ways to set up electronic coupons:
•
By UPC
•
By Mix & Match Code
•
By Report Code
•
By Bundle Code
•
By Department
•
By Total Sale Amount
Setting Up an Electronic Coupon by UPCs
If you want to earmark a specific product for a store or manufacturer
electronic coupon, simply click on the UPC radio button, enter the UPC
Lookup Value and complete the remaining data fields. Whenever this
product is scanned or key-entered at the POS workstation, qualified
frequent shopper customers are automatically awarded the electronic
coupon discount associated with this UPC. The electronic coupon
discounts are detailed at the bottom of the customer receipt.
4-92
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Setting Up Electronic Coupons Through Mix & Match
If you want to earmark a group of products for a store or manufacturer
electronic coupon, simply click on the Mix & Match radio button, enter
the Mix & Match Code Lookup Value and complete the remaining data
fields. Whenever a product with this Mix & Match code is scanned or
key-entered at the POS workstation, qualified frequent shopper
customers are automatically awarded the electronic coupon discount
associated with this Mix & Match code. The electronic coupon
discounts are detailed at the bottom of the customer receipt.
Example: If an electronic coupon is associated with Mix & Match 222,
all UPCs with a Mix & Match code of 222 will be flagged for an
electronic coupon. Therefore, when a qualified frequent shopper
customer purchases a product with this Mix & Match code, the amount
of the electronic coupon is discounted from the purchase.
Setting Up Electronic Coupons Through Report Code
If you want to earmark a group of products for a store or manufacturer
electronic coupon, simply click on the Report Code radio button, enter
Report Code Lookup Value and complete the remaining data fields.
Whenever a product with this Report Code is scanned or key-entered
at the POS workstation, qualified frequent shopper customers are
automatically awarded the electronic coupon discount associated with
this Report Code. The electronic coupon discounts are detailed at the
bottom of the customer receipt.
Setting Up Electronic Coupons Through Bundle Code
If you want to earmark a group of products for a store or manufacturer
electronic coupon, simply click on the Bundle Code radio button, enter
Bundle Code Lookup Value and complete the remaining data fields.
Whenever a product with this Bundle Code is scanned or key-entered
at the POS workstation, qualified frequent shopper customers are
automatically awarded the electronic coupon discount associated with
this Bundle Code. The electronic coupon discounts are detailed at the
bottom of the customer receipt.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-93
Setting Up Electronic Coupons Through Department
If you want to earmark a group of products for a store or manufacturer
electronic coupon, simply click on the Department radio button, enter
the Department Lookup Value and complete the remaining data fields.
Whenever a product within this Department is scanned or key-entered
at the POS workstation, qualified frequent shopper customers are
automatically awarded the electronic coupon discount associated with
this Department. The electronic coupon discounts are detailed at the
bottom of the customer receipt.
Setting Up Electronic Coupons Through Total Sale Amount
If you want to earmark a store or manufacturer electronic coupon
based on the total pre-tax sale amount, simply click on the Total Sale
radio button, enter the Total Sale Amount Lookup Value and complete
the remaining data fields. Whenever a total sale equals or exceeds this
amount, qualified frequent shopper customers are automatically
awarded the electronic coupon discount associated with this sale. The
electronic coupon discounts are detailed at the bottom of the customer
receipt.
Note: When this option is used, the Dept Total and Minimum
Purchase fields are inactive in the General Coupon Information Tab.
Creating Multiple Electronic Coupons for the Same Lookup
Value
Multiple electronic coupons can be created for the same Lookup Value
(i.e. UPC, Mix & Match Code, etc). Stores may want to use this feature
in frequent shopper or store membership programs.
There are two Control File questions that govern this feature. They are:
•
Frq Shp Level Set In Cust File (Register Control File)
•
Allow Mult Same ECpn-FrqSp Lvl (Back Office Control File)
4-94
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Assigning Multiple Electronic Coupons Per Lookup Value
If both options are set to “Yes,” stores can create up to 10 electronic
coupons for the same Lookup Value (i.e. UPC, Mix & Match Code, etc).
This is accomplished by setting different levels for each electronic
coupon. However, each level would receive only the discount assigned
to that level, not a culmination of previous levels.
Below is an example of how a store might use this feature to provide
electronic coupon benefits to customers at different “frequent shopper”
levels.
UPC (or Mix & Match)
Level
Discount
000000000012000000013
1
.10
000000000012000000013
2
.20
000000000012000000013
3
.30
000000000012000000013
4
.40
Follow the steps below to create multiple electronic coupons for the
same Lookup Value.
1. Select the desired coupon lookup type by clicking on the
corresponding radio button.
2. Enter the desired Lookup Value.
3. Set the electronic coupon level (the frequent shopper level to which
the coupon will be awarded) by clicking on the down arrow in the
Level field and selecting the desired level (0-9).
4. Complete the remaining electronic coupon information (for
example, the electronic coupon description, the discount price, the
coupon dates) and save the information.
5. Repeat the above steps as many times as necessary when creating
multiple electronic coupons for the same Lookup Value. The only
field that needs to change is the Level field, so each electronic
coupon for the same Lookup Value has a different level.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-95
Assigning Only One Electronic Coupon Per Lookup Value
If both control file options are set to “No,” only one electronic coupon
can be associated with a specific Lookup Value.
The coupon is awarded based on the level listed in the Level field on
the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen. This level represents the
minimum level a customer is required to be at in order to receive the
frequent shopper discount or points associated with that electronic
coupon. Everyone at that level or above will receive that coupon.
Electronic Coupons by Weight
Electronic coupons also can be configured for weighted items. This
feature enables store to provide customers electronic discounts on
scalable items (such as bananas or any produce item) or variable
weight items (such as roasts, ground beef or deli items).
There are two flags on the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen that
govern this feature. They are: Coupon is By Weight, and Weighted
Coupons Favor.
The Coupon is by Weight flag is used when stores want to provide
customers with a weighted discount on a particular item. For example,
stores would use this feature if they wanted to sell bananas at buy two
pounds and get one pound free.
Follow the steps below to perform this task:
1. From the Direct Item Maintenance Screen, create a scalable UPC for
bananas.
2. Make sure a price per pound is listed in the Unit Price field on the
Direct Item Maintenance Screen.
3. From the Electronic Coupon Maintenance Screen, create an
electronic coupon for bananas. Include the start/end date/times.
4. Check the Coupon is By Weight Flag.
5. Enter the discount in the Buy/Get and Limit Of fields. (These fields
are now listed in pounds because the Coupon is By Weight flag is
enabled.)
6. Save the information.
4-96
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
The Weighted Coupon Favors flag is used when stores want to provide
customers with a specific number of items as a discount. For example,
if a customer buys one roast, they would get a second roast (of equal or
lesser value) free. This option is further describe in the section below.
Setting Up Random Weight Discounts (By Unit of Measure)
Random weight discounts can be applied to electronic coupons. This
feature can provide discounts on meats or other products that use
random weight UPCs. The product’s price is embedded in the random
weight UPC and the price varies depending on the weight of a product.
Follow the steps below to set up an electronic coupon for a random
weight discount.
1. From the Direct Item Maintenance screen, create a random weight
UPC for that particular product.
2. From the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen, create a
corresponding electronic coupon for that item. The UPC for the
electronic coupon must match exactly the UPC for that product in
the item file.
3. Enter general electronic coupon information for that item.
4. Select the preferred coupon favor option (0 – Not Applicable; 1 –
Store; 2 – Customer) from the Weighted Coupons Favor field,
found on the General Coupon Information tab. This setting
determines whom the coupon favors and how the system tracks the
discount.
5. Next, select the discount type (dollars or percent) and then set the
Buy/Get/Discount/Limit information. These fields set parameters
for the discount. Also set start/end date/time information to
control when the discount is available.
6. Save information.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-97
Example: Stores may want to use this feature for a buy one, get one
promotion on roasts. After setting up general electronic coupon
information, click the Percent discount type and then select the
weighted coupon favors setting. If it is set to 0 – Not Applicable, the
second roast is given to the customer free. If it is set to 1 -- Store, the
cheaper of the two roasts is given free. If it is set to 2 -- Customer, the
most expensive roast is given free. Next, set the Buy field to 1, the Get
field to 1, and enter 100 in the at a Discount field. You can also attach a
limit. Save the information and the coupon is now available for use.
Setting Up Limited Quantity Discounts (By Unit of Measure)
This feature is primarily governed by the Coupon is by Weight flag.
When this flag is set, electronic coupon discounts are given by the
pound. This discount is given for items weighed at the checkout and
random weight items. Random weight items require the price/lb. to
be entered. The register calculates the discount. The Buy/Get fields
change from units to weight in pounds. So, instead of buying one item
and getting one item free, the Buy/Get fields would change to pounds
and it would permit the customer to purchase 1 pound and get 1
pound free.
Example: Stores may want to use this feature to promote a “buy one
pound, get one pound free” sale on ground beef.
4-98
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Bundle File Maintenance
Bundle File Maintenance is the seventh option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltU) to access the ScanMaster Bundle File Maintenance screen.
This option enables stores to organize a group of items together in a
“bundle” for sale or promotional purposes. Customers get free or
discounted item if all items included the bundle are purchased.
Figure 4-31: ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance Screen
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance
screen.
Bundle Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter a unique number to
identify a bundle on the ScanMaster system. Up to 99 bundles can be
assigned.
Bundle Description: Sixteen (16) character alphanumeric field. Enter a
unique description used to identify a bundle.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
4-99
Bundle UPC Information: Use this section of the screen to assign items
to a bundle. Items can be assigned individually through a UPC or
collectively through groupings such as Mix and Match or Report
Codes. Up to five individual items or groupings can be organized into
a bundle. The first line in this section is designated for the free or
discounted item. The remaining lines are for other items that comprise
a bundle. Click on the down arrow in the first column to assign a UPC,
Mix and Match or Report Code. Enter the UPC or code in the second
column. The item’s read-only description is displayed in the third
column.
Note: Items included in one bundle cannot be included in any other
bundle. However, the same item can be used more than one time in
the same bundle.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the Bundle
Maintenance screen. The system prompts to Save any unsaved
changes made to information on this screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save information in the
ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance record.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous bundle on the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance Screen.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
bundle on the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance Screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the current
bundle from the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance record.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print a summary
list of all existing bundles on the ScanMaster system.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance Screen.
4-100 Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Using the Bundle File Maintenance Option
Bundling products together permit stores to reward customers with a
free or discounted item when a group of associated products are
purchased.
Up to 99 bundles can be created in ScanMaster. As many as five and as
few as two items or groupings can be included in the bundle.
Example: Grouping picnic items together is a good example of how
bundling can be used. The customer gets a free or discounted bottle of
ketchup if the remaining items (hot dogs, soft drink, relish, and hot dog
buns) are purchased as part of the sale.
The first line of the Bundle UPC Information section is reserved for the
free or discounted item, while the remaining lines are used for the
items that must be purchased in order to receive the free item. If a
UPC is used in the bundle, that particular UPC must be purchased for
the customer to qualify. If Mix and Match or Report Code is selected,
the customer must buy one of the items in those groupings to get the
free or discounted item.
In addition to identifying the free or discounted item in the Bundle File
Maintenance option, an electronic coupon that is tagged with the exact
same code number as the Bundle Code number must be created to link
the free item to the bundle.
Refer to Electronic Coupon Maintenance for more information about
electronic coupons.
Creating a New Bundle
Follow the steps below to create a new bundle.
1. Enter a unique bundle number in the Bundle Code field.
2. Enter a bundle description in the Bundle Description field.
3. Enter the preferred item information in the Bundle UPC
Information fields. The first line is reserved for the free or
discounted item, while the remaining lines are used for listing the
items that must be purchased in order to receive the deal.
4. To redeem the free bundle item, create an electronic coupon for the
item listed on the first line.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance 4-101
Adjective Price Maintenance
Adjective Price Maintenance is the ninth option on the ScanMaster
Miscellaneous Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press AltD) to access the Adjective Price Maintenance screen.
Adjective Pricing and Adjective Price Maintenance features are used to
configure multiple level pricing for a single UPC. Through adjective
price maintenance, stores can use a single UPC to create layers of
pricing for an individual product.
There are two ways to configure Adjective pricing. They are:
•
By Level
•
By Quantity
Figure 4-32: Adjective Pricing By Level
Field Descriptions
Below are the field descriptions for the Adjective Price Maintenance
screen.
4-102 Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Adjective Price Code: The price code is a four (4) digit numeric field.
Enter a unique code for an item that has multiple prices. This code
displays on the Item Maintenance Screen.
Code Description: In the twenty (20) character alphanumeric field,
enter a product description that is associated with this particular
Adjective Price Code.
Type (Level or Quantity): Select the preferred Adjective Price type by
clicking either the Level or Quantity radio buttons. Level adjective
pricing is used when multiple prices are assigned to an item based on
the unit size (for example, small, medium, large or supersize).
Quantity adjective pricing is used when multiple prices are assigned to
an item based on the number of units a customer purchases.
Level (1-5): You can select up to five pricing levels for a single UPC. If
a product has only one price (or level), that price is read from the
Direct Item Maintenance screen. If a product has multiple prices, an
Adjective Price Code for that product must be created and multiple
prices assigned through the Adjective Price Maintenance screen.
Quantity: The Quantity field is a two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the
number of units that a customer must purchase in order to receive the
adjective price. The customer must purchase the exact quantity
required for a particular level to receive the individual item price for
that product (as listed in Direct Item Maintenance).
Description: In the sixteen (16) character alphanumeric field, enter a
product description for each level of adjective pricing. For example,
six-pack, twelve-pack, etc.
Price: In the six (6) digit numeric field, enter the product’s multiple
level prices. The decimal is automatically placed two digits from the
right of the initial digit.
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Adjective Price Maintenance
screen.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance 4-103
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the ScanMaster
Adjective Price Maintenance screen. The system prompts you to save
any unsaved changes made to information in this record.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to view a list of all
Adjective Price codes. Click on Print to print the list.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous Adjective Price item in the ScanMaster Adjective Price
Maintenance record.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
adjective price item on the ScanMaster Adjective Price record.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to information on the ScanMaster Adjective Price Maintenance
record.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete an adjective
price item from the ScanMaster Adjective Price Maintenance
record.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Adjective Price Maintenance feature.
4-104 Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
Adjective Pricing by Level
Adjective Pricing by Level is used to set tiered pricing for a product
based on its size. Soda fountain soft drinks are a good example. There
are many different cup sizes available for soda fountain drinks – small,
medium, large, extra large, jumbo or supersize – and stores can set a
price for each size using this screen.
Follow the steps below to configure Adjective Prices by Level.
1. From the Adjective Price Maintenance Screen, create an adjective
price code for an item with multiple level pricing.
2. Use the Adjective Price Maintenance screen to set up the multiple
level pricing for that item. Click the Level radio button to select the
Adjective Price by Level option.
3. Enter descriptions and prices for the various levels and click the
checkbox next to each level number to indicate that level is being
used (see the Adjective Pricing by Level screen shot on the previous
page for an example). Up to five levels can be configured.
4. Save the information.
5. Next, you must link the item to its multiple prices through the
Direct Item Maintenance screen. From this screen, access the UPC
associated with the multiple level pricing. Select the General tab
and change the Enforce Qty field to Enforce. Next, select the
Enhanced tab and enter the adjective price code in the Adjective
Code Field. Save your changes. That item is now linked to that
Adjective Price Code.
Note: When Enforce Qty is set, the cashier is prompted to Enter Qty.
When Enforce Qty is not set, the normal item price is used if no
quantity is entered.
Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance 4-105
Adjective Pricing by Quantity
Adjective Pricing by Quantity is used to set tiered pricing for a product
based on quantity. In other words, a certain quantity of that product
must be sold in order for the customer to get it at the listed price.
Selling canned soft drinks in different quantities (six packs, 12 packs,
24 packs or 30 packs) is a good example.
Figure 4-33: Adjective Pricing by Quantity
Follow the steps below to configure Adjective Prices by Quantity.
1. From the Adjective Price Maintenance Screen, create an adjective
price code for an item with multiple level pricing.
2. Use the Adjective Price Maintenance screen to set up the multiple
level pricing for that item. Click the Quantity radio button to select
the Adjective Price by Quantity option.
3. Enter the product quantities, descriptions and prices for the various
levels and being used. Up to five levels can be configured.
4. Save the information.
4-106 Chapter 4: Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance
5. Next, you must link the item to its multiple prices through the
Direct Item Maintenance screen. From this screen, access the UPC
associated with the multiple level pricing. Select the General tab
and change the Enforce Qty field to Enforce. Next, select the
Enhanced tab and enter the adjective price code in the Adjective
Code Field. Save your changes. That item is now linked to that
Adjective Price Code.
Note: When Enforce Qty is set, the cashier is prompted to Enter Qty.
When Enforce Qty is not set, the normal item price is used if no
quantity is entered.
Note: In order to get the product at the listed adjective price, the
customer must purchase the exact quantity required for a particular
level to receive the individual item price for that product (as listed in
Direct Item Maintenance). Otherwise, the cashier must ring the product
to the nearest adjective level to get the deal and sell the remaining
number of that product at the individual price. For example, if you
have a deal for the quantity of 6, 12, 24 and 30 and the customer
purchases 8 of an item, the cashier must enter 6 @, item code and then
press enter. The remaining two products must be rung at the
individual price. If it is not done this way, the customer will not get the
deal.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
The purpose of this chapter is to enable the user to create and maintain
the negative or positive check file, the frequent shopper file, and the
customer charge file. This chapter also discusses how to perform
reason code maintenance, clear customer totals, and maintain accounts
receivable records.
In addition, this chapter discusses the purpose of each of the following
reports and defines each field in the report:
•
Negative Check Report
•
Customer Report
•
Accounts Receivable Report
5-2
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Customer Maintenance Menu
Customer Maintenance is the fourth option on the ScanMaster Main
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu.
Customer Maintenance enables the stores to create a user-defined
customer database. Through this option, a store can set limits, assign
charges and payments, establish store programs, and provide several
Accounts Receivable tracking and reporting programs.
Figure 5-1: Customer Maintenance Menu Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-3
Customer Maintenance Menu Options
There are eight options on the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Menu:
•
Negative Check File Maintenance
•
Negative Check Report
•
Customer File Maintenance
•
Check/Charge Reason Codes
•
Clear Customer Totals
•
Customer Report
•
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix
•
Accounts Receivable Menu
•
Postal Zip Code Export / Import (Not Available)
•
Level Code Maintenance
•
Customer Host Configuration
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Main Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
Negative Check File Maintenance: The Negative Check File creates
and maintains a file on customers who have written bad checks to the
store. This option alerts the cashier about customers with a negative
check history and prompts for office interaction. There can be up to 9
user-defined negative check reason codes. The system default is 0 =
Good Account. This code does not require office interaction.
Negative Check Report: The Negative Check Report creates a report
on all negative check accounts in the Negative Check File.
Customer File Maintenance: Customer File Maintenance enables you
to track customer check cashing, frequent shopper points, and in-store
charges.
5-4
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Check/Charge Reason Codes: Through this screen, you can assign up
to nine reason codes each for negative checks, positive checks, and instore charges.
Clear Customer Totals: This option permits you to clear frequent
shopper and customer totals from the system, based on the selected
field.
Customer Report: This option permits the operator to produce a
report on frequent shopper activity, based on operator selected fields.
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix: This option permits up to 10
frequent shopper discount levels and allows the user to set up and
define the discount percentage given to frequent shoppers.
Accounts Receivable Menu: Accounts Receivable options enable stores
to maintain an in-house credit and reporting system for customer
accounts.
Postal Zip Code Export / Import: This option currently not available.
Level Code Maintenance: Use this screen to create descriptions for the
various frequent shopper levels set up on your ScanMaster system.
Through this field, you can assign names on up to nine (9) different
frequent shopper levels.
Customer Host Configuration: Use this feature to define the fields of
customer data and the days on which replacement should occur.
Fields chosen here will be replaced by Host-maintained data.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-5
Negative Check File Maintenance
Negative Check File Maintenance is the first option on the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-N) to
access the ScanMaster Negative Check Maintenance screen.
The Negative Check File creates and maintains a file on customers who
have written bad checks to the store. This alerts the cashier about
customers with a negative check history and prompts for office
interaction. There can be up to 9 user-defined negative check reason
codes. The system default is 0 = Good Account. This code does not
require office interaction.
Figure 5-2: Negative Check Maintenance Screen
5-6
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Negative Check
Maintenance Screen.
Acct. #: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s checking
account number. It can be up to twenty digits and must be a unique
customer number.
Transit #: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the bank transit/routing
number from the customer’s checking account.
Last Name: Twenty-five (25) character alphanumeric field. Enter the
customer’s last name.
First Name: Twenty-five (25) character alphanumeric field. Enter the
customer’s first name.
Address: Twenty-five (25) character alphanumeric field. Enter the
customer’s address.
City: Fifteen (15) digit alpha field. Enter the customer’s city.
State: Two (2) digit alpha field. Enter the customer’s state.
Zip Code: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s zip code
without hyphens
Phone #: Ten (10) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s phone
number without the hyphens.
Social Sec. #: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s social
security number without hyphens.
Tax Exempt #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s
tax exempt number, if applicable.
Code: One (1) digit numeric field. Negative Check reason code. Click
on the down arrow to access the Negative Check Reason Code list box.
Click on the desired reason code.
Comment: Thirty (30) digit alphanumeric field. This field can be used
for any special comments.
Alternate Account #: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the
customer’s alternate checking account number, if any.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-7
NSF Checks Taken: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of
NSF checks tendered by the customer.
NSF Check Amount: Seven (7) digit numeric field. Enter the dollar
amount of the NSF check. This field may also be used to accumulate
NSF check amounts.
Date Account Opened: ScanMaster automatically records the date the
customer record was created. This is a display field only.
Total Checks Taken: The field holds the quantity of checks tendered
by the customer since the account opened. This is a display field only.
Check Total Amount: This field holds the total dollar amount of
checks tendered by the customer since the account opened. This is a
display field only.
Date of Last Visit: This field holds the date of the last check tendered
by this customer. This is a display field only.
Override Count: This field displays the number of times a check was
used as tender by this customer where a manager override was
necessary. This is a display field only.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Negative Check
Maintenance Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
customer file.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous customer in the file.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes to a
customer file.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a customer
from the file.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Negative Check Maintenance screen.
5-8
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Performing Negative Check File Maintenance
The store’s Negative Check File is created from the ScanMaster
Negative Check Maintenance screen.
1. Upon accessing this screen, type in the customer’s account number
and press ENTER.
If it is a new account number, the system prompts: “Do You Want
to Create a New Customer?” Select “Yes” to create a new
record or “No” to abort changes and return to the ScanMaster
Negative Check Maintenance screen.
If the account number is an existing number, the system takes you
to the first data field.
2. Complete each data field entry, pressing ENTER to advance to the
next data field.
It is from this screen that you assign Reason Codes for a particular
customer. Select the desired reason code from the list box in the
Codes field (for example, 0=Good Account, 1=Bad Checks, or
2=Stolen Checks). In addition, you can enter comments in the
Comment field about a particular customer’s account.
3. Complete the data fields for the customer and click on the SAVE
button to save the customer record.
Note: Depending on how the Register Control File is configured, the
negative check file may also be used as a positive check file. If used as
just a negative check file, when an account number is entered on the
POS workstation that is in the Negative Check File with a status code
of greater than 0, the POS workstation screen displays: “Manager
Needed” and the code number. The manager can override the
warning, which is tracked in the Negative Check File, or require
another means of payment. If used as a positive check file, the POS
workstation prompts for a Manager ID number only if the customer
status requires management attention (reason code 1-9), or if the limits
on checks and check amounts are reached.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-9
Negative Check Report
The Negative Check Report is the second option on the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to
access the ScanMaster Negative Check Report screen.
The Negative Check Report creates a report on all account numbers in
the Negative Check File.
Figure 5-3: Negative Check Report Screen
5-10
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Negative Check Report
Screen.
Select By: Click the radio button for the desired selection criteria.
Start/End: Enter in the Start and End fields the starting and ending
account, transit number, or last name ranges, to be included in the
Negative Check Report selected by Account Number, Transit (Routing)
Number and Last Name, respectively.
Transit/Account: Enter in the Transit Number and Account Number
to be included in the Negative Check Report selected by Specific
Record.
Note: The Start/End range fields are inactive when the All Records
selection is made.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Negative Check Report
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu.
EXECUTE: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to compile the
ScanMaster Negative Check Report for the selected parameters. An
on-line copy of the report is then displayed.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Negative Check Report screen.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard-copy of this
report. This button displays after clicking on EXECUTE and the report
is displayed on-line.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-11
Creating a Negative Check Report
The Negative Check Report option enables the operator to create a
report of the accounts that are in the Negative Check File.
The operator can create the report using an account number range,
transit number range or customer’s last name range. In addition, the
operator can create the report for a specific account number or for all
records in the file. Define the selection criteria by completing the
screen data fields. Upon completing this screen, click on the EXECUTE
button to first view the report on-line. Then click on the PRINT button
to print a hard-copy of the report.
5-12
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Customer File Maintenance
Customer File Maintenance is the third option on the Customer
Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the
ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen.
Customer File Maintenance enables you to track customer check
cashing, frequent shopper information and in-store charges. Customer
information is entered into the ScanMaster customer database from this
screen.
Figure 5-4: Customer Maintenance Screen and History Tab
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-13
Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Screen.
Acct. #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. The customer account number
must be a unique number.
Last Name: Twenty-five (25) digit alpha/numeric field. Enter the
customer’s last name.
First Name: Twenty-five (25) digit alpha/numeric field. Enter the
customer’s first name.
Address: Twenty-five (25) digit alpha/numeric field. Enter the
customer’s address.
City: Fifteen (15) digit alpha field. Enter the customer’s city.
State/Prov: Two (2) digit alpha field. Enter the customer’s state or
province.
Zip Code: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s zip code.
Level: Display only. This field holds the customer’s current frequent
shopper level.
Phone Number: Ten (10) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s
phone number without hyphens.
SSN #: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s social
security number without hyphens.
Tax Exempt #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. Enter the customers tax
exempt #, if applicable.
Checking Acct. #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. Enter the
customer’s checking account number.
Code: One (1) digit numeric field. Click the down arrow to choose the
customer’s reason code for negative/positive checks.
Comment: Thirty (30) digit alpha/numeric field. This field can be used
for any special comments.
5-14
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
History Tab Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Screen’s History Tab.
Date Opened: Display only. The date the customer record was
created.
Date of Last Visit: Display only. The last date the customer purchased
items.
Visits to Date: Display only. The total number of visits by the
customer.
Visits this Period: Display only. The number of visits by the customer
during this period.
Purchases to Date: Display only. The Total Freq. Shopper and Non
Freq. Shopper purchases total.
Purchases this Period: Display only. The Total Freq. Shopper and Non
Freq. Shopper purchases this period.
Manual Overrides: Display only. Total number of manager overrides
on checks with status codes.
# Checks Today/Amount: Display only. Total number of checks today
and the total amount of those checks.
# Checks Week/Amount: Display only. Total number of checks for the
week and the total amount of those checks.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-15
Frequent Shopper Tab Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Screen’s Frequent Shopper Tab.
Figure 5-5: Customer Maintenance Screen’s Frequent Shopper Tab
Dollars to Date: Display only. This field holds the total dollar amount
of frequent shopper item purchases to date.
Dollars the Period: Display only. This field holds the total dollar
amount of frequent shopper item purchases this period.
Points to Date: Display only. This field holds the total frequent
shopper points earned to date.
5-16
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Points this Period: Display only. This field holds the total frequent
shopper points earned this period.
Note: Frequent shopper customers can accumulate points by
purchasing an item. There are two Register Control File settings
associated with this feature.
Register Control File Option
Use Item Price Based Points
Point Format (0=Amt
1=Number)
Setting
Y or N
0 = Dollar Format
(example $120.80
1 = Points Format
(example 12,080)
Follow these procedures.
1. Select the frequent shopper point or dollar format from the Register
Control File question “Point Format (0=Amt 1=Number).”
2. In order to receive points based on the price of an item, the Register
Control File option “Use Item Price Based Points” must be set to Y.
Next, the point level for that item must be selected. This is done
from the Enhanced Tab on the Direct Item Maintenance screen.
From the Frequent Shopper field, select the preferred level (No$$$,
1X $$$, 2X $$$ or 3X $$$) and the frequent shopper receives one
point per penny (multiplied by the frequent shopper level) based
on the price of that item.
Bonus Points to Date: Display only. This field holds the total frequent
shopper bonus points earned to date.
Bonus Points this Period: Display only. This field holds the total
frequent shopper bonus points earned this period.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-17
Note: Frequent shopper points and bonus points can be attached to
item records or to electronic coupons. There are two Register Control
File settings associated with this feature.
Register Control File Option
Use Item/EC Points and Bonus Points
Point Format (0=Amt 1=Number)
Setting
Y or N
0 = Dollar Format
(example $120.80
1 = Points Format
(example 12,080)
Follow these procedures.
1. Select the frequent shopper point or dollar format from the Register
Control File question “Point Format (0=Amt 1=Number).”
2. Upon selecting the point or dollar format, the next step is attaching
frequent shopper points. When the Register Control File question
“Use Item/EC Points and Bonus Points” to set to Yes, frequent
shopper customers receive the points and bonus points associated
with that item or electronic coupon.
3. If stores are attaching points or bonus points to a particular item,
those amounts are set from the Enhanced tab on the Direct Item
Maintenance screen.
4. If stores are attaching points or bonus points to an electronic coupon,
those amounts are set from the Frequent Shopper/General
Information tab on the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen.
Promotion Points: Display only. This field holds the number or special
promotion points earned (less those redeemed).
5-18
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Note: Through the Special Points Accumulation program, stores can
issue special promotional points for a specific period and then define a
specific time that those points can be redeemed. There are several
Register Control File options associated with this feature.
Register Control File Option
Special Promo Description
Setting
Fifteen (15)
alphanumeric
characters
Special Promo Accum Begin Date
Six (6) numeric
characters - MMDDYY
Special Promo Accum End Date
Six (6) numeric
characters - MMDDYY
Special Promo Accum Begin Time
Four (4) numeric
character – military
time
Special Promo Accum End Time
Four (4) numeric
character – military
time
Add Item Based Points to Special Promo
Y or N
Add Item/EC Points to Special Promo
Y or N
Add Item/EC Bonus Points to Special
Promo
Y or N
Redemption Reset Special Promo
Y or N
1. The first step in setting up a Special Promotional program is
creating a name for the promotion. For example, type an
appropriate descriptor such as Turkey Giveaway in the Special
Promo Description field in the Register Control File.
2. The next step is defining the time and date parameters for special
promotional point accumulation. Those are set up in the Register
Control File (the Special Promo Begin/End Time/Date options).
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-19
When selecting those parameters, the user must define how Special
Promotional Points are accumulated. Those points can be accumulated
based on:
•
The price of an item (Add Item Based Points to Special Promo).
Through this option, points are awarded based on the item’s price.
•
The number of points attached to a frequent shopper item or
electronic coupon (Add Item/EC Points to Special Promo).
Through this option, special promotional points are awarded based
on the amounts listed in the Points fields on the Item Maintenance
and Electronic Coupon Maintenance screens.
•
The number of bonus points attached to a frequent shopper item or
electronic coupon (Add Item/EC Bonus Points to Special Promo).
Through this option, special promotional points are awarded based
on the amounts listed in the Bonus Points fields on the Item
Maintenance and Electronic Coupon Maintenance screens.
FS Discount to Date: Display only. This field holds the total dollar
amount of Frequent Shopper discounts used to date.
FS Discount to Period: Display only. This field holds the total dollar
amount of Frequent Shopper discounts used this period.
Electronic Cpns to Date: Display only. This field holds the total dollar
amount of Electronic Coupons used to date.
Electronic Cpns to Period: Display only. This field holds the total
dollar amount of Electronic Coupons used the period.
5-20
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Frequent Shopper Tab Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Screen’s Charge Tab.
Figure 5-6: Customer Maintenance Screen’s Charge Tab
Date Opened: Display only: This field displays the date the
customer’s charge account opened:
Charge Status: One (1) digit numeric field. Click the down arrow to
choose the customer’s charge reason code.
Credit Limit: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum credit
balance allowed for this customer.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-21
Last Payment: Display only. This field displays the amount of the
customer’s last payment.
Current Balance: Display only. This field displays the customer’s
current credit balance.
APR%: Four (4) digit numeric field. This field displays the customer’s
annual percentage interest rate for finance charges.
Finance Charge: Click this box to make the customer eligible for
finance charges. This box is automatically checked when the
annualized percentage rate (APR%) is entered.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance
Screen.
CREATE RANGE: Click on this button to create a desired range of
customer accounts.
X-FER CHARGE: Click on this button to transfer all customer
information to a new customer number and remove the old customer
number from the system.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save current information
for this customer.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous customer file.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
customer file.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete the current
customer. The current charge balance for that customer must be zero
before this customer can be deleted.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen.
5-22
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Adding, Editing, or Deleting a Customer in the Customer File
You can add, edit, or delete a customer in the Customer File from the
ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen.
1. Perform one of the following steps, depending on if you are
creating a new record or editing or deleting an existing record:
•
If you are adding a new customer record, enter a unique
account number. The message appears “Do You Want to
Create a New Cust?” Click on “Yes” and enter the
customer information into the corresponding data fields.
•
If you are editing an existing customer record, type in the
customer’s twelve (12) digit account number or use the NEXT
or PREVIOUS buttons to locate that record. The Customer File
always starts with the first record when the Customer
Maintenance screen is initially accessed.
•
If you are deleting an existing customer record, type in the
customer’s twelve (12) digit account number or use the NEXT
or PREVIOUS buttons to locate that record. The Customer File
always starts with the first record when the Customer
Maintenance screen is initially accessed. Click on the DELETE
button to delete the desired record. The message appears “Are
you sure you want to Delete this customer?”
Click on “Yes” The record is purged from the system if the
customer balances are at zero. Skip steps 2 and 3 if deleting a
record.
2. Complete the fields, pressing ENTER to advance from field to field.
3. Click on the SAVE button to save the customer to the Customer
File.
Warning: Before a customer record can be deleted from the system, all
customer balances must be at zero. You must first clear the customer’s
totals before the record can be removed from the system.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-23
Creating a Customer Range
The CREATE RANGE button is located near the top right corner of the
ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen.
Click the CREATE RANGE button to access the ScanMaster
Create Range screen. Upon accessing this screen, enter the desired
account range by entering 12-digit customer account numbers in the
From Account # and the To Account # fields. Once you have entered
the desired range, click CREATE to generate a customer range.
This feature is used in conjunction with ScanMaster’s Dynamic
Customer Build feature. When the “Enable Dynamic Customer Build”
feature is enabled in the Register Control File, you can create a list of
blank customers in the defined range. Later, through the Customer
Maintenance screen, you can input remaining information about those
newly-created customers. This feature is mainly used for new frequent
shopper customers or other in-store customer promotions.
Figure 5-7: Create Blank Range Screen
5-24
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Transferring Customer Charge Information
ScanMaster enables you to copy customer charge information to a new
account (i.e., if a customer loses his/her customer card) and delete the
old account.
The X-FER CHARGE button is located near the top right corner of the
ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen. When this button is
pressed, the Transfer Customer Totals screen displays. It shows the
customer’s current account number in the From Account # field and
prompts you for a new account number of up to 12 digits. Enter the
new account number in the To Account # field and press the X-FER
TOTALS button.
The following message displays:
“This Action Will Transfer Customer # XXXXXXXXXXXX’s Information
to the New Customer’s Information and DELETE the CURRENT
CUSTOMER! ARE YOU SURE?”
Select Yes, No or Cancel.
Figure 5-8: Transfer Customer Totals Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-25
Adding or Editing Customer Charge Information
You can add or edit charge information through the ScanMaster
Customer File Maintenance screen.
1. Click on the CHARGE Tab to access the Edit Customer Charge
Information screen.
From this screen, you can adjust the customer charge status, change
the credit limit, and set the Annual Percentage Rate (APR).
2. Upon completing changes, click on the SAVE button to save charge
information or the ABORT button to abort any changes made on
this screen and return to the ScanMaster Customer File
Maintenance screen.
Setting Up an In-Store Charge Program
Accounts Receivable options are used in conjunction with ScanMaster’s
in-store charge feature, located on the Customer File Maintenance
screen. Information about the Customer File Maintenance screen is
documented earlier in this chapter.
In order to use ScanMaster’s A/R functions, you must configure the
system for an in-store charge program. This includes:
•
Setting in-store charge options in the Register Control File, Back
Office Control File and Media Configurator.
•
Configuring customer accounts to include charge information.
Setting In-Store Charge Options in ScanMaster Control Files
In order to set up an in-store charge program and use ScanMaster’s
A/R function, you must set the following options in the Register
Control File, Back Office Control File, and Media Configurator. (See
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations for control file definitions.)
The tables below detail the various control file options that can be used
to set up in-store charge. Each table displays the control file options,
the necessary settings, and if the settings are required or optional.
5-26
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Note: Refer to the “Accounts Receivable” section later in this chapter
for A/R functions associated with in-store charges. Also, refer to
Chapter 9, “Performing POS Operations” for information on how to
key-enter an in-store charge, make an in-store charge payment and
inquire on an in-store charge balance.
•
Register Control File: Set the following options in the Register
Control File and Save those options for each register.
Register Control File Options
Setting
Required / Optional
Enable In-Store Charge
Y
Required
Display Customer Charge Detail
Y or N
Optional
Allow Charge Only if Balance 0
Y or N
Optional
Disable Store Charge Verify
Y or N
Optional
Frq Shp Stat Set By Store Chg
Y or N
Optional
Amount Compulse On Charge Menu Y or N
Optional
Min Charge Status for Mgr Auth
0-9
Optional
Disable Cust Name on Receipt
Y or N
Optional
Disable Acct # Print on Receipt
Y or N
Optional
Disable Acct # Print on Sig Slip
Y or N
Optional
Print 2nd Payment Slip For Cust
Y or N
Optional
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
•
•
5-27
Back Office Control File: Set the following options in the Back
Office Control File. Select Save once the desired options are
chosen.
Back Office Control File Options
Setting
Required / Optional
Turn On Accounts Receivable
Y or N
Required
Company Name
Optional
Company Address
Optional
Company City, State, Zip
Optional
Company Telephone Number
Optional
Print Charge Log Information
Y or N
Optional
No Zero/Neg Balances AR Stmnt
Y or N
Optional
No Printer Graphics AR Stmnt
Y or N
Optional
Finance Charges Compounded
Y or N
Optional
Media Configurator: Select In-store Charge from the list of tender
media and set the following options. Select Save once the desired
options are chosen.
Media Configurator Options
Setting
Required / Optional
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Y
Required
Amount Compules (Y/N)
Y or N
Optional
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Y or N
Optional
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Y or N
Optional
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Y or N
Optional
5-28
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Building an In-store Charge Account
Providing customers with in-store charge capabilities is accomplished
from the Customer File Maintenance screen. From this screen, you can
set customer demographics, as well as shopper information.
Follow the steps below to provide customers with in-store charge
capabilities.
1. From the Customer File Maintenance screen, enter a customer
account number in the account number field to access a particular
customer’s account.
Note: If that account number does not exist, the system prompts, “Do
You Want To Create a New Customer?” Select “Yes” to create a
new account.
2. Then click on the Charge Tab to access the Edit Customer Charge
Information screen.
3. From this screen, you can set the customer charge status, enable a
credit limit, view the current balance, and set the Annual
Percentage Rate (APR).
4. If your store applies finance charges to in-store charge accounts
enter a percentage rate in the APR field.
Example: The decimal point is placed two digits from the right. Enter
1450 in the data field for a 14.50 APR.
5. Click on SAVE to save charge information or ABORT to abort any
changes made.
6. Click on SAVE again to save information in the Customer File
Maintenance screen.
7. Repeat these steps to create additional in-store charge accounts.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-29
Check/Charge Reason Codes
Reason Code Maintenance is the fourth option on the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to
access the ScanMaster Customer Reason Maintenance screen.
Through this screen, you can assign up to nine reason codes each for
negative checks, positive checks, and in-store charges.
Figure 5-9: Reason Code Maintenance Screen
5-30
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer Reason
Maintenance Screen.
Negative Check: Click this radio button to display or edit reason codes
used for Negative Checks.
Positive Check: Click this radio button to display or edit reason codes
used for Positive Checks.
Charge: Click this radio button to display or edit reason codes used for
store charges.
Reason Lines: Twenty (20) character alpha/numeric field where the
user can assign reasons for negative checks, positive checks, or in-store
charges. These are used at the POS workstation and Back Office to
define customer status levels.
Note: The reason code 0 = Good Account is a system default. It is
available for Negative and Positive Check, or Charge.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Customer Reason
Maintenance Screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save reason code
changes.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu without saving any reason code changes.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy
of Check/Charge reason codes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about ScanMaster Customer Reason Maintenance.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-31
Adding or Editing Customer Reason Codes
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Customer Reason Maintenance
Screen, select the reason type (Negative Check, Positive Check, or
Store Charge) by clicking on the radio button in front of that type.
You can define up to nine reason codes for each reason type.
If you are adding a new reason code, go to the first available line
and type in the reason description.
If you are editing an existing reason, click on the line you want to
edit and type in the desired change.
Note: If the Accounts Receivable module is installed on your system,
the following store charge reason codes are reserved: 1 = 30-60 Days, 2
= 60-90 days, 3 = 90+ days, 4 = Over Limit. These codes cannot be
changed.
2. Click on the SAVE button to save added or edited reason codes or
click on the EXIT button to exit to the ScanMaster Customer
Maintenance Menu screen without saving any changes.
5-32
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Clear Customer Totals
Clear Customer Totals is the fifth option on the ScanMaster Customer
Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-L) to access the
ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals screen.
Totals can be cleared immediately or during a file export. The Clear
Customer Totals option clears the following customer totals from the
system:
•
Frequent Shopper $$/Points to Date
•
Frequent Shopper $$/Points this Period
•
Number of Visits to Date
•
Number of Visits this Period
•
Purchases to Date
•
Purchase this Period
•
Manager Overrides
•
Number of Checks Per Day
•
Number of Checks Per Week
•
Check Dollar Amount Per Day
•
Check Dollar Amount Per Week
•
Frequent Shopper Points to Date
•
Frequent Shopper Points this Period
•
Frequent Shopper Bonus Points to Date
•
Frequent Shopper Bonus Point this Period
•
Special Promotion Points
•
Frequent Shopper Discount To Date
•
Frequent Shopper Discount To Period
•
Electronic Discounts to Date
•
Electronic Discounts to Period
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-33
Figure 5-10: Clear Customer Totals Screen - Immediate Tab
Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals
Screen’s Immediate, End of Day and Export Tabs.
Frequent Shopper $$ to Date: Frequent Shopper item purchase
amounts spent to date.
Frequent Shopper $$ this Period: Frequent Shopper item purchase
amounts spent this period.
Number of Visits to Date: Total number of visits by the customer.
Number of Visits this Period: Number of visits by the customer
during this period.
Purchases to Date: Total Frequent Shopper and Non Frequent Shopper
purchases total.
5-34
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Purchases this Period: Total Frequent Shopper and Non Frequent
Shopper purchases this period.
Manual Overrides: Total number of manager overrides on checks with
status codes.
Number of Checks Per Day: Total number of checks today.
Number of Checks Per Week: Total number of checks for the week.
Check Dollar Amount Per Day: The total dollar amount of checks per
day.
Check Dollar Amount Per Week: The total dollar amount of checks
per week.
Frequent Shopper Points to Date: The total dollar amount of Frequent
Shopper points earned to date.
Frequent Shopper Points this Period: The total dollar amount of
Frequent Shopper point earned this period.
Frequent Shopper Bonus Points to Date: The total dollar amount of
Frequent Shopper Bonus Points earned to date.
Frequent Shopper Bonus Points this Period: The total dollar amount
of Frequent Shopper Bonus Points earned this period.
Special Promotion Points: The number or special promotion points
earned (less those redeemed).
Frequent Shopper Discount To Date: The total dollar amount of
Frequent Shopper discounts used to date.
Frequent Shopper Discount To Period: The total dollar amount of
Frequent Shopper discounts used this period.
Electronic Discounts To Date: The total dollar amount of Electronic
Coupons used to date.
Electronic Discounts To Period: The total dollar amount of Electronic
Coupons used the period.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-35
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu Screen.
SELECT ALL: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to select all fields on
the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals program.
CLEAR ALL: Click this button (or press Alt-E) to deselect all fields on
the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals screen.
Figure 5-11: Clear Customer Totals Screen - End of Day Tab
5-36
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Immediate Tab Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals
Screen’s Immediate Tab.
CLEAR TOTALS: Displays on the Immediate Tab. Click on this
button (or press Alt-C) to clear customer totals for the fields checked on
the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals Screen.
End of Day Tab Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals
Screen’s End of Day Tab.
CLEAR THESE SETTINGS AFTER END OF DAY ON: Click on the
pull down arrow to choose the day of the week for which its end of day
process will trigger clearing customer totals.
SAVE SETTINGS: Click this button (or press Alt-V) to permanently
save the screen settings for a specific day. The saved settings will
reappear when the day is chosen in the “Clear These Settings After End
Of Day On:” field.
Note: The screen will display “End of Day Settings Exist. Active In
End of Day.” if settings for a day have been previously saved and are
scheduled to execute.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-37
Figure 5-12: Clear Customer Totals Screen - Export Tab
Export Tab Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals
Screen’s Immediate Tab.
PATH AND FILE NAME OF EXPORT FILE: Click into this field and
enter the location and file name of the cleared customer totals file.
EXPORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-T) to export cleared
customer totals to a specific directory and file for later use.
5-38
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Clearing Customer Totals Immediately
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals Screen, click
on the Immediate Tab.
2. Check the customer totals you want to clear by clicking inside the
box. An “X” appears in the check box when that item is selected.
(Click on the SELECT ALL button to select all totals.)
3. Click the Clear Totals Button.
Clearing Customer Totals During End of Day
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals Screen, click
on the End of Day Tab.
2. Check the customer totals you want to clear by clicking inside the
box. An “X” appears in the check box when that item is selected.
(Click on the SELECT ALL button to select all totals.)
3. Select the desired day from the pull-down list.
4. Check the “Active In End of Day” box.
5. Save the settings (optional) by clicking the “Save Settings” button.
6. Click “Exit” to return to the Customer Maintenance Menu.
The totals for that particular day will be cleared following End of Day
on that day every week.
When clearing customer totals at End of Day, ScanMaster includes the
Clear Customer Totals program (SMWCSCLR.EXE) at the beginning of
the ScanMaster End of Day script (F:\Grocery\SMWEOD.SCR). The
totals are then deleted at the end of the selected day.
Note: If using a keyboard, use the up and down arrow keys to
navigate through the clear customer totals screen. Press the spacebar
to select or deselect the clear customer totals options you desire.
Customer Frequent Shopper totals or points are accumulated by
selecting the appropriate options in the Register Control File. See
Maintaining Customer Data (above) for more information.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-39
Clearing Customer Totals During Export
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Clear Customer Totals Screen, click
on the Export Tab.
2. Check the customer totals you want to clear by clicking inside the
box. An “X” appears in the check box when that item is selected.
(Click on the SELECT ALL button to select all totals.)
3. Enter the path and name of the export file.
4. Click the “Export” button.
Note: The totals can be used to analyze customer buying patterns,
distribute coupons or set up mailing lists. Customer totals that are not
deleted or exported are located at: F:\Grocery\Files\GRCCUST.BTR.
5-40
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Customer Report
The Customer Report option is the sixth option on the Customer
Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-T) to access the
ScanMaster Frequent Shopper Reports screen. The Customer Report
option produces detailed reports on all frequent shopper activity,
based on data in the Customer File.
Figure 5-13: Customer / Frequent Shopper Report Screen and Points Tab
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-41
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent
Shopper Report Screen.
From Account #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. The beginning
customer account number range for the frequent shopper report.
To Account #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. The ending customer
account number range for the frequent shopper report.
Last Name: Enter the range of the customer’s last name. Use the first
letter of customer’s last name only.
First Name: Enter the range of the customer’s first name. Use the first
letter of customer’s first name only.
Address: This is a display only field. The system searches all
addresses.
City: Fifteen (15) digit alpha field. Enter the city search criteria. Type
in all to search all cities.
State /Prov.: Two (2) digit alpha field. Enter the state / province search
criteria. Type in all to search all states / provinces.
Zip Code: Nine (9) digit numeric field. Enter the customer’s zip code.
Type in the range of zip codes you want to search.
Phone Number: Ten (10) digit numeric field. Type in the range of
customer phone numbers you want to search (without hyphens).
Click on the desired radio buttons to report by:
Account: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer Report by the
Account Number.
Purchase to Date: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer
Report by Purchases to Date.
Last Name: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer Report by
Last Name.
Purchases Period: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer
Report by Purchases This Period.
5-42
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Last Visit: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer Report by
Last Visit.
Freq Shpr To Date: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer
Report by Frequent Shopper $$/Points to Date.
Phone #: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer Report by
Phone Number.
Freq Shpr Period: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer
Report by Frequent Shopper $$/Points This Period.
Zip/Postal Code: Click on this radio button to sort the Customer
Report by Zip Code.
Report on First #: Click on this radio button and enter the quantity of
customers (three-digit, up to 999) to search customers fitting the search
criteria. For example, if the Report on First # button is selected and the
number 128 entered, the system searches for the first 128 customers
fitting the search criteria.
Report Last #: Click on this radio button and enter the quantity of
customers (three-digit, up to 999) to search fitting the search criteria.
For example, if the Report on Last # button is selected and the number
128 entered, the system searches for the last 128 customers fitting the
search criteria.
Report on All: A report is created for all items that meet the search
criteria.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-43
Points Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent
Shopper Report Screen’s Points Tab.
Several search options can be utilized on the following fields. They
include all (search on all ranges), < (less than a certain range), = (search
only that range), or > (greater than a certain range).
FS Dollars to Date: The amount of frequent shopper dollars the
customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
dollars to date field was cleared.
FS Dollars this Period: The amount of frequent shopper dollars the
customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
dollars this period field was cleared.
FS Points to Date: The amount of frequent shopper points the
customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
points to date field was cleared.
FS Points this Period: The amount of frequent shopper points the
customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
points this period field was cleared.
FS Bonus to Date: The amount of frequent shopper bonus points the
customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
bonus points to date field was cleared.
FS Bonus this Period: The amount of frequent shopper bonus points
the customer has accumulated since the last time the frequent shopper
bonus points this period field was cleared.
Special Promotions: The amount of frequent shopper special
promotion points the customer has accumulated (less those redeemed)
since the last time the frequent shopper promotion points field was
cleared.
Frequent Shopper Level: Enter the frequent shopper level on which
you want to search.
5-44
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Historical Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent
Shopper Report Screen’s Historical Tab.
Several search options can be utilized on the following fields. They
include all (search on all ranges), < (less than a certain range), = (search
only that range), or > (greater than a certain range).
Figure 5-14: Customer / Frequent Shopper Report Screen’ Historical Tab
Date Opened: The date the customer record was created.
Date of Last Visit: The last date the customer purchased items.
Visits to Date: Total number of visits by the customer.
Visits this Period: Number of visits by the customer during this
period.
Purchases to Date: Total Frequent Shopper and Non Frequent Shopper
purchases total.
Purchases Period: Total Frequent Shopper and Non Frequent Shopper
purchases this period.
Manager Overrides: Total number of manager overrides on checks
with status codes.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-45
Discounts Tab Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent
Shopper Report Screen’s Discounts Tab.
Several search options can be utilized on the following fields. They
include all (search on all ranges), < (less than a certain range), = (search
only that range), or > (greater than a certain range).
Figure 5-15: Customer / Frequent Shopper Report Screen’ Discounts Tab
FS Discount to Date: The amount of frequent shopper discount dollars
the customer has redeemed since the last time the frequent shopper
discount to date field was cleared.
FS Discounts this Period: The amount of frequent shopper discount
dollars the customer has redeemed since the last time the frequent
shopper discount to period field was cleared.
FS EC Disc to Date: The amount of electronic coupon dollars the
customer has redeemed since the last time the electronic discounts to
date field was cleared.
5-46
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
FS EC Disc this Period: The amount of electronic coupon dollars the
customer has redeemed since the last time the electronic discounts to
period field was cleared.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent
Shopper Report Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance screen without saving any report information.
REPORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to initiate the Customer
/ Frequent Shopper Report. An on-line report is created that can later
be printed.
RESET: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to clear all search
parameter fields.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent Shopper Report screen.
Creating a Customer / Frequent Shopper Report
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Customer / Frequent Shopper
Report screen, enter the desired data into each data field, pressing
ENTER to move from field to field.
2. When you have selected the desired search criteria, click on the
REPORT button to process the report and view it on-line.
3. Click on the PRINT button to print a hard copy of this report.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-47
Figure 5-16: Sample Customer/Frequent Shopper Report
Customer/Frequent Shopper Report Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer /
Frequent Shopper Report.
Customer Account Number: The customer’s frequent shopper account
number.
Customer Name: The customer’s name.
Address: The customer’s address.
City / State / Zip: The customer’s city, state and zip code.
Phone #: The customer’s phone number.
Account Opened: The date the customer’s account was opened.
Last Visit: The date of the customer’s last visit.
Checking Acct #: The customer’s checking account number.
Account Status: The customer’s account status with the store as set
from the Customer Maintenance screen.
Tax Exempt #: The customer’s tax exempt number.
5-48
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Freq Shopper Level: The customer’s frequent shopper level.
Social Security #: The customer’s social security number.
Manager Overrides: The number of manager overrides performed for
this specific customer.
Comments: Comments entered from the Customer Maintenance screen
about that specific customer display here.
Purchases (To Date / This Period): This is the total amount of Freq.
Shopper and Non Freq. Shopper purchases accumulated by the
customer since the last time the purchases to date (or this period) field
was cleared..
Freq Shop Pts (To Date / This Period): This is the amount of frequent
shopper points accumulated by the customer since the last time the
points to date (or this period) field was cleared.
# Visits (To Date / This Period): This is the total number of visits by
the customer since the last time the # visits to date (or this period) field
was cleared.
Freq Shop Dollars (To Date / This Period): This is the amount of
frequent shopper dollars accumulated by the customer since the last
time the dollars to date (or this period) field was cleared.
Freq Shop Bonus (To Date / This Period): This is the amount of
frequent shopper bonus points accumulated by the customer since the
last time the bonus to date (or this period) field was cleared.
Elec Cpn Disc (To Date / This Period): The amount of electronic
coupon dollars the customer has redeemed since the last time the
electronic discounts to date field (or this period) was cleared.
# Checks Today/Amount: Total number of checks today and the total
amount of those checks.
# Checks Week/Amount: Total number of checks for the week and the
total amount of those checks.
Special Promo Points: The number of frequent shopper special
promotion points the customer has accumulated (less those redeemed)
since the last time the frequent shopper promotion points field was
cleared.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-49
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix
The Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix is the seventh option on the
ScanMaster Customer Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or
press Alt-M) to access the ScanMaster Frequent Shopper Discount
Table.
The Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix permits the user to set up and
define the discount percentage given to frequent shoppers. This matrix
can be set up using frequent shopper dollars or points depending on
the frequent shopper program used by a particular store.
Figure 5-17: Frequent Shopper Discount Table
5-50
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Frequent Shopper
Discount Table.
Up To: Enter the frequent shopper dollars or points amount limit a
customer must accumulate to receive the percentage discount. In order
for customers at the highest frequent shopper level to receive the
maximum percentage discount, the Up To field must contain all 9s.
The system automatically allows for a two-digit decimal place.
When using points, the level associated with the “Up To” field is
determined by the sum of both points and bonus points during the
current accumulation period.
Discount: This is the percentage that is discounted for the customer if
they have reached the Up To limit field for the order.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Frequent Shopper
Discount Table.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save frequent shopper
discount matrix information.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Frequent Shopper Discount Table.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-51
Setting Up Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix
Follow the steps below to set up a frequent shopper discount matrix on
your ScanMaster system.
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Frequent Shopper Discount Table,
enter the desired dollars/points amounts in the Up To data field.
Note: The highest Up To field in the matrix should be set at all 9s so
the customer can receive the maximum frequent shopper discount
percentage.
2. Press ENTER to advance to the Discount field.
3. Enter the desired discount percentage. Up to 10 frequent shopper
discount levels can be defined.
4. If you want to change or delete a specific discount range, click on
the specific data field and press the DELETE key on the keyboard
and input the correct information. When deleting Up To field
amounts, make sure the corresponding percentage is deleted as
well.
5. Click on SAVE to save changed or added information on the
ScanMaster Frequent Shopper Discount Table or EXIT to abort any
changes entered by mistake.
Note: When using frequent shopper dollars, ScanMaster assumes a
two-digit decimal point. Therefore, 1000 equals $10 in the Up To field
and 10 percent in the Discount field.
The Up To field should increment in order, for example:
Frequent Shopper Level
Up To
Discount
Level 1
2500
0.01 %
Level 2
5000
0.02 %
Level 3
7500
0.03 %
Level 10
99999
0.10 %
5-52
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Accounts Receivable Menu
The Accounts Receivable Menu is the eighth option on the ScanMaster
Customer Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-A) to
access the ScanMaster Accounts Receivable Menu.
Accounts Receivable options enable stores to maintain an in-house
credit and reporting system for customer accounts. This option
permits the posting or adjustment of customer payments and the
application of finance charges to customer accounts. It also enables
A/R Month-End Close statement printing, as well as aging and activity
reporting.
Figure 5-18: A/R Menu A/R Menu Options
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-53
The ScanMaster A/R Menu has six options:
•
Post A/R Payments
•
Post A/R Finance Charges
•
A/R Statement Printing
•
A/R Month-End Close
•
A/R Aging Report
•
A/R Activity Report
Post A/R Payments: This option posts customer payments and permits
miscellaneous adjustments to be made to a customer account through
the back office PC.
Post A/R Finance Charges: This option enables the store to apply a
predetermined Annual Percentage Rate (APR) to a customer account
with a balance over 30 days old.
A/R Month-End Close: This option applies any payments made to a
customer account during that billing period and balances that account.
Unpaid balances are carried forward, while overpayments are credited
to that account.
A/R Statement Printing: This option provides a detailed, monthly
printout (in line item detail) of a customer’s account, as well as any
balance information brought forward from the previous month.
A/R Aging Report: The A/R Aging Report details the age of
outstanding customer balances and lists them in date order.
A/R Activity Report: This option enables the tracking of A/R activity
for any given period.
5-54
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Performing A/R Functions
Several A/R functions can be performed at any time during the month.
They include posting A/R payments and finance charges and running
the activity or aging reports.
However, Statement Printing must be performed prior to running the
Month-End Close option because line item detail is purged when
Month-End Close is run.
Statement Printing provides a detailed monthly printout of a
customer’s account, along with balance information from the previous
month.
Month-End Close applies payments to a customer account and
balances the account.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-55
Post A/R Payments
This is the first option on the ScanMaster A/R Menu. Click on that
button (or press Alt-P) to access the ScanMaster A/R Posting screen.
The Post A/R Payments option posts customer payments and permits
miscellaneous adjustments to be made to a customer account through
the back office PC.
Figure 5-19: A/R Posting Screen
5-56
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster A/R Posting Screen.
Account Number: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This is the
customer’s in-store account number.
Balance Due: Display-only field. This field displays the customer’s
balance due amount.
Amount: Enter the amount of the transaction.
Transaction (Payment or Adjustment): Click the radio for the type of
transaction posting against a customer. Payment is an amount the
customer is applying to the bill. Adjustment is the adjustment amount
for the bill.
Media (Cash or Check): Click the radio button for the method of
payment.
Balance Periods: Display Only. This field details the age of the balance
due (for example, 0-30 days, 30-60 days, 60-90 days, 90 days or more).
Credit Limit: Display Only. This field lists the maximum amount a
customer can charge.
Status: Display Only. This field displays the status of the customer
account based on the customer’s aged balances and credit limit.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster A/R Posting Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to return to the A/R Menu
screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to record posted amounts.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the A/R Posting screen.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-57
Posting A/R Payments
1. To post an A/R Payment, enter the customer account number in
the Account Number field on the ScanMaster A/R Posting screen.
2. Upon accessing the desired account, enter the payment amount and
choose the transaction and media type (if payment).
Note: Adjustments entered are assumed to add to the credit balance
unless a negative number is entered.
3. When finished with customer data entry, click on the Save button
to apply the data. The system responds with “Save Payment?” or
“Save Adjustment”. Click on Yes to save or No to return to the
ScanMaster A/R Posting screen.
5-58
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Post A/R Finance Charges
Post A/R Finance Charges is the second option on the ScanMaster A/R
Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the
ScanMaster A/R Finance Charges screen.
Post A/R Finance Charges enables the store to apply a predetermined
Annual Percentage Rate (APR) to a customer account with a balance
over 30 days old.
Figure 5-20: A/R Finance Charges Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-59
Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster A/R Finance Charges
Screen.
Last finance charge application date was: This field is a display only
field that lists the date and time of the last finance charge application.
Last end of Month date was: This field is a display only field that lists
the last day for which the A/R Month-End Close routine was
completed.
Enter Cut-off date for finance charges: (MMDDYY format). Enter the
cut-off date for applying finance charges. The system applies finance
charges on account balances as of this date.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster A/R Finance Charges
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
A/R Menu Screen.
OK: Click on this button (or press Alt-O) to apply finance charges.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster A/R Finance Charges Screen.
Posting A/R Finance Charges
1. To post A/R Finance Charges, enter the finance charge cut-off date
in the Enter the Cut-off date for Finance Charges field.
Note: The date entered into this field is the date the system applies
finance charges to customer accounts. Both marking customer
accounts for finance charges and selecting their desired APR are
performed on the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance screen. Finance
charges are not applied to accounts not marked at this screen.
2. Click on the OK button. The system responds with “Finance
Charges Applied”. Click the OK button to return to the A/R
Finance Charge screen.
5-60
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
A/R Month-End Close
A/R Month-End Close is the third option on the ScanMaster A/R
Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to access the
ScanMaster A/R Month-End Close screen.
The A/R Month-End Close option consolidates customer activity
during the monthly billing period and balances that account. Unpaid
balances are carried forward, while overpayments are credited to that
account.
Note: Line item detail is consolidated into one balance brought
forward record during month-end processing. Therefore, A/R
Statement Printing must be performed prior to month-end. Otherwise,
line item detail is lost.
Figure 5-21: A/R Month-End Close Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-61
Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster A/R Month-End Close
Screen.
Last end of Month date was: This is a display only field that lists the
last day for which the A/R Month-End Close routine was completed.
Enter date for month end consolidation: (MMDDYY format). Enter
the date for applying month-end consolidation.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster A/R Finance Charges
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
A/R Menu Screen.
OK: Click on this button (or press Alt-O) to consolidate monthly
activity.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster A/R Month-End Screen.
Closing Month-End
1. To consolidate monthly A/R activity, enter the month end date in
the Enter date for month end consolidation field.
Note: Make sure that finance charges have been applied for this
month before proceeding.
2. Click on the OK button. The systems responds with “Note: Once a
month is complete finance charges will not be able to be applied.
Are you sure you wish to continue?” Click the Yes button to
continue consolidation or click No to return to the A/R Finance
Charge screen.
5-62
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
A/R Statement Printing
A/R Statement Printing is the fourth option off the ScanMaster A/R
Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the
ScanMaster A/R Statement Printing Screen.
The A/R Statement Printing option provides a detailed, monthly
printout (in line item detail of the transaction total only) of a
customer’s account, as well as any balance information brought
forward from the previous month.
Figure 5-22: A/R Statement Printing Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-63
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster A/R Statement
Printing Screen.
Account Number: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. You can select the
range of account numbers you want to print.
Statement Date: Type in the month, date, and year for the desired
printing date. Dashes are automatically inserted. For single digit days
or months, add a zero before the number and type in the complete
year. Example: May 5, 1999 = 05-05-99.
Sort Order: Account Number or Zip Code. Click on the desired radio
button for the ascending print order of the statements.
Statement Message: You can create a customized 60-character
alpha/numeric message to appear on the customer’s statement.
Different messages can be created for 0-30 days, 31-60 days, 61-90 days,
or 91 days or more.
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster A/R Statement
Printing Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the A/R Menu
screen.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to send the statement to
the printer.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster A/R Statement Printing screen.
Printing A/R Statements
1. To print an A/R Statement, simply enter the range of the account
numbers to be printed in the Account Number range fields and
enter the statement date in the Statement Date field.
2. Select the desired sort order (“Account Number” or “Zip Code”).
Optional User-defined messages can be customized for the various
statement dates. An example is “Thank you for shopping with us!”
5-64
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
3. Upon completing the desired data fields, click on the PRINT button
to print the A/R Statement for the range of customer accounts
listed.
Note: Make sure paper is properly aligned in the printer before
clicking PRINT to ensure the statement is printed properly.
Ajax Supermarket
P O Box 1450
Pittsburgh PA 15222-1450
H
J
_
I
Kramden Bus Lines
1529 East 153rd Street
Carnegie PA 15314
K
UQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQX
R
'DWH
R
`FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFc
R R
aQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQd
R $FFRXQW 1R R
`FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFc
R R
[QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ^
$____________________
$PRXQW 5HPLWWHG
Please Detach and Return this Portion with your Payment
_
UQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQX
R
'DWH
R&RGHR 5HIHUHQFH R
&KDUJHV DQG &UHGLWV
R
%DODQFH R
[QQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQ^
03/31/99
04/01/99
04/03/99
04/03/99
04/04/99
04/14/99
04/14/99
BF
PU
PU
PU
PU
PY
PU
BO950331
03030834
04050980
04051039
04051443
02040038
04055848
$161.65
$27.99
$5.48
$3.32
$16.13
-$214.57
$21.25
$161.65
$189.64
$195.12
$198.44
$214.57
$0.00
$21.25
UQQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQgQQQQQQQQQQQQQQX
R 'D\V R 'D\V R 'D\V R
'D\V R
$PRXQW 'XHR
aQQQQQQQQQQQQQmQQQQQQQQQQQQQmQQQQQQQQQQQQQmQQQQQQQQQQQQQmQQQQQQQQQQQQQQd
R
R
R
R
R
R
aQQQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQjQQQQQQQQQQQQQQd
R&RGHV383XUFKDVH 3<3D\PHQW 5)5HIXQG )&)LQ&KUJ $'$GMXVW %)%DO)ZG R
[QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ^
Finance Charge Annual Percentage Rate: 18.00%
Thank you for shopping with us!
Page 1 of 1
Figure 5-23: Sample A/R Statement
Note: This size of this statement has been reduced for reproduction
purposes. Actual statements are printed on 8 1/2 X 11 sheets of paper.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
A/R Aging Report
The A/R Aging Report is the fifth option on the ScanMaster A/R
Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-G) to access the
ScanMaster A/R Aging Report.
The A/R Aging Report details a list of outstanding transactions and
customer balances. These are listed in date order.
Figure 5-24: A/R Aging Report Screen
5-65
5-66
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions and button options for the ScanMaster
A/R Aging Report Screen.
Account Number: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. You can select the
range of account numbers you choose to print.
Sort Order: Account Number or Last Name. Click the radio button for
the desired sort order of the report.
Aging Date: Enter the aging “as of” date for the report.
Zero Balances: “Yes” or “No” option. Select “Yes” to include all A/R
customers on the aging report and “No” to include only those
customers with balances.
Summary Report Only: Click on this check box to select a summary
A/R Aging Report instead of a detailed report. The summary report
lists only totals, while the regular report lists detailed breakdowns.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster A/R Aging Report
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the A/R Menu
screen.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to view the statement online or send it to a printer.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster A/R Aging Report screen.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-67
Creating A/R Aging Reports
1. To create an A/R Aging Report, enter the range of the account
numbers for the aging report in the Account Number range fields.
2. Select the desired sort order (“Account Number” or “Last Name”).
3. Enter an aging date in the Aging Date field (MMDDYY format) and
select a “Yes” or “No” option in the Zero Balances field. Select
“Yes” to include all A/R customer statements in the aging report or
“No” to include only those customers with balances.
4. Click on PRINT to generate the report and display it to the screen.
5. Click on PRINT to send the report to the printer or EXIT to return
to the A/R Aging Report screen.
Figure 5-25: Sample A/R Aging Report
5-68
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
A/R Activity Report
The A/R Activity Report is the sixth option on the A/R Menu screen.
Click on that button (or press Alt-I) to access the ScanMaster A/R
Activity Report.
The A/R Activity Report enables the tracking of A/R activity for any
given period. It shows information about each store charge by account
number. The activity information includes account number, customer
name, transaction number, date, type (purchase, payment) and
amount.
Figure 5-26: A/R Activity Report Screen
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-69
Field Definitions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster A/R Activity Report
Screen.
Account Number: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. You can select the
range of account numbers you want to sort for the activity report.
Date Range: Type in the month, day, and year for the desired starting
and ending dates for the activity report. Dashes are automatically
inserted. For single digit days or months, add a zero before the
number and type in the complete year. Example: June 5, 1999 = 06-0599.
Summary: Click on this radio button to print activity totals only.
Payment Flash: Click on this radio button for a report of all payments
entered into the system.
Regular: Click on this radio button for a detailed activity report.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster A/R Activity Report
Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the A/R Menu
screen.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to view the statement online or send it to a printer.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster A/R Activity Report.
5-70
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Creating A/R Activity Reports
1. To create an A/R Activity Report, enter the range of the account
numbers for the activity report in the Account Number range
fields.
2. Enter a start and end date (MMDDYYYY format) in the Date Range
field.
3. Select the desired report type by clicking the radio button:
Summary, Payment Flash or Regular.
4. Click on PRINT to generate the report and display it to the screen.
5. Click on PRINT to send the report to the printer or EXIT to return
to the A/R Aging Report screen.
Figure 5-27: Sample A/R Activity Report
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-71
Level Code Maintenance
Level Code Maintenance is the tenth option on the Customer
Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the
ScanMaster Level Code Maintenance screen.
Use this screen to create descriptions for the various frequent shopper
levels set up on your ScanMaster system. Through this screen, names
can be attached to each of the nine levels.
Figure 5-28: Level Code Maintenance Screen
5-72
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Level Code Maintenance Screen.
Level (1-8): Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Click on the
desired data field across from the Level # and enter a description.
Button Options
Below are button options for the Level Code Maintenance Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the Level Code
Maintenance screen without saving any changes.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to the
Level Code Maintenance screen.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a list of the
Level Codes on this screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Level Code Maintenance screen.
Using the Level Code Maintenance Screen
Follow the steps below to assign names to the different Frequent
Shopper Levels on your ScanMaster system. Names can be attached to
each of the nine levels.
1. Click in the data field portion of the level to which you want to
assign a name.
2. Type in the desired name you want to attach to that Frequent
Shopper Level. The name can be up to 15 characters in length.
3. Use the mouse, Tab or Enter keys to navigate the data fields.
4. Click the Save button to save the changes.
5. To print a hard copy list of the various Frequent Shopper Level
names, click the Print List button.
6. Press Exit to return to the Customer Menu.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-73
Host Customer File Configurator
Customer Host Configuration is the eleventh option on the Customer
Maintenance Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-H) to access the
ScanMaster Customer Host Configuration screen.
Customer Hosting enables stores to replace existing customer file
information (on a field-by-field basis) with customer file information
imported from the host.
This utility is known as the Host Customer File Configurator. Its file
name is H2CUSCFG.EXE. When a customer file (SSXCUSP) is
imported from the host, the host customer configurator lets the system
know whether or not to replace or retain existing customer file
information. It is written to the following file:
F:\Grocery\SMWH2CUS.CFG.
The configuration utility has the exact same fields as the customer file,
but stores can pick and choose the fields they want to overwrite with
the new, imported host information. In addition, stores can select the
days of the week on which they want to overwrite customer file fields.
Note: Customer file hosting must be performed consistently (using
either the regular hosting method or the Host Customer File
Configurator) in order to maintain accurate customer information. If
stores use the Host Customer File Configurator to perform customer
file hosting, that method must be used each time a customer file is
imported. Stores cannot use the configurator on selected days and
perform regular customer file hosting on other days. One method or
the other must be used.
5-74
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Figure 5-29: Host Customer File Configurator Screen
Field Descriptions
See the field descriptions of the Customer File Maintenance screen in
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Host Customer File
Configurator screen.
SELECT ALL: Click on this button to select all Customer File fields on
the Host Customer File Configurator screen. An “X” in the checkbox
indicates the field is selected. When host customer file information is
imported, local customer file fields are replaced with the hosted
information.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-75
SELECT NONE: Click on this button to de-select any selections made
to the Host Customer File Configurator screen. Selecting this option
clears the screen of any selections.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the Host Customer
File Configurator screen.
SAVE SETTINGS: Click on this button to save the configuration
settings.
CLEAR: Click on this button to clear settings for the entire Host
Customer File Configuration screen (including days on which to
import host information).
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Host Customer File Configurator screen.
5-76
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Launching the Host Customer File Configurator
There are several ways to launch the Host Customer File Configurator
screen.
•
From the ScanMaster Customer Maintenance Menu
•
From the Microsoft Windows NT Task Bar
•
From a batch file on the User Defined Menu
Launching the Configurator from the Windows NT Task Bar
Follow the steps below to launch the Host Customer File Configurator
from the Microsoft Windows NT Task Bar:
1. Click Start
Æ Run from the Microsoft Windows NT Task Bar.
The Run dialog box displays.
2. At the Run prompt, type C:\Grocery\H2CUSCFG.EXE and click OK:
Note: To delete the hosted file after processing, the command line,
/D, must be added to end of the H2CUSCFG.EXE line.
The Host Customer File Configurator screen displays.
3. The user can now configure ScanMaster to receive hosted customer
file information.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-77
Launching the Configurator from the User Defined Menu
A button option to launch the Host Customer File Configurator can be
placed on ScanMaster’s User Defined Menu (located off the System
Services main menu option). This is created using a text editor and
then linked to the SMWXMENU.MNU file.
Follow the steps below to create a menu option to launch the Host
Customer File Configurator from ScanMaster’s User Defined Menu.
1. Create a .BAT file from a text editor (for example, Windows
Notepad or MS-DOS EDIT).
2. The .BAT file should contain the following two lines:
H2CUSCFG.EXE
SMWXMENU.EXE
Note: To delete the hosted file after processing, the command line,
/D, must be added to end of the H2CUSCFG the line.
3. Save the .BAT file (for example, HOSTCFG.BAT) and place it in the
C:\GROCERY directory.
4. Link the .BAT file to the User-Defined Menu.
Using the text editor, edit SMWXMENU.MNU. The first two lines
are used by the program. Do not edit these two lines. Place a
description of the program (for example, host config) on the third
line, then place the .BAT file name directly under the description
line.
SMWXMENU.MNU example:
Line 1 = user-defined programs
Line 2 = smwxmenu.exe
Line 3 = Host Config (This is the program description.)
Line 4 = .BAT file name (.BAT file name created above.)
Using the Host Customer File Configurator
After accessing the Host Customer File Configurator, settings can now
be configured to receive host customer file information.
5-78
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Through this configurator, the user has the option to replace existing
customer file information (entirely or on a field-to-field basis) with
customer file information imported from the host. In addition, the user
can select the day of the week on which that information is to be
replaced.
Follow the steps below to use the Host Customer File Configurator.
1. Select the day (or days) of the week on which information is to be
replaced. This can be done on a day-by-day basis or the Always
option can be selected to perform this function every day.
2. Select the Customer File fields that will be replaced with the
imported host customer file information. The user can pick and
choose the desired individual fields or click the Select All button to
replace information in every field.
3. Click on the Save Settings button to save the selected settings.
4. Click on the Exit button to exit the configurator.
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
5-79
Host Customer File Record Layout
The record layout for the Host Customer File is displayed on the
following pages. The record layout name and length is listed below.
Name: GRCCUST.BTR
Record Length: 398
Field Name
Action Code
Field Length
Field Position
1
1
Field Type
ALPHA: A - Add; U Update; D - Delete; H Header; I - Ignore
ACCOUNT #
12
2-13
NUMERIC RJ0
NAME LAST
25
14-38
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
NAME FIRST
25
39-63
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
ADDRESS
25
64-88
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
CITY
15
89-103
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
STATE
2
104-105
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
ZIP CODE
9
106-114
NUMERIC RJ0
PHONE #
10
115-124
NUMERIC RJ0
SOCIAL SECURITY #
9
125-133
NUMERIC RJ0
DATE ACCOUNT OPENED
6
134-139
NUMERIC MMDDYY
TAX EXEMPT CODE
12
140-151
ALPHA-NUMERIC RJ0
CHECKING ACCOUNT #
12
152-163
NUMERIC RJ0
# OF VISITS TO DATE
3
164-166
NUMERIC RJ0
# OF VISITS THIS PERIOD
3
167-169
NUMERIC RJ0
PURCHASE AMOUNT TO DATE
9
170-178
NUMERIC RJ0
PURCHASE AMT THIS PERIOD
9
179-187
NUMERIC RJ0
DATE OF LAST PURCHASE
6
188-193
NUMERIC MMDDYY
COMMENTS
30
194-223
ALPHA-NUMERIC LJS
OVERRIDE COUNT
3
224-226
ACCOUNT STATUS
1
227
NUMERIC RJ0
NUMERIC
FREQ SHOP $$$ TO DATE
9
228-236
NUMERIC RJ0
FREQ SHOP $$$ THIS PERIOD
9
237-245
NUMERIC RJ0
# CHECKS TODAY
1
246
NUMERIC
# CHECKS THIS WEEK
1
247
NUMERIC
AMOUNT CHECKS TODAY
9
248-256
NUMERIC WHOLE $
AMOUNT CHECKS WEEK
9
257-265
NUMERIC WHOLE $
RECORD CHANGED FLAG
1
266
0 OR 1
UPDATE FLAG
1
267
0 OR 1
5-80
Chapter 5: Maintaining Customer Data
Field Name
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
FREQ. SHOPPER LEVEL
1
268
NUMERIC RJ0
POINTS THIS PERIOD
9
269-277
NUMERIC RJ0
POINTS TO DATE
9
278-286
NUMERIC RJ0
BONUS POINTS THIS PERIOD
9
287-295
NUMERIC RJ0
BONUS POINTS TO DATE
9
296-304
NUMERIC RJ0
SPECIAL PROMO POINTS
9
305-313
NUMERIC RJ0
FREQ. SHOPPER DISC. TD
9
314-322
NUMERIC RJ0
FREQ. SHOPPER DISC. PTD
9
323-331
NUMERIC RJ0
ELEC. COUPON TD
9
332-340
NUMERIC RJ0
ELEC. COUPON PTD
9
341-349
NUMERIC RJ0
BLANKS
47
350-396
0F
CR
1
397
0D
LF
1
398
0A
RJO – Right Justified Zero-Filled
LJS – Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
Chapter 6: Communications
Communications is the sixth option on the ScanMaster Main Menu.
Click on that button (or press ALT + M) to access the ScanMaster Host
Menu.
Since host communications (and communication packages) vary from
store to store, this menu is entirely user-defined. Stores can configure
this menu to meet their specific needs.
Before creating your Communications Menu, several steps must be
performed:
•
Copy SMWXMENU.EXE (User-Defined Menu executable) to
SMWTMENU.EXE (Communications Menu executable)
•
Build the SMWTMENU.MNU file using an ASCII file editor.
Note: Please refer to the User Defined Menu section of Chapter 7:
System Services for information on how to build and configure a userdefined menu.
The purpose of Communications is to allow the Point of Sale PCs to
communicate with another location. This option may consist of
options such as: Call Host, Set up to receive a call.
6-2
Chapter 6: Communications
The screenshot displayed below depicts how a user might configure a
ScanMaster Communication Menu.
Figure 6-1: Host Menu
This chapter covers Host Communications through the ScanMaster
System.
File changes made at the host-level can be downloaded to the storelevel using this feature.
Information received from the host is stored in the directory
F:/Grocery/Host until it is applied at the store level.
The following sections contain ScanMaster files that can be hosted.
Chapter 6: Communications
6-3
Host Record Layouts
The ScanMaster System utilizes the following Host Record Layouts:
•
Host Customer File
•
Host Negative Check File
•
Host In-store Charge File
•
Host Batch Conversion File
•
Host Electronic Coupon File
Host Customer File: Downloading customer information from the host
can make changes and additions to a store’s customer file. This layout
shows the field names, lengths and types.
Host Negative Check File: Changes and additions to a store’s negative
check file can be made by downloading negative check information
from the host. This layout shows the field names, lengths, and types.
Host In-store Charge File: Changes and additions to a store’s in-store
check file can be made by downloading in-store charge information
from the host. This layout shows the field names, lengths, and types.
Host Batch Conversion File: Changes and additions to batches can be
made by downloading batch information from the host. This program
converts batch files from an ASCII format (*.asc) to batch files in a
btrieve format (*.btr).
Host Electronic Coupon File: Changes and additions to a store’s
electronic coupon file can be made by downloading electronic coupon
information from the host. This layout shows the field names, lengths,
and types.
6-4
Chapter 6: Communications
Customer Hosting
An important feature in ScanMaster’s remote communication package
is customer information hosting.
ScanMaster provides a single interface to import customer information
in ASCII format and to convert it to ScanMaster format. The
SMWH2CUS.EXE program performs this task. It allows for
maintaining customer information (adding, deleting and updating) at
the host level and then importing that new information to the store
level.
The SMWH2CUS program can import and convert information for
three ScanMaster files. They are:
•
•
•
Customer File Hosting
Negative Check File Hosting
In-store Charge File Hosting
Host Customer File
Customer information maintained at the host level can be changed and
passed on to store level using the Host Customer File.
When customer information is changed at the host-level, it is then
downloaded to the store-level where it is applied to the ScanMaster
System.
For example, if a customer address is changed at the host-level, that
information is downloaded to ScanMaster System at the store-level so
the customer’s new address is available.
Sending a Host Customer File
The process is initiated at the host level. The host customer file is
created in an ASCII file format (using ScanMaster host customer file
record layout specifications listed below) and transmitted to the store
via modem.
The transmitted file is placed in the ScanMaster Server’s LAN drive
\GROCERY\HOST folder with the following default name: SSXCUSP.
The directory path for sending a host customer file should be as
follows:
F:\Grocery\Host\SSXCUSP
Chapter 6: Communications
6-5
Converting a Host Customer File
After receiving the file, it can be converted to the ScanMaster Btrieve
format. This is accomplished by running the SMWH2CUS.EXE
program.
ScanMaster currently supports two types of host customer file formats
(Pre-Release 5 and Release 5 formats).
Host customer file conversions can be performed manually by adding
the conversion program to the User Defined Menu (see “User Defined
Menu” in Chapter 7, “System Services”) or automatically by including
the program in ScanMaster’s End-of-Day process.
Note: To delete the hosted file after processing, the command switch
/D must be added to the command line.
Note: Customer totals are not overwritten by host file information.
Those fields include: # of Visits to Date; # of Visits this Period; Purchase
Amt. To Date; Purchase Amt. This Period; Date of Last Purchase;
Override Count; Freq. Shp. $$$ to Date; Freq. Shp. $$$ this Period; #
Checks Today; # Checks this Week; Amt. Checks Today; and Amt.
Checks this Week.
The record layout for the Host Customer File is displayed on the
following pages. The record layout name and length is listed below:
File Name:
GRCCUST.BTR
Record Length:
398 bytes (Including the Action Code, CR and LF.)
6-6
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Customer File Record Layout
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Action Code
1
1
Field Type
Account #
12
2 – 13
ALPHA: A – Add; U – Update;
D – Delete; H – Header; I – Ignore
Numeric RJ0
Name, Last
25
14 – 38
Alphanumeric LJS
Name, First
25
39 – 63
Alphanumeric LJS
Address
25
64 – 88
Alphanumeric LJS
City
15
89 – 103
Alphanumeric LJS
State
2
104 – 105
Alphanumeric LJS
Zipcode
9
106 – 114
Alphanumeric LJS
Phone #
10
115 – 124
Numeric RJ0
Social Security #
9
125 – 133
Numeric RJ0
Date Account Opened
6
134 – 139
Numeric MMDDYY
Tax Exempt Code
12
140 – 151
Alphanumeric RJ0
Checking Account #
12
152 – 163
Numeric RJ0
# of Visits to Date
3
164 – 166
Numeric RJ0
# of Visits this Period
3
167 – 169
Numeric RJ0
Purchase Amt. to Date
9
170 – 178
Numeric RJ0
Purchase Amt. this Period
9
179 – 187
Numeric RJ0
Date of Last Purchase
6
188 – 193
Numeric MMDDYY
Comments
30
194 – 223
Alphanumeric LJS
Override Count
3
224 – 226
Numeric RJ0
Account Status
1
227
Freq. Shp. $$$ to Date
9
228 – 236
Numeric RJ0
Freq. Shp. $$$ this Period
9
237 – 245
Numeric RJ0
# Checks Today
1
246
Numeric
# Checks this Week
1
247
Numeric
Amt. Checks Today
9
248 – 256
Numeric
Numeric RJ0
Chapter 6: Communications
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
Amt. Checks this Week
9
257 – 265
Record Changed Flag
1
266
0 or 1
Update Flag
1
267
0 or 1
Freq. Shopper Level
1
268
Numeric RJ0
Points this Period
9
269 – 277
Numeric RJ0
Points to Date
9
278 – 286
Numeric RJ0
Bonus Points this Period
9
287 – 295
Numeric RJ0
Bonus Points to Date
9
296 – 304
Numeric RJ0
Special Promo Points
9
305 – 313
Numeric RJ0
Freq. Shopper Disc. TD
9
314 – 322
Numeric RJ0
Freq. Shopper Disc. PTD
9
323 – 331
Numeric RJ0
Elec. Coupon TD
9
332 – 340
Numeric RJ0
Elec. Coupon PTD
9
341 – 349
Numeric RJ0
Blank
47
350 – 396
0F
CR
1
397
0D
LF
1
398
0A
Numeric RJ0
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
6-7
6-8
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Negative Check File
Negative Check information maintained at the host level can be
changed and passed on to the store level using the Host Negative
Check File.
When negative check information is changed at the host-level, it is then
downloaded to the store-level and applied to the ScanMaster System.
For example, customers continually writing bad checks can be flagged
in the Host Negative Check File. This information can then be
downloaded to the store-level to prohibit that customer from writing
checks at other stores.
Sending a Host Negative Check File
The process is initiated at the host level. The host negative check file is
created in an ASCII file format (using ScanMaster host negative check
file record layout specifications) and transmitted to the store via
modem).
The transmitted file is placed in ScanMaster’s LAN
drive\GROCERY\HOST folder with the following default name:
SSXNCFP. The directory path for sending a host negative check file
should be as follows:
F:\Grocery\Host\SSXNCFP
Chapter 6: Communications
6-9
Converting a Host Negative Check File
After receiving the file, it can be converted to the ScanMaster Btrieve
format. This is accomplished by running the SMWH2CUS.EXE
program.
Host Negative Check File conversions can be performed manually by
adding the conversion program to the User Defined Menu (see “User
Defined Menu” in Chapter 7, “System Services”) or automatically by
including the program in ScanMaster’s End-of-Day process.
Note: To delete the hosted file after processing, the command switch
/D must be added to the command line.
The record layout for the Host Negative Check File is displayed on the
next page. The record layout name and length is listed below:
File Name:
GRCNCHEK.BTR
Record Length:
317 bytes (Including the Action Code, CR and LF.)
6-10
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Negative Check File Record Layout
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Action Code
1
1
Account #
20
2 – 21
ALPHA: A – Add; U – Update;
D – Delete; H – Header; I –
Ignore
Numeric RJ0
Name, Last
25
22 – 46
Alphanumeric LJS
Name, First
25
47 – 71
Alphanumeric LJS
Address
25
72 – 96
Alphanumeric LJS
City
15
97 – 111
Alphanumeric LJS
State
2
112 – 113
Alphanumeric
Zipcode
9
114 – 122
Alphanumeric LJS
Phone #
10
123 – 132
Numeric RJ0
Social Security #
9
133 – 141
Numeric RJ0
Date Account Opened
6
142 – 147
Numeric MMDDYY
Tax Exempt Code
12
148 – 159
Alphanumeric RJ0
Checking Account #
20
160 – 179
Numeric RJ0
# of Checks Tendered
3
180 – 182
Numeric RJ0
# of NSF Checks
3
183 – 185
Numeric RJ0
Checks Tendered Amount
7
186 – 192
Numeric RJ0
NSF Checks Amount
7
193 – 199
Numeric RJ0
Date of Last Visit
6
200 – 205
Numeric MMDDYY
Comments
30
206 – 235
Alphanumeric LJS
Override Count
3
236 – 238
Numeric RJ0
Account Status
1
239
Transit/Routing Number
9
240 – 248
Numeric RJ0
Blank
67
249 – 315
0F
CR
1
316
0D
LF
1
317
0A
TRANSIT/ROUTING NUMBER, ACCOUNT #
Field Type
Numeric
Chapter 6: Communications
6-11
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
Host In-Store Charge File
In-Store charge information maintained at the host-level can be
changed and passed on to the store-level using the Host In-Store
Charge File.
When in-store charge information is changed at the host-level, it is then
downloaded to the store-level and applied to the ScanMaster System.
There are several reasons for using the Host In-Store Charge File.
Among them are:
•
Changing a customer’s credit limit
•
Applying customer finance charges
•
Changing the Annual Percentage Rate
Sending a Host In-Store Charge File
This process is initiated at the host level. The host in-store charge file is
created in an ASCII file format (using ScanMaster’s host in-store charge
file record layout specifications) and transmitted to the store via
modem.
The transmitted file is placed in ScanMaster’s LAN drive
\GROCERY\HOST folder with the following default name:
SSXCRGP. The directory path for sending a host in-store charge file
should be as follows:
F:\Grocery\Host\SSXCRGP
6-12
Chapter 6: Communications
Converting a Host In-Store Charge File
After receiving the file, it can be converted to the ScanMaster Btrieve
format. This is accomplished by running the SMWH2CUS.EXE
program.
Host in-store charge file conversions can be performed manually by
adding the conversion program to the User Defined Menu (see “User
Defined Menu” in Chapter 7, “System Services”) or automatically by
including the program in ScanMaster’s End-of-Day process.
Note: To delete the hosted file after processing, the command switch
/D must be added to the command line.
The record layout for the Host In-Store Charge File is displayed on the
next page. The record layout name and length is listed below:
File Name:
GRCHARGE.BTR
Record Length:
103 bytes (Including the Action Code, CR and LF.)
Chapter 6: Communications
6-13
Host In-Store Charge File Record Layout
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Action Code
1
1
Field Type
Account #
12
2 – 13
ALPHA: A – Add; U – Update;
D – Delete; H – Header; I –
Ignore
Numeric RJ0
Date Account Opened
6
14 – 19
Numeric MMDDYY
Charge Limit
6
20 – 25
Numeric RJ0 (0 Decimals)
Charge Status
1
26
Date of Last Payment
6
27 – 32
Numeric MMDDYY
Amount of Last Payment
8
33 – 40
Numeric RJ0
Current Account Balance
8
41 – 48
Numeric RJ0
Previous Account Balance
8
49 – 56
Numeric RJ0
Validation Page #
2
57 – 58
Numeric RJ0
Validation Line #
2
59 – 60
Numeric RJ0
Finance Charge
1
61
APR
4
62 – 65
Numeric RJ0
Blank
35
66 – 100
0F
Update Flag
1
101
0 or 1
CR
1
102
0D
LF
1
103
0A
Numeric RJ0
0 or 1
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
6-14
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Batch Conversion File
Batch information maintained at the host level can be changed and
passed on to the store level using the Host Batch Conversion File.
When batch information is changed at the host level, it is then
downloaded to the store level where it is applied to the ScanMaster
System.
For example, if items or prices are changed at the host level, that
information is downloaded to the ScanMaster System at the store level
so the new batch information is available.
Sending A Host Batch File
The process is initiated at the host level. Batches are created in an
ASCII file format (using ScanMaster host batch record layout
specifications) and transmitted to the store via modem.
The file(s) are placed in the LAN drive\GROCERY\HOST folder (for
example F:\GROCERY\HOST) using the following naming
convention:
host###.asc (for example host001.asc).
The directory path for sending a host batch conversion file should
follow this example:
F:\grocery\host\host001.asc.
Note: Multiple batch files can be downloaded from the host; however,
each must have a unique number. For example, host001.asc,
host002.asc, host003.asc, etc.
Chapter 6: Communications
6-15
Converting a Host Batch File
After receiving the file, ScanMaster can convert the file to a Btrieve
format and then delete the original ASCII file.
Host batch conversions can be performed manually by adding the
conversion program (SMWASC2B.EXE) to the User Defined Menu (see
“User Defined Menu” in Chapter 7, “System Services”) or automatically
by including the program in ScanMaster’s End-of-Day process.
The record layout and header record for the Host Batch Conversion
File is displayed on the following pages. The record layout name and
length is listed below:
File Name:
LOCALxxx.BTR
HOSTxxx.BTR
OFFSLxxx.BTR
MASSxxx.BTR
xxx = the batch number.
Record Length:
509 bytes (Including the Action Code, CR and LF.)
6-16
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Batch File Record Layout
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
Action Code
1
1
UPC
20
2 – 22
ALPHA: A – Add; U – Update;
D – Delete; H – Header; I –
Ignore
Numeric RJ0
Description
16
23 - 38
Alphanumeric LJS
Department
4
39 – 42
Numeric RJ0
Sub Department
4
43 – 46
Numeric RJ0
Item Type
1
47
Numeric
0 – Unit; 1 – Split Qty; 2 – Scale;
4 – Store Coupon; 9 – Linked.
Item Price
6
48 – 53
Numeric RJ0
Split Qty
2
54 – 55
Numeric RJ0
Split Price
6
56 – 61
0 or 1
Food Stamp Status
1
62
0 or 1
Tax 1 Status
1
63
0 or 1
Tax 2 Status
1
64
0 or 1
Tax 3 Status
1
65
0 or 1
Discount 1 / 4 Status
1
66
Numeric
Discount 2 / 5 Status
1
67
Numeric
Frequent Shopper Status
1
68
0 or 1
Enforce / Inhibit Qty
1
69
Numeric
Limited Qty
2
70 - 71
Numeric RJ0
Limited Price
6
72 – 77
Numeric RJ0
Bottle Link
2
78 – 79
Numeric RJ0
Mix & Match
4
80 – 83
Numeric RJ0
Report Code
4
84 - 87
Numeric RJ0
Reserved for EBO
12
88 – 99
0F
Ad Level
1
100
Numeric RJ0
Chapter 6: Communications
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Visual Verify
1
101
Receipt Coupon Number
4
102 - 105
Restrict Sale
1
106
Field Type
0 or 1
Numeric RJ0
Numeric
0 – No Restriction; 1 – Restrict Sales; 4 – No Coupon Multiple; 5 – Restrict Sales and No Coupon Multiple;
6 – No Coupon and No Coupon Multiple; 7 – Restrict Sales, No Coupon and No Coupon Multiple
Unit Cost
9
107 - 115
Numeric RJ0 (5 Decimals)
Case Cost
9
116 – 124
Numeric RJ0 (5 Decimals)
Case Qty
4
125 – 128
Numeric RJ0
Commodity Code
8
129 - 136
Numeric RJ0
Date of Last Maintenance
6
137 – 142
Numeric MMDDYY
WIC Status
1
143
0 or 1
Reserved
1
144
Numeric
Reserved for EBO
1
145
0F
Vendor Number
8
146 – 153
Alphanumeric LJS
Item Number
10
154 – 163
Alphanumeric LJS
Reserved for EBO
37
164 – 200
0F
Ad Flag
1
201
Reserved
2
202 – 203
Numeric RJ0
Regular Price
6
204 – 209
Numeric RJ0
Price Link
20
210 – 229
RJ0
Reserved for EBO
38
230 – 267
0F
Pack Size
4
268 – 271
Numeric RJ0
Unit Size
9
272 – 280
Alphanumeric LJS
Unit Measure
2
281 – 282
Numeric RJ0
Reserved for EBO
6
283 – 288
0F
Aisle
3
289 – 291
Numeric RJ0
Shelf
3
292 – 294
Numeric RJ0
Location
3
295 – 297
Numeric RJ0
Stock Number
3
298 – 300
Numeric RJ0
0 or 1
6-17
6-18
Chapter 6: Communications
Field Description
Field Length
Tag Quantity
3
Field Position
301 – 303
Field Type
Numeric RJ0
Note: Aisle, Shelf, Location, Stock Number and Tag Quantity; Maximum 254, Minimum 0.
Family Code 1
3
304 – 306
Numeric RJ0
Family Code 2
3
307 – 309
Numeric RJ0
Reserved for EBO
18
310 – 327
0F
Tare Code
2
328 – 329
Numeric RJ0
Weight
6
330 – 335
Numeric RJ0
Master Link Item Flag
1
336
Reserved for EBO
20
337 – 356
0F
Adjective Price Code
4
357 – 360
Numeric RJ0
Points
6
361 – 366
Numeric RJ0
Bonus Points
6
367 – 372
Numeric RJ0
Free Item Flag
1
373
0 or 1
Exclude from Min. Purchase
1
374
0 or 1
Long Description
30
375 – 404
Alphanumeric LJS
Blank
103
405 – 507
0F
CR
1
508
0D
LF
1
509
0A
0 or 1
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Batch File Header Record
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
Action Code
1
1
Alpha H-Header
UPC
20
2 – 21
Numeric
“99999999999999999999”
Description
30
22 – 51
Alphanumeric LJS
Batch Type Description
20
52 – 71
Alphanumeric LJS
# of Items
5
72 – 76
Numeric RJ0
Applied Flag
1
77
0 or 1
Blanks
18
78 – 95
0F
Creation Date
6
96 – 101
Numeric MMDDYY
Activation Date
6
102 – 107
Numeric MMDDYY
Blank
1
108
0F
Offsale Flag
1
109
0 or 1
Blank
397
110 – 506
0F
CR
1
507
0D
LF
1
508
0A
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
6-19
6-20
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Electronic Coupon File
Electronic coupon information maintained at the host level can be
changed and passed on to the store level using the Host Electronic
Coupon File.
When electronic coupon information is changed at the host level, it is
then downloaded via modem to the store level where it is applied to
the ScanMaster System.
For example, if new electronic coupons are created or existing ones
changed at the host level, that information is downloaded to the
ScanMaster System at the store level so the new electronic coupon
information is available.
Sending an Electronic Coupon File
The process is initiated at the host level. Electronic coupons are created
in an ASCII file format (using ScanMaster host electronic coupon
layout specifications) and transmitted to the store via modem.
The file(s) are placed in the LAN drive\GROCERY\HOST folder (for
example F:\GROCERY\HOST) using the following naming
convention:
ec####.asc (for example ec0001.asc).
The directory path for sending a host electronic coupon file should
follow this example:
F:\grocery\host\ec0001.asc.
Note: Multiple electronic coupon files can be downloaded from the
host, however, each must have a unique number. For example,
ec0001.asc, ec0002.asc, ec0003.asc, etc.
Chapter 6: Communications
6-21
Converting a Host Electronic Coupon File
After receiving the file, ScanMaster can write the information into the
Btrieve coupon file and then delete the original ASCII file.
ScanMaster currently supports two types of host electronic coupon file
record layout formats. Host electronic coupon files can be converted to
the ScanMaster format through: SMWECACT.EXE or
SMWECAC2.EXE.
Host electronic coupon conversions can be performed manually by
adding the conversion program (SMWECACT.EXE or
SMWECAC2.EXE) to the User Defined Menu (see “User Defined
Menu” in Chapter 7, “System Services”) or automatically by including
the program in ScanMaster’s End-of-Day process.
The record layout and header record for the Host Electronic Coupon
File is displayed on the following pages. The record layout name and
length is listed below:
File Name:
GRCPOINT.BTR
Record Length:
373 bytes (Including the Action Code, CR and LF.)
6-22
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Electronic Coupon ASCII File Record Layout
(SMWECACT.EXE)
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
Action Code
1
1
UPC
20
2 – 21
ALPHA: A – Add; U – Update;
D – Delete; H – Header; I –
Ignore
Numeric RJ0
Vendor #
12
22 – 33
Numeric RJ0
Commodity Code #
12
34 – 45
Numeric RJ0
Department #
4
46 –49
Numeric RJ0
Report Code
4
50 – 53
Numeric RJ0
Description
30
54 – 83
Alphanumeric LJS
Coupon Type
1
84
Numeric
0 – Mfg. Coupon
1 – Store Coupon
Discount Type
1
85
Alpha
% - Percent Discount
$ - Amount Discount
Discount Amount
6
86 – 91
Numeric RJ0
Buy Qty / Weight
6
92 – 97
Numeric RJ0
Get Qty / Weight
6
98 – 103
Numeric RJ0
Limited Qty / Weight
6
104 – 109
Numeric RJ0
Start Date
6
110 – 115
Numeric MMDDYY
M = Month
D = Day
Y = Year
Start Time
6
116 – 119
Numeric HHMM
H = Hours
M = Minutes
End Date
6
120 – 125
Numeric MMDDYY
End Time
6
126 – 129
Numeric HHMM
Freq. Shopper Points
6
130 – 135
Numeric RJ0
Chapter 6: Communications
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
Freq. Shopper Bonus Points
6
136 – 141
Numeric RJ0
Coupon Print Code
4
142 – 145
Numeric RJ0
Promotion Code
20
146 – 165
Numeric RJ0
Current Cpn. Qty
6
166 – 171
Numeric RJ0
Current Cpn. Amount
9
172 – 180
Numeric RJ0
Current Freq. Shp. Pnts
12
181 – 192
Numeric RJ0
Current Freq. Shp. Bonus Pnts
12
193 – 204
Numeric RJ0
Period Cpn. Qty
6
205 – 210
Numeric RJ0
Period Cpn. Amount
9
211 – 219
Numeric RJ0
Period Freq. Shp. Pnts
12
220 – 231
Numeric RJ0
Period Freq. Shp Bonus Pnts
12
232 – 243
Numeric RJ0
Close Date
6
244 – 249
Numeric MMDDYY
Freq. Shopper Level
1
250
Minimum Purchase Amount
7
251 – 257
Numeric RJ0
Mix Match
4
258 – 261
Numeric RJ0
Total Sale
7
262 – 268
Numeric RJ0
Department Total
7
269 – 275
Numeric RJ0
Sort Department
4
276 – 279
Numeric RJ0
Redemption Value
6
280 – 285
Numeric RJ0
Bundle Code
2
286 – 287
Numeric RJ0
Weighted Flag
1
288
Movement:
Numeric
0 or 1
0 – Non-Weighted
1 – Weighted
Favor Flag
1
289
0, 1, or 2
0 – Not Used
1 – Favor store
Favor Customer
Blank
82
290 – 371
0F
6-23
6-24
Chapter 6: Communications
Field Description
Field Length
Field Position
Field Type
CR
1
372
0D
LF
1
373
0A
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
Chapter 6: Communications
Host Electronic Coupon ASCII File Record Layout
(SMWECAC2.EXE)
Field Description
Action
Field Length
1
Field Position
1
UPC
Vendor #
Commodity Code #
Department #
Description
Coupon Type
20
12
12
4
30
1
2 - 21
22 - 33
34 - 45
46 - 49
50 - 79
80
Discount Type
1
81
Field Type
A = Add
D = Delete
U = Update
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Alphanumeric LJS
Numeric
0 = Mfg. Coupon
1 = Store Coupon
Alpha
% = Percent Discount
$ = Amount Discount
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric MMDDYY
Numeric HHMM
Numeric MMDDYY
Numeric HHMM
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Numeric RJ0
Discount Amount
6
82 - 87
Buys
3
88 - 90
Gets
3
91 - 93
Limited Qty
3
94 - 96
Start Date
6
97 - 102
Start Time
4
103 - 106
End Date
6
107 - 112
End Time
4
113 - 116
Freq. Shopper Points
6
117 - 122
Freq. Shopper Bonus Points
6
123 - 128
Coupon Print Code
4
129 - 132
Promotion Code
4
133 - 136
Current Cpn. Qty
6
137 - 142
Current Cpn. Amount
9
143 - 151
Current Freq. Shp. Pnts
12
152 - 163
Current Freq. Shp. Bonus
12
164 - 175
Pnts
Period Cpn. Qty
6
176 - 181
Numeric RJ0
Period Cpn. Amount
9
182 - 190
Numeric RJ0
Period Freq. Shp. Pnts
12
191 - 202
Numeric RJ0
Period Freq. Shp. Pnts
12
203 - 214
Numeric RJ0
Close Date
6
215 - 220
Numeric MMDDYY
Freq. Shopper Level
1
221
Numeric
Minimum Purchase Amount
7
222 - 228
Numeric RJ0
Bundle Code
2
229 - 230
Numeric RJ0
Mix Match
3
231 - 233
Numeric RJ0
Total Sale
7
234 - 240
Numeric RJ0
Department Total
7
241 - 247
Numeric RJ0
Sort Department
4
248 - 251
Numeric RJ0
Blank
65
252 - 316
0F
Carriage Return
2
317 - 318
0D
Line Feed
0A
RJ0 means Right Justified with leading zeroes
LJS means Left Justified
Blank, CR, and LF are Hex values
6-25
6-26
Chapter 6: Communications
Auditing Changes to the Item File and Host Batches
ScanMaster provides an optional audit trail log to track store-level
changes made to the item file via direct item maintenance or through
applied batches. These changes are recorded in file ITRAIL.LOG.
When this feature is activated (the “Use Item Trail Feature” option
must be turned on in the Back Office Control File), ScanMaster creates
an audit trail to track item file and batch activity. This flag causes the
programs SMWITEM.EXE (Direct Item Maintenance) and
SMWBAPLY.EXE (Apply Batch File) to write information to the
ITRAIL.LOG file.
ITRAIL.LOG documents any adds, changes or deletes to the item file,
as well as any applied batch sent down from a host.
This feature is primarily used in hosting. It ensures file integrity and
enables the host to see any changes made to the item file at store level.
ScanMaster stores this file in the following folder:
<Lan drive>:\Grocery\Files\Log\ITRAIL.LOG.
Note: This file was designed to be easily pulled back by the host once
item file or applied batch changes are made. However, once this file is
pulled back by the host, it should be deleted from the server because it
can be appended and the system will keep writing to the file. This
could create auditing problems if numerous item file and applied batch
changes are continually written to this file.
When this feature is enabled, if no ITRAIL.LOG file exists (if it had
been deleted by host), it starts a new ITRAIL.LOG file.
This file can be viewed or printed from any ASCII viewer.
Chapter 6: Communications
ITRAIL.LOG Record Layout
Key
Field Description
Field
Field
Length
Position
1
1
ITEM FILE
300
2-301
SECURITY
2
302-303
ALPHANUMERIC
3
304-306
NUMERIC
Fields
ACTION CODE
Field Type
ALPHA
N = NEW ITEM
D = DELETE
B = BEFORE
CHANGE
A = AFTER
CHANGE
(MATCHES ITEM FILE
LAYOUT)
LEVEL
(MAKING
CHANGE)
EMPLOYEE ID
(MAKING
CHANGE)
6-27
6-28
Chapter 6: Communications
Chapter 7: System Services
The purpose of this chapter is to enable you to perform the various
system services of the ScanMaster System. The System Service Menu
contains the following submenu options: View Security Log,
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files, the User-Defined Menu, Label
Printing, Third Party Menu, Electronic Journal Back-up, and System
Back-up.
System Services is option ten on the ScanMaster Main Menu. Click on
that button (or press Alt-S) to access the ScanMaster System Services
Menu.
Figure 7-1: System Services Menu
7-2
Chapter 7: System Services
System Services Menu Options
There are eight options on the ScanMaster System Services Menu.
They are:
•
View Security Log
•
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files
•
User Defined Menu
•
Label Printing
•
Third Party Menu
•
Electronic Journal Back-Up
•
System Back-Up
•
View/Print Error Log
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Main Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
View Security Log provides an up-to-the-minute listing of employee
activity on the ScanMaster System. Listed in time and date order, the
log details who logged on the system, what functions they used, and
from which PC.
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files enables you to view/delete
suspended files, view/delete error log files, and unlock shared files
(notfound, random and suspend). A lock file prevents the system from
sharing.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-3
The User Defined Menu enables you to create a customizable menu at
the store-level for specialized DOS applications.
Label Printing enables you to print shelf labels, shelf signs, and
product labels.
Third Party Menu enables the user to access optional software
modules (for example, Shrink Trax).
Electronic Journal Back-Up enables you to protect your electronic
journal data files by saving them to a tape back-up.
The System Back-Up feature enables you to back up your entire
system -- Back Office PC, File Server, and all data files -- to a tape backup.
The View/Print Error Logs button launches the ScanMaster
View/Delete Logs and Unlock Flags Files Menu.
7-4
Chapter 7: System Services
View Security Log
View Security Log is the first option on the ScanMaster System Services
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-V) to access the ScanMaster
ASCII File Viewer screen.
View Security Log provides an up-to-the-minute, online listing of
employee activity on the ScanMaster System. Listed in time and date
order, the log details who logged on the system, what functions they
used, and from which PC. Click PRINT to print a hard copy of this log.
Figure 7-2: View Security Log Screen
Chapter 7: System Services
7-5
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster ASCII File Viewer
screen.
Date: The date the user was signed on to the ScanMaster System.
Time: The time the user was signed on to the ScanMaster System.
Employee Name: The login name of the employee who used the
system.
Programs: The ScanMaster programs accessed by that employee.
PC Name: The name of the PC -- File Server PC or Back Office PC or
the name given each PC during installation of ScanMaster -- from
which the system was accessed.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster ASCII File Viewer screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
System Services Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the ScanMaster
Security Log.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Security Log.
7-6
Chapter 7: System Services
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files is the second option on the
ScanMaster System Services Menu. Click on that button (or press AltS) to access the ScanMaster View/Delete/Unlock Logs and Busy Flag
Files screen.
View/Delete Suspend/Lock Files enables you to view/delete
suspended files, view/delete error log files, and unlock shared files
(notfound, random and suspend). A lock file prevents the system from
sharing.
Figure 7-3: View/Delete Logs & Unlock Flag Files Menu
Chapter 7: System Services
Menu Options for ScanMaster View/Delete Logs and Unlock
Flag Files
There are nine options on the ScanMaster View/Delete Logs and
Unlock Flags Files Menu. They are:
•
Unlock Notfound
•
Unlock Random
•
Unlock Suspend
•
View/Print Error Log
•
Delete Error Log
•
View/Print EOD Log
•
View/Print ARC Log
•
View/Print FC Rate Log
•
View/Delete Suspends
7-7
7-8
Chapter 7: System Services
Using the View/Delete Logs and Unlock Flag Files Options
Options on this menu enable the user to view and delete any locked or
suspended data files on the ScanMaster System.
System data files may become locked or suspended for a number of
reasons (for example, a power outage). If the file was in use on a POS
workstation at the time, the file may become locked and other POS
workstations may not be able to access the file.
The system displays a warning message detailing the locked file (for
example, “SUSPEND.DAT busy, Please try again”). Check to see if the
file is in use elsewhere on the system and retry. If no one is using the
file and the POS workstation still displays the message, select the
correct option to unlock the file you need to release (for example,
Unlock Suspend). This action unlocks the file and enables all POS
workstations to access the file. These files are shared data files, so only
one POS workstation/Back Office can access the file at a time.
Unlock Notfound
Any scanned item not found in the Item File is written to the
NOTFOUND.DAT file. By selecting the Unlock Notfound button (or
pressing Alt-N), items in this file are automatically deleted.
Unlock Random
The RANDOM.HLD file is used to identify and keep track of random
winners on the ScanMaster System. By selecting the Unlock Random
button (or pressing Alt-R), this file is automatically deleted.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-9
Unlock Suspend
SUSPEND.DAT is the file where suspended sales are written. By
selecting the Unlock Suspend button (or pressing Alt-S), all suspended
sales are deleted.
View/Print Error Log
Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to access the View/Print Error
Log. The View/Print Error Log provides a listing of all application
errors that have occurred on the Back Office PC, as well as the time,
date, and brief description of the error.
Note: A POS workstation indicates the number of suspended
transactions pending since the screen was refreshed. The screen
refreshes at the beginning of a new sale and updates with the new
suspended transactions.
Figure 7-4: View/Print Error Log Screen
7-10
Chapter 7: System Services
Delete Error Log
Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to delete the system’s error log.
Selecting this button purges the listing of application errors on the
system.
View/Print EOD Log
Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to access the End of Day Log. The
EOD Log provides a listing of all processes and warning messages that
occurred during the end of day, as well as the time, date, and a brief
description.
Figure 7-5: View/Print EOD Log Screen
Chapter 7: System Services
7-11
View/Print ARC Log
Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to access the Archive Log. The
ARC Log provides a listing of all file archive activity that has occurred,
as well as the time, date, activity type and a brief description.
View/Print FC Rate Log
Click on this button (or press Alt-I) to access the Foreign Currency Rate
Log. The FC Rate Log provides a listing of all foreign currency rate
changes including the time and date of the change, the employee who
initiated the change and the new exchange rate.
Figure 7-6: Foreign Currency Rate Log Screen
7-12
Chapter 7: System Services
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Foreign Currency Rate Log screen.
All fields on this screen are Read-only fields.
Date: This field displays the calendar date (mmddyyyy format) that the
foreign currency exchange rate was changed on the ScanMaster
system.
Time: This field displays the military time that the foreign currency
exchange rate was changed on the ScanMaster system.
Employee Number: This field displays the three-digit employee
number of the employee who changed the foreign currency exchange
rate on the ScanMaster system.
Employee Name: This field displays the name of the employee who
changed the foreign currency exchange rate on the ScanMaster system.
New Foreign Currency Exchange Rate: The field displays the new
foreign currency exchange.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Foreign Currency
Rate Log screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the ScanMaster
Foreign Currency Rate Log. The system prompts to save any unsaved
changes made to information in this record.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the Foreign
Currency Rate Log.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Foreign Currency Rate Log.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-13
View/Delete Suspends
Click on this button (or press Alt-V) to access the ScanMaster Delete
Suspended Sales screen. There can be up to 99 global suspended
transactions on the system. By selecting this button, you can view and
remove suspended sales from the ScanMaster System. This is not a
detailed list of each transaction, but a summary list of all suspended
transactions. Simply click on the desired transaction you want to
delete and then click on the DELETE button to remove it from the
system.
Figure 7-5: Delete Suspended Sales Screen
7-14
Chapter 7: System Services
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Delete Suspended Sales
screen.
Cashier ID: Three (3) digit cashier number.
Reg. #: POS workstation where the sale was suspended.
Transaction: Transaction number assigned to that sale.
Date: The date the sale was suspended.
Time: The time the sale was suspended.
Sales Total: The subtotal of the sale at the time it was suspended.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Delete Suspended Sales
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
View/Delete Log/Lock Files screen.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete suspended
sales from the ScanMaster System.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Delete Suspended Sales screen.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-15
User Defined Menu
The User Defined Menu is the third option on the ScanMaster System
Services Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-U) to access the
ScanMaster User Defined Menu.
This is a customizable menu that is used at the store-level for
specialized DOS applications.
Figure 7-6: User-Defined Menu
7-16
Chapter 7: System Services
Editing the User-Defined Menu
Since this menu is user-defined, you can customize up to eight options
to meet your needs. These options are created in a text editor and are
linked to the SMWXMENU.MNU file. Below is an example of how to
customize this menu.
Example: The store wants to create a DOS Tape Backup of the
Grocery File Directory. In order to do this, you would follow the steps
below.
1. Create a .BAT file from a text editor (MS-DOS 6.0 EDIT).
2. Enter the information the .BAT file should process (see the sample
.BAT file below).
cd\tape
tape backup c:\grocery\files\*.* /-a /t=“backup”
cd\grocery
smwxmenu.exe (This is needed to return to the ScanMaster UserDefined Menu.)
3. Place the .BAT file in the C:\GROCERY directory.
4. Link the .BAT file to the User-Defined Menu.
Using the text editor, edit SMWXMENU.MNU. The first two lines
are used by the program. Do not edit these two lines. Place a
description of the program [TAPE BACKUP] on the third line, then
place the .BAT filename directly under the description line.
SMWXMENU.MNU example:
Line 1 = user-defined programs
Line 2 = smwxmenu.exe
Line 3 = tape backup (This is the program description.)
Line 4 = tape1.bat (Actual .BAT file with extension.)
Chapter 7: System Services
7-17
Label Printing
Label Printing is the fourth option on the ScanMaster System Services
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-L) to access the ScanMaster
Shelf Labels for Windows screen.
Label Printing enables you to print shelf labels, product labels and
shelf signs.
Figure 7-7: Shelf Labels for Windows Screen
7-18
Chapter 7: System Services
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Shelf Labels for
Windows Screens.
Page Layout: Enter the UPC numbers in the order you want them to
print. The item number must exist in the Item File before a label can be
printed.
Shelf Label Layout: A bar code displays in this field when a UPC
number is entered in the Page Layout field.
Product Description: The product description for the UPC number
displays in this field.
UPC #: The product UPC number displays in this field.
Commodity Code: The commodity code for this item displays in this
field.
Price: The price for that UPC displays in this field.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Shelf Labels for Windows
screen.
CLEAR: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to clear the 24 UPC fields.
PRINT SHELF LABELS: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to print
Shelf Labels for all UPC entries in the Page Layout field.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Shelf Label for Windows screen.
PRINT PRODUCT CODES: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to
print Product Codes for all UPC entries in the Page Layout field.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
System Services Menu.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-19
Printing ScanMaster Shelf Labels
There are two different ways to print labels through the ScanMaster
System: manually or automatically.
Manual printing of labels is performed from the ScanMaster Label
Printing screen. You can print up to 24 labels per page when printing
labels manually. Simply enter in the Page Layout field the desired
UPC code and press TAB to advance to the next field. Repeat this
procedure until you are finished or complete the page.
Click on the PRINT SHELF LABELS button at the bottom of the screen
to print the UPC labels (or PRINT PRODUCT CODES button to print
scannable barcodes).
Printing labels for an entire batch is accomplished through the
ScanMaster Item Maintenance Menu. From the ScanMaster
Create/Edit Batches screen, click on the desired batch. Then click on
the Labels radio button. From this screen, click on the LABELS button.
Load the desired label stock and click on the YES button to print the
labels.
Note: Be sure your printer is loaded with the recommended label
paper - Electronic Label Technology ELT Form # 311Y -- before the
printing labels. All customizations for different forms or stock are
addressed by the software developers by request.
7-20
Chapter 7: System Services
Third Party Menu
Third Party Menu is the fifth option on the ScanMaster System Services
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-T) to access the ScanMaster
Third Party Menu.
Third Party Menu enables the user to access optional software modules
(for example, Shrink Trax).
Figure 7-10: Third Party Menu Screen
Chapter 7: System Services
7-21
Third Party Software
ScanMaster for Windows NT supports the following Third Party
Interfaces:
•
EFT – Multiple vendors
•
FM Terminal Support – Multiple vendors
•
Profit Track
•
RDS Shelf Label – Multiple vendors
•
Shrink Trax
•
SIL
•
Vision Value Interface / APT / xiNETix
Installation instructions for these interfaces can be found in Chapter 2
of the Installing and Supporting ScanMaster technical guide.
Refer to the user’s guide of each software package for information on
how to use that product.
7-22
Chapter 7: System Services
Electronic Journal Back-Up
Electronic Journal Back-Up is the sixth option on the ScanMaster
System Services Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-E) to access
the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Back-Up screen. Electronic Journal
Back-Up enables you to protect your electronic journal data files by
saving them to a tape back-up.
Figure 7-11: Electronic Journal Back-Up Screen
Chapter 7: System Services
7-23
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Back-Up
screen are:
Electronic Journal Selection Criteria: This field displays a list box of
available electronic journal files to back up. Select the desired files to
back up by clicking on those files.
Quick Pick All: Click on this radio button to back up all electronic
journal files on the system.
Quick Pick Last 7 Days: Click on this radio button to back up
electronic journal files for the last seven days.
Quick Pick Last Month: Click on this radio button to back up
electronic journal files for the last month.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Back-Up screen
are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
System Services Menu.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to save electronic
journal data to a tape back-up.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Electronic Journal Back-Up screen.
7-24
Chapter 7: System Services
Performing Electronic Journal Back-up
Follow the steps below to back up electronic journal files on the
system:
1. Access the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Back-up screen.
2. Select the desired files to back up by clicking on those files or click
on the desired “Quick Pick” radio button option.
3. Click on the PREPARE button to initiate electronic journal back-up
procedures.
4. The Tape Backup Options dialog box displays, along with the
message: “Preparing Data Files.”
5. After the data files are prepared, the system prompts you to “Insert
a tape in the tape drive.”
6. Insert a tape in the tape drive on the PC.
Note: Consult your NT hardware compatibility guide for supported
tape back-up devices and tapes.
7. Click OK to initiate the tape back-up process.
8. A back-up status screen displays, listing back-up statistics, file
names and a summary of all backed up files. If a file is in use, the
system displays an error message.
Note: Click on ABORT to abort the back-up procedure at any
time.
9. When all files are backed up, the following message displays:
“Electronic Journal Backup Completed.”
10. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Note: If the back-up procedure is unsuccessful (for any or all files),
an error message displays.
11. The message, “Deleting Work Files,” then displays. When work
files are deleted, the message, “File Backup Completed,” displays.
12. Click OK.
13. The system then prompts if you want to delete the backed up files
from the hard drive. Click Yes or No.
14. The Electronic Journal Tape Back-up process is complete.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-25
System Back-Up
System Back-Up is the seventh option on the ScanMaster System
Services Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-B) to access the
ScanMaster Electronic Journal Back-Up screen. System Back-Up
enables you to back up your workstation, File Server, and all data files
to a tape back-up.
Figure 7-12: Tape Back Up Utility Screen
7-26
Chapter 7: System Services
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster System Back-Up screen are:
Back Up This Workstation: Click on this radio button to back up only
this workstation.
Back Up the Server: Click on this radio button to back up only the File
Server. When this button is activated, open data files on the server will
not be backed up.
Back Up Data Files: Click on this radio button to back up all data files
on the system, including any open data files.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster System Back-Up screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
System Services Menu.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to perform system
back-up.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Electronic Journal Back-Up screen.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-27
Performing System Back-up (Workstation Only)
Follow the steps below to perform system back-up on a workstation
only:
1. Access the ScanMaster System Back-Up screen.
2. Click on the Back Up This Workstation radio button.
3. Click on the PREPARE button to initiate electronic journal back-up
procedures.
4. The following message displays: “Insert a tape in the tape drive.”
5. Insert a tape in the tape drive on the PC.
Note: Consult your NT hardware compatibility guide for supported
tape back-up devices and tapes.
6. Click OK to initiate the tape back-up process.
7. A back-up status screen displays, listing back-up statistics, file
names and a summary of all backed up files. If a file is in use, the
system displays an error message.
Note: Click on ABORT to abort the back-up procedure at any
time.
8. When all files are backed up, the following message displays:
“Workstation Backup Completed.”
9. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Note: If the back-up procedure is unsuccessful (for any or all files),
an error message displays.
10. The System Tape Back-Up (for this workstation) is complete.
7-28
Chapter 7: System Services
Performing System Back-up (Server Only)
Follow the steps below to perform system back-up on the server only:
1. Access the ScanMaster System Back-Up screen.
2. Click on the Back Up The Server radio button.
3. Click on the PREPARE button to initiate electronic journal back-up
procedures.
4. The following message displays: “Insert a tape in the tape drive.”
5. Insert a tape in the tape drive on the PC.
Note: Consult your NT hardware compatibility guide for supported
tape back-up devices and tapes.
6. Click OK to initiate the tape back-up process.
7. A back-up status screen displays, listing back-up statistics, file
names and a summary of all backed up files. If a file is in use, the
system displays an error message.
Note: Click on ABORT to abort the back-up procedure at any
time.
8. When all files are backed up, the following message displays:
“Server Back-Up Completed.”
9. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Note: If the back-up procedure is unsuccessful (for any or all files),
an error message displays.
10. The System Tape Back-Up (for the server) is complete.
Chapter 7: System Services
7-29
Performing System Back-up (On Data Files)
Follow the steps below to back up all ScanMaster System data files:
1. Access the ScanMaster System Back-Up screen.
2. Click on the Back Up Data Files radio button.
3. Click on the PREPARE button to initiate electronic journal back-up
procedures.
4. The Tape Backup Options dialog box displays, along with the
message: “Preparing Data Files.”
5. The following message displays: “Insert a tape in the tape drive.”
6. Insert a tape in the tape drive on the PC.
Note: Consult your NT hardware compatibility guide for supported
tape back-up devices and tapes.
7. Click OK to initiate the tape back-up process.
8. A back-up status screen displays, listing back-up statistics, file
names and a summary of all backed up files. If a file is in use, the
system displays an error message.
Note: Click on ABORT to abort the back-up procedure at any
time.
9. When all files are backed up, the following message displays:
“Data File Backup Completed.”
10. Click OK to complete the procedure.
Note: If the back-up procedure is unsuccessful (for any or all files),
an error message displays.
11. The message, “Deleting Work Files,” then displays. When work
files are deleted, the message, “File Backup Completed,” displays.
12. Click OK.
13. The System Tape Back-Up (for all data files) is complete.
7-30
Chapter 7: System Services
View/Print Error Logs
View/Print Error Logs is the eighth option on the ScanMaster System
Services Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to access
ScanMaster View/Delete Logs and Unlock Flags Files Menu screen.
This is the identical menu that is launched when the View/Delete
Suspend/Lock Files button is chosen. There are nine options on the
ScanMaster View/Delete Logs and Unlock Flags Files Menu.
•
Unlock Notfound
•
Unlock Random
•
Unlock Suspend
•
View/Print Error Log
•
Delete Error Log
•
View/Print EOD Log
•
View/Print ARC Log
•
View/Print FC Rate Log
•
View/Delete Suspends
For information on each of these functions, please see View/Delete
Suspend/Lock Files earlier in this chapter.
Chapter 8:
Personalizing Workstations
The purpose of this chapter is to enable the user to personalize
workstations on the ScanMaster Windows NT System.
This chapter discusses setting up the Register and Back Office control
files, as well as the Banner File. In addition, you can perform Reason
Code and Tax Table maintenance using System Services. Also
discussed in this chapter is how to configure a POS workstation
keyboard, and how to configure your system for types of acceptable
media.
Final sections discuss editing system Tax Codes, Foreign Currency
Exchange Rates and editing the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
8-2
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Personalization Menu
System Personalization is the fifth option on the ScanMaster Main
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-P) to access the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu.
Figure 8-1: Personalization Menu Screen
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-3
Personalization Menu Options
There are twelve options on the ScanMaster Personalization Menu
screen. They are:
•
Register Control File
•
Back Office Control File
•
Banner File
•
Reason Code Maintenance
•
Tax Table Maintenance
•
Keyboard Configurator
•
Media Configurator
•
Foreign Currency Rate Editor
•
Tax Code Editor
•
SRR Editor
•
Communication Parameters
•
Customer CRT Promo Editor
Click on EXIT to return to the ScanMaster Main Menu or EXIT TO
LOGIN to exit from the system.
Register Control File: The Register Control File sets the POS
workstation parameters for each POS workstation
Back Office Control File: The Back Office Control File sets back office
parameters for the Back Office PCs.
Banner File: The Banner File permits stores to customize a scrolling
banner that can display on the customer display at each POS
workstation.
8-4
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Reason Code Maintenance: Through this option, you can customize
Override, Refund, and Void reason codes.
Tax Table Maintenance: This option enables you to configure Tax
Tables 1-3 with exception ranges.
Keyboard Configurator: This option enables you to customize the
POS workstation keyboards.
Media Configurator: This option enables you to customize the system
media fields.
Foreign Currency Rate Editor: This option enables you to edit the
exchange rate for tendering foreign currency.
Tax Code Editor: This option enables you to assign a letter to each tax
table or combination of tax tables. The letter is printed on the customer
receipt when that tax or combination of taxes is used.
SRR Editor: The SRR Editor enables you to develop a customized
reconciliation report that displays all pertinent accounting information
for store balancing under three headings (Paidouts, Receipts &
Memos).
Communication Parameters: This option provides interface
parameters for stores using third-party host communication software
on their ScanMaster system.
Customer CRT Promo Editor: This option is used to set up store
promotions that display on the customer CRT at each POS workstation.
It can be used to promote sales, display messages, notify customers of
upcoming events or a variety of other reasons.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-5
Control File Options by Function
The Register Control File and Back Office Control File settings, as
defined through the first two menu options of the Personalization
Menu Screen, work together to serve store customization requirements.
Use this section in conjunction with the alphabetical listing (and
detailed descriptions) of Register Control File and Back Office Control
File settings found later in the chapter. Also see ScanMaster User
Guide – Appendix A.
Listed below are the functional groups of file option settings that need
to be adjusted based on specific store requirements. Identify the
functional group, locate the relevant settings and review the definition
for each option setting in the alphabetical listing.
Change settings using ScanMaster’s System Personalization screen.
Register Control File settings are changed using the Register Control
File Editor that groups settings into related tabs. The tab location for
each Register Control File setting is in parentheses.
The functional groups listed below are detailed on the following pages.
Major Area
Functional Group
Accounting
Balancing / Reports
Discounts
Electronic Journal
In Store Charge
Override / Refund / Void /
Media Swap
Tax
Tender Media (Checks / WIC /
Charge / EFT / EBT)
Maintenance
Customer Receipt and Display
Department / Subdepartment
Employees and Security
Tare / Weighed Items
Item (PLU) File / Item Movement
POS Functions
POS Functions - Miscellaneous
8-6
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Promotions
Electronic Coupons
Frequent Shopper
Manufacturer Coupons
Store Coupons
Store Coupons (Print)
Third Party Software
Third Party Software
Workstation
Peripherals
Workstation Peripherals
Do NOT Apply these
to 7452 with Dynakey
and Thermal Printer
Do NOT Apply these option
settings to the NCR 7452 with
Dynakey and Thermal Printer
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Accounting – Functional Groups
Balancing/Reports
Back Office Control File
# OF DAYS OF EFT LOG TO SAVE
# OF DAYS OF TLOG TO SAVE
ACCOUNTABILITY BY LANE
ADD DBL STORE COUP TO SALES
ADD DBL VENDOR COUPON TO SALES
ADD STORE COUPON TO SALES
CALC SRR ON CURRENT LINE
DAYS HISTORICAL DATA TO SAVE
DAYS OF HIST. ARCHIVES TO SAVE
EJ REPORTS USE ENHNCD ELC COUP
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL INSTALLED
ENABLE EJ PROCESSOR ON THIS PC
END WEEK ON DAY # (SUN=1)
FINANCE CHARGES COMPOUNDED
GIFTCERT O/S ADD INTO NET O/S
HIDE NRT TOTALS FROM EJ RPTS
LOGOFF WINDOWS AFTER EOD
MFG COUP O/S ADD INTO NET O/S
MONEY ORDER FEE
NUM OF DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS (1-3)
PRINT CASHIER LOG FILES
RUN ELEC. COUPON FIX AT EOD
SETTLE MEDIA COUNTS
SHOW SUSPENDED SALES AT EOD
ST COUP O/S ADD INTO NET O/S
STORE #
STORE NAME FOR REPORTS
8-7
8-8
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
THIS PC DOES THE END-OF-DAY
THIS PC PROCESSES TLOGS
TREAT CASHIER O/S AS MEMO
TREAT OFFICE O/S AS MEMO
USE AUTO PICKUP FEATURE
USE NORMAL BALANCING MODE
USE STORE SPREADSHEET
WEEKS OF SRR TO SAVE
Register Control File
MFG CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
ENABLE LANE ACCOUNTABILITY – (FINANCIALS)
EXCLUDE MEMO TOTALS FRM ACTVTY – (FINANCIALS)
USE MEDIA COUNTS – (FINANCIALS)
MONEY ORDER FEE – (GLOBAL/STORE)
CASH PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
CASH PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FS PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FS PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
WIC TENDER FORGIVES TAX – (MEDIA)
DISTRIBUTE MULTI-LANE EOD TIME – (MISC)
ENABLE RECEIPT HISTORY CAPTURE – (RECEIPT)
PRINT ACCOUNTABILITY RECEIPT – (SIGN ON/OFF)
PRINT PICKUP & LOAN RECEIPT – (SIGN ON/OFF)
TAX EXEMPT 1 FORGIVES ALL TAX – (TAX)
ENABLE MEDIA SWAP FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Discounts (Key Discounts)
Register Control File
AUTO APPLY DSC1 AT END OF SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
AUTO APPLY DSC2 AT END OF SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
AUTO APPLY DSC4 AT END OF SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
AUTO APPLY DSC5 AT END OF SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 1 (1=ITEM 2=SALE 3=BOTH) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 1 FIXED % (0=VARIABLE %) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 2 (1=ITEM 2=SALE 3=BOTH) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 2 FIXED % (0=VARIABLE %) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 4 (1=ITEM 2=SALE 3=BOTH) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 4 FIXED % (0=VARIABLE%) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 5 (1=ITEM 2=SALE 3=BOTH) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISC 5 FIXED % (0=VARIABLE %) – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 1 DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 1 MAXIMUM LIMIT – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 2 DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 2 MAXIMUM LIMIT – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 4 DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 4 MAXIMUM LIMIT – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 5 DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
DISCOUNT 5 MAXIMUM LIMIT – (DISCOUNTS)
ENABLE NET DISCOUNT – (DISCOUNTS)
ENABLE NON FRQ SHP SURCHARGE – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 1 IF CPN APPLIED – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 1 IF ITEM ON SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 2 IF CPN APPLIED – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 2 IF ITEM ON SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 4 IF CPN APPLIED – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 4 IF ITEM ON SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
EXCLUDE DSC 5 IF CPN APPLIED – (DISCOUNTS)
8-9
8-10
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
EXCLUDE DSC 5 IF ITEM ON SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM ITEM COUNT FOR DISC1 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM ITEM COUNT FOR DISC2 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM ITEM COUNT FOR DISC4 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM ITEM COUNT FOR DISC5 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM PURCHASE AMT FOR DISC1 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM PURCHASE AMT FOR DISC2 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM PURCHASE AMT FOR DISC4 – (DISCOUNTS)
MINIMUM PURCHASE AMT FOR DISC5 – (DISCOUNTS)
SURCHARGE DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
SURCHARGE PERCENTAGE ##.##% - (DISCOUNTS)
TOTAL DISC 1 SET DURING SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
TOTAL DISC 2 SET DURING SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
TOTAL DISC 4 SET DURING SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
TOTAL DISC 5 SET DURING SALE – (DISCOUNTS)
VERIFY NSC4 ACCT # ON DISC 1 – (DISCOUNTS)
VERIFY NSC4 ACCT # ON DISC 2 – (DISCOUNTS)
VERIFY NSC4 ACCT # ON DISC 4 – (DISCOUNTS)
VERIFY NSC4 ACCT # ON DISC 5 – (DISCOUNTS)
“YOU SAVED” WITH KEY DISCOUNT – (RECEIPT)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 1 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 2 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 4 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 5 – (SECURITY)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-11
Electronic Journal
Back Office Control File
# OF DAYS OF TLOG TO SAVE
EJ REPORTS USE EHNCD ELC COUP
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL INSTALLED
ENABLE EJ PROCESSOR ON THIS PC
HIDE NRT TOTALS FROM EJ RPTS
THIS PC PROCESSES TLOGS
In-Store Charge
Back Office Control File
COMPANY ADDRESS
COMPANY CITY, STATE, ZIP
COMPANY NAME
COMPANY TELEPHONE NUMBER
FINANCE CHARGES COMPOUNDED
NO PRINTER GRAPHICS AR STMNT
NO ZERO/NEG BALANCES AR STMNT
PRINT CHARGE LOG INFORMATION
TURN ON ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
Register Control File
ALLOW CHARGE ONLY IF BALANCE 0 – (INSTORE CHARGE)
AMOUNT COMPULSE ON CHARGE MENU – (INSTORE CHARGE)
DISABLE CHARGE PAYMENT – (INSTORE CHARGE)
DISPLAY CUSTOMER CHARGE DETAIL – (INSTORE CHARGE)
ENABLE INSTORE CHARGE – (INSTORE CHARGE)
MINCHARGE STATUS FOR MGR AUTH – (INSTORE CHARGE)
PRINT CUSTOMER HISTORY MSG. – (INSTORE CHARGE)
8-12
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Override / Refund / Void / Media Swap
Register Control File
USE MEDIA SWAP REAS. CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE OVERRIDE REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE REFUND REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE VOID REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
REMOVE VOIDS FROM DELAYED RCPT – (RECEIPT)
SECURITY ON ERROR CORRECT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MEDIA SWAP – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON OVERRIDE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON REFUND – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON VOID – (SECURITY)
ENABLE MEDIA SWAP FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE ERROR CORRECT VALIDATN – (VOID/REFUNDS)
ENABLE REFUND MODE OPERATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
ENABLE REFUND VALIDATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
ENABLE VOID VALIDATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
LINE ITEM REFUND LIMIT – (VOID/REFUNDS)
LINE ITEM VOID LIMIT – (VOID/REFUNDS)
TOTAL REFUND LIMIT – (VOID/REFUNDS)
TOTAL VOID LIMIT – (VOID/REFUNDS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tax
Back Office Control File
DESCRIPTION FOR TAX1
DESCRIPTION FOR TAX2
DESCRIPTION FOR TAX3
Register Control File
MFG CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN FORGIVES TAX - (COUPONS)
STORE CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX - (COUPONS)
STORE CPN FORGIVES TAX - (COUPONS)
WIC TENDER FORGIVES TAX – (MEDIA)
COMBINE ALL TAX TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
COMBINED TAX TOTAL DESCRIPTION – (RECEIPT)
ENABLE TAX 1 – (TAX)
ENABLE TAX 2 – (TAX)
ENABLE TAX 3 – (TAX)
TAX EXEMPT 1 FORGIVES ALL TAX – (TAX)
TAX 1 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX 2 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX 3 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX3 MEMO TOTAL DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX1 RATE ##.####% (0=TABLE) – (TAX)
TAX2 RATE ##.####% (0=TABLE) – (TAX)
TAX3 RATE ##.####% (0=TABLE) – (TAX)
USE TAX3 TOTAL FOR MEMO TOTAL – (TAX)
8-13
8-14
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tender Media (Checks / WIC / Charge / EFT / EBT)
Register Control File
ENABLE MICR READER SUPPORT – (DEVICES)
CONFIGURABLE TERM AMT VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE EFT LOGGING – (EFT)
EFT AUTHORIZATION TIMEOUT SECS – (EFT)
ENABLE EFT SETTLEMENT CAPTURE – (EFT)
ENABLE EFT TENDER REVERSAL – (EFT)
EXP YEAR <71 THEN YEAR>1999 – (EFT)
PRESS CLEAR AFTER EFT APPROVAL– (EFT)
PRINT EBT DECLINE SLIP – (EFT)
USE MEDIA COUNTS – (FINANCIALS)
AMOUNT COMPULSE ON CHARGE MENU – (INSTORE CHARGE)
ALARM IF DRAWER REMAINS OPEN – (MEDIA)
AUTOMATIC CHECK PAY TO FIELD – (MEDIA)
CAPTURE MAX WIC CHECK AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
CASH PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
CASH PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
CHECK WIC BEGIN & END DATES – (MEDIA)
DISABLE BANK CHARGE VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE BANK CHRG ACCT CAPTURE – (MEDIA)
DISABLE DEBIT CARD VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE EBT CASH CARD VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE STORE CHARGE VERIFY – (MEDIA)
DRAWER ALARM DELAY IN SECONDS – (MEDIA)
ENABLE GIFT CERT SOLD VALIDATN – (MEDIA)
ENABLE WIC SALE MODE – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FS PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FS PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
MAXIMUM # CHECKS/DAY – (MEDIA)
MAXIMUM # CHECKS/WEEK – (MEDIA)
MAXIMUM AMOUNT CHECKS/DAY – (MEDIA)
MAXIMUM AMOUNT CHECKS/WEEK – (MEDIA)
OPEN DRAWER BEFORE CHK VALIDTN – (MEDIA)
PAYROLL CHECK MAX AMOUNT (MGR) – (MEDIA)
PAYROLL CHECK MAX OVERTENDER – (MEDIA)
PAYROLL CHECK OVERTENDER (MGR) – (MEDIA)
USE ELECTRONIC CHECK – (MEDIA)
USE ENHANCED SPLIT QTY CALC. – (MEDIA)
USE FRQ SHP # FOR CHECK VERIFY – (MEDIA)
USE PAPER CHECK – (MEDIA)
USE PAYROLL CHECK – (MEDIA)
USE ROUTING # FOR NEG CHECK – (MEDIA)
WIC TENDER FORGIVES TAX – (MEDIA)
CHECK FILE (1=NEG 2=POS 0=NONE) – (MEDIA)
DISPLAY RUNNING FS TOTAL – (MISC)
DISPLAY CUSTOMER COMMENT INFO – (PROMOTIONS)
DISABLE ACCT# PRINT ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE ACCT# PRINT ON SIG SLP – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE CUST NAME ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE CUST NAME ON SIG SLIP – (RECEIPT)
PRINT 2ND PAYMNT SLIP FOR CUST – (RECEIPT)
RTRN TO ITM ENTRY DURING TENDR – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CHECK CASHING – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CURRENCY EXCH RATE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MEDIA SWAP – (SECURITY)
ENABLE MEDIA SWAP FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
8-15
8-16
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Maintenance
Customer Receipt and Display
Register Control File
ENABLE VIDEO CUSTOMER DISPLAY – (DEVICES)
USE 40 COLUMN CID MODE – (DEVICES)
STORE # - (GLOBAL/STORE)
PRINT CUSTOMER HISTORY MSG. – (INSTORE CHARGE)
BOTTLE DEPOSIT DESCRIPTION – (ITEMS)
BONUS POINTS DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE POINTS & BONUS POINTS – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE PRICE PTS & ITM/EC POINTS - (PROMOTIONS)
DEFAULT CID PROMOTION NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
ELECTRONIC COUPON DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
ITEM PRICE BASED POINTS DESC –(PROMOTIONS)
POINT FORMAT (0=AMT 1=NUMBER) – (PROMOTIONS)
POINTS DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE ALL TAX TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
COMBINE CPN & MULTIPLE SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINE STORE & MFG CPN SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINE STORE & MFG EC CPN SUB – (RECEIPT)
COMBINED CPN MULTIPLE DESC - (RECEIPT)
COMBINED TAX TOTAL DESCRIPTION – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE ACCT# PRINT ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE ACCT# PRINT ON SIG SLP – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE CHRG INFO ON SIG SLIP – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE CUST NAME ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE CUST NAME ON SIG SLIP – (RECEIPT)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
DISABLE FRQ SHP # ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE ITEMIZED EC ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE PRT OF IRI CPN RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE WIDE DEBIT SLIP PRINT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE WIDE RECEIPT PRINTING – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE WIDE VALIDATION PRINT – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH CHANGE – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH COUPON MULTIPLE – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH DISCOUNT – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH FREQ SHOPPER ITEMS – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH MFG & STORE COUPON – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH MFG & STORE EC CPN – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH RECEIPT HEADER 1,2,3 – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH RECEIPT TRAILER – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH RETURN & REFUND – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH SALE ITEMS – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH SUBTOTAL INFO – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH TENDERS – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH TPR SAVINGS – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH TRANSACTION TOTAL – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE HIGH YOU SAVED – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE WIDE RECEIPT HEADER 1,2,3 – (RECEIPT)
DOUBLE WIDE RECEIPT TRAILER – (RECEIPT)
ENABLE 7156 DELAYED RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
ENABLE RECEIPT HISTORY CAPTURE – (RECEIPT)
ENABLE YOU SAVED ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
FLAG SALE ITMS ON RECEIPT W/ $ – (ITEMS)
ITEM DETAIL ON JOURNAL PRINTER – (RECEIPT)
MFG CPN MULTIPLE DESCRIPTION – (RECEIPT)
PRINT 2ND PAYMNT SLIP FOR CUST – (RECEIPT)
PRINT CASHIER NAME ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
8-17
8-18
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
PRINT DUAL DELAYED RECEIPTS – (RECEIPT)
PRINT ELEC COUPONS AFTER ITEMS – (RECEIPT)
PRINT TO DATE FRQ SHP TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
PRINT TO PERIOD FRQ SHP TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
PRINT TPR SAVINGS AFTER ITEM – (RECEIPT)
RECEIPT HEADER LINE 1 – (RECEIPT)
RECEIPT HEADER LINE 2 – (RECEIPT)
RECEIPT HEADER LINE 3 – (RECEIPT)
RECEIPT TRAILER LINE 1 – (RECEIPT)
REDEMPTION RESET SPECIAL PROMO – (RECEIPT)
REMOVE VOIDS FROM DELAYED RECPT – (RECEIPT)
STORE CPN MULTIPLE DESCRIPTION – (RECEIPT)
TO DATE FRQ SHP TOTALS DESC – (RECEIPT)
TO PERIOD FRQ SHP TOTALS DESC– (RECEIPT)
TPR SAVINGS DESCRIPTION– (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH FRQ DISCOUNT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH KEY DISCOUNT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG COUPON – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG CPN MULT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STORE COUPON – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STORE CPN MULT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STR ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH TPR – (RECEIPT)
TAX 1 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX 2 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION – (TAX)
TAX 3 RECEIPT DESCRIPTION –(TAX)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Department / Subdepartment
Back Office Control File
ARE SUBDEPARTMENTS USED
Register Control File
BIRTHDATE DISPLAY AGE VERIFY – (ITEMS)
CUST AGE (0=DATE 1=ID 2=BOTH) – (ITEMS)
DEPT/PLU STATUS (0=PLU 1=DEPT) – (ITEMS)
DISABLE HALO/LALO CHECK ON – (ITEMS)
ENABLE DEPARTMENT VALIDATION – (ITEMS)
ENABLE DEPT # KEY FLIP CHART – (ITEMS)
ENABLE SALES RESTRICTION TABLE – (ITEMS)
SECURITY ON AGE RSTRCT DECLINE – (SECURITY)
8-19
8-20
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Employees and Security
Back Office Control File
SEC. LEVEL ON COMMUNICATIONS
SEC. LEVEL ON CUSTOMER MAINT.
SEC. LEVEL ON DAY END
SEC. LEVEL ON DEPARTMENT MNT.
SEC. LEVEL ON EMPLOYEE MAINT.
SEC. LEVEL ON ITEM MAINT.
SEC. LEVEL ON OFFICE PROC.
SEC. LEVEL ON PERSONALIZATION
SEC. LEVEL ON REPORTING
SEC. LEVEL ON SYSTEM SERVICES
USE ENHANCED SECURITY
Register Control File
MIN CHARGE STATUS FOR MGR AUTH – (INSTORE CHARGE)
ENABLE DEPARTMENT VALIDATION – (ITEMS)
ALARM IF DRAWER REMAINS OPEN – (MEDIA)
CASH PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
CASH PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
DISABLE BANK CHARGE VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE DEBIT CARD VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE EBT CASH CARD VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE STORE CHARGE VERIFY – (MEDIA)
DRAWER ALARM DELAY IN SECONDS – (MEDIA)
ENABLE GIFT CERT SOLD VALIDATN – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FC PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
FS PICKUP COMPULSE AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
FS PICKUP WARNING AMOUNT – (MEDIA)
OPEN DRAWER BEFORE CHK VALIDTN – (MEDIA)
DISABLE TRAINING MODE – (MISC)
DISABLE VALIDATION IN TRAINING – (MISC)
IDLE MODE TIMEOUT IN SECONDS – (MISC)
PRINT CASHIER NAME ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
ALLOW MANAGER OVERRIDE OF ACH – (SECURITY)
DISABLE KEY ENTRY OF MGR ID – (SECURITY)
DISABLE SIGNON/OFF SECURITY # - (SIGN ON/OFF)
MINIMUM SECURITY LEVEL FOR MGR – (SECURITY)
NO SECURITY IF MANAGER CASHIER – (SECURITY)
PREVENT MANAGER SELF-OVERRIDE – (SECURITY)
RTRN TO ITM ENTRY DURING TENDR – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON AGE RSTRCT DECLINE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CANCEL – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CHECK CASHING – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON COUPON PAIDOUT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CURRENCY EXCH RATE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 1 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 2 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 4 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 5 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DYNAMIC CUST BUILD – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON ERROR CORRECT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON HALO/LALO ERRORS – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MEDIA SWAP – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MISC. FUNCTIONS – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON NOSALE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON OVERRIDE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON PAIDOUT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON REFUND – (SECURITY)
8-21
8-22
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
SECURITY ON REPORT FUNCTION – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON RETRIEVE SALE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON RTRN TO ITEM ENTRY – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SALE OF GIFT CERT. – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SALE OF MONEY ORD. – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SUSPEND SALE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON TAX EXEMPTION – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON UTILITIES – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON VOID – (SECURITY)
CHECK CASHIER ACTIVE STATUS – (SIGN ON/OFF)
DISABLE DRAWER OPEN SIGNON/OFF – (SIGN ON/OFF)
ONE STEP ENTRY FOR SIGNON/OFF – (SIGN ON/OFF)
PRINT ACCOUNTABILITY RECEIPT – (SIGN ON/OFF)
PRINT PICKUP & LOAN RECEIPT – (SIGN ON/OFF)
SIGNOFF FROM IDLE IN SECONDS – (SIGN ON/OFF)
ENABLE ERROR CORRECT VALIDATN – (VOID/REFUNDS)
ENABLE REFUND VALIDATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
ENABLE VOID VALIDATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tare / Weighed Items
Back Office Control File
WEIGHT IN LBS (Y) (N) = KG.
Register Control File
ENABLE VARIABLE TARE – (ITEMS)
SCALE WEIGHT IN KILOGRAMS – (GLOBAL/STORE)
USE MANUAL TARE ENTRY – (ITEMS)
8-23
8-24
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Item (PLU) File/Item Movement
Back Office Control File
ALLOW ITEM DELETE W/MOVEMENT
COMMODITY CODE=FAMILY CODE
CREATE DAILY MOVEMENT FILES
DO NOT INCLUDE CPNS IN MOVEMNT
ENABLE HOST BATCH SEPARATION
ITEM HOST UPDATE RECS DON’T ADD
LBL APP 1=UG 2=GENERAL 0=BOTH
PAGE HOST BATCHES IN UPC ORDER
REGISTERS DO LOCAL ITEM UPDATE
STORE #
USE ITEM TRAIL FEATURE
USE MARGIN (Y) OR MARKUP (N)
USE REAL TIME ITEM MOVEMENT
Register Control File
BEEP SCANNER ON ITEM INTERVENT – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON MANUAL ITEM – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON NOT FOUND – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON OFFLINE SALE – (DEVICES)
USE LOCAL ITEM FILE UPDATE – (GLOBAL/STORE)
ALLOW MANUAL WEIGHT ENTRY – (ITEMS)
BIRTHDATE DISPLAY AGE VERIFY – (ITEMS)
BOTTLE DEPOSIT DESCRIPTION – (ITEMS)
COPY ITEM FILE AT REG. UPDATE – (ITEMS)
CUST AGE (0=DATE 1=ID 2=BOTH) – (ITEMS)
DEPT/PLU STATUS (0=PLU 1=DEPT) – (ITEMS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
DISABLE HALO/LALO CHECK ON UPC – (ITEMS)
ENABLE DEPARTMENT VALIDATION – (ITEMS)
ENABLE DEPT # KEY FLIP CHART – (ITEMS)
ENABLE SALES RESTRICTION TABLE – (ITEMS)
ENABLE VARIABLE TARE – (ITEMS)
FLAG SALE ITMS ON RECEIPT W/$ – (ITEMS)
REPROMPT SAME ITEM VIS VERIFY – (ITEMS)
USE AUTO NOT FOUND BATCHING – (ITEMS)
USE MANUAL TARE ENTRY – (ITEMS)
USE VAR WEIGHT 5 DIGIT PRICE – (ITEMS)
USE ENHANCED SPLIT QTY CALC. – (MEDIA)
USE LOCAL SCAN RESOURCE – (MISC)
PRINT TPR SAVINGS AFTER ITEM – (RECEIPT)
TPR SAVINGS DESCRIPTION – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH TPR – (RECEIPT)
ENABLE REFUND VALIDATION – (VOIDS/REFUNDS)
8-25
8-26
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
POS Functions (Miscellaneous)
Register Control File
BEEP SCANNER ON ITEM INTERVENT – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON MANUAL ITEM – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON NOT FOUND – (DEVICES)
BEEP SCANNER ON OFFLINE SALE – (DEVICES)
ENABLE DEPT # KEY FLIP CHART – (ITEMS)
ENABLE SALES RESTRICTION TABLE – (ITEMS)
REPROMPT SAME ITEM VIS VERIFY – (ITEMS)
ENABLE WIC SALE MODE – (MEDIA)
USE ELECTRONIC CHECK – (MEDIA)
USE PAPER CHECK – (MEDIA)
USE PAYROLL CHECK – (MEDIA)
BACKGROUND SCREEN COLOR 0-7 – (MISC)
CHECK FILE(1=NEG 2=POS 0=NONE) – (MEDIA)
DISABLE TRAINING MODE – (MISC)
DISABLE UPC REPEAT KEY (ENTER) – (MISC)
DISABLE VALIDATION IN TRAINING – (MISC)
DISP CUST NAME AT END OF SALE – (MISC)
DISPLAY RUNNING FS TOTAL – (MISC)
DISTRIBUTE MULTI-LANE EOD TIME – (MISC)
ENABLE CATALINA INTERACE – (MISC)
ENABLE CVC INTERFACE – (MISC)
ENABLE PAIDOUT ACCT FLIP CHART – (MISC)
ENABLE POWER FAIL RECOVERY – (MISC)
ENABLE RX ITEM INTERFACE – (MISC)
ENABLE SHOPPERS HOTLINE – (MISC)
END OF SALE DELAY IN SECONDS – (MISC)
IDLE MODE TIMEOUT IN SECONDS – (MISC)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
SCREEN SAVER MESSAGE – (MISC)
SCREEN SAVER TIMEOUT IN SEC. – (MISC)
USE LOCAL SCAN RESOURCE – (MISC)
USE MEDIA SWAP REAS. CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE OVERRIDE REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE REFUND REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
USE VOID REASON CODE MENU – (MISC)
ENABLE DYNAMIC CUSTOMER BUILD – (PROMOTIONS)
RTRN TO ITM ENTRY DURING TENDR – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CANCEL – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON CHECK CASHING – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON COUPON PAIDOUT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 1 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 2 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 4 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DISCOUNT 5 – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON DYNAMIC CUST BUILD – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON ERROR CORRECT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON HALO/LALO ERRORS – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MEDIA SWAP – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON MISC. FUNCTIONS – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON NOSALE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON OVERRIDE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON PAIDOUT – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON REFUND – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON REPORT FUNCTION – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON RETRIEVE SALE – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON RTRN TO ITEM ENTRY – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SALE OF GIFT CERT. – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SALE OF MONEY ORD. – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON SUSPEND SALE – (SECURITY)
8-27
8-28
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
SECURITY ON TAX EXEMPTION – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON UTILITIES – (SECURITY)
SECURITY ON VOID – (SECURITY)
ENABLE CHECK CASHING FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE COUPON PAIDOUT – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE GIFT CERTIFICATE SALES – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE MEDIA SWAP FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE MONEY ORDER SALES – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE PAIDOUT FUNCTION – (UTILITIES)
ENABLE REFUND MODE OPERATION – (VOID/REFUNDS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Promotions
Electronic Coupons
Back Office Control File
ALLOW MULT SAME ECPN-FRQSP LVL
DEFAULT ELEC. COUPON DEPT.
DO NOT INCLUDE CPNS IN MOVEMNT
EJ REPORTS USE EHNCD ELC COUP
Register Control File
COMBINE PRICE PTS & ITM/EC POINTS – (PROMOTIONS)
DEFAULT CID PROMOTION NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
ELECTRONIC COUPON DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE ENHANCED ELECTRONIC CPN – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE ENHANCED FRQ SHP PRGM – (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY STRCPN– (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY STRDBL– (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY MFGCPN– (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY MFGDBL – (PROMOTIONS)
MINIMUM PURCHASE FOR ELEC CPNS – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE STORE & MFG EC CPN SUB – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE ITEMIZED EC ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
PRINT ELEC COUPONS AFTER ITEMS – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STR ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
8-29
8-30
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Frequent Shopper
Back Office Control File
ALLOW MULT SAME ECPN-FRQSP LVL
BONUS POINT DESCRIPTION
FORCE FREQ. SHOPPER BIT ON
FREQ SHOPPER $$$(N) OR PNTS(Y)
FREQ.SHOP. LEVEL SET MANUALLY
POINT DESCRIPTION
Register Control File
ENABLE NON FRQ SHP SURCHARGE – (DISCOUNTS)
SURCHARGE DESCRIPTION – (DISCOUNTS)
SURCHARGE PERCENTAGE ##.##% - (DISCOUNTS)
ENABLE APT INTERFACE – (EFT)
PRINT CUSTOMER HISTORY MSG. – (INSTORE CHARGE)
USE FRQ SHP # FOR CHECK VERIFY – (MEDIA)
DISP CUST NAME AT END OF SALE – (MISC)
ADD BONUS PTS TO SPECIAL PROMO – (PROMOTIONS)
ADD FS DOLLRS TO SPECIAL PROMO – (PROMOTIONS)
ADD POINTS TO SPECIAL PROMO – (PROMOTIONS)
BONUS POINTS DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE POINTS & BONUS POINTS – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE PRICE PTS & ITM/EC POINTS – (PROMOTIONS)
DEFAULT CID PROMOTIONS NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
DISPLAY CUSTOMER COMMENT INFO – (PROMOTIONS)
DYNAMIC CUSTOMER DEFAULT LEVEL – (PROMOTIONS)
EAN CUST# TRIM 0=RIGHT 1=LEFT – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE DYNAMIC CUSTOMER BUILD – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE ENHANCED ELECTRONIC CPN – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE ENHANCED FRQ SHP PRGM – (PROMOTIONS)
FREQ. SHOPPER ROLLOVER AMOUNT – (PROMOTIONS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
FREQUENT SHOPPER PROGRAM DESC. – (PROMOTIONS)
FRQ SHP LEVEL MATCH IN EC FILE – (PROMOTIONS)
FRQ SHP LEVEL SET IN CUST FILE – (PROMOTIONS)
FRQ SHP STAT SET BY ACH VERIFY – (PROMOTIONS)
FRQ SHP STAT SET BY CHK VERIFY – (PROMOTIONS)
FRQ SHP STAT SET BY STORE CHRG – (PROMOTIONS)
ITEM PRICE BASED POINTS DESC – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER FREQ. SHOPPER $$ AMOUNT – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER FREQ. SHOPPER COUPON # – (PROMOTIONS)
POINT FORMAT (0=AMT 1=NUMBER) – (PROMOTIONS)
POINTS DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
PRINT FREQUENT SHOPPER MSG. – (PROMOTIONS)
PRINT NON FREQ. SHOPPER MSG. – (PROMOTIONS)
PRMPT FOR FRQ SH# AT NEW SALE – (PROMOTIONS)
PROMPT FOR FREQ SH # AT TOTAL – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO ACCUM BEGIN DATE – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO ACCUM BEGIN TIME – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO ACCUM END DATE – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO ACCUM END TIME – (PROMOTIONS)
SPECIAL PROMO DESCRIPTION – (PROMOTIONS)
UPC TYPE 4 CUST NUM SUPPORT – (PROMOTIONS)
USE ITEM PRICE BASED POINTS – (PROMOTIONS)
USE ITEM/EC PNTS & BONUS PNTS – (PROMOTIONS)
DISABLE FRQ SHP # ON RECEIPT – (RECEIPT)
PRINT TO DATE FRQ SHP TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
PRINT TO PERIOD FRQ SHP TOTALS – (RECEIPT)
REDEMPTION RESET SPECIAL PROMO – (RECEIPT)
TO DATE FRQ SHP TOTALS DESC – (RECEIPT)
TO PERIOD FRQ SHP TOTALS DESC – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH FRQ DISCOUNT – (RECEIPT)
SECURITY ON DYNAMIC CUST BUILD – (SECURITY)
8-31
8-32
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Manufacturer Coupons
Back Office Control File
ADD DBL VENDOR COUPN TO SALES
COMMODITY CODE=FAMILY CODE
DO NOT INCLUDE CPNS IN MOVEMNT
MFG COUP O/S ADD INTO NET O/S
USE COUPON LINKING FEATURE
Register Control File
ALLOW SCAN MFG CPN>ITM PRICE – (COUPONS)
AUTOMATE MFG CPN MULTIPLIER – (COUPONS)
CHECK CPN AGAINST DEPT. SALES – (COUPONS)
CHECK SCAN MFG CPN IN ITM FILE – (COUPONS)
DISABLE SCAN MFG COUPONS – (COUPONS)
ENABLE FAMILY CODE CPN CHECK – (COUPONS)
ENFORCE DEPT ENTRY ON MFG CPN – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MAX AMT. TO MULTIPLY – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MAX AMT. TO MULTIPLY2 – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MAX RESULT AMOUNT – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MAX RESULT AMOUNT2 – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MULTIPLIER (0=NONE) – (COUPONS)
MFG CPN MULTIPLIER2 (0=NONE) – (COUPONS)
PRICE HALO ON MFG COUPONS – (COUPONS)
PRICE LALO ON MFG COUPONS – (COUPONS)
SCAN CPN DESC (0=DEPT 1=ITEM) – (COUPONS)
DEFAULT CID PROMOTIONS NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY MFGCPN– (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY MFGDBL – (PROMOTIONS)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
COMBINE CPN & MULTIPLE SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINE STORE & MFG CPN SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINED CPN MULTIPLE DESC – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG COUPON – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG CPN MULT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH MFG ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
8-33
8-34
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Store Coupons
Back Office Control File
ADD DBL STORE COUP TO SALES
ADD STORE COUPON TO SALES
DO NOT INCLUDE CPNS IN MOVEMNT
ST COUP O/S ADD INTO NET O/S
USE COUPON LINKING FEATURE
Register Control File
AUTOMATE STORE CPN MULTIPLIER – (COUPONS)
CHECK CPN AGAINST DEPT. SALES – (COUPONS)
PRICE HALO ON STORE COUPONS – (COUPONS)
PRICE LALO ON STORE COUPONS – (COUPONS)
SCAN CPN DESC (0=DEPT 1=ITEM) – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN DISC. FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN FORGIVES TAX – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MAX AMT. TO MULTIPLY – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MAX AMT. TO MULTIPLY2 – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MAX RESULT AMOUNT – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MAX RESULT AMOUNT2 – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MULTIPLIER (0=NONE) – (COUPONS)
STORE CPN MULTIPLIER2 (0=NONE) – (COUPONS)
DEFAULT CID PROMOTIONS NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY STRCPN – (PROMOTIONS)
MIN PURCH NOT REDUCED BY STRDBL – (PROMOTIONS)
COMBINE CPN & MULTIPLE SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINE STORE & MFG CPN SUBTOT – (RECEIPT)
COMBINED CPN MULTIPLE DESC – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STORE COUPON – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STR CPN MULT – (RECEIPT)
“YOU SAVED” WITH STR ELEC CPN – (RECEIPT)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Store Coupons (Print)
Register Control File
DEFAULT CID PROMOTIONS NUMBER – (PROMOTIONS)
MAX # OF CPNS TO PRT UP TO 19 – (PROMOTIONS)
MAXIMUM # OF RANDOM WINNERS – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER FREQ. SHOPPER $$ AMOUNT – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER FREQ. SHOPPER COUPON # – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER TOTAL SALE AMOUNT – (PROMOTIONS)
OVER TOTAL SALE COUPON# – (PROMOTIONS)
RANDOM WINNER COUPON # – (PROMOTIONS)
RANDOM WINNER PROBABILITY – (PROMOTIONS)
UNDER TOTAL SALE AMOUNT – (PROMOTIONS)
UNDER TOTAL SALE COUPON # – (PROMOTIONS)
8-35
8-36
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Third Party Software
Back Office Control File
IS EBO INSTALLED
USE SHRINK TRAX INTERFACE
Register Control File
CONFIGURABLE TERM AMT VERIFY – (EFT)
EFT AUTHORIZATION TIMEOUT SECS – (EFT)
ELECTRONIC PAYMT TERM ATTACHED – (EFT)
ENABLE APT INTERFACE – (EFT)
ENABLE EFT SETTLEMENT CAPTURE – (EFT)
ENABLE EFT TENDER REVERSAL –(EFT)
ENABLE ELECTRONIC PAYMENT SYS – (EFT)
PRESS CLEAR AFTER EFT APPROVAL – (EFT)
PRINT EBT DECLINE SLIP – (EFT)
UNIVERSAL EFT AUTH FILE NAME – (EFT)
UNIVERSAL EFT SETLMNT FILE NAME – (EFT)
UNIVERSAL EFT STR & FRWD FILE – (EFT)
DISABLE BANK CHARGE VERIFY – (EFT)
DISABLE BANK CHRG ACCT CAPTURE – (MEDIA)
DISABLE DEBIT CARD VERIFY – (EFT)
ENABLE CATALINA INTERFACE – (MISC)
ENABLE CVC INTERFACE – (MISC)
ENABLE RX ITEM INTERFACE – (MISC)
ENABLE SHOPPERS HOTLINE –(MISC)
DISPLAY CUSTOMER COMMENT INFO – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE UNVRSL CREDIT INSERTION – (PROMOTIONS)
ENABLE UNVRSL MRKTNG INTERFACE – (PROMOTIONS)
ALLOW MANAGER OVERRIDE OF ACH – (SECURITY)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Workstation Peripherals
Back Office Control File
ENABLE 7800 ON THIS PC
ENABLE LM2100 INTERFACE
Register Control File
COIN CHANGER 0-NO 1-OCIA 2-SER – (DEVICES)
ENABLE MICR READER SUPPORT – (DEVICES)
ENABLE VIDEO CUSTOMER DISPLAY – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 4100 RS232 SCALE – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 7835/36/37 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 7870 RS232 SCAN/SCAL – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 7870 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 7880 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 7890 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 960LS RS232 (ICL) – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 960LS RS232 SCAN/SCL – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE 960LS RS485 SCAN/SCL – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE CYBERDATA 9 BIT 7824 – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE ML2010 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE MS951 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE NCR OCIA SCAN/SCALE – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE ORION RS232 SCAN/SCL – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE SP210 RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
INTERFACE SPACE RS232 SCANNER – (DEVICES)
USE 40 COLUMN CID MODE – (DEVICES)
ELECTRONIC PAYMT TERM ATTACHED – (EFT)
ENABLE APT INTERFACE – (EFT)
8-37
8-38
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Do Not Apply to 7452 with DynaKey and Thermal
Printer
Back Office Control File
ADD FORMFEED TO END OF REPORTS
Register Control File
BACKGROUND SCREEN COLOR 0-7 – (MISC)
END OF SALE DELAY IN SECONDS – (MISC)
SCREEN SAVER MESSAGE – (MISC)
SCREEN SAVER TIMEOUT IN SEC. – (MISC)
DISABLE WIDE DEBIT SLIP PRINT – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE WIDE RECEIPT PRINTING – (RECEIPT)
DISABLE WIDE VALIDATION PRINT – (RECEIPT)
ITEM DETAIL ON JOURNAL PRINTER – (RECEIPT)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-39
Register Control File
The Register Control File is the first option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to access
the ScanMaster Register Control File Editor Screen.
The Register Control File sets the control parameters for each POS
workstation. Upon accessing the Register Control File Editor screen,
click the functional tab which contains the setting(s) to change. The
Register Control File parameters for each POS workstation’s functional
grouping are displayed by lane. On some tabs, you may need to use
the up and down scroll arrows to locate the setting. Next, locate the
first lane to change by using the left and right arrows until the lane’s
column heading is displayed.
Note: To quickly access a register’s settings in situations where there
are several lanes, click on the pull down arrow in the QUICK SELECT
REGISTER window and select the number of the POS workstation to
setup or maintain.
Double-click in the desired cell to change or highlight the cell and press
the EDIT CELL button. If using the up and down arrows to highlight
the desired cell, press ENTER. In the blank area below the tab,
ScanMaster will either display a data entry field or a radio button along
the field’s current value. Make the desired change and press OK. The
cell will display in yellow signifying a change.
To copy the change(s) to other lanes, click on the COPY LANE button.
Click on the specific lane(s) or press the ALL LANES button to copy
the change to each lane. When finished, click the COPY button.
ScanMaster will respond with, “Copy only changes?”. Answering
“Yes” will copy only the changed fields to the specified lane(s).
Answering “No” will copy all Register Control File settings to the
specified lane(s).
To copy just the changes to a specific cell to other lanes, click the COPY
CELL button. Click on the specific lane(s) or press the ALL LANES
button to copy the cell change to each lane. When finished, click the
COPY button.
8-40
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
To correct errors during edit, click on the UNDO CELL button to
return the highlighted cell to its pre-saved value. To return a
highlighted row of changed cells to their pre-saved value, click on the
UNDO ROW button.
When finished, click the SAVE button. ScanMaster will automatically
highlight the lanes that have had changes made to their settings. Click
SAVE and the changes will be saved for those workstations. To
deselect a workstation, click the highlighted lane or click NONE to
deselect all lanes.
Each POS workstation has its own Control File so each POS
workstation can be set up differently. When a Register Control File is
edited, the Control File is created in the Update Directory on the Server
PC.
Note: The POS workstation reads the file from the Update Directory
when an update or Day-End Procedure is performed.
If you click EXIT before saving your changes, ScanMaster displays
“Changes have been made. Are you sure you wish to exit?”. Click
“Yes” to abort any changes made and return to the System
Personalization Menu. Press “No” to return to the open Tab.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Figure 8-2: Register Control File Editor Screen
8-41
8-42
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Register Control File Configuration
Register Control Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List
Register Control File Settings are shown below in alphabetic order. In
ScanMaster, the individual setting will appear in the functional folder
tab listed in brackets.
Example: The first Register Control file option “Add Bonus Pts to
Special Promo” will be found on the Promotions Tab of theRegister
Control File Editor.
Register Control File Option Descriptions
A
Add Bonus Pts to Special Promo [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any customer frequent shopper Bonus
Points accumulated during the Special Promotional time period are
included in the Special Promotional Points totals bucket. In addition,
these points will also be included in the Bonus Points totals bucket.
Add FS Dollrs to Special Promo [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any Frequent Shopper dollars
accumulated during the Special Promotional time period are included
in the Special Promotional Points totals bucket. In addition, these
points are included in the Frequent Shopper Dollars totals bucket.
Add Points to Special Promo [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any frequent shopper Points accumulated
during the Special Promotional time period are included in the Special
Promotional Points totals bucket. In addition, these points will also be
included in the Points totals bucket.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-43
Alarm If Drawer Remains Open [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” an alarm sounds if the cash drawer
remains open.
Allow Charge Only If Balance 0 [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If the Enable Instore Charge field and this field are set to “Yes,”
customers can make new store charges only if their old charge account
balance is zero.
Allow Manager Override Of ACH [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the manager can override Automated
Clearing House (ACH) denial codes.
Allow Manual Weight Entry [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” weights can be entered manually using
the Manual Weight key on the POS Workstation. If set to “No,”
manual weight entry is not allowed at the POS Workstation.
Allow Scan Mfg. Cpn > Itm Price [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation accepts a
manufacturer’s coupon that bears a value greater than that of the item
purchased. The Disable Scan Mfg. Coupons field must be set to “No”
for this option to be functional.
Amount Compulse on Charge Menu [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the charge amount must be entered before
the CHARGE key is pressed.
Auto Apply Dsc1 (2, 4, 5) At End Of Sale [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system automatically applies Discount
1 (2, 4 or 5) at the end of all sales without the cashier pressing the
DISCOUNT key.
8-44
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Automate Mfg CPN Multiplier [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system automatically doubles the
value of manufacturers’ coupons at the POS workstation. If this field
and the Automate Store CPN Multiplier setting (below) are both
“Yes,” the DOUBLE COUPON key acts as a DOUBLE COUPON
EXEMPTION key. If either one is set to no or if both are set to no, the
DOUBLE COUPON key acts as an Accept key. If both are no, you need
to ring or scan the coupon first then hit the Double Coupon Key.
Automate Store CPN Multiplier [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system automatically doubles the
value of store coupons at the POS workstation. If this field and the
Automate Mfg CPN Multiplier setting (above) are both “Yes,” the
DOUBLE COUPON key acts as a DOUBLE COUPON EXEMPTION
key. If either one is set to no or if both are set to no, the DOUBLE
COUPON key acts as an Accept key. If so you need to ring or scan the
coupon first then hit the Double Coupon Key.
Automatic Check Pay To Field [Media]
Thirty-eight (38)-character alpha/numeric field. If the Use Automatic
Check Writing field is set to “Yes,” this is the heading that prints in the
Pay To field on the face of the check.
B
Background Screen Color 0-7 [Misc]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field allows the selection of a
background screen color for POS workstations that are equipped with
VGA color monitors. (The foreground is always white.) The color
selections are: 0=Black, 1=Blue, 2=Green, 3=Cyan, 4=Red, 5=Magenta,
6=Brown, and 7=White.
Beep Scanner on Item Intervent [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No
and is only valid for 7870, 7880, and 7890 model scanners and
scanner/scales. If this field is set to “Yes,” the scanner at the POS
workstation will beep twice any time a cashier intervention is
necessary to complete a transaction.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-45
Beep Scanner on Manual Item [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No
and is only valid for 7870, 7880, and 7890 model scanners and
scanner/scales. If set to “Yes,” the scanner produces an audible tone
when an item is manually entered on the POS workstation. If set to
“No,” the scanner does not produce any tones when an item is
manually entered on the POS workstation.
Beep Scanner on Not Found [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This field is only valid for 7870, 7880, and 7890 model scanners and
scanner/scales. If set to “Yes,” the scanner produces two audible tones
when a not found error occurs on the POS workstation. If set to “No,”
the scanner does not produce any tones when a not found error occurs
on the POS workstation.
Beep Scanner on Offline Sale [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This field is only valid for 7870, 7880, and 7890 model scanners and
scanner/scales. If set to “Yes,” the scanner produces an audible tone
when a new sale is initiated and the POS workstation is in Offline
mode. If set to “No,” the scanner does not produce any tones when a
new sale is initiated and the POS workstation is in Offline mode.
Birthdate Display Age Verify [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field and the Enable Sales Restriction Table field are set to “Yes,”
the screen of the POS workstation displays the minimum birth date
that is required for the customer to make the purchase. See the section
titled “Department Restriction Matrix” in Chapter Three, “Performing
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance,” in the ScanMaster User’s
Guide for more information on setting up a department restriction
matrix.
Bonus Points Description [Promotions]
Sixteen (16) character alphanumeric field. Enter a user-defined Bonus
Points description in this field. The default setting is “Bonus Pnts.”
This field is used in conjunction with the Frequent Shopper Program
Desc.
8-46
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Bottle Deposit Description [Items]
Fourteen (14) character alpha/numeric field. Enter a bottle deposit
description in this field as you want it to display on the customer
receipt.
C
Capture Max WIC Check Amount [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This option works in conjunction with the Enable WIC Sale Mode field.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts the cashier to enter
the maximum amount of the WIC check.
Cash Pickup Compulse Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of cash specified in this field, the POS workstation screen prompts the
cashier with the message: “Must DO Pickup.” This warning displays
at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made. The cashier
cannot continue to operate the POS workstation. When the cashier
presses CLEAR, the screen prompts the cashier with the message:
“Enter Manager ID.” The manager’s password must be entered before
the cashier can continue with the sale.
Cash Pickup Warning Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of cash specified in this field, the POS workstation screen prompts the
cashier with the message: “Please Do Pickup.” The warning displays
at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made. The cashier can
continue to operate the POS workstation by pressing CLEAR when the
warning displays.
Check Cashier Active Status [Sign On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system requires a cashier to log on to
the back office PC before signing on at the POS workstation. If a
cashier attempts to sign on to the POS workstation before logging on to
the back office PC, the “Cashier Inactive” message displays.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-47
Check CPN Against Dept. Sales [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation checks the value
of entered coupons against department sales. The value of entered
coupons cannot exceed department sales.
Check File(1=Neg 2=Pos 0=none) [Misc]
One (1) digit numeric field. The system has the capability of having a
Negative Check File, a Positive Check File, or neither.
If you enter 1 in this field, the POS workstation searches the Negative
Check File any time a cashier enters a checking account number. If the
account number entered at the POS workstation is in the Negative
Check File with a status code greater than 0, the cashier screen displays
“Manager needed - Code #.” A manager may decide to accept the
check by pressing ENTER and entering a Manager ID, or deny the
check by pressing CLEAR, which permits another type of tender for
the transaction. There are up to nine (9) code numbers that can display
at the POS Workstation. (For more information, see Chapter Five,
“Customer Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.)
If you enter 2 in this field, the POS workstation searches the Customer
Maintenance File any time a cashier enters a checking account number.
This file should contain information on everyone who can cash a
check. The Positive Check File looks at the following criteria: customer
account numbers on file, customer status (0 = Good Account; 1-9 =
Manager Needed), the number of checks per day and per week that are
allowed, and the check amount limit per day and per week. If the
customer status requires management attention, or if the limits on
checks and check amounts are reached, the POS workstation prompts
for a Manager ID number.
If you enter 0 in this field, the POS workstation does not prompt the
cashier for an account number.
8-48
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Check Scan Mfg Cpn In Itm File [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system checks the Item File when a
cashier scans a manufacturer’s coupon to see if the coupon number
exists in the Item File. If it exists, the system uses the price from the
Item File rather than the price on the 2-digit numeric suffix of the
coupon. This option is helpful for known coupons that are bar-coded
incorrectly.
Check WIC Begin & End Dates [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prompts for the
beginning and ending dates on the WIC check in MM/DD/YY format.
If the entered values do not correspond to the POS date, the WIC check
is denied.
Coin Changer 0=No 1=OCIA 2=Ser [Devices]
One (1) digit numeric field. If this field is set to “0,” it denotes that a
coin changer is not attached. If this field is set to “1,” a coin changer is
attached to the OCIA port. If this is set to “2,” the coin changer is
attached to the RS232 serial port.
Combine All Tax Totals [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” to combine all tax totals on the customer receipt.
This field is used in conjunction with the Combine Tax Total
Description option.
Combine Cpn & Multiple Subtot [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all coupons and coupon multiples are
combined into two subtotal lines on the customer receipt. For
example, all store coupons and store coupon multiples combine into
one line, while all manufacturer coupons and manufacturer coupon
multiples combine on a second line. When set to No, each line displays
separately on the customer receipt. This option is used in conjunction
with the Combine Store & Mfg. Cpn. Subtot option. If both options are
set to yes, all coupon information is combined into one line.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-49
Combine Points & Bonus Points [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all frequent shopper points and bonus
points are combined into one subtotal line on the customer receipt.
When set to No, each line displays separately on the customer receipt.
Combine Price Pts & Itm/EC Points [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster will combine all price-based
points and Item/Electronic Coupon points into one subtotal line on the
customer receipt. When set to No, each line displays separately on the
customer receipt. This option is used in conjunction with the Use Item
Price Based Points and Use Item/EC Pnts & Bonus Pnts options.
Combine Store & Mfg Cpn Subtot [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all store and manufacturer coupons are
combined into one subtotal line on the customer receipt. In addition, a
second coupon line prints, combining any coupons or coupon
multiples. When set to No, each line displays separately on the
customer receipt. This option is also used in conjunction with the
Combine Cpn & Multiple Subtotal option. If both options are set to
yes, all coupon information is combined into one line.
Combine Store & Mfg EC Cpn Sub [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all store and manufacturer electronic
coupons are combined into one subtotal line on the customer receipt.
If this option is set to No, store and manufacturer electronic coupons
are listed on separate subtotal lines on the customer receipt.
Combined Cpn Multiple Desc [Receipt]
Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Enter a user-defined coupon
multiple description in this field. This field is used in conjunction with
the Combine Cpn & Multiple Subtot, Combine Store & Mfg Cpn
Subtot, and the Combine Store & Mfg. EC Cpn. Sub options.
8-50
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Combined Tax Total Description [Receipt]
Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Enter a user-defined tax total
description in this field. The default description is “All Taxes.” This
option is used in conjunction with the Combine All Tax Totals option.
Configurable Term Amt Verify [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster’s media type settings (for
example, Visa or MasterCard) will determine whether the EFT
terminal prompts for customer amount verification. If this field is set to
“No,” EFT terminal settings will determine whether customer amount
verification is performed.
Copy Item File At Reg. Update [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system automatically copies the
Item File to the POS workstation during Update and End-Of-Day
Procedures.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-51
Cust Age (0=Date 1=Id 2=Both) [Items]
One (1) digit numeric field. (Enter 0, 1, or 2 in this field.) This field
restricts the sale of items (such as alcohol) on certain days and by
customer age. If you set up a Department Restriction Matrix restricting
the sale of items such as alcoholic beverages to customers, the POS
workstation can verify that the cashier has checked the customer’s age
by prompting for the entry of the customer’s birthday, ID number, or
both.
If you enter 0 in this field, the cashier must enter the customer’s
birthdate for any items in restricted departments. The system verifies
the customer’s age from the Department Restriction Matrix. If the
customer is not of age, the POS workstation displays the message that
the customer is not of age.
If you enter 1 in this field, the POS workstation prompts the cashier to
enter an ID number (up to nine (9) digits) given by the customer. This
information is stored in the system.
If you enter 2 in this field, the POS workstation prompts for both the
date and an ID number.
8-52
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
D
Default CID Promotion Number [Promotions]
Four (4) digit numeric field. This option works only if the Enable
Video Customer Display option is enabled. When the Enable Video
Customer Display option is active, stores can display a default
promotional message on the screen by entering the four digit
promotional number in this field.
Dept/PLU Status (0=PLU 1=Dept) [Items]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field instructs the system to obtain
information from either the Item File or the Department File regarding
food stamps, taxes, discounts, and other status settings.
If you select to follow the PLU setup contained in the Item File, you
must maintain all status information on each sales item. When a
cashier scans an item, the system searches the Item File for: PLU #,
Description, Price, and all status information.
If the system follows the department setup, the system searches the Item
File for UPC #, Description, and Price, but searches the Department
File for status information. By following department status, you do
not maintain status information in Item Maintenance and no check
marks display in the item status check boxes in the Item File.
There may be occasions in which item status is not the same as
department status. (For example, bird seed is in the Grocery
Department, where most products are food-stampable and nontaxable, and bird seed is the exception.) In these situations, go to the
Item Maintenance Screen and enter the PLU number of the product
whose status you wish to change and enter a check mark in the
appropriate status box. This action reverses the department status of
the sales item. See Chapter Three, “Performing Department/
Subdepartment Maintenance” and Chapter Four, “Performing
Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance,” in the ScanMaster User
Guide for more information.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-53
Disable Acct# Print on Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the account number is not printed on the
receipt at the end of the transaction.
Disable Acct# Print on Sig Slp [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the account number is not printed on the
signature slip at the end of a charge transaction.
Disable Bank Charge Verify [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. This field works with the Enable Bank Charge Media field. If
you set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts at total time with the
message: “Charge Approved Yes or No.” This prompt reminds
cashiers to make sure the charge is approved if a stand-alone payment
system is installed at the store. It also permits the cashier to press the
NO key if the charge is denied in order to permit the use of another
tender type.
Disable Bank Chrg Acct Capture [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation does not require the
cashier to enter a bank charge account number at tender time. If No is
selected, a menu listing available charge option displays. Options
include: American Express, Visa, Master Card and Discover.
Disable Charge Payment [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Use this field in conjunction with the Enable Instore Charge option
(Register Control File). If this field is set to “Yes,” ScanMaster disables
the option to accept charge payments at the POS terminal. The Enable
Instore Charge option must be turned on in order for this option to
work.
Disable Chrg Info on Sig Slip [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” in-store charge account balance information is not
printed on the signature slip. If set to “No,” in-store charge account
balance information is printed on the signature slip when applicable.
8-54
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Disable Cust Name on Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer name is not printed on the
receipt at the end of the transaction.
Disable Cust Name on Sig Slip [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer name is not printed on the
signature slip at the end of the transaction.
Disable Debit Card Verify [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. This field works with the Enable Debit Card Media field. If you
set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts at total time with the
message: “Debit Approved Yes or No.” This prompt reminds cashiers
to make sure the debit is approved if a stand-alone payment system is
installed at the store. It also permits the cashier to press the NO key if
the debit is denied in order to permit the use of another tender type.
Disable Drawer Open Signon/off [Sign On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the drawer does not open at sign-on or
sign-off.
Disable EBT Cash Card Verify [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This field works with the Enable Bank Charge Media option. If you
set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts at total time with the
message: “EBT approved Yes or No.” This prompt reminds cashiers to
make sure the EBT is approved if an unattached EFT system is in place
at the store. It also permits the cashier to press the No key if the EBT is
denied in order to permit the use of another tender type.
Disable EFT Logging [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” EFT transactions do not update EFT log files. If set to
“No,” all EFT transactions are logged to the EFT Authorization log file,
the EFT Store and Forward log file, or both.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-55
Disable Frq Shp # on Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this option is set to “Yes,” the customer’s frequent shopper number
does not display on the customer receipt when entered during a
purchase. If set to “No,” the customer’s frequent shopper number
displays.
Disable Halo/Lalo Check On UPC [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system does not check scanned
items against the Halo/Lalo amounts set in the department file. For
more information on the department file, see Chapter Three,
“Performing Department/Subdepartment Maintenance,” in the
ScanMaster User’s Guide. When set to “No”, Halo/Lalo amounts are
checked only for item UPCs, not for Store Coupons or Vendor
Coupons.
Disable Itemized EC on Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
The system default is N, meaning any electronic coupons applied to
the sale are itemized (along with their amounts) on the bottom of the
customer receipt. If this option is set to Y, any electronic coupons
applied to the sale are not itemized on the receipt.
Disable Key Entry Of Mgr Id [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If this field is set to “Yes” and the Security Type field is set to “1”
(ID), the manager can only scan an ID number. The manager cannot
manually enter the ID number.
Disable Prt of IRI CPN Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the IRI coupon receipt is not printed on the bottom of
the customer receipt when applicable. If set to “No,” the IRI coupon
receipt is printed on the bottom of the receipt when applicable.
Disable Scan Mfg Coupons [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” manufacturer’s coupons cannot be
scanned.
8-56
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Disable Signon/off Security # [Sing On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier only needs to enter the cashier
ID number at logoff time. The 3-digit security number is not needed.
Disable Store Charge Verify [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. This field works with the Enable Store Charge Media field. If you
set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts at total time with the
message: “Charge Approved Yes or No.” This prompt reminds
cashiers to make sure the charge is approved if a store charge system is
in place at the store. It also permits the cashier to press the NO key if
the charge is denied in order to permit the use of another tender type.
Disable Training Mode [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the training mode is not available on the
POS workstation.
Disable UPC Repeat Key (ENTER) [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation’s REPEAT key is
inactive. ENTER now performs the Repeat function.
Disable Validation In Training Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all validation printing is disabled in the
training mode.
Disable Wide Debit Slip Print [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the debit slip information prints in singlewidth format.
Disable Wide Receipt Printing [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the receipt header line prints in singlewidth format.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-57
Disable Wide Validation Print [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the validation information prints in singlewidth format.
Disc 1 (2, 4, 5) (1=Item 2=Sale 3=Both) [Discounts]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field requires the number one (1), two
(2), or three (3), which activates when Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) is available.
One (1) = allows a discount by line item, two (2)= allows discount at
end of sale and three (3)=allows discount by line item and at end of
sale. For the system to apply a discount, the department or item must
have a Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) status. See Chapter Three, “Performing
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance” and Chapter Four,
“Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance,” in the
ScanMaster User’s Guide for information on enabling discounts for
departments or items.
Disc 1 (2, 4, 5) Fixed % (0=variable %) [Discounts]
Two (2) digit numeric field. If Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) status is enabled
for an item or department, enter a discount type in this field. The
discount can be either a fixed percent or a variable percent. If it is a
fixed percent, enter the percentage. (If you enter a single digit, the
system adds a “0” at the beginning of the number.) If the discount is a
variable percent, leave all zeros in this field. A variable discount
permits the cashier to enter the discount percentage at the POS
workstation.
See Chapter Three, “Performing Department/ Subdepartment
Maintenance” and Chapter Four, “Performing Immediate and Batch
Item Maintenance,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide for information on
enabling discounts for departments or items.
Discount 1 (2, 4, 5) Description [Discounts]
Sixteen (16)-character alpha/numeric field. The description in this
field displays on the customer’s receipt to explain Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5).
Discount 1 (2, 4, 5) Maximum Limit [Discounts]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field determines the maximum
discount a customer can receive per order from Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5).
All discount amounts above this limit are not given to the customer.
8-58
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Disp Cust Name at End of Sale [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the name of the customer displays on the
screen if the name variable has been set. This variable can be set by
debit cards, bank charges, frequent shopper customer charges, or
positive check account numbers.
Display Customer Charge Detail [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This option is used in conjunction with the in-store charge module.
Before you can activate this option, the Enable Instore Charge field
must be set to “Yes.” If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier’s screen
displays the customer’s account number, name, current balance, charge
amount, and new balance when the cashier accepts an in-store charge
as a tender type. The system prompts the cashier to “Accept Charge
Transaction Y/N.”
Display Customer Comment Info [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the POS workstation displays any
comments about that customer as detailed in the Customer
Maintenance screen. The POS workstation prompts the cashier to first
enter that customer’s frequent shopper number and the comments are
then displayed. The cashier must press Clear to continue with the sale.
Display Running FS Total [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation displays a running
food stamp total. If you set this field to “No,” the POS workstation
displays the number of items in the transaction.
Distribute Multi-Lane EOD Time [Misc]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” POS workstations will reboot using the
following formula for time delay: (register # / 5) * 20 seconds. This is
done to ensure only five POS workstations will try to log on to the file
server PC at a given time. For example, if you have a 15-store, the first
five workstations will reboot immediately following the end-of-day,
the next five will reboot 20 seconds after that, while the last five will
reboot 20 seconds after that.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-59
Double High Change [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the change line on the customer receipt
displays in double high character format.
Double High Coupon Multiple [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any multiple coupons applied to the sale
displays on the customer receipt in double high character format.
Double High Discount [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any discounts applied to the sale displays
on the customer receipt in double high character format.
Double High Freq Shopper Items [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any frequent shopper items applied to the
sale displays on the customer receipt in the double high character
format.
Double High Mfg & Store Coupon [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any manufacturer or store coupons
applied to the sale displays on the customer receipt in double high
character format.
Double High Mfg & Store EC Cpn [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any manufacturer or store electronic
coupons applied to the sale displays on the customer receipt in double
high character format.
Double High Receipt Header 1 (2, 3) [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” receipt header 1 (2 or 3) information
displays in double high character format. This setting is often used in
conjunction with the Double Wide Receipt Header setting.
8-60
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Double High Receipt Trailer [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” receipt trailer information displays in
double high character format. This setting is often used in conjunction
with the Double Wide Receipt Trailer setting.
Double High Return & Refund [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any return or refund items applied to the
sale displays on the customer receipt in double high character format.
Double High Sale Items [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any sale items purchased displays on the
customer receipt in double high character format.
Double High Subtotal Info [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” subtotal lines on the customer receipt
displays in double high character format.
Double High Tenders [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” tender lines on the customer receipt
displays in double high character format.
Double High TPR Savings [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” any Temporary Price Reduction (TPR)
applied to the sale displays on the customer receipt in double high
character format.
Double High Transaction Total [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the transaction total line on the customer
receipt displays in double high character format.
Double High You Saved [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the “You Saved” line on the customer
receipt displays in double high character format.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-61
Double Wide Receipt Header 1 (2, 3) [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” receipt header 1 (2 or 3) information
displays in double wide character format. This setting is often used in
conjunction with the Double High Receipt Header setting. When both
options are enabled, the receipt header line prints 19 characters or less.
Double Wide Receipt Trailer [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” receipt header information displays in
double wide character format. This setting is often used in conjunction
with the Double High Receipt Trailer setting. When both options are
enabled, the receipt trailer line prints 19 characters or less.
Drawer Alarm Delay In Seconds [Media]
Four (4) digit numeric field. If the POS workstation drawer alarm is
enabled, enter the time in seconds in this field. The alarm will go off if
the drawer remains open after the specified time expires.
Dynamic Customer Default Level [Promotions]
One (1) digit numeric field. Values include 0 through 9. Enter the
frequent shopper level customers will be assigned when a frequent
shopper customer is dynamically built at the POS workstation.
E
EAN Cust # Trim 0 = Right 1 = Left [Promotions]
One (1) digit numeric field. Enter 0 or 1 in this field. If set to “0,” the
right digit is trimmed and the left 12 digits of a 13-digit EAN Code are
used as the customer number. If set to “1,” the left digit is trimmed
and the right 12 digits of a 13-digit EAN Code are used as the customer
number.
8-62
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
EFT Authorization Timeout Secs [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” enter the number of seconds to wait for
EFT approval before timing out. If approval is not gained in that time,
the following message displays: “EFT Authorization Timeout.” The
cashier can then try for offline approval (if permitted through the
media configurator) or accept another form of tender. If this field is set
to zero (0), the system default is 120 seconds.
Electronic Coupon Description [Promotions]
Twenty (20) character alpha/numeric field. Enter the electronic
coupon program name in this field as you want it to display on the
customer receipt or display. If you leave this field blank, the system
will use “Electronic Coupon” as the default name.
Electronic Paymt Term Attached [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Select Yes if you are using an external Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR)
and PIN capture device.
Enable “You Saved” On Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” a configurable “You Saved” message is
displayed on the bottom of the customer receipt. If you set this field to
“No,” no other “You Saved” options can be configured.
Enable 7156 Delayed Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system permits the delay of the
printing of a receipt for a previous sale (as the customer writes a
personal check, for example), while permitting the initiation of a new
sale.
Enable APT Interface [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” you must have third-party package
software and Vision Value hardware for this option to be functional.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-63
Enable Catalina Interface [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” POS workstations connected to the
ScanMaster system will send POS data to the Catalina server.
Enable Check Cashing Function [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” cashiers can cash checks outside of a sale
at the POS workstation.
Enable Coupon Paidout [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” cashiers can perform paidout functions for a
coupon outside of a sale. For example, if a customer forgets to turn in
a coupon until after the sale is over, the cashier can reimburse the
customer for that coupon outside the sale.
Enable CVC Interface [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This field is only valid when the POS workstation is in Online mode. If
set to “Yes,” the POS Workstation sends CVC marketing data across
the network during transactions. If set to “No,” the POS workstation
does not send CVC marketing data across the network during
transactions.
Enable Department Validation [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system validates the cashier’s entry of
a department. You must have department validation active in
Department Maintenance for this option to work. For detailed
instructions on setting up departments, see Chapter Three,
“Performing Department/Subdepartment Maintenance,” in the
ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Enable Dept # Key Flip Chart [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” when the cashier presses the
DEPARTMENT NUMBER key at the POS workstation, a flip chart
displays all departments in the Department File.
8-64
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Enable Dynamic Customer Build [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier can add a new customer
account to the ScanMaster customer file from the POS
workstation. Simply enter the new customer number and later add
specific customer information at the back office workstation.
Enable EFT Settlement Capture [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “yes,” ScanMaster will capture all EFT
transaction activity and write it to a history file
(F:\Grocery\Files\EFTSETTL.DAT). This file is used by the store’s
EFT manager to balance EFT transactions against ScanMaster.
Enable EFT Tender Reversal [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the cashier can reverse a partially tendered
EFT transaction during the sale. All partial tenders will be reversed
automatically when the cashier presses the Clear key. For example, a
cashier can use this feature to cancel a sale during EFT, or to add more
items to a partially tendered EFT transaction. Tender reversal takes
place when a cashier clears out of tender entry mode back into sale
entry mode.
Enable Electronic Payment Sys [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation recognizes an
external payment device for external payment, such as Verifone or
OMNI.
Enable Enhanced Electronic Cpn [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” this option replaces the standard
electronic coupon file and combines frequent shopper and electronic
coupon options into one file. For detailed instructions, see Chapter
Five, “Maintaining Customer Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-65
Enable Enhanced Frq Shp Prgm [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This field works in conjunction with the Enable Enhanced Electronic
Cpn field. If you set this field to “Yes,” this option replaces the
standard frequent shopper file and uses the enhanced electronic
coupon file for frequent shopper information. For detailed
instructions, see Chapter Five, “Maintaining Customer Data,” in the
ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Enable Error Correct Validatn [Voids/Refunds]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prints a validation when the
cashier corrects an error.
Enable Family Code Cpn Check [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” and a coupon can be scanned, the POS
workstation checks to see if the customer purchased the actual
product. This option requires additional Item File maintenance. The
family code must be entered into the Commodity Code field for each
UPC. For more information about Item Maintenance, see Chapter
Four, “Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance,” in the
ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Enable Gift Cert Sold Validatn [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prompts to validate when a
gift certificate is purchased.
Enable Gift Certificate Sales [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier can sell gift certificates at the
POS workstation.
Enable Instore Charge [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field and the In-Store Charge Installed field on the Back Office
PC Control File to “Yes” to enable an in-store charge. The system
prompts the cashier at the POS workstation to enter a charge account
number when entering the tender type.
8-66
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Enable Lane Accountability [Financials]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system will provide lane
accountability totals in addition to cashier accountability totals.
Enable Media Swap Function [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” cashiers can swap amounts from one
tender type to another tender type, affecting cashier totals. The media
swap function keeps the Cashier’s Report in alignment with the till.
Enable MICR Reader Support [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If the system is using the 7156 or 7158 thermal printer, you have the
option of using the MICR reader. The MICR reader reads the account
number from the check. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system reads
the account number, validates the back of the check, and writes the
face of the check. The following fields must also be set correctly for
this option to be functional:
The Use Paper Check field must be set to “Yes.”
The Use Automatic Check Writing field must be set to “Yes.”
The Automatic Check Pay To field must contain the heading that
prints in the Pay To field on the face of the check.
The Disable Paper Check Validation field must be set to “No.”
The fields, Check Validation Line 1, Check Validation Line 2, and
Check Validation Line 3 must contain the text that will be printed on
the back of the check during validation. (All three fields do not require
entries if the validation text is less than 3 lines.)
Enable Money Order Sales [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” cashiers can sell money orders at the POS
workstation.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-67
Enable Net Discount [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any store electronic coupons that were
applied against any discountable items will reduce the transaction
level discountable totals. If this field is set to “No”, the discount is
applied against the original price of the item before the electronic
discount is applied.
Enable Non Frq Shp Surcharge [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds an additional charge to a
non-frequent shopper’s bill at total if the customer does not have a
Frequent Shopper Number.
Enable Paidout Acct Flip Chart [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” a flip chart displays presenting all paidout
accounts during a paidout function, permitting the cashier to select an
account.
Enable Paidout Function [Utilities]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” cashiers can perform paidout functions at
the POS workstation. There are two (2) paidout functions: a POS
Workstation Paidout and a Coupon Paidout.
Enable Power Fail Recovery [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system permits recovery in the event
of a power failure by writing sales to the hard drive of the POS
workstation. This option writes each line of the transaction to the POS
workstation’s hard drive. When the power is removed and recovered,
the POS workstation returns to the last item that was entered during
the sale.
8-68
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Enable Receipt History Capture [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system captures the image of the
receipt to a POS workstation file. This is a type of electronic journal. It
permits you to search and print previous receipts for analysis of the
cashier’s performance.
Enable Refund Mode Operation [Voids/Refunds]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes”, the POS workstation has the ability to
enter into a “Refund Mode.” This mode is activated by pressing the
REFUND key. All items entered from this point on are refunded. This
mode is valid until the REFUND key is pressed again or the
transaction is finalized. Refunds do not affect item movement or
inventory.
Enable Refund Validation [Voids/Refunds]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prints a validation when the
cashier does a refund.
Enable RX Item Interface [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” third-party pharmacy software must be in
place in the store. The system generates an ASCII record when the
pharmacy prepares a prescription. Cashiers can then scan
prescriptions at the POS workstation. The back office PC writes to a
prescription file, and the system prepares a movement report for the
pharmacy software.
Enable Sales Restriction Table [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation looks for the
department restriction matrix created under the Department
Maintenance Menu when the cashier enters the sales items. The POS
workstation checks the cashier’s age, customer’s age, and restriction
days and times by department. See the section titled “Department
Restriction Matrix” in Chapter Three, “Performing
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance,” in the ScanMaster User’s
Guide for more information.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-69
Enable Shoppers Hotline [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes” and if this option is available, the POS
workstation permits a report to be sent to IRI, a third- party movement
clearing house. The customer receives a message on the receipt
indicating that a manufacturer’s coupon list is redeemed in the sale.
Enable Tax 1 (2, 3) [Tax]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Enter Y to enable Tax Table 1 (2 or 3).
Enable Unvrsl Credit Insertion [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster permits promotional credits to
be inserted through this interface by TargetMaster and other thirdparty promotional software.
Enable Unvrsl Mrktng Interface [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster transmits item and sale
information through this interface to TargetMaster or other third-party
promotional software.
Enable UPC Linked Store Coupon [Global/Store]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier must scan the item indicated
on the store coupon in order for the coupon to be valid.
Enable Variable Tare [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Tare codes 80 through 98 are reserved. These codes point to the
variable Tare Table under the Miscellaneous Item Maintenance Menu.
Each variable Tare Table can have up to ten (10) different associated
weight codes. The weight is the item weight, and the tare code is the
package weight. This option can be used when an item has the same
UPC number, but the weight of the package varies.
Enable Video Customer Display [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces to the color
Customer CRT.
8-70
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Enable Void Validation [Voids/Refunds]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prints a validation when the
cashier does a void.
Enable WIC Sale Mode [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system flags the sale for WIC
purchases. The system also performs other tasks appropriate for a
WIC sale, such as limiting the maximum check amount that can be
purchased under the WIC program, checking the beginning and
ending dates on the WIC check, and making the sale tax-exempt. The
system also checks the UPC for the correct WIC status, so that the
cashier can ring only UPCs with WIC status into the order.
End Of Sale Delay In Seconds [Misc]
Two (2) digit numeric field. This field represents the number of
seconds that the POS workstation delays before starting the next
transaction.
Enforce Dept Entry On Mfg CPN [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prompts for
manual entry of a department when manufacturers’ coupons are
scanned.
If you set this field to “No,” the system assumes the department of the
item to which the coupon is linked. If the Enable Family Code Cpn
Check field is set to “No,” the system retrieves the first item from in
transaction containing the manufacturer matching the coupon. If the
Enable Family Code Cpn Check field is set to “Yes,” the system
retrieves the first item from in transaction that matches both the
manufacturer and family code.
Exclude Dsc 1 (2, 4, 5) If Cpn Applied [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” and the system applies a coupon to the
item, the system cannot apply Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) to the item.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-71
Exclude Dsc 1 (2, 4, 5) If Item On Sale [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
The Sale Level field in the Item File determines if an item is on sale. If
the item has a sale level of 1 through 9, and this field is set to “Yes,” the
item is considered on sale, and the system cannot apply Discount 1 (2,
4 or 5) to the item. For more information about Item Maintenance, see
Chapter Four, “Performing Immediate and Batch Item Maintenance,”
in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Exclude Memo Totals frm Actvty [Financials]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system excludes memo department
totals (for sales such as vending machine sales, lottery sales, or
newspaper sales) from department totals. Department activity is a
sales report; hourly reports show productivity. See example below.
A transaction as follows:
LOTTERY
$1.00
MEMO ITEM $2.00
MEMO ITEM - $1.00
When this field is set to Yes, hourly report shows:
Item Count = +1
Sales = +$1.00
When this field is set to No, hourly report shows:
Item Count= +2
Sales = +$2.00
NOTE: Refunds, Returns, and Negative Items do not add to or
subtract from the Item Count. The customer receipt shows 3 items.
Exp Year < 71 then Year > 1999 [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation advances to the next
century if the credit card expiration date is less than 71. If you set this
field to “no,” the system defaults to the current century. For example,
when a cashier enters 0523, the system would recognize this date as
May of 2023 if the register control file option is set to yes. If set to no, it
defaults to May of 1923.
F
8-72
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
FC Pickup Compulse Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of foreign currency specified in this field, the POS workstation screen
prompts the cashier with the message: “Must DO Pickup.” This
warning displays at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made.
The cashier cannot continue to operate the POS workstation. When the
cashier presses CLEAR, the screen prompts the cashier with the
message: “Enter Manager ID.” The manager’s password must be
entered before the cashier can continue with the sale.
FC Pickup Warning Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of foreign currency specified in this field, the POS workstation screen
prompts the cashier with the message: “Please Do Pickup.” The
warning displays at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made.
The cashier can continue to operate the POS workstation by pressing
CLEAR when the warning displays.
Flag Sale Itms on Receipt W/ $ [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the receipt will display sale items (with a
level above zero) with a dollar character to the left of the description.
Freq Shopper Rollover Amount [Promotions]
Seven (7) digit numeric field. If you use the Frequent Shopper
Program, enter the amount of total purchases per customer required
for the Frequent Shopper Amount in the Customer File to roll over to
zero.
Frequent Shopper Program Desc. [Promotions]
15-character alphanumeric field. Enter the frequent shopper program
name in this field as you want it to display on the customer receipt or
display.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-73
Frq Shp Level Match in EC File [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If this field is set to “Yes,” a customer is only eligible for electronic
coupons if they are at the same frequent shopper level as set through
the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen. This field is used in
conjunction with the Allow Mult Same ECPN-Frqsp Lvl field in the
Back Office Control File. Both control file options must be set the same
to work. If this option is set to “no,” a customer is eligible for
electronic coupons less than or equal to their frequent shopper level.
Frq Shp Level Set in Cust File [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If this field is set to “Yes,” the frequent shopper level for a
customer is set from the Customer Maintenance screen. This field is
used in conjunction with the Freq. Shop. Level Set Manually question
in the Back Office Control File. Both control file options must be set
the same to work. If both options are set to “no,” the customer’s
frequent shopper level is determined through the Frequent Shopper
Discount Matrix based on the amount of frequent shopper
points/dollars the customer has earned.
Frq Shp Stat Set by ACH Verify [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer is assumed to be a frequent
shopper upon verification by an Automated Clearing House.
Frq Shp Stat Set by Chk Verify [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer is assumed to be a frequent
shopper upon the use of a positive checking account number.
Frq Shp Stat Set by Store Chrg [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer is assumed to be a frequent
shopper upon use of a store charge account.
8-74
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
FS Pickup Compulse Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of food stamps specified in this field, the POS workstation screen
prompts the cashier with the message: “Must DO Pickup.” This
warning displays at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made.
The cashier cannot continue to operate the POS workstation. When the
cashier presses CLEAR, the screen prompts the cashier with the
message: “Enter Manager ID.” The manager’s password must be
entered before the cashier can continue with the sale.
FS Pickup Warning Amount [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When the cashier’s till reaches the amount
of food stamps specified in this field, the POS workstation screen
prompts the cashier with the message: “Please Do Pickup.” The
warning displays at the beginning of each sale until a pickup is made.
The cashier can continue to operate the POS workstation by pressing
CLEAR when the warning displays.
I
Idle mode timeout In seconds [Misc]
Five (5) digit numeric field. The number of seconds entered in this
field determines when the POS workstation automatically goes into
Idle Mode. Idle Mode locks the keyboard.
Interface 4100 RS232 Scale [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
4100 RS232 Scale.
Interface 7835/36/37 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If this field is set to ‘Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
7835/7836/7837 RS232 Scanner.
Interface 7870 RS232 scan/scal [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
7870 RS232 Scan/Scale.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-75
Interface 7870 RS232 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
7870 RS232 Scanner.
Interface 7880 RS232 scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
7880 RS232 Scanner.
Interface 7890 RS232 scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
7890 RS232 Scanner.
Interface 960 LS RS232 (ICL) [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
960LS RS232 (ICL) scanner.
Interface 960LS RS232 Scan/Scl [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
960LS RS232 Scan/Scale.
Interface 960LS RS485 Scan/Scl [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
960LS RS485 Scanner/Scale.
Interface Cyberdata 9 bit 7824 [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
Cyberdata 9 bit 7824.
Interface ML2010 RS232 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
ML2010 RS232 Scanner.
8-76
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Interface MS951 RS232 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
MS951 RS232 Scanner.
Interface NCR OCIA Scan/Scale [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
NCR OCIA Scan/Scale.
Interface Orion RS232 scan/scl [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
Orion RS232 Scanner/Scale.
Interface SP210 RS232 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
SP210 RS232 Scanner.
Interface Space RS232 Scanner [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation interfaces with the
Space RS232 Scanner.
Item Detail on Journal Printer [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” line item detail information is printed on
the journal printer. If you set this field to “No,” only summary
information is listed on the journal printer.
Note: To avoid a problem with double printing, this setting is ignored
if the register detects a 7156 or 7158 Thermal Printer attached.
Item Price Based Points Desc [Promotions]
Sixteen (16) character alphanumeric field. Enter a user-defined Item
Price Based Points description in this field. The default setting is
“Price Based Pts.” This option is used in conjunction with the Use Item
Price Based Points option. When the Use Item Price Based Points
option is enabled, this description, along with the accumulated item
price based points, displays at the bottom of the customer receipt.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-77
L
Line Item Refund Limit [Voids/Refunds]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The cashier can perform line item refunds
up to this amount per transaction without management approval.
Line Item Void Limit [Voids/Refunds]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The cashier can perform line item voids up
to the amount entered in this field without management approval.
M
Max # of cpns to Prt up to 19 [Promotions]
Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum number of
promotional coupons you want to print on the customer receipt. The
maximum amount is 19. If “0” is entered in this field, no promotional
coupons print on the customer receipt.
Maximum # Checks / Day [Media]
One (1) digit numeric field. If the Check File field is set to “2” (Positive
Check File), the system can monitor how many checks per day a
customer can tender. Enter in this field the maximum number of
checks a single customer can tender in one day without management
approval.
Maximum # Checks / Week [Media]
One (1) digit numeric field. If the Check File field is set to “2” (Positive
Check File), the system can monitor how many checks per week a
customer can tender. Enter in this field the maximum number of
checks a single customer can tender in one week without management
approval.
Maximum # of Random Winners [Promotions]
Three (3) digit numeric field. If the store issues random coupons, enter
the maximum number of random winner coupons that should be
printed in a day.
8-78
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Maximum Amount Checks / Day [Media]
Four (4) digit numeric field. If the Check File field is set to “2”
(Positive Check File), the system can monitor the total dollar amount of
checks per day a customer can tender. Enter in this field the maximum
dollar amount of checks a single customer can tender in one day
without management approval.
Maximum Amount Checks / Week [Media]
Four (4) digit numeric field. If the Check File field is set to “2”
(Positive Check File), the system can monitor the total dollar amount of
checks per week a customer can tender. Enter in this field the
maximum dollar amount of checks a single customer can tender in one
week without management approval.
Mfg CPN Disc. Forgives Tax [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives all tax (Tax
Tables 1, 2, and 3) on the multiplied value of manufacturers’ coupons.
Mfg CPN Forgives Tax [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives all tax (Tax
Tables 1, 2, and 3) on manufacturers’ coupons.
Mfg CPN Max Amt. To Multiply [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount at which a
manufacturer’s coupon multiplies. For example, if 49 cents is entered
in this field, all coupons valued up to 49 cents are multiplied.
Mfg CPN Max Amt. To Multiply2 [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount (for the second
multiplier) at which a manufacturer’s coupon multiplies. For example,
if 49 cents is entered in this field, all coupons valued up to 49 cents are
multiplied.
Mfg CPN Max Result Amount [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount of the
multiplied value of a manufacturer’s coupon. For example, if 98 cents
is entered in this field, the multiplied value of a manufacturer’s coupon
cannot exceed 98 cents. A coupon worth 45 cents would double to 90
cents, whereas a coupon worth 50 cents would only double to 98 cents.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-79
Mfg CPN Max Result Amount2 [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount (for the second
multiplier) of the multiplied value of a manufacturer’s coupon. For
example, if 98 cents is entered in this field, the multiplied value of a
manufacturer’s coupon cannot exceed 98 cents. A coupon worth 45
cents would double to 90 cents, whereas a coupon worth 50 cents
would only double to 98 cents.
Mfg CPN Multiple Description [Receipt]
Thirteen (13) character field (maximum). Enter text to print on the
second line of a multiplied manufacturer coupon. For example, set text
to “Extra Savings” or some other phrase to be printed on the receipt
when a multiplied manufacturer coupon is tendered.
Mfg CPN Multiplier (0=None) [Coupons]
One (1) digit numeric field. If you enter a number other than zero (0)
in this field, the system multiplies manufacturers’ coupons by this
amount. For example, the number two (2) entered in this field doubles
the value of manufacturers’ coupons, and the number three (3) entered
in this field triples the value of manufacturers’ coupons.
8-80
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Mfg CPN Multiplier2 (0=None) [Coupons]
One (1) digit numeric field. This option provides a second
store/manufacturer coupon multiplier if the initial Store CPN
Multiplier control option is not fulfilled.
Register Control
Setting
File Option
Mfg CPN Multiplier (0=None)
Register Control
Setting
File Option
3
Mfg CPN Multiplier 2
2
(0=None)
Mfg CPN Max Amt to
000025
Multiply
Mfg CPN Max Result Amount
Mfg CPN Max Amt to
000075
Multiply2
000075
Mfg CPN Max Result
000150
Amount2
•
Scenario 1
If the customer gives you a .20 store/mfg. coupon, the POS
workstation will triple the coupon for a total of .60. This example
satisfies the Store/Mfg. CPN Multiplier scenario.
•
Scenario 2
If the customer gives you a .50 store/mfg. coupon, the POS
workstation tries to satisfy the Store/Mfg. CPN Multiplier
(0=None) option, but it cannot be complete because the Store CPN
Max Amt to Multiply option is set to .25. Therefore it defaults to
the Store CPN Multiplier2 (0=None) option to be fulfilled. The
coupon value is $1.00
Note
If the coupon fails to meet either criteria, the customer receives credit
for only the face value of the coupon.
Min Charge Status For Mgr Auth [Instore Charge]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field requires a single-digit charge
status between (0-9). It sets the minimum level where the manager
charge status is required.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-81
Min Purch Not Reduced by MfgCpn [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the manufacturer coupon total does not reduce the
eligibility towards minimum purchase. If set to “No,” the
manufacturer coupon total reduces the eligibility towards minimum
purchase.
Min Purch Not Reduced By MfgDbl [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the manufacturer coupon double total does not reduce
the eligibility towards minimum purchase. If you set this field to “No,”
the manufacturer coupon double total reduces the eligibility towards
minimum purchase
Min Purch Not Reduced By Strcpn [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the store coupon total does not reduce the eligibility
towards minimum purchase. If set to “No,” the store coupon total
reduces the eligibility towards minimum purchase.
Min Purch Not Reduced By Strdbl [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the store coupon double total does not reduce the
eligibility towards minimum purchase. If set to “No,” the store coupon
double total reduces the eligibility towards minimum purchase.
Minimum Item Count for Disc1 (2, 4, 5) [Discounts]
Four (4) digit numeric field. This field indicates the minimum number
of items a customer must purchase to receive Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5).
Minimum Purchase Amt for Disc1 (2, 4, 5) [Discounts]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field indicates the minimum dollar
amount a customer must purchase to receive Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5).
Minimum Purchase for Elec Cpns [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the minimum purchase amount
before any electronic coupons can be applied. Zero (0) indicates the
option is disabled. For example, if this field is set to 1000, the customer
must buy at least $10 worth of merchandise before any electronic
coupons can be applied to the sale.
8-82
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Minimum Security Level For Mgr [Security]
One (1) digit numeric field. This field determines the security level
needed to do secured functions on the POS workstation. For detailed
instructions on setting employee security levels, see Chapter Two,
“Maintaining Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Money Order Fee [Global/Store]
Six (6) digit numeric field. When a money order is issued at the POS
workstation, the system automatically adds a fee to the transaction.
N
No Security if Manager Cashier [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” and a manager is signed on to the POS
workstation, all functions requiring a manager ID for security are
accessible without entering the manager’s ID number using the
method described in the Security Type field. The manager must have a
security level at least as high as the level defined in the Minimum
Security Level For Mgr field for this option to work.
O
One Step Entry For Signon/off [Sign On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the sign-on or sign-off function requests
cashier and security numbers at the same time. This eliminates the
need to press ENTER between prompts for the cashier number and the
cashier security number.
Open Drawer Before Chk Validtn [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation permits the cash
drawer to open before the POS workstation asks for check validation.
Over Freq. Shopper $$ Amount [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If you enter an amount in this field and
specify the coupon number in the Over Freq. Shopper $$ Coupon #
field, the POS workstation prints a coupon if a customer’s frequent
shopper purchases are over this amount.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-83
Over Freq. Shopper Coupon # [Promotions]
Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the number of the coupon which is
printed for transactions over the amount specified in the Over Freq.
Shopper $$ Amount field. The coupon must be created in the Coupon
Editor under Miscellaneous Item Maintenance.
Over Total Sale Amount [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If you enter an amount in this field and
specify the coupon number in the Over Total Sale Coupon # field, the
POS workstation prints a coupon if the total sale of the transaction is
over this amount.
Over Total Sale Coupon # [Promotions]
Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the number of the coupon which is
printed for transactions over the amount specified in the Over Total
Sale Amount field. The coupon must be created in the Coupon Editor
under Miscellaneous Item Maintenance.
P
Payroll Check Max Amount (Mgr) [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If the Use Payroll Check field is set to
“Yes,” this field sets the maximum payroll check amount that a cashier
can accept without requiring management approval.
Payroll Check Max Overtender [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If the Use Payroll Check field is set to
“Yes,” this field sets the maximum payroll check amount that a cashier
can accept over the total amount.
Payroll Check Overtender (Mgr) [Media]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If the Use Payroll Check field is set to
“Yes,” this field sets the maximum payroll check amount that a cashier
can accept over the total amount without requiring management
approval.
Point Format (0=Amt 1=Number) [Promotions]
Use this option to select the point format you use with your stores
frequent shopper program. Select 0 for customers to accumulate
frequent shopper dollars of 1 for customers to accumulate frequent
shopper points.
8-84
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Points Description [Promotions]
Sixteen (16) character alphanumeric field. Use this field to create a
user-defined description for the frequent shopper points used by your
store. This field is used in conjunction with the Frequent Shopper
Program Desc.
Press Clear After EFT Approval [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier must press the clear key to
acknowledge EFT approval and continue the sale.
Prevent Manager Self-Override [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” a manager running a POS workstation
cannot override any security limits.
Price HALO On Mfg Coupons [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field sets the highest price permitted
for a manufacturer’s coupon. If the limit is reached, cashiers receive a
high/low error which they can either clear with CLEAR or overwrite
by pressing ENTER to accept the amount.
Price HALO On Store Coupons [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field sets the highest price permitted
for a store coupon. If the limit is reached, cashiers receive a high/low
error which they can either clear with CLEAR or overwrite by pressing
ENTER to accept the amount.
Price LALO On Mfg Coupons [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field sets the lowest price permitted for
a manufacturer’s coupon. If the limit is reached, cashiers receive a
high/low error which they can either clear with CLEAR or overwrite
by pressing ENTER to accept the amount.
Price LALO On Store Coupons [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field sets the lowest price permitted for
a store coupon. If the limit is reached, cashiers receive a high/low
error which they can either clear with CLEAR or overwrite by pressing
ENTER to accept the amount.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-85
Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prints two payment
slips for the customer.
To print one receipt and 2 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to NO and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to YES.
To print two receipts and 2 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to YES and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to NO.
To print two receipts and 4 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to YES and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to YES.
Print Accountability Receipt [Sign On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to ”Yes,” when a cashier signs on or off, the
POS workstation prints a Till Accountability (TA) Receipt. This report
represents all media currently in the cashier’s till.
Print Cashier Name on Receipt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the cashier’s first name prints on the
customer’s receipt.
Print Customer History Msg. [Instore Charge]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prints the customer’s
total sales to date dollar amount on the receipt.
Print Dual Delayed Receipts [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” a duplicate delayed receipt is printed at
the end of the sale.
To print one receipt and 2 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to NO and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to YES.
To print two receipts and 2 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to YES and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to NO.
To print two receipts and 4 signature slips, set “Print Dual Delayed
Receipts to YES and set “Print 2nd Paymnt Slip for Cust” to YES.
8-86
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Print EBT Decline Slip [EFT]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes” and a customer is declined on an EBT
transaction, the cashier is prompted to insert a slip to print the reason
for the decline and the EBT account balance for immediate customer
review. If the system is using Delayed Receipt, the EBT decline slip is
automatically printed.
Print Elec Coupons After Items [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This option works only if the Enable 7156 Delayed Receipt option is
enabled. If you set this field to “Yes,” an electronic coupon line will be
printed on the receipt immediately under the item to which the
electronic coupon was applied. Applied electronic coupons will also
be itemized at the bottom of the receipt.
Print Frequent Shopper Msg. [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prints the message:
“[Customer Account Number], Frequent Shopper $$ Earned, Frequent
Shopper $$ to Date” on a frequent shopper receipt at the end of the
transaction.
Print Non Freq. Shopper Msg. [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prints the message:
“If you had been a frequent shopper, today you would have saved $$
amount and earned Frequent Shopper $$. Ask cashier for details about
our Frequent Shopper Program!” This message prints on the receipts
of customers who are not frequent shoppers.
Print Pickup & Loan Receipt [Sign On/Off]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” any pickup or loan performed for that
cashier will print on a receipt when that cashier signs off. Also printing
on the receipt is the pickup or loan amount, the media type picked up
or loaned, along with the date, time and cashier name.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-87
Print To Date Frq Shp Totals [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer’s frequent shopper totals to
date are printed on the bottom of the customer receipt.
Print To Period Frq Shp Totals [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the customer’s frequent shopper totals for
the period are printed on the bottom of the customer receipt.
Print TPR Savings After Item [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. Used in conjunction with the TPR
Savings Description option. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster compares the current retail
price of a purchased item to its regular price and print the difference
(after that item) on the customer receipt if the retail price is lower. This
feature is disabled when set to “No.”
Prmpt For Frq Sh # at New Sale [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prompts for a
frequent shopper number at the beginning of each sale. The cashier
can then scan or key-enter the account number, or press ENTER to
override the prompt and continue with the sale.
Prompt For Freq Shp # at Total [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prompts the cashier
for a Frequent Shopper Number at total time. The cashier can then
scan or key-enter the account number or press ENTER to override this
prompt and continue to finalize the order.
R
Random Winner Coupon # [Promotions]
Two (2) digit numeric field. If the store issues random coupons, enter
the number of the coupon which is printed for a random winner. The
coupon must be created in the Coupon Editor under Miscellaneous
Item Maintenance.
8-88
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Random Winner Probability [Promotions]
Five (5) digit numeric field. If the store issues random coupons, enter
the ratio at which a customer coupon is issued to a random winner.
For example, if the odds of winning are one in 100, enter 100 in this
field to enable the system to print a coupon every hundredth
transaction. Random winner is determined by store, not by POS
workstation. Make sure that this field is the same for all control
files. Enter 0 in this field if the store does not issue random coupons.
Receipt Header Line 1 [Receipt]
Thirty-eight (38)-character alpha/numeric field. This is the first line of
the heading that prints on the customer’s receipt.
Receipt Header Line 2 [Receipt]
Thirty-eight (38)-character alpha/numeric field. This is the second line
of the heading that prints on the customer’s receipt.
Receipt Header Line 3 [Receipt]
Thirty-eight (38)-character alpha/numeric field. This is the third line
of the heading that prints on the customer’s receipt.
Receipt Trailer Line 1 [Receipt]
Thirty-eight (38)-character alpha/numeric field. This is the trailer
message that prints on the customer’s receipt.
Redemption Reset Special Promo [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” all special promotional points
accumulated by a frequent shopper customer are cleared (the total
resets to zero) when the special promotional item is redeemed. If you
set this field to “No,” only the amount of special promotional points
required for the free item are erased from the customer’s total.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-89
Remove Voids from Delayed Rcpt [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This option works only if the Enable
7156 Delayed Receipt option is enabled. This field requires Y for Yes
or N for No. If you set this field to “Yes,” any voids performed during
the sale will be excluded from the delayed receipt. Otherwise, voids
will print on the receipt.
Note: This function will be temporarily disabled for the current
transaction if an electronic coupon is voided that contains a non-zero
amount for Buy or Get Quantity, Minimum Purchase, Frq Level, or
Register Control File Minimum Purchase. The function resumes for the
next transaction until this condition recurs.
Reprompt same Item Vis Verify [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” scanning an item with visual verify enabled prompts for
visual verification each time the item is entered in the same
transaction. If set to “No,” scanning an item with visual verify enabled
prompts for visual verification only once in the transaction for the
same item.
Rtrn to Itm Entry During Tendr [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” POS workstation permits the cashier to
return to item entry after tender. The cashier can add items, void
items, or cancel the transaction. When the cashier re-tenders, the first
tender previously entered does not exist. The cashier must start
tendering over again.
S
Scale Weight In Kilograms [Global/Store]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the scale weighs items by kilograms rather
than pounds.
8-90
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Scan Cpn Desc (0=dept 1=item) [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field determines whether a scanned
coupon follows the department description or item description. See
Chapter Three, “Performing Department/ Subdepartment
Maintenance” and Chapter Four, “Performing Immediate and Batch
Item Maintenance,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide for information on
setting up departments or items.
Screen Saver Message [Misc]
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. The message entered
in this field displays on the screen when the screen saver time-out is up
and moves about randomly on the screen.
Screen Saver Timeout in Sec. [Misc]
Five (5) digit numeric field. This field determines the number of
seconds that pass before the screen saver message displays.
Security on Age Rstrct Decline [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” manager authorization is necessary at the
POS workstation if a sale is declined based on a customer age
restriction.
Security on Cancel [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security for the cancellation of a transaction.
Security on Check Cashing [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a check cashing operation outside a
sale.
Security on Coupon Paidout [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a coupon paidout function.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-91
Security on Currency Exch Rate [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” authorized cashiers can update the foreign
currency exchange rate from the POS workstation. When set to “No,”
updates can only be performed from the Back Office.
Security on Discount 1 (2, 4, 5) [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) operation.
Security on Dynamic Cust Build [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” a cashier must key-enter or scan a
manager ID when adding a new account to the customer file from the
POS workstation.
Security on Error Correct [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform an error correction operation.
Security on HALO/LALO Errors [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security (as defined in the Security Type field) for
clearing halo/lalo errors on department and coupon limits.
Security on Media Swap [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a media swap.
Security on Misc. Functions [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a miscellaneous operation.
8-92
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Security on Nosale [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system requires management security
(as defined in the Security Type field) to open the POS workstation
cash drawer during a no-sale operation.
Security on Override [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a price override.
Security on Paidout [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management to perform a paidout function.
Security on Refund [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a refund operation.
Security on Report Function [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a report function operation.
Security on Retrieve Sale [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a sales retrieve operation.
Security on Rtrn to Item Entry [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires the type of
management security access specified in the Security Type field in
order to return to item entry after tender. Returning to item entry after
tender is enabled in the Rtrn to Item Entry During Tndr field.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-93
Security on Sale Of Gift Cert. [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a gift certificate sale.
Security on Sale Of Money Ord. [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a sale of a money order.
Security on Suspend Sale [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management to perform a suspended sales operation.
Security on Tax Exemption [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system requires management security
(as defined in the Security Type field) to use the TAX EXEMPTION
key.
Security on Utilities [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a utilities operation.
Security on Void [Security]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation requires
management security to perform a void operation.
Signoff From Idle in Seconds [Sign On/Off]
Five (5) digit numeric field. This field determines the number of
seconds the POS workstation continues in the idle mode before
automatically logging off the cashier.
Special Promo Accum Begin Date [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. MMDDYY format. Enter the date that you
want ScanMaster to start accumulating special promotional points.
8-94
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Special Promo Accum Begin Time [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the military time that you want
ScanMaster to start accumulating special promotional points.
Special Promo Accum End Date [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. MMDDYY format. Enter the date that you
want ScanMaster to stop accumulating special promotional points.
Special Promo Accum End Time [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the military time that you want
ScanMaster to stop accumulating special promotional points.
Special Promo Description [Promotions]
Fifteen (15) alphanumeric characters. The default description is
“Special Promo” if nothing is entered. Enter the special promo
description in this field. For example, Turkey Giveaway.
Store # [Global/Store]
Four (4) digit numeric field. This field identifies the store and is
included in the Transaction Log (TLOG).
Store CPN Disc. Forgives Tax [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives all tax (Tax
Tables 1, 2, and 3) on the multiplied value of store coupons.
Store CPN Forgives Tax [Coupons]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives all tax (Tax
Tables 1, 2, and 3) on store coupons.
Store CPN Max Amt. To Multiply [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount at which a
store coupon multiplies. For example, if 49 cents is entered in this
field, all coupons valued up to 49 cents are multiplied.
Store CPN Max Amt. To Multiply2 [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount (for the second
multiplier) at which a store coupon multiplies. For example, if 49 cents
is entered in this field, all coupons valued up to 49 cents are
multiplied.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-95
Store CPN Max Result Amount [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount of the
multiplied value of a store coupon. For example, if 98 cents is entered
in this field, the multiplied value of a store coupon cannot exceed 98
cents. A coupon worth 45 cents would double to 90 cents, whereas a
coupon worth 50 cents would only double to 98 cents.
Store CPN Max Result Amount2 [Coupons]
Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the maximum amount (for the second
multiplier) of the multiplied value of a store coupon. For example, if
98 cents is entered in this field, the multiplied value of a store coupon
cannot exceed 98 cents. A coupon worth 45 cents would double to 90
cents, whereas a coupon worth 50 cents would only double to 98 cents.
Store CPN Multiple Description [Receipt]
Thirteen (13) character field (maximum). Enter text to print on the
second line of a multiplied store coupon. For example, set text to
“Extra Savings” or some other phrase to be printed on the receipt
when a multiplied store coupon is tendered.
Store CPN Multiplier (0=None) [Coupons]
One (1) digit numeric field. If you enter a number other than zero (0)
in this field, the system multiplies store coupons by this amount. For
example, the number two (2) entered in this field doubles the value of
store coupons, and the number three (3) entered in this field triples the
value of store coupons.
Store CPN Multiplier2 (0=None) [Coupons]
Register Control
Setting
Register Control
File Option
Mfg CPN Multiplier
3
(0=None)
Mfg CPN Max Amt to
Amount
Mfg CPN
2
Multiplier 2 (0=None)
000025
Multiply
Mfg CPN Max Result
Setting
File Option
Mfg CPN Max Amt to
000075
Multiply2
000075
Mfg CPN Max Result
Amount2
000150
8-96
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
•
Scenario 1
If the customer gives you a .20 store/mfg. coupon, the POS
workstation will triple the coupon for a total of .60. This example
satisfies the Store/Mfg. CPN Multiplier scenario.
•
Scenario 2
If the customer gives you a .50 store/mfg. coupon, the POS
workstation tries to satisfy the Store/Mfg. CPN Multiplier
(0=None) option, but it cannot be complete because the Store CPN
Max Amt to Multiply option is set to .25. Therefore it defaults to
the Store CPN Multiplier2 (0=None) option to be fulfilled. The
coupon value is $1.00
Note
If the coupon fails to meet either criteria, the customer receives credit
for only the face value of the coupon.
Store Location [Global/Store]
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. Enter the store
address in this field.
Store Name [Global/Store]
Twenty (20) character alpha/numeric field. The store name displays
when the POS workstation is powered on.
Surcharge Description [Discounts]
Eighteen (18)-character alpha field. This field works in conjunction
with the Enable Non Frq Shp Surcharge and Surcharge Percentage
fields. The description entered in this field prints in front of the
surcharge amount indicated on the customer’s receipt.
Surcharge Percentage ##.##% [Discounts]
Four (4) digit numeric field. This field defines the percentage of the
total sale, excluding tax, which the system adds as a surcharge to a
non-frequent shopper. This percentage is used when the Enable Non
Frq Shp Surcharge field is set to “Yes.”
T
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-97
Tax 1 Receipt Description [Tax]
Fifteen (15) alpha/numeric field. Enter the description that should
print for Tax 1 on the customer’s receipt.
Tax 2 Receipt Description [Tax]
Fifteen (15) alpha/numeric field. Enter the description that should
print for Tax 2 on the customer’s receipt.
Tax 3 Receipt Description [Tax]
Fifteen (15) character alpha/numeric field. Enter the description that
should print for Tax 3 on the customer’s receipt.
Tax Exempt 1 Forgives All Tax [Tax]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives all tax (Tax Tables 1, 2,
and 3) when the cashier uses the TAX 1 EXEMPT key.
Tax1 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table) [Tax]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The tax rate can either be a fixed percentage
or table-based. If Tax 1 uses a table, enter 0. The system then
calculates Tax 1 from the tax table created with the Tax Table
Maintenance option on the Systems Personalization Menu. If Tax 1 is a
fixed percentage, enter the fixed percentage without a decimal point.
Tax2 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table) [Tax]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The tax rate can either be a fixed percentage
or table-based. If Tax 2 uses a table, enter 0. The system then
calculates Tax 2 from the tax table created with the Tax Table
Maintenance option on the Systems Personalization Menu. If Tax 2 is a
fixed percentage, enter the fixed percentage without a decimal point.
Tax3 Memo Total Description [Tax]
Fifteen (15) character alpha/numeric field. This description is printed
at the bottom of the customer’s receipt, along with the Tax 3 memo
total if you set the Use Tax 3 Total For Memo Total field to “Yes.”
8-98
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tax3 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table) [Tax]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The tax rate can either be a fixed percentage
or table-based. If Tax 3 uses a table, enter 0. The system then
calculates Tax 3 from the tax table created with the Tax Table
Maintenance option on the Systems Personalization Menu. If Tax 3 is a
fixed percentage, enter the fixed percentage without a decimal point.
To Date Frq Shp Totals Desc [Receipt]
Ten (10) alphanumeric characters. The default description is “To Date”
if nothing is entered in this field. Through this field, the user can
create a user-defined name for the To Date frequent shopper totals.
To Period Frq Shp Totals Desc [Receipt]
Ten (10) alphanumeric characters. The default description is “Period” if
nothing is entered in this field. Through this field, the user can create a
user-defined name for the To Period frequent shopper totals.
Total Disc 1 (2, 4, 5) Set During Sale [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” a cashier can enter Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5) at
any time before totaling the order. The system then applies the
discount to those items within the order that have a Discount 1 (2, 4 or
5) status.
Total Refund Limit [Voids/Refunds]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The cashier can perform refunds up to this
amount per transaction without management approval.
Total Void Limit [Voids/Refunds]
Six (6) digit numeric field. The cashier can perform voids up to this
amount per transaction without management approval.
TPR Savings Description [Receipt]
Fifteen (15) alphanumeric characters. Used in conjunction with the
Print TPR Savings option. Use this field to customize a specific name
for your store’s Temporary Price Reduction (TPR) program. For
example, a store may name its program, “Our Savings.” This
descriptor, along with the savings amount, displays after an item on
the customer receipt when a TRP item is purchased.
U
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
8-99
Under Total Sale Amount [Promotions]
Six (6) digit numeric field. If you enter an amount in this field and
specify the coupon number in the Under Total Sale Coupon # field, the
POS workstation prints a coupon if the total sale of the transaction is
under this amount.
Under Total Sale Coupon # [Promotions]
Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the number of the coupon which is
printed for transactions under the amount specified in the Under Total
Sale Amount field. The coupon must be created in the Coupon Editor
under Miscellaneous Item Maintenance.
Universal EFT Auth File Name [EFT]
Use this field to set the authorization file name of the specific
Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) program used by your store. This is
the file from which the POS workstation communicates with the Back
Office EFT manager. Select the file name based on the EFT system used
by your store. File names include:
•
Concord = epsauth.dat
•
Electronic Payment Systems = epsauth.dat
•
Kincaid = ktauth.dat
•
Microtrax = mtxauth.dat
•
Plourde = pldauth.dat
•
Smokey Mountain = smtauth.dat
Universal EFT Setlmnt File Nam [EFT]
Use this field to set the settlement file name for your store’s Electronic
Funds Transfer (EFT) program. The file name should be:
EFTSETTL.DAT. This file can be used by the in-store EFT manager as
an auditing tool. ScanMaster appends EFT data to this file indefinitely.
It is the responsibility of the in-store EFT manager to delete it
periodically. It is not supported by all EFT manager systems. Contact
your EFT provider to determine whether or not they support this
feature.
8-100 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Universal EFT Str & Frwd File [EFT]
Use this field to set the store and forward file name of the specific
Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) program used by your store. It is used
in conjunction with the ScanMaster media configurator option, “Permit
Offline Approval.” This is the file to which the POS workstation writes
a record of all EFT transactions done in store and forward mode. This
file is only used with the POS workstation is offline with the in-store
EFT manager. Select the file name based on the EFT system used by
your store. File names include:
•
Concord = epssnf.dat
•
Electronic Payment Systems = epssnf.dat
•
Kincaid = ktsnf.dat
•
Microtrax = mtxsnf.dat
•
Plourde = pldsnf.dat
•
Smokey Mountain = smtsnf.dat
UPC Type 4 Cust Num Support [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” cashiers can scan UPC Type 4 customer
cards anytime during the sale without first having to press the
customer account key. ScanMaster immediately recognizes a Type 4
UPC as a frequent shopper number
Use 40 Column CID Mode [Devices]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If this field is set to “Yes,” the customer CID will display in the 40Column mode. This mode offers a bigger display area and is easier for
customers to read. However, it does not allow space for frequent
shopper information and customer promotional messages. This
feature also requires modification to the CID initialization in the
autoexec.bat file. If this field is set to “no,” the CID will display in the
80-Column mode. This field is used in conjunction with the Enable
Video Customer Display option in the Register Control File.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-101
Use Auto Not Found Batching [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This feature provides an easy method of collecting the data on any
item in the store that may have been left out of the Item File.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation prints a chit at the
end of a sale for any item not found in the Item File. This chit displays
the UPC number, the department, the price, and a dotted line on which
the cashier prints the description of the item. The cashier should then
submit the chit to the scanning coordinator for entry in the Item File.
The system automatically places the not-found item in the Not Found
batch on the back office PC.
The advantage of this feature is that a chit is printed only one time for
each not found item. If the item already exists in the Not Found batch,
the chit is not reprinted. The scanning coordinator does not have to
check multiple chits for duplicates. However, the cashier is still
responsible for entering a price and department when entering the sale
at the POS workstation.
Use Electronic Check [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation accepts
electronic check tender. This is only available if the Enable Electronic
Payment System field is set to “Yes” and an electronic payment system
is attached.
Use Enhanced Split Qty Calc. [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation calculates split
quantity prices with the savings entered on the last item quantity. For
example, the POS workstation rings up 40 cents, 40 cents, and 20 cents
for each of three items priced at three for $1.00. If you set this field to
“No,” the POS workstation rings up 34 cents, 34 cents, and 32 cents for
each of the three items.
8-102 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Use Frq Shp # for Check Verify [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. Used in conjunction with the Check File
(1 = Neg 2 = Pos 0 = None) option. This field requires Y for Yes or N
for No. If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster uses the customer’s
frequent shopper number to validate a check through the positive
check file. If this option is set to “No,” the system always prompts for
the customer’s account number to validate the check.
Use Item Price Based Points [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” frequent shopper customers can
accumulate points based on the item’s price listed in the item file.
Upon setting this option, the frequent shopper point level must be set
on the Direct Item Maintenance screen. From the Enhanced tab, select
the point level from the Frequent Shopper field (No$$$, 1X $$$, 2X $$$
or 3X $$$) and the frequent shopper customer receives one point per
penny (multiplied by the frequent shopper level) based on the price of
that item.
Use Item/EC Pnts & Bonus Pnts [Promotions]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” frequent shopper customers receive the
points and bonus points associated with that item or electronic coupon.
If stores are attaching points or bonus points to a particular item, those
amounts are set from the Enhanced tab on the Direct Item Maintenance
screen. If stores are attaching points or bonus points to an electronic
coupon, those amounts are set from the Frequent Shopper/General
Information tab on the Electronic Coupon Maintenance screen. Stores
can attach points or bonus points to an item only or just the electronic
coupon, or both. Only the points or bonus points listed are credited to
the frequent shopper customer when that item is purchased or
electronic coupon issued.
Use Local Item File Update [Global/Store]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system sends all Item File changes to
the hard disk of the POS workstation throughout the day when the
POS workstation is not in a sale. At the end of the day, the system still
copies the entire Item File to the hard disk of the POS workstation.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-103
Use Local Scan Resource [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation uses the item
file on its own hard drive instead of the item file on the file server PC.
Use Manual Tare Entry [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the screen prompts cashiers with “Enter
Tare Code” every time they use the SCALE/TARE key.
Use Media Counts [Financials]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation tracks the number of
media accepted at that workstation. Note
The media counts option in the Back Office Control File also must be enabled
for the Media Counts feature to work.
Use Media Swap Reas. Code Menu [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the POS workstation prompts the cashier
to select a media swap reason when performing a media swap. The list
of media swap reasons is created and maintained from the Reason
Code menu, located off the Personalization menu.
Use Override Reason Code Menu [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the Override Reason Code Menu displays
up to four (4) user-defined override reasons. The cashier can then
select from the list.
Use Paper Check [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation accepts paper
(personal) check tender when the cashier presses the CHECK key.
Use Payroll Check [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” the POS workstation accepts payroll
check tender when the cashier presses the CHECK key.
8-104 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Use Refund Reason Code Menu [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” when the cashier presses the REFUND
key at the POS workstation, the Refund Reason Code Menu displays
up to four (4) user-defined refund reasons. The cashier can then select
from the list.
Use Routing # For Neg Check [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes,” the manual data capture entry for a check tender
prompts for the entry of a routing number and account number. If
MICR is used to capture the check data, the routing number and
account number are extracted from the MICR data. If set to “No,” the
manual data capture entry of a check tender prompts only for an
account number. If MICR is used to capture the check data, the account
number is only extracted from the MICR data. Use of an EFT system
with MICR data capture overrides this field and always captures the
MICR data in its entirety.
Use Tax3 Total For Memo Total [Tax]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you do not use Tax 3, you can set this field to “Yes” to enable the
system to view the Tax 3 Table as a memo field. The system can then
check for items and departments having the Tax 3 flag and accumulate
the cost of these items within the transaction. The cost of the Tax 3
items is printed on the bottom of the customer’s receipt.
Use Var Weight 5 Digit Price [Items]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This option involves scanning items that have variable weight UPCs.
Variable Weight UPCs are those that include the price in the last four
digits of the UPC. If this field is set to “Yes,” the last five digits of the
UPC will serve as the price.
Use Void Reason Code Menu [Misc]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” when the cashier presses the VOID key at
the POS workstation, the Refund Reason Code Menu displays up to
four (4) user-defined void reasons. The cashier can then select from the
list.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-105
V
Verify NSC4 Acct # On Disc 1 (2, 4, 5) [Discounts]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the screen prompts cashiers to enter
account numbers when they press the DISCOUNT key in order to
verify a senior citizen’s eligibility for Discount 1 (2, 4 or 5). The valid
format of NSC4 is x4xx4xxx-xxxx. If the NSC4 account number is
valid, the system accepts the number and applies the discount.
W
WIC Tender Forgives Tax [Media]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system forgives tax at the end of a sale
finalized with WIC tender.
Y
"You Saved" With Frq Discount [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the Enable You Saved On Receipt option. If
you set this field to “Yes,” any Frequent Shopper discounts applied to
the sale are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the
customer receipt.
"You Saved" With Key Discount [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the Enable You Saved On Receipt option. If
you set this field to “Yes,” any key discounts (Disc. 1,2, 4 or 5) applied
to the sale are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the
customer receipt.
8-106 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
"You Saved" With Mfg Coupon [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the Enable You Saved on Receipt option. If
you set this field to “Yes,” any manufacturer coupons applied to the
sale are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the
customer receipt.
"You Saved" With Mfg Cpn Mult [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If you set
this field to “Yes,” any multiple manufacturer coupons applied to the
sale are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the
customer receipt.
"You Saved" With Mfg Elec Cpn [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If you set
this field to “Yes,” any manufacturer electronic coupons applied to the
sale are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the
customer receipt.
"You Saved" With Store Coupon [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If you set
this field to “Yes,” any Store Coupons applied to the sale are included
in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the customer receipt.
"You Saved" With Str Cpn Mult [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If you set
this field to “Yes,” any Store Coupons Multiples applied to the sale are
included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the customer
receipt.
"You Saved" With Str Elec Cpn [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If you set
this field to “Yes,” any Store Electronic Coupons applied to the sale are
included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom of the customer
receipt.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-107
“You Saved” With TPR [Receipt]
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with the You Saved on Receipt option. If this field
is set to “Yes,” any savings accumulated through Temporary Price
Reductions (TPR) are included in the “You Saved” total on the bottom
of the customer receipt.
8-108 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Back Office Control File
The Back Office Control File is the second option on the
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-B) to access
the ScanMaster Back Office Control File Maintenance screen.
The Back Office Control File sets parameters for the Back Office and
ScanMaster Server.
After accessing the Back Office Control File Maintenance screen, click
on the desired line and complete the change. Use the up and down
arrows to highlight the line, press ENTER and then make the desired
change. Click on SAVE/EXIT to save changes and return to the
Personalization Menu.
When searching for a desired option, click on the SEARCH button and
enter a key word to initiate a search.
Click on the ABORT button to abort any changes made to that POS
workstation’s control file. Click on the PRINT LIST button to print a
hard copy of the Back Office Control File.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-109
Back Office Control File Configuration
Back Office Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List
Back Office Control File Settings are shown below in alphabetic order.
In ScanMaster, similar settings are grouped together in a nonalphabetized list.
Symbols \ Numbers
# of Days of EFT Log to Save
Three (3) digit numeric field. This option works in conjunction with
ScanMaster’s EFT Log archival program. Enter the number of days the
system will archive EFT transaction log data. The default setting for
this option is 0. However, if this option is set to 0, the system will
automatically save 45 worth of EFT Log history. It is recommended
that at least 60 days worth of log data is saved.
# of Days of TLOG to Save
Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of days the system will
save Consolidated Transaction Log (CTLOG) files. These files are
saved in the F:\Grocery\Files\Asc directory. The default setting is 0.
# Of Decimal Places In Cost
Two (2) digit numeric field. Now considered a “Reserved” field. No
longer used by ScanMaster Version 1.02.
A
Accountability By Lane
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” system accountability is determined by
lane. If you set this field to “No,” system accountability is determined
by cashier. For detailed instructions on accounting procedures, see
Chapter 10, “Accounting Procedures,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
8-110 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Add Dbl Store Coup To Sales
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds double-value store
coupons into sales records.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon To Sales
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds double-value
manufacturers’ coupons into sales records.
Add Formfeed To End Of Reports
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the dot matrix printer generates an extra
page at the end of a report.
Add Store Coupon To Sales
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds store coupons into sales
records.
Allow Deletes in Batches
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” individual items can be deleted from
batches. Prior to ScanMaster Version 1.02, items could only be ignored
and not deleted. That is how this feature works when set to No.
Allow Item Delete W/Movement
One (1) character alpha field. When this option is turned on,
movement items can be deleted in either batches or direct item
maintenance. If it is not turned on, the system will not allow you to
delete any movement items
Allow Mult Same ECPN-Frqsp Lvl
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” up to 10 electronic coupons (one per each
frequent shopper level) can be created for a single UPC or Mix &
Match. This field is used in conjunction with the Frq. Shp. Level Set in
EC File question in the Register Control File. Both control file options
must be set the same to work. If this option is set to “no,” only one
electronic coupon can be associated with a UPC.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-111
Are Subdepartments Used
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” if you wish to use subdepartments and enable
the Department Maintenance File.
B
Bonus Point Description
Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Enter the name used to
describe the store’s Frequent Shopper Bonus Points program.
C
Calc SRR on current line
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the system calculates the ScanMaster
Reconciliation Report (SRR) on the current line. If it is set to “no,” the
system calculates on the next line.
Commodity Code = Family Code
One (1) character field. This field changes the commodity code field
into two, three-digit Family Code fields to allow manufacturer coupon
validation at the item level.
Company Address
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. The company address
appears in this field and is printed on Accounts Receivable statements.
Company City, State, Zip
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. The city, state, and zip
code of the company appear in this field and are printed on Accounts
Receivable statements.
Company Name
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. The company name
appears in this field and is printed on Accounts Receivable statements.
Company Telephone Number
Fourteen (14) character alpha/numeric field. The phone number
appears in this field and is printed on Accounts Receivable statements.
Create Daily Movement Files
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
8-112 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
If this field is set to “yes,” item movement data is collected (using the
ScanMaster EJ processor) into individual daily totals rather than into
one cumulative total.
D
Days Historical Data to Save
Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of days the system will
save supplemental department information (for example historical
voids and error correct). This information is accumulated through the
Enhanced Department Report and the Department Activity Report.
Days of Hist. Archives to Save
Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the number of days the system will
retain archived history. These files are saved in the F:\History
directory.
Default Elec. Coupon Dept.
Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter a default department number that is
assigned to an electronic coupon that has a missing or invalid sort
department number.
Description For Tax1
15-character alpha/numeric field. This field provides a description of
Tax Table 1. This is used on the Item Maintenance Screens.
Description For Tax2
15-character alpha/numeric field. This field provides a description of
Tax Table 2. This is used on the Item Maintenance Screens.
Description For Tax3
15-character alpha/numeric field. This field provides a description of
Tax Table 3. This is used on the Item Maintenance Screens.
Do Not Include Cpns in Movemnt
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” coupon movement is not written to the
ScanMaster movement file.
E
EJ Reports use Ehncd Elc Coup
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-113
If you set this field to “yes,” the system uses the electronic coupon
description in the Electronic Coupon file. If it is set to “no,” the system
defaults to either store electronic coupon or manufacturer’s electronic
coupon.
Electronic Journal Installed
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “yes” to indicate electronic journal software is installed
on the system.
Enable 7800 On This PC
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes” and ScanMaster NCR 7800 software is
installed on this machine, ScanMaster will automatically start the price
verifier when the ScanMaster login screen is initiated.
Enable Elc Cpn Label Printing
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to "Yes" and the supported label printing software
application is installed, electronic coupons can be printed on labels.
This option enables remotely hosted electronic coupon files of a specific
format to be printed using third-party label software.
Enable EJ Processor on This PC
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” the ScanMaster Electronic Journal (EJ)
processor is enabled on that machine. This flag must only be set to yes
on one machine since the EJ processor can only be run on one machine.
There must not be multiple EJ processors running at the same time. If
this field is set to “no,” EJ processing from that machine is disabled.
Enable Host Batch Separation
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” ScanMaster will split a host batch into
three separate batches (Add, Update and Delete) if the host batch
contains any of these batch types. For example, if host batch
HOST100.ASC is sent from the host and it contains any add, update or
delete batches, it will split into three batches: HOST101.ASC,
HOST102.ASC and HOST103.ASC. The batch type is determined by an
action code (A = Add Batch,
8-114 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
U = Update Batch, or D = Delete Batch).
Enable LM2100 Interface
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” an export file that interfaces with the
Fleming’s LM2100 labor management software is created during Endof-Day.
End Week On Day # (Sun=1)
One (1) digit numeric field. This field is used in conjunction with the
Use Weekly Balancing field. Enter the number of the day designated
by the store as the last day of the week.
F
Finance Charges Compounded
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the system calculates compounded finance
charges on a monthly basis. The system default is no, meaning the
system implements only a monthly finance charge.
Force Freq. Shopper Bit On
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the Frequent Shopper default in the Item
Maintenance File is set to “1-Shopper $$$.” This field is intended for
all new UPCs entered through direct item maintenance and batches.
Freq Shopper $$$ (N) or Pnts (Y)
One (1) character alpha field. When using Freq Shopper $$$, the system
assign points based on the specific dollar value of the item. When using
Freq Shopper Pnts, you can assign the desired number of points or
bonus manufacturer points to a specific item.
Freq. Shop. Level Set Manually
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the level field in the Customer
Maintenance screen becomes an editable field. From this field, you can
set a customer’s frequent shopper level.. This field is used in
conjunction with the Freq. Shp Set in Cust File question in the Register
Control File. Both control file options must be set the same to work. If
both options are set to no, the customer’s frequent shopper level is
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-115
determined through the Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix based on
the amount of merchandise the customer purchases.
G
GiftCert O/S Add Into Net O/S
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds the total of Gift
Certificates Over/Short to the total of Net Over/Short on the Cashier
and Store Reports.
H
Hide NRT Totals From EJ Rpts
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” non-resetable totals will not be printed on
electronic journal reports.
I
Is EBO Installed
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” if RCS Technologies Inc.’s Extended Back Office
(EBO) software is installed on your system. If this field is set to “Yes,”
certain ScanMaster menu items are disabled to permit for use of the
EBO software.
Item Host Update Recs Don’t Add
One character alpha field. This option works in conjunction with
ScanMaster’s ASC2B.EXE program. It requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to Yes, imported host file items marked with an
update flag will not be added to the ScanMaster item file even if the
item does not exist in ScanMaster. If this option is se to No, imported
host file items marked with an update flag will be added to the
ScanMaster item file. The default setting for this option is No.
L
Lbl App 1=UG 2=General 0=Both
One (1) digit numeric field. This setting allows stores to specify what
type of label system they are using. There are three settings: 1 = UG; 2
8-116 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
= General; 0 = Both.
Logoff Windows After EOD
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system will automatically logoff the
user from NT after an End-of-Day is complete. After the EOD is
complete, the SMWLGOFF program is initiated. The user must log on
to NT again to access the system.
M
Mfg Coup O/S Add Into Net O/S
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds the total of
Manufacturers’ Coupons Over/Short from the cashier settles to the
total of Net Over/Short on the Cashier and Store Reports.
Money Order Fee
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field indicates the service fee which the
system calculates on the store spreadsheet for the issuing of money
orders.
N
No Printer Graphics AR Stmnt
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires a Y for Yes or N for
No. If you set this field to “Yes,” no printer graphics are printed on the
AR statement.
No Zero/Neg Balances AR Stmnt
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” ScanMaster will not print statements with
a zero balance.
Num of Deposit Accounts (1-3)
One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the number of deposit accounts (up
to three) used by your store.
Numbers
See the Symbols \ Numbers section at the beginning of the document for #
options.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-117
P
Page Host Batches In UPC Order
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” Host batches appear in UPC order. If you
set this field to “No,” Host batches appear in Commodity Code order.
Point Description
Fifteen (15) character alphanumeric field. Enter the name used to
describe the store’s Frequent Shopper Points program.
Print Cashier Log Files
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system prints the log files for money
orders, gift certificates, and checks when the cashier is settled.
Print Charge Log Information
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,”, charge log information is printed on the
Cashier Settles report. It details if the transaction was an in-store
charge, an in-store charge payment, or an in-store charge return.
R
RAM Drive Designator
One (1) character alpha field. This field indicates which drive contains
the file server PC shared files.
Registers Do Local Item Update
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system creates or updates a file in real
time on a register hard drive when closed or idle and at the beginning
of a transaction.
Run Elec. Coupon Fix at EOD
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
This feature works in conjunction with ScanMaster’s ECPNCHEK.EXE
utility. When set to yes, this option runs the ECPNCHEK utility at the
beginning of the End of Day process.
S
8-118 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Sec. Level On Communications
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform operations on the Communications Menu. For
instructions on setting the security level of employees, see Chapter
Two, “Maintaining Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Customer Maint.
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform customer maintenance. For instructions on setting
the security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining
Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Day End
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform End of Day procedures. For instructions on
setting the security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining
Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Department Mnt.
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform department maintenance. For instructions on
setting the security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining
Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Employee Maint.
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform employee maintenance. For instructions on setting
the security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining
Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Item Maint.
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform item maintenance. For instructions on setting the
security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining Employee
Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Office Proc.
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform office procedures. For instructions on setting the
security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining Employee
Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-119
Sec. Level On Personalization
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to maintain system personalization operations. For
instructions on setting the security level of employees, see Chapter
Two, “Maintaining Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On Reporting
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform operations on the Reports Menu. For instructions
on setting the security level of employees, see Chapter Two,
“Maintaining Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Sec. Level On System Services
One (1) digit numeric field. This field indicates the security level
required to perform system services. For instructions on setting the
security level of employees, see Chapter Two, “Maintaining Employee
Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Settle Media Counts
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “yes,” the POS workstation tracks the number of
media accepted at that workstation. Note
The media counts option in the Register Control File also must be enabled for
the Media Counts feature to work.
Show Suspended Sales at EOD
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
When this option is set to Yes, any suspended sales accumulated
during the day are displayed on the Delete Suspended Sales screen
when the End of Day procedure is run. From that screen, the user can
then permanently delete the suspended sales, print the list of
suspended sales or do nothing and continue with the End of Day
procedure. If this option is set to No, the End of Day procedure will
process without showing the day’s suspended sales.
St Coup O/S Add Into Net O/S
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system adds the total of Store Coupons
Over/Short from the cashier settles to the total of Net Over/Short on
the Cashier and Store Reports.
8-120 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Store #
Four (4) digit numeric field. This field indicates the store number.
Store Name For Reports
Thirty-eight (38) character alpha/numeric field. This field represents
the store name which appears at the top of all back office PC reports.
T
Third Party DSD Installed
One character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No. If
you set this field to “Yes,” the system removes all Item Maintenance
function screens.
This PC Does the End of Day
One character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No. If
you set this field to “Yes,” the PC runs the End-Of-Day Procedure.
This PC Processes Tlogs
One character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No. If
you set this field to “Yes,” the PC processes Transaction Logs (TLOGs)
when it is idle.
Treat Cashier O/S as Memo
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the amounts by which a cashier is over or
short appear on the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report (SRR) as a memo
only and are not included in the computations.
Treat Office O/S as Memo
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the amounts by which the office is over or
short appear on the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report (SRR) as a memo
only and are not included in the computations.
Turn On Accounts Receivable
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” if you wish to enable the Accounts Receivable
module.
U
Use Auto Pickup Feature
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-121
One character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” if you wish to enable the Auto Pickup feature on
cashier pickup, settles, store reconciliation, and final deposit screens.
Use Coupon Linking Feature
One (1) character alpha field. This option allows you to link store-built
coupons to a specific item. It provides coupon validation for that item.
Use Enhanced Security
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the enhanced security is enabled. For
detailed instructions on accounting procedures, see Chapter 2,
“Maintaining Employee Data,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Use Item Trail Feature
One (1) character alpha field. When this feature is turned on, the
system provides an ASCII record (item trail) of changes made via
batches or direct item maintenance.
Use Margin (Y) or Markup (N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Used in conjunction with ScanMaster’s Cost Calculator feature. If this
field is set to “Yes,” the system uses the Margin calculation in
determining an item’s price. If this field is set to “No,” the system uses
the Markup calculation in determining the price. Margin is the
difference in percentage between total sales and the cost of those sales.
In other words, the profit percent of the item. Markup is the percentage
added to the cost of the item to arrive at the selling price of the item.
Margin and markup information can also be found on ScanMaster’
Item Movement Report.
Use Normal Balancing Mode
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system uses the Normal Balancing
Mode. For detailed instructions on accounting procedures, see Chapter
10, “Accounting Procedures,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
Use Real Time Item Movement
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system displays the movement of
items as it occurs. For this option to be functional you must also:
8-122 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Store the GRCMVMNT.BTR file only on the file server in the
\GROCERY\FILES subdirectory.
Set the Enable Real Time Item Movement field in the POS Workstation
(Register) Control File to “Yes.”
Use Shrink Trax Interface
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to Yes, the Shrink Trax interface is enabled on the
ScanMaster system. The Shrink Trax software and the ScanMaster
Shrink Trax interface must be installed to use this feature.
Use Store Spreadsheet
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Set this field to “Yes” if you wish to use a store spreadsheet. If No is
selected, all SRR options are unavailable for use. For detailed
instructions on accounting procedures, see Chapter 10, “Accounting
Procedures,” in the ScanMaster User’s Guide.
W
Weeks of SRR to Save
Two (2) digit numeric field. This field displays the number of weeks that the
system saves the ScanMaster Reconciliation Reports (SRR) for retrieval.
Weight In Lbs (Y) (N) = Kg
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No. If you
set this field to “Yes,” the system records scale weight in pounds rather than
kilograms.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-123
Banner File
The Banner File is the third option on the ScanMaster Personalization
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the ScanMaster
Banner File Maintenance screen. The Banner File is the scrolling
message on the customer display that displays during idle time on the
POS workstation. Customized advertising or customer messages can
be displayed through this banner.
Figure 8-3: Banner File Screen
8-124 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Customizing the Banner File
The Banner File consists of ten (10) lines of fifty-six (56) characters.
Through the Banner File, you can create a message/advertisement for
the customers to read. Select the desired POS workstation on which
you want to put the message or create a default message for all POS
workstations. Then type in the desired message and click on the SAVE
button. (Even though there are ten lines, the words automatically wrap
around to the next line. The Banner File is one continuous line). When
the Banner File is created/updated, it is written to the Update
Directory on the Server PC.
Note: The POS workstation reads the file from the Update Directory
when an update or day-end is performed.
Click on EXIT to return to the Personalization Menu. Click on SAVE to
save changes made to the Banner File.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-125
Reason Code Maintenance
Reason Code Maintenance is the fourth option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to access
the ScanMaster Reason Code Maintenance Screen.
The Reason Code Maintenance screen is where you set up reasons for
Overrides, Refunds, Voids and Media Swaps that appear on the POS
workstations. The reason codes appear on the override, refund, void
and media swap report by cashier and by item.
Figure 8-4: Reason Code Maintenance Screen
8-126 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Reason Code
Maintenance Screen.
Overrides: Click on this radio button to select the Override Reason
Code Table. Override reasons permit you to change the price of a PLU
at the POS workstation. This price change only affects one line item,
not the price in the item file. You can define up to four override
reasons.
Refunds: Click on this radio button to select the Refunds Reason Code
Table. Refund reasons permit you to issue refunds based on the
reasons defined. You can define up to four refund reasons.
Voids: Click on this radio button to select the Voids Reason Code
Table. Void Reason permits you to void a transaction based on the
reason defined. You can define up to four void reasons.
Media Swaps: Click on this radio button to select the Media Swaps
Reason Code Table. Media Swap reason permit you to swap media
based on the reason defined. You can define up to four media swap
reasons.
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save Override, Refund
or Void reasons defined in the ScanMaster Reason Code Maintenance
screen.
PRINT LIST: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the list of
Override, Refund or Void reason codes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Reason Code Maintenance screen.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-127
Creating/Editing the Reason Code Table
To create a new or update existing reason codes, select the desired type
of reason code by clicking the radio button next to that reason type.
Then enter a new reason code or edit the existing reason code. There
can be up to four reason codes for each reason type. Upon completing
changes, click on the SAVE button to save any changes made. Click on
the EXIT button to return to the ScanMaster Personalization Menu.
Reason codes created here will display on the POS workstation if
Reason Code Menus are enabled in the Register Control File. When a
reason code is created/edited the file is written to the Update
Directory. The POS workstation reads the file from the Update
Directory when an update is performed.
Click on PRINT LIST to print a hard copy of the overrides, refunds or
voids reason codes.
8-128 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tax Table Maintenance
Tax Table Maintenance is the fifth option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-T) to access
the ScanMaster Tax Maintenance Screen.
Tax Table Maintenance enables you to configure Tax Tables 1-3 with
exception ranges.
Figure 8-5: Tax Table Maintenance Screen
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-129
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Tax Table Maintenance
Screen.
Table Selection: Click the radio button for the desired tax table (1, 2 or
3) to edit.
Enter New Description: Click into this field to enter in a description
for the Tax Table.
Enter the break point for XX tax: Four (4) digit numeric field. Enter
the break point (assuming a two place decimal for dollars and cents)
for highlighted XX cent tax. Non-repeated pre-tax totals equaling this
amount will receive this tax.
Use Exception: Click on this button to enter an exception table
associated tax table.
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Tax Table Screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made in
the Tax Table Maintenance screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Tax Table Maintenance screen.
8-130 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Performing Tax Table Maintenance
From the Tax Maintenance screen, click on the desired Table
Selection radio button to select Tax1, Tax 2, or Tax 3. Upon selecting
the desired tax table, the screen displays the tax table break points and
the exception table break points.
To edit an existing tax table, click on the break point of the desired tax
line. Enter the new amount. Enter break points only up until the
report range is reached. Tax break points must end in an even dollar
amount for repeating purposes. In the above screen, a pre-tax sales
total of $1.07 would generate a tax of 7 cents (6 cents on the $1.00 break,
and 1 cent on the amount above the 6 cent repeated break).
To create an exception table, click on the USE EXCEPTION button and
enter the break points. Up to 99 break points are permitted on the
ScanMaster System. Exception tables are used in special taxing
circumstances not covered by the regular tax table.
The ScanMaster Tax Table is enabled from the Register Control File’s
“Tax Rate ##.####%(0=Table)” setting. If this feature is not enabled
(with a setting of 000000), the POS workstation will use a table to
calculate the tax. If a rate is entered, it will use the percent rate entered
in this Register Control File setting instead.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-131
Keyboard Configurator
Keyboard Configurator is the sixth option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-K) to access
the ScanMaster Keyboard Configurator Menu screen. The Keyboard
Configurator enables you to customize the POS workstation keyboard
to meet your store’s needs. You can assign department keys, function
keys and tender keys for the POS workstation.
Figure 8-6: Keyboard Configurator Menu
8-132 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Keyboard Configurator Menu Options
There are four different keyboard options. They are:
•
7452 DynaKey Configurator
•
NCR 56 Key Configurator
•
NCR 64 Key Configurator
•
NCR 7445 (Falcon) Key Configurator
Click on the button for the desired keyboard type to access that
keyboard configurator.
Using the Keyboard Configurators
To Create/Edit the keyboard layout, click on the button of the
keyboard configuration for your system. If you use the DynaKey
keyboard, click on the 7452 DynaKey Configurator button. If you
use the NCR 64 keyboard instead of the DynaKey, click on the NCR 64
Key Configurator. If you use the NCR 7445 (Falcon) keyboard, click on
the NCR 7445 (Falcon) Key Configurator.
All POS workstation keyboards on the system can be configured the
same way or each can be configured differently.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-133
Figure 8-7: 7452 DynaKey Keyboard Configurator
8-134 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Using the 7452 DynaKey Configurator
The first thing you must do to configure your keyboard is to select the
register number and the size of the Dynakey display (9.5 inch or 10.5
inch).
Note: Radio buttons for the display size are located in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Then, you can establish the department keys. Click on the Department
radio button at the top left of the screen to access the eight available
department keys. Double click on the desired Not Defined field to
access the department list box, located in the lower left corner of the
screen. Click on the down arrow to display the available departments
and select the desired department for that key. Repeat this step until
all eight departments keys are set up.
Next, you can set up the status keys. Click on the Status Key radio
button at the top left of the screen to access the 18 available Status
Keys. They are: Price Inquire, Price Override, Return, Refund, FS
Exempt, Tax1 Exempt, Tax2 Exempt, Tax3 Exempt, Discount1, 2, 4, and
5, Cancel Transaction, Account Number, W.I.C. Sale Mode, Receipt
Print, Shoppers Hotline and Manual Weight. Use the up/down arrows
to navigate through the status selections. Double click on the desired
status field to access the status selection list box. Click on the list box
down arrow to display the available status selections and then click on
the desired selection to create a key for that status. Select OK when
you’re finished. Repeat this step until all 18 status keys are set up.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-135
Once status keys are established, you can now create Total Status Keys.
Click on the Total Status Key radio button at the top left of the screen to
access the 7 available Total Status Keys. They are: Tax1 Exempt, Tax2
Exempt, Tax3 Exempt, and Discount 1, 2, 4, and 5. Double click on the
desired Total Status field to access the Total Status selection list box.
Click on the list box down arrow to display the available total status
selections and then click on the desired selection to create a key for that
total status. Select OK when you’re finished. Repeat this step until all
7 total status keys are set up.
Once the keys are set up, you can now set up the rest of the keyboard
layout. When creating the keyboard layout, click on the desired key
and hold down the left mouse button while dragging that key to the
desired keyboard position.
Field Descriptions
Detailed descriptions of each key and its function can be found in
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations.
Button Options
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) to abort any changes
made to the 7452 DynaKey Keyboard Configurator.
SAVE/EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes
made to the 7452 DynaKey Keyboard Configurator for register.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the 7452 DynaKey
Keyboard Configurator.
8-136 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Figure 8-8: NCR 56 Key Keyboard
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-137
Figure 8-9: NCR 64 Key Keyboard
8-138 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Using the NCR 56 & 64 Key Configurators
The first thing you must do to configure you keyboard is select the
register number for that keyboard. Next, you can establish the 15
department keys. There are two ways to set up department keys.
Using the first method, double click on a DEPT (A through O) key.
Select the desired department by clicking on the down arrow and
highlighting that department. That department is now assigned to that
key. Holding down the left mouse button, select that key and drag it to
the desired position.
Using the second option, single click and drag a DEPT (A through O)
key (holding down the left mouse button) to the desired keyboard
position. Then double click on that key. A dialog box displays: “Will
This Be a Department Key? Yes or No.” Click on YES to set up a
department key or NO to set up a Preset Key. A Preset Key is a key
that is set up for a specific product. When setting up a Preset Key,
enter the PLU number for that product and press ENTER.
Repeat for the remaining department/preset keys.
Once you have set up the department keys, you can now set up the rest
of the keyboard layout. When creating the keyboard layout for your
system, click on the desired key and hold down the left mouse button
while dragging that key to the desired keyboard position.
Press ABORT to cancel any changes; SAVE/EXIT to save changes and
exit to the Keyboard Configurator; CLEAR ALL to clear the entire
keyboard; and PRINT to print a hard copy of the keyboard for key caps
for that register keyboard
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-139
Figure 8-10: NCR 7445 Keyboard
8-140 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Using the NCR 7445 Key Configurator
The first thing you must do to configure you keyboard is select the
register number for that keyboard. Next, you can establish the
department or preset keys. There are two ways to set up department
or preset keys.
Using the first method, double click on a DEPT PRESET key. If you are
setting up a department key, click on the Department radio button and
then select the desired department. A list of available departments is
available by clicking on the down arrow. Click OK upon selecting the
desired department. That department is now assigned to that key. If
you are setting up a preset key, click on the Preset radio button and
type in the desired 12-digit preset UPC for that key. Click OK once the
preset is entered. To place the key on the keyboard, hold down the left
mouse button, select that key and drag it to the desired position.
Using the second option, single click and drag a DEPT PRESET key
(holding down the left mouse button) to the desired keyboard position.
Then double click on that key. If you are setting up a department key,
click on the Department radio button and then select the desired
department. A list of available departments is available by clicking on
the down arrow. Click OK upon selecting the desired department.
That department is now assigned to that key. If you are setting up a
preset key, click on the Preset radio button and type in the desired 12digit preset UPC for that key. Click OK once the preset is entered. To
place the key on the keyboard, hold down the left mouse button, select
that key and drag it to the desired position.
Repeat for the remaining department/preset keys.
Once you have set up the department keys, you can now set up the rest
of the keyboard layout. When creating the keyboard layout for your
system, click on the desired key and hold down the left mouse button
while dragging that key to the desired keyboard position.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-141
Note: You can use multiple keys to make a single, larger key from this
configurator. Make sure the lower left key is the active key, while the
other keys in the group are blank keys. For example, if you want to use
four keys to create one larger key, make the lower left key the active
key, while the one key above and the two keys on the right side are
blank keys.
Press ABORT to cancel any changes; SAVE/EXIT to save changes and
exit to the Keyboard Configurator; CLEAR ALL to clear the entire
keyboard; and PRINT to print a hard copy of the keyboard for key caps
for that register keyboard.
Note: You can save the keyboard configuration for that POS
workstation only, selected other POS workstations or for all POS
workstations. The system prompts you for the desired save options.
Field Descriptions
Detailed descriptions of each key and its function can be found in
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations.
Button Options
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) to abort any changes
made to the Keyboard Configurator.
SAVE/EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes
made to the Keyboard Configurator for register.
CLEAR ALL: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to clear all keys
positions from the keyboard layout. A dialog box prompts: “Are You
Sure You Want to Clear the Keyboard? Yes or No.” Select Yes to clear
the entire keyboard or No to return to the keyboard configurator.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the keyboard configurators.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print key caps for the
keyboard layouts.
8-142 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Media Configurator
The Media Configurator is the seventh option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access
the ScanMaster Media Configurator screen.
This option enables you to customize the system media fields. There
are 22 media fields available to customize. Those fields and their
default settings are listed below.
Figure 8-11: Media Configurator Screen
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-143
Media Control File Configuration
Media Control Settings – Functional List
Cash
The following configuration options are available for Cash media. For
information on each setting, please see the alphabetical listing later in
this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Check
The following configuration options are available for Check media. For
information on each setting, please see the alphabetical listing later in
this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
8-144 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-145
Foreign Currency
The following configuration options are available for Foreign Currency
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Media Description
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
ACH (Electronic Check)
The following configuration options are available for ACH (Electronic
Check) media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
8-146 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Validation Line 3
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-147
Debit Card
The following configuration options are available for Debit Card
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
8-148 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry)
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Master Card
The following configuration options are available for Master Card
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-149
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry)
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
8-150 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Visa
The following configuration options are available for Visa media. For
information on each setting, please see the alphabetical listing later in
this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit)
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-151
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry)
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
8-152 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
American Express
The following configuration options are available for American
Express media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-153
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry)
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
8-154 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
In-store Charge
The following configuration options are available for In-store Charge
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Enable Term Amt Verification
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-155
Discover Card
The following configuration options are available for Discover Card
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
8-156 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry)
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-157
Gift Certificate
The following configuration options are available for Gift Certificate
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
8-158 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Food Stamp
The following configuration options are available for Food Stamp
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
WIC
The following configuration options are available for WIC media. For
information on each setting, please see the alphabetical listing later in
this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-159
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Master Credit
The following configuration options are available for Master Credit
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
8-160 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-161
Visa Credit
The following configuration options are available for Visa Credit
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
8-162 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Amex Credit
The following configuration options are available for Amex Credit
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-163
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
In-store Chg Credit
The following configuration options are available for In-Store Charge
Credit media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
8-164 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Use Neg/Pos Check (0-2)
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Enable Term Amt Verification
Discover Credit
The following configuration options are available for Discover Credit
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-165
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
8-166 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Store Coupon
The following configuration options are available for Store Coupon
media. For information on each setting, please see the alphabetical
listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-167
MFG Coupon
The following configuration options are available for Manufacturer
Coupon media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Electronic Food Stamps
The following configuration options are available for Electronic Food
Stamps media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
8-168 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Gen # on Manual Entry
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Electronic Benefit Transfer
The following configuration options are available for Electronic Benefit
Transfer media. For information on each setting, please see the
alphabetical listing later in this chapter.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-169
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
Offline Tender Limit
Capture Gen # on Manual Entry
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
8-170 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Media Control Settings & Definitions – Alphabetic List
Media Control File Settings are shown below in alphabetic order. In
ScanMaster, similar settings are grouped next to each other in nonalphabetized lists by media type. The type of controls that can be set
change according to the type of media. See a file setting listing for each
media type later in this chapter.
Media Control File Option Descriptions
1
1-EFT Void 2 - No Return to Sale
One (1) digit integer field with valid values of 0, 1, or 2. Enter 0 (Zero)
to disable EFT voiding (reversal) for this media. Media set to 0 is
discarded upon return to item entry. EFT reversal must be done
manually on the external EFT system. Enter 1 to enable void of an EFT
media tender upon returning to item entry. Results of the void are
reflected on the register receipt when the checker uses the Clear key
during Tender Entry. Enter 2 to prevent return to item entry mode
after tendering this media. Use 2 for EFT manager software that does
not support ScanMaster EFT Spec Version 2.
Note: For Setting = 1 to work properly, the in-store EFT manager
software must support this feature. The Register Control File option,
"ENABLE EFT TENDER REVERSAL" must also be set to "Y”.
A
Allow Loan (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, this media is eligible to loan to a cashier through
Office Procedures.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-171
Allow Manual Account Entry
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If you set this field to “Yes,” the system allows for manual account
entry (keyboard entry) in addition to card swiping (through an
attached Payment Terminal or the integrated MSR) by the cashier.
Allow Offline Approval (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” the cashier can tender offline credit
transactions. Note: In order for this parameter to work, the offline credit
amount must be set in the Offline Tender Limit field, another media
configurator parameter.
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, the operator can exceed the total amount due at the
POS workstation with this media.
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, this media is eligible for pickup operations through
Office Procedures.
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, this media is eligible for pickup counts to determine
how many pickups were performed on a specific cashier.
Allow Refund (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes and N for
No. If yes is selected, a refund can be given with this media.
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, the amount of tendered media must be key entered.
8-172 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
C
Capture Cash Back Amt at Term
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If “Yes” is selected, customers can enter the amount of cash back at the
electronic payment terminal. Customers can choose from 0=No cash
back; Two definable fixed amounts; or Other=Amount desired by the
customer, limited to the Maximum Cash Back Amount option. If “No”
is selected, the cashier will be prompted for the cash back amount on
the cashier display.
Capture Gen # on Manual Entry
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” the cashier must gain voice approval for a
selected manual media transaction (for example, a manual EFS or EBT
transaction) and enter a provided approval number. The number is
then transmitted back to the host, captured and printed on the
customer receipt and signature slip.
Check Expiration Date
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes”, the system will verify that the expiration
date of a tender card has not elapsed .
D
Data Capture Prompt Message
Twenty (20) character alphanumeric field that displays at the POS
workstation. Example: Enter account #.
Data Capture/Display Prompt
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes”, the POS workstation will display the data
capture prompt message.
E
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If set to “Yes”, the system will prompt the cashier with the option of
writing the face of the check.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-173
Enable Term Amt Verification
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If this field is set to “Yes,” the selected media (for example, Visa or
MasterCard) is configured to prompt the customer to confirm the final
authorization amount. If it is set to ”No”, the customer is not
prompted to confirm the final authorization amount unless the
Payment Terminal is configured to do so. This option is used in
conjunction with the Register Control File question, “Configurable
Term Amt Verify.”
Enable This Media (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
Select Y or N to make this media available for tendering at the POS
workstation.
M
Manager Over Tender Limit
Seven (7) digit numeric field. This is the maximum amount that can be
over tendered before a manager is required.
Max. Over Tender Limit
Seven (7) digit numeric field. This is the maximum amount that can be
over tendered by anyone (including a manager).
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Seven (7) digit numeric field. This is the maximum amount that can be
tendered before a manager is required.
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Six (6) digit numeric field. This field details the maximum amount of
cash back the customer can receive from a media transaction.
Media Description:
Twenty (20) character alphanumeric field. Enter customized
description of the foreign currency media (for example, Canadian
Cash). When the description is saved and you exit the foreign currency
media options screen, the new description displays on the list of Media
Configuration options available on the system.
8-174 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Media Group Link (0-9)
One (1) digit numeric field. User-defined field that allows the operator
to consolidate similar media into a group.
O
Offline Tender Limit
Seven (7) digit numeric field. Enter the media approval amount a
cashier can tender when the integrated EFT system is offline. Note: In
order for this parameter to work, the offline credit approval must be set in the
Allow Offline Approval field, another media configurator parameter.
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
One (1) digit numeric field. If this field has a 0, the drawer will not
open. If it has a 1, it opens only on sale finalization. If it has a 2, it
opens immediately.
P
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, a prompt requesting the Personal Identification
Number will appear on the attached payment terminal.
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If yes is selected, the POS prints this signature slip for the customer to
sign. The cashier keeps this slip for accounting purposes.
S
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires a Y for Yes or N for
No. If yes is selected, the POS workstation will print a signature line
on the signature slip for that type of media.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-175
T
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Five (5) digit numeric field. Enter the fixed amount of cash a customer
can obtain at the end of a sale using the Amt 1 option. This field is
used in conjunction with the Capture Cash Back Amt at Term option.
This amount should not be set larger than the Maximum Cash Back
Amount option.
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
Five (5) digit numeric field. Enter the fixed amount of cash a customer
can obtain at the end of a sale using the Amt 2 option. This field is
used in conjunction with the Capture Cash Back Amt at Term option.
This amount should not be set larger than the Maximum Cash Back
Amount option.
U
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If “Yes” is selected, authorization is required for electronic payment.
V
Validate (Y/N)
One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y for Yes or N for No.
If “Yes” is selected, this media requires validation to finalize.
Validation Description
Twenty (20) character alphanumeric field. This field details which
Media Description will appear on the back of the validation.
Validation Line 1
Thirty-eight (38) character alphanumeric field. This user-defined field
prints during validation.
Validation Line 2
Thirty-eight (38) character alphanumeric field. This user-defined field
prints during validation.
8-176 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Validation Line 3
Thirty-eight (38) character alphanumeric field. This user-defined field
prints during validation.
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the
Personalization Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes to the
ScanMaster Media Configurator screen.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort changes to the
ScanMaster Media Configurator screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Media Configurator screen.
Using the Media Configurator
The user has the ability to define the attributes of the selected media by
clicking on the desired button. Each different media type has specific
functions that are easily configured to meet store needs. After the user
defines each individual type, click on the SAVE button to save changes
to the media configurator. The file is updated at the POS workstation
via manual update or Day-End procedure.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-177
Foreign Currency Rate Editor
The Foreign Currency Rate Editor is the eighth option on the
ScanMaster System Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or
press Alt-U) to access the ScanMaster Foreign Currency Rate Editor
Screen.
The Foreign Currency Rate Editor permits stores to enter the foreign
currency exchange rate ScanMaster uses when calculating between the
face amount and native value.
Foreign Currency Rate Editor
8-178 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Foreign Currency Rate Editor
screen.
Enter the Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Here: In the nine (9) digit
numeric field, the first four digits are placed before the decimal point,
with the remaining five placed after the decimal point (XXXX.XXXXX).
Enter the exchange rate for the foreign currency in this field. Use the
decimal point when entering this value.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Foreign Currency Rate
Editor.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit the ScanMaster
Foreign Currency Rate Editor. The system prompts you to save any
unsaved changes made to information in this record.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to information in the Foreign Currency Exchange Rate record.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Foreign Currency Rate Editor.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-179
Using the Foreign Currency Rate Editor
The Foreign Currency Rate Editor permits stores to apply the exchange
rate for transactions in which foreign currency is used. The user
simply enters the exchange rate for the foreign currency into the editor
and ScanMaster uses this value when calculating the currency
exchange.
Any changes made to this field are immediate, so when a new
exchange rate is entered and saved, it is not necessary to update POS
workstations to get the new exchange rate. The change is real-time.
The currency exchange is calculated through one of two formulas.
•
Native Value = Face Amount * Exchange Rate
•
Face Amount = Native Value / Exchange Rate
Example: The following examples involve converting Canadian
dollars (foreign currency) into US dollars (native value) with an
exchange rate of .80000.
CONVERTING FOREIGN CURRENCY INTO US CURRENCY
If a customer wanted to convert a $10 Canadian bill into US currency,
ScanMaster would take the face value of the Canadian currency and
multiply it by the exchange rate ($10 Canadian * .80000 exchange rate =
$8 US currency).
PAYING SALE TOTAL IN FOREIGN CURRENCY
If a customer wanted to know how much Canadian currency to tender
for a $10.00 sale, ScanMaster would take the native value of the sale
($10) and divide it by the exchange rate (.80000). The formula would
read: $10.00 US / .80000 exchange rate = $12.50 Canadian.
PAYING IN FOREIGN CURRENCY AND GETTING US CHANGE
If a customer pays for a $10 transaction with a $20 Canadian bill and
seeks US change, ScanMaster first converts the Canadian cash into US
currency ($20.00 Canadian * .80000 exchange rate = $16.00 US) and
then subtracts the amount of the sale ($16.00 tendered - $10.00 total sale
= $6.00 Change).
8-180 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Tax Code Editor
The Tax Code Editor is the ninth option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-E) to access
the ScanMaster Tax Code Editor screen. The Tax Code Editor allows
you to assign a letter to each tax table or combination of tax tables.
This letter is printed on the customer receipt when that tax table or
combination is used.
Figure 8-12: Tax Code Editor
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-181
Field Descriptions
Tax Tables: This field displays the available tax table configurations
for the ScanMaster System.
Letter Descriptor: One (1) character alpha field. Enter a letter to
correspond with each tax table configuration.
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
System Personalization Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to
the Tax Code Editor screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Tax Code Editor screen.
Using the Tax Code Editor
From the ScanMaster Tax Code Editor screen, enter a letter descriptor
to correspond with each tax table configuration. This letter prints on
the customer receipt whenever an entry is made that has a taxable
status.
8-182 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
SRR Editor
The SRR Editor is the tenth option on ScanMaster Personalization
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the ScanMaster
Reconciliation Report Editor Screen. The SRR Editor enables you to
develop a customized reconciliation report that displays all pertinent
accounting information for Paidouts, Receipts and Memos.
Figure 8-13: Reconciliation Report Editor Screen
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-183
Field Descriptions
Edit: Click on this radio button to edit the desired account name under
the Paidout, Receipt or Memo Tab.
Delete: Click on this radio button to delete the highlighted totalizer
under the Paidout, Receipt or Memo Tab.
Insert After: Click on this radio button to insert a Paidout, Receipt or
Memo totalizer after the highlighted selection in the Section Layout
Box.
Insert Before: Click on this radio button to insert a Paidout, Receipt or
Memo totalizer before the highlighted selection in the Section Layout
Box.
Section Layout Box: This layout box displays the account names that
are currently arranged on the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
Totalizer List: This list displays when you choose to insert a totalizer
into the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report spreadsheet. It consists of
the various media available, the register total fields and various
formatting features. A user-defined field is also available.
Totalizer: This field displays the selected totalizer number from the
Totalizer List.
Descriptor: This field displays the totalizer description that prints on
the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report. You can use that descriptor or
customize a new one from this data field.
G/L Account Number: Optional. This 10-character data field displays
the G/L Number (when available) that corresponds to that totalizer.
Use a different G/L Account Number from that assigned to the
corresponding Paidout Totalizer.
Line Type: This is an informational field that details the source for that
totalizer. Line Types include:
•
Imported: Data imported from the POS or other programs.
•
Sales: Data compiled from department reports.
•
Balance: Data compiled through balancing the spreadsheet.
8-184 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
•
Special: User-defined character field.
•
GT: Grand Total.
•
ST: Sub Total.
•
SST: Sub total since last sub total.
•
Header: This line indicates a header position. IT has no value.
•
===‘s: This line draws a double, underscored line on the
spreadsheet.
•
___’s: This line draws a single, underscored line on the
spreadsheet.
•
Hand Key: Data is hand-keyed into the spreadsheet, not imported
from
•
FF: Form Feed.
Attribute: This field displays whether the totalizer is visible or hidden
under the Section Heading and whether or not it is a memo. Memos
are not calculated into the spreadsheet. When you click on this field,
the Totalizer Attributes box displays. Select from: Visible, Hidden,
Memo or Hidden Memo.
Action: This field indicates the action of the totalizer. When you click
on this field, the Totalizer Action box displays. Select from: Adds
(adds totalizer), Subtracts (subtracts totalizer) or None (indicates no
action).
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu Screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save changes made to
the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes
made to the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report Editor.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-185
Using the SRR Editor
You can customize a reconciliation report specifically for your store by
using the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report Editor screen.
Select the Paidouts Tab to assign totalizers for all store deposits, and
anything paid out from the store safe. Select the Receipts Tab to assign
totalizers for incoming receipts. Totalizers used in this section account
for all incoming funds to the store safe. Use the Memo tab to assign
totalizers for miscellaneous items sold by the store. This includes
“other” trackable items sold by the store, but are not considered
paidouts or receipts.
Editing an Existing Totalizer on the SRR Editor
Follow the steps below to edit an existing totalizer.
1. Select a totalizer from the Paidouts, Receipts or Memos tab.
2. Click the Edit button.
The Totalizer data fields display:
Figure 8-14: Totalizer Data Fields
3. Edit the data fields and click Save to save the changes.
8-186 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Adding a New Totalizer to the SRR Editor
New totalizers can be added anywhere in the SRR report. They can be
added before a certain line or after a certain line. Follow the steps
below to add a new totalizer to the SRR Editor.
1. Select the new totalizer location by clicking on the line before or
after an existing totalizer.
2. If you want to insert the new totalizer before that line, click the
Insert Before button. If you want to insert the new totalizer after
that line, click the Insert After button.
The Totalizer list displays.
Figure 8-15: Totalizer List
3. Select the preferred totalizer and click OK.
4. Edit the data fields and click Save to save the changes.
Deleting a Totalizer in the SRR Editor
If you want to delete a totalizer from the reconciliation report, click (or
highlight) the totalizer and click the Delete button. The system
prompts to make sure you want to delete that totalizer. Select YES to
delete.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-187
Customizing a Totalizer in the SRR Editor
If you want to customize the totalizer, click (or highlight) the totalizer
and click the Edit button. Make the desired changes in the Totalizer
data fields and click Save.
Click on the SAVE button to save changes made to the Reconciliation
Report or the ABORT button to abort any changes made. Click on the
EXIT button to return to the ScanMaster Personalization Menu.
8-188 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Communication Parameters
Communication Parameters is the eleventh option on the ScanMaster
Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-P) to access
the ScanMaster Communication Parameters screen.
This option provides interface parameters for stores using third-party
host communication software on their ScanMaster system. Configure
these parameters to enable your communications software to interface
with ScanMaster.
Figure 8-16: Communications Control File Maintenance
Field Descriptions
Comm Software Drive Designator: Enter the drive where the
communication package software is installed. (For example, C:\)
Comm Software Directory: Enter the directory where the
communication package software is installed. (For example,
\Prowin2)
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-189
Comm Software Upload Directory: Enter the directory where files are
stored when uploading to the host (For example, UPLOAD/)
Comm Software Download Dir. Enter the directory where files are
saved when downloading from the host. (For example, DNLOAD/)
Store Receive Batch Name: This is the name of the file that is
downloaded from the host. (8.3 character)
Store Send PLU File Name: This is the name of the file that is being
uploaded to the host.
Store/VSP Number: Up to five (5) digit numeric field. The use of this
field is determined by the host communication software package being
utilized. It is the store number that can be appended to the file name.
Save Store Report Codes: One (1) character alpha field. This field
requires Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow
supporting interfaces to import report code fields. If set to “No,”
report codes will not be imported.
Save Store Departments: One (1) character alpha field. This field
requires Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow
supporting interfaces to import store department fields. If set to “No,”
store departments will not be imported.
Set Discount 1 On: One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y
for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to force all imported items
to a Discount 1 status. If set to “No,” imported discounts will retain
their original discount status.
Set Discount 2 On: One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y
for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to force all imported items
to a Discount 2 status. If set to “No,” imported discounts will retain
their original discount status.
Save Subdepartment: One (1) character alpha field. This field requires
Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow supporting
interfaces to import subdepartment fields. If set to “No,”
subdepartments will not be imported.
8-190 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Save Mix N Match: One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y
for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow supporting
interfaces to import Mix & Match fields. If set to “No,” mix n match
fields will not be imported.
Save Store Mix N Match: One (1) character alpha field. This field
requires Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow
supporting interfaces to import store Mix & Match fields. If set to
“No,” store mix n match fields will not be imported.
Save Descriptors: One (1) character alpha field. This field requires Y
for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to allow supporting
interfaces to import descriptor fields. If set to “No,” descriptor fields
will not be imported.
Use Alternate Batching: One (1) character alpha field. This field
requires Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to
Set Tax2 on If Tax1 Is On: One (1) character alpha field. This field
requires Y for Yes or N for No. Set this field to “Yes” to automatically
set the Tax2 flag to on if the Tax1 flag is turned on.
Max Number of Items Per Batch: This is the maximum number of
items an imported batch can contain. There can be multiple batches in
a file, however.
Electronic Coupon File Name: Eight (8) character alpha field. This is
the name of the file holding Electronic Coupon information.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-191
Customer CRT Promo Editor
The Customer CRT Promo Editor is the twelfth option on the
ScanMaster Personalization Menu. Click on that button (or press
Alt-O) to access the ScanMaster Customer Promo Editor screen.
This screen is used to set up promotional messages that display on the
customer CRT at each POS workstation.
Figure 8-17: Customer CRT Promo Editor Screen
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Customer CRT Promo
Editor Screen.
Promo Code: Four (4) digit numeric field. A unique number assigned
to customer CRT promotions. Up to 9,999 customer CRT promotions
can be created.
8-192 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Description: Forty (40) character alpha/numeric field. Enter a brief
description used to identify the promotional message.
Promotion: Ten (10) lines of thirty-seven (37) alpha/numeric
characters each. Enter text or characters that will comprise the message
that will be displayed on the Customer CRT. The message is left
justified, so spaces must be inserted in front of text in order for it to
appear centered on the Customer CRT.
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Customer CRT Promo
Editor Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Customer CRT Promo Editor screen.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save any changes made
to the ScanMaster Customer CRT Promo Editor screen.
PREVIOUS: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to return to the
previous promotion.
NEXT: Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to advance to the next
promotion.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes you
have made to an unsaved Customer CRT Promotion.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete a Customer
CRT Promotion from the list..
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Customer CRT Promo Editor screen.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-193
Using the Customer CRT Promo Editor
The Customer CRT Promo Editor enables stores to
display promotional messages -- the same message or different
messages -- at each individual POS workstation on their ScanMaster
system. It can be used to promote sales, display messages, notify
customers of upcoming events or a variety of other reasons.
Up to 9,999 promotional messages can be customized through
ScanMaster’s Customer CRT Promo Editor. When saved, each
message is stored in the GRCCPRMO.BTR file, located in the
F:\Grocery\Files directory.
In order for the Customer CRT Promo Editor to work at each POS
workstation, the following Register Control File options must be
enabled at each POS workstation:
•
Enable Video Customer Display (Yes or No)
•
Default CID Promotion Number (enter four digit promo number)
8-194 Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations
Creating a Customer CRT Promotion
Follow the steps below to create or edit a customer CRT promotional
message:
1. Upon initially accessing the Customer CRT Promo Editor screen,
the first promotion on the list displays.
2. From the Promotion Code field, enter the promotion code number
you want to create or edit.
3. If it is a new promotion code number, the system prompts if you
want to create a new promotion. Click Yes and a blank promotion
screen displays. If the promotion code number already exists, that
particular promotional message displays.
4. Enter or edit the promotion Description.
5. Enter or edit the Promotion message. The Promotion message
consists of ten (10) lines of thirty-seven characters each. This is the
message that will display in the upper right corner of the Customer
CRT.
6. Click Save to save the promotional message or Abort to exit that
promotion without saving any changes.
Chapter 8: Personalizing Workstations 8-195
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
The purpose of this chapter is to enable you to perform POS
operations. It covers the features and functionality provided at POS
workstations. In addition, this chapter discusses security features, data
redundancy, POS Utilities, and POS recovery procedures.
This chapter explains in detail the POS workstation functions and how
they operate. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
•
Operator Display
•
Customer Display
•
Beginning a Transaction
•
Item Entry
•
Total/Tendering
•
Department/Item Status
•
Customer Receipt
•
Function/Tender Keys
•
Training Mode
9-2
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Operator Display (CRT)
The POS workstation can have a 9" CRT operator display which shows
all operator prompts, data caption fields and error/informational
messages. The CRT can also be used as a customer display. The screen
is divided into two boxed sections.
•
The top section displays the UPC or department number,
description, and price of the current line item entry, as well as
any operator prompts.
•
The bottom section displays: the last 10 line items entered and
amount and status of each line item entry. The scrolling keys,
PAGE UP (REPORT MENU) and PAGE DOWN
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION), permit you to page through
previous line items sold.
•
Additional information displayed outside of the two boxes on
the operator includes a top line showing the POS workstation
number, operator name, and the date.
•
The middle line displays the running total with tax, the running
food stamp total, or the number of items in the transaction.
•
The bottom line displays the copyright statement and software
version number. When the POS workstation is running in offline
mode, the screen displays: " ***OFF-LINE***." If there are
suspended sales, a message indicating the number of sales
currently suspended displays vertically along the right side of the
display screen.
Figure 9-1: Operator Display (CRT)
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-3
Operator Display (LCD - DynaKey)
The POS workstation can have an LCD operator display which shows
all operator prompts, data caption fields, and error/informational
messages. The screen is divided into three boxed sections.
•
The top section displays the UPC or department number,
description, and price of the current line item entry, as well as any
operator prompts.
•
The bottom section displays the last 10 line items entered and the
amount and status of each line item entry. The scrolling keys,
PAGE UP (REPORT MENU) and PAGE DOWN
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION Keys) permit you to page through
previous line items sold.
•
The right section displays the “Dynamic Keys” of the POS
workstation. The functions of these keys change during the sales
process. During item entry, the LCD displays the available
department keys and open departments. If you press the STATUS
key during item entry, the “Dynamic Keys” show the available
status keys. At total time, the “Dynamic Keys” show the available
tender key. At the Closed prompt, the right side of the display is
blank until you sign on to the POS workstation. The DOWN
ARROW key (PAGE DOWN - MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION)
and the UP ARROW key (PAGE UP - REPORTS MENU) are
located below the numerical keypad.
•
Additional information displays outside of the two boxes on the
operator display. The top line shows the POS workstation number,
the operator name, and the date.
•
The middle line shows the running total with the tax and the
running food stamp total or number of items in the transaction.
9-4
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
•
The bottom line displays the copyright statement and software
version number. When the POS workstation is running in offline
mode, the screen displays: " ***OFF-LINE***." If there are
suspended sales, a message indicating the number of sales
currently suspended displays vertically in the middle of the display
screen.
Figure 9-2: Operator Display (LCD)
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-5
Customer Display
The Customer Display is a 2-line, 20 character alpha/numeric display
that shows line item information, total due, or change information for
the customer to view. When the POS workstation is in Idle or Closed
mode, it is possible to have a banner message continuously scrolling
across the display. This feature can be used to advertise or to display
store greetings.
Figure 9-3: Customer Display
The NCR 5973 Vacuum Florescent Display (VFD) is an optional
customer display device for the NCR 7452, 7453 and 7454 customer
workstations. It can be used with any industry-standard PC.
Figure 9-4: VFD Customer Display
9-6
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Beginning the Transaction
Before beginning a sales transaction, you must sign on to the POS
workstation using a unique three (3) digit log on/off ID and a three (3)
digit security number. A transaction starts when you scan or key the
first item.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-7
Item Entry
There are five ways of entering items into a transaction:
•
Scanning the UPC Number
•
Key-Entering the UPC Number
•
Presets
•
Entering an Amount to a Department Key
•
Enter an Amount to an Open Department Number
When you scan or key-enter a UPC code, the POS workstation reads
the UPC code from the File Server PC. The File Server PC contains all
necessary data about the item scanned such as the price, description,
and status. If limits are exceeded or the UPC code requires more
information, an error message or an operator prompt displays on the
screen. An operator’s intervention or a manager’s intervention is
necessary to complete the item entry.
Some of the most common error messages/operator prompts that may
display are:
•
ENTER PRICE AND DEPARTMENT
•
ENTER TARE CODE NUMBER
•
HIGH/LOW ERROR
•
ENTER MANAGER ID
•
QTY LIMITED EXCEEDED
•
QTY NOT ALLOWED
•
KEY SEQUENCE INVALID
•
SCALE ERROR
•
PRESET NOT DEFINED
Other error messages or operator prompts may display during the
transaction.
9-8
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Scanning an Item
To scan an item, place or swipe the bar code over the scanner glass. A
tone sounds on a successful scan.
Entering a UPC Number Manually
To manually enter a UPC number, key-enter the UPC number and
press ENTER.
The standard UPC code is a 12-digit bar code number. Some UPCs
may display as a short 6-digit UPC code which expands to the
standard 12 digits. Expanded product codes, such as EANs (European
Article Numbers) and SKUs (Stock Keeping Units), can be key-entered
into the system as well.
Note: Never key the last check digit number.
Figure 9-5: Sample Standard 12-digit UPC-A Code
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Figure 9-6: Sample Short 6-digit UPC-E Code
Figure 9-7: Standard 13-digit EAN Code
Figure 9-8: Sample Short 8-digit EAN code
9-9
9-10
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Entering a Preset
A PRESET is a specific UPC number assigned to a department key. To
enter a preset at the POS workstation, press the department key that
has a preset assigned. The item assigned to that department key is
entered.
Entering an Amount to a Department
The system has the capability to enter a dollar amount to a specific
department when scanning or when a UPC number is not available.
There can be up to 15 department keys assigned to the POS
workstation keyboard. To enter an amount to a department, enter the
dollar amount and press the corresponding department key.
Entering an Amount to an Open Department Key
You must use the OPEN DEPARTMENT # key if the system’s
department file exceeds more than the allowed fifteen keys on the
keyboard. The OPEN DEPARTMENT # key displays a numerical
listing of all available departments in the department file. The operator
screen displays the department number and description. You may
need to use the PAGE UP (REPORTS MENU) and PAGE DOWN
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS) keys to scroll through the whole
department list. To enter an amount to an open department:
1. Enter the dollar amount.
2. Press the OPEN DEPT. # key.
3. Enter the department number and press the ENTER key to accept.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-11
Total/Tendering
Total/Tendering provides the transaction total. The following
amounts are calculated at tendering:
•
The transaction subtotal
•
The food stamp subtotal
•
The tax calculation
•
The discount amount
The system calculates the food stamp subtotal on items designated as
food stamp eligible in the item file. It calculates taxes due from items
marked as taxable in the item file and from the appropriate tax table
only after any food stamps have been tendered. All transaction
information (TLOG) is written to the file server PC (person and
department totals) and the POS workstation's hard disk (person,
department and register totals) at the end of each transaction. When
you sign off, the system transfers all transaction information to the File
Server PC.
After you press the TOTAL key, the system prompts you to enter the
amount and tender type from the customer.
Note: Food stamp tendering must be the first tender when split
tendering because of forgiving tax on items that are food stamp and tax
status.
The system supports the use of multiple tender types within a sale.
Once the system accepts the tender you cannot "clear" to go back into
the sale unless there is an amount still due and the POS workstation
Control File is set to permit return to item entry. This feature can be
made available to managers only.
9-12
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Department/Item Status
As each item and department entry is made at the POS workstation, or
a function is performed, the operator display, customer receipt, and
journal tape reflect any status codes that are unique to the line item.
The seven (7) possible codes are:
•
F - Food Stampable
•
MC - Manufacture Coupon
•
R - Refund
•
SC - Store Coupon
•
T - Taxable
•
V - Void
•
* - Denotes an item eligible for Frequent Shopper points
accumulation
•
A blank space next to any item means it has no unique or special
status
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Customer Receipt
The Customer's Receipt consists of:
•
Logo (if 7156 thermal printer is used)
•
3 Line Heading
•
1 Transaction Line which includes:
•
4 digit Store Number
•
2 digit POS workstation Number
•
8 digit Transaction Number
•
Date and Time
•
3 digit Operator Number and Name (optional)
•
All Line Items with Status
•
Subtotal
•
Sales Tax
•
Total
•
Tender
•
Exchange Rate (optional for Foreign Currency conversion)
•
Change
•
# of Items
•
Trailer Message
9-13
9-14
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
The Customer Receipt may show additional information depending on
the configuration set up or these transaction selections:
•
Item Subtotal
•
Discounts
•
Food Stamp Total
•
Food Stamp Change
•
Coupon Total
•
Combined Tax Total
•
Memo Line information
•
Frequent Shopper Information:
•
Account Number
•
Savings Today
•
Frequent Shopper $$ Amount Earned
•
Frequent Shopper $$ Period to Date
•
Frequent Shopper Points Earned
•
Frequent Shopper Points Period to Date
•
Non - Frequent Shopper Information
•
Store Generated Coupons/Advertisements
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-15
Function Keys
Below is a list of available function keys at the POS workstation. The
following pages explain in detail about the function keys and show
examples of the keying sequence. Manager security may be assigned
to function keys through the Register Control File. If manager security
is required to perform a function, the operator screen prompts "ENTER
MANAGER ID." At this prompt, a manager must enter a manager ID
number and press the ENTER key or scan a manager ID number before
you can continue.
Note: Tender keys are listed documented separately following this
section.
Function Keys
•
ACCOUNT NUMBER Key
•
AT/FOR Key
•
CANCEL Key
•
CASH CHECK Key
•
CHARGE PAYMENT Key
•
CHARGE PAYMENT Key (on DynaKey)
•
CHECK CASHING Key
•
CLEAR/NO Key
•
COUPON PAID OUT Key
•
DEPARTMENT Key
•
DISCOUNT (1, 2, 4, OR 5) key
•
DOUBLE COUPON/DOUBLE COUPON EXCEPTION Key
•
ENTER/REPEAT/YES Key
•
FOOD STAMP EXCEPTION Key
•
GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER Key
9-16
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
•
GIFT/MONEY Key (on DynaKey)
•
MANUFACTURER COUPON Key
•
MEDIA SWAP Key
•
OPEN DEPARTMENT NUMBER Key
•
OVERRIDE Key
•
PAID OUT Key
•
PRICE INQUIRY Key
•
REFUND Key
•
REPORT MENU Key (Up Arrow Key)
•
RETURN Key
•
SCALE/TARE Key
•
SCAN VOID Key
•
SIGN ON/OFF Key
•
STATUS Key
•
STORE COUPON Key
•
SUSPEND/RETRIEVE Key
•
TAX EXEMPT (1,2,3 OR ALL) Key
•
TOTAL/NO SALE Key
•
VOID/ERROR CORRECT Key
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-17
ACCOUNT # Key
The Account Number Key is used with the Frequent Shopper Program.
When the Frequent Shopper Program is implemented in the store, the
operator screen prompts: "ENTER FREQUENT SHOPPER #" at the
beginning of each transaction. If the customer is a program member
and provides a number, you can either scan the customer's card or
manually enter the customer's account number. Press ENTER, then
proceed with item entry. If the customer is not a member, or does not
provide the number at the beginning of the transaction, you may press
ENTER to bypass the prompt, and proceed with item entry.
Note: This key is activated by first pressing the STATUS key on the
DynaKey keyboard followed by the Down Arrow key.
At any point in the transaction prior to pressing the TOTAL key and
accepting tender, you may enter the Frequent Shopper number by
pressing the ACCOUNT # key. The operator screen displays "ENTER
FREQUENT SHOPPER #." The items that have a Frequent Shopper
status have an asterisk "*" in front of the line item.
Frequent Shopper information may or may not print on the bottom of
the receipt depending on the POS workstation configuration. If the
system is set up to print Frequent Shopper information on the bottom
of the Customer Receipt, this is the information that displays:
“Customer Account #”
“Today, You Saved $$.$$”
“Freq. Shopper $$.$$ Earned”
“Freq. Shopper $$.$$ To Date”
There is also a Non-Frequent Shopper message that may be configured
to print on the bottom of the customer receipt:
“If You had Been A Frequent Shopper”
“Today, You Would Have Earned”
“Freq. Shopper $$.$$”
“Ask Cashier Details About Our”
“Frequent Shopper Program”
9-18
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
AT/FOR Key
You can use the AT/FOR key to enter multiple quantities of an item
with a single scan or keyed entry. Every item in the item file is
designated as one of the following:
•
Quantity Allowed: Permits but does not require entering a
quantity when scanning or key-entering an item.
•
Quantity Enforced: Requires a quantity entry before or after
scanning or key-entering an item. The screen prompts for the
quantity.
•
Quantity Inhibited: Prohibits inputting a quantity when an item is
scanned or key-entered.
Key Sequence for At/For Key (Multiple Quantities)
1. Enter the quantity of the items being sold.
2. Press AT/FOR.
3. Key-enter or scan the item.
The AT/FOR key is also used in split price multiplication when selling
multiple counts of items within the same pricing group. This keying
sequence is only available when selling an item to a department. For
example, suppose you are entering ABC Soup at 3 for $1.00. The soup
is sold to the GROCERY department, and the customer is purchasing 9
cans. You would follow the steps below.
Key Sequence for At/For Key (Split Quantities)
1. Enter the quantity of items being sold. (In the example above, you
would enter 9.)
2. Press AT/FOR.
3. Enter the quantity number for the split price. (In the example
above, you would enter 3.)
4. Press AT/FOR.
5. Enter the amount and department or scan in the item.
6. Press the appropriate department key. (In the example above, you
would press the GROCERY department key.)
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-19
Note: Items scanned or key-entered, pricing methods, and results of
the calculation display on the operator screen and are printed on the
customer receipt.
CANCEL Key
The CANCEL KEY automatically cancels the current transaction and is
available only during sales mode. You can only press the CANCEL
KEY before pressing the TOTAL key. If you need to cancel a sale after
totaling, but before you have entered in the system any tender, press
the CLEAR key to return to sales mode. Then you can press the
CANCEL KEY.
Note: This key activated by first pressing the STATUS key on the
DynaKey keyboard followed by the Down Arrow key.
When you use the CANCEL key to terminate an order, the message,
"Transaction Canceled," is printed on both the customer receipt and the
journal tape.
A canceled transaction does not produce any totals. However, the
system records that the transaction was canceled. The Back Office PC
maintains a file that accumulates the number and the amounts of all
canceled transactions.
Key Sequence for Cancel Key
During Sales Mode, press the CANCEL key. The transaction is
canceled.
9-20
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
CASH CHECK Key
The CASH CHECK key permits you to cash a check outside of a
transaction. You can only perform the Cash Check function at the
beginning of a new transaction by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION key (Down Arrow key). Since check cashing is the same
as accepting the check as tender in a sales transaction with a zero
balance due, the same verification, change, and amount limits are
applicable.
If the system uses a negative check, and the customer presents an
invalid check, the screen indicates "Manager Needed Code #" and the
appropriate status code number. The system prints a receipt indicating
the check amount cashed and the dollar amount removed from the
cash drawer.
Key Sequence for Cash Check
1. Press the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Retrieve Transaction”
“2. Paidout”
“3. Coupon Paidout”
“4. Cash Check”
“5. Media Swap”
2. Enter 4 for Cash Check.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Check Amount?”
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-21
3. Enter the amount of the check and press ENTER.
If a Negative or Positive check file is active, continue to Step 4. If
there is no check file active, continue to step 5.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Account #”
4. Enter the account number and press ENTER.
If the account number is accepted, the transaction continues. If
there is a problem with the account number, the operator screen
displays "Manager Needed Code #." A manager is needed to
continue this transaction. Press ENTER and enter the manager
number to accept the check or press CLEAR and deny the check
from being cashed.
The screen prompts "Insert Check."
5. Insert the check in the printer to validate the back of the check. The
operator screen then prompts "Press Clear" for validation printing
to take place.
9-22
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
CLEAR/NO Key
The CLEAR/NO key is a multiple function key that determines which
function is currently active.
Clear
The CLEAR/NO key clears data before or during entry of the data in
the system. This function permits re-entry of correct data.
When the system permits, you can press the CLEAR key to force the
system to "back up" to the prior step in the transaction. For example, if
you have pressed the TOTAL key, and you realize you need to enter
additional items, press the CLEAR key to return the POS workstation
to sales mode.
If an error or advisory message displays, you must press the CLEAR
key in order to proceed.
When inserting a document for validation, press the CLEAR key to
activate the print function.
No
The CLEAR/NO key is also the “No” response when the transaction
presents you with a “Yes” or “No” option. If the choice is “No,” press
the CLEAR/NO key to provide a “No” response.
COUPON PAIDOUT Key
The Coupon Paidout key permits the redemption of manufacturer or
store coupons outside of a transaction. The system includes Coupon
Paidout totals in the regular manufacturer or store coupon totals. You
can only perform the Coupon Paidout function at the beginning of a
new transaction by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key
(Down Arrow Key). The system cannot verify a coupon against a
specific department when you are using the Coupon Paidout function.
The screen displays a running total of all coupons. After you enter the
last coupon amount, press the TOTAL key. The screen displays the
total amount to be returned to the customer, and the cash drawer
opens. The system prints a receipt displaying "Coupon Paid Out" and
the amount.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-23
Key Sequence for Coupon Paidout
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Retrieve Transaction”
“2. Paidout”
“3. Coupon Paidout”
“4. Cash Check”
“5. Media Swap”
2. Enter 3 for Coupon Paidout.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Coupon Amount”
“Total Paidout $$.$$”
“Press Total When Done”
3. Enter the amount of the coupon and press the corresponding
manufacturer or store coupon key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Department”
“Total Paidout $$.$$”
“Press Total When Done”
4. Press the corresponding department key. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for
additional coupons.
5. Press TOTAL.
9-24
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
DEPARTMENT Keys
The system has the capability to enter a dollar amount to a specific
department when scanning or when a UPC number is not available.
There can be up to 15 department keys assigned to the POS
workstation keyboard.
Key Sequence for Department
1. Enter a dollar amount.
2. Press the corresponding department key.
DISCOUNT Key
The system permits up to four discount keys (1, 2, 4 or 5) at the POS
workstation. The DISCOUNT key can operate by line item or at total
with either a variable (open) or fixed percent discount. In order to be
eligible for a discount, the item must be identified as discountable in
both the item file and department file. The type and amount of
discount allowed must also be defined in the Register Control File. It is
possible to give both a line item discount and a total discount within a
transaction, but the system does not permit you to apply both discount
one and discount two to the same line item.
Note: This key is activated by first pressing the STATUS key on the
DynaKey keyboard followed by the Down Arrow key.
You must enter a line item discount immediately following the item
entry. The customer receipt tape and journal tape reflect the original
selling price and discount percentage. If needed, you can void the line
item with the discount, either immediately after entering the discount
by pressing the ERROR CORRECT key or later in the transaction by
pressing PAGE UP (REPORTS MENU) or PAGE DOWN
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS) and pressing the VOID key. When
error correcting or voiding an item, this action voids the item and the
discount amount.
A transaction discount (at total time) reduces the balance due and tax
amount by the appropriate discount percentage. The system calculates
a transaction discount on the items in the transaction that are flagged
as discountable. You can void a transaction discount by pressing the
CLEAR key and then pressing the TOTAL key again.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-25
Key Sequence for Discount by Line Item
1. Scan or key-enter the item.
2. Press the DISCOUNT key.
Note: On the DynaKey POS workstations, you must press the
STATUS key to access the discount keys.
If the discount is a fixed discount, the system automatically applies the
discount. If it is a variable (open) discount, continue to STEP 3.
The operator screen prompts: "Enter Discount Percentage"
3. Enter the discount percent.
4. Press ENTER.
Key Sequence for Discount at Total Time
1. Enter all items and press TOTAL.
2. Press the DISCOUNT key.
Note: On the DynaKey POS workstations, the STATUS key must be
pressed to access the discount key.
If it is a fixed discount, the system automatically reduces the total
amount due, by the value of the discount percentage. If it is a variable
(open) discount continue to step 3.
The operator screen prompts: "Enter Discount Percentage"
3. Enter the discount percent.
4. Press ENTER.
9-26
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
DOUBLE COUPON/DOUBLE COUPON EXCEPTION Key
Depending on the Register Control File settings, the DOUBLE
COUPON/DOUBLE COUPON EXCEPTION will either automatically
double the face value of any store or manufacturer’s coupon or exempt
the coupon from receiving a multiplier.
Key Sequence for Double Coupon Key
1. Key-enter or scan the store or manufacturer’s coupon
2. Press the Double Coupon Key
ScanMaster automatically adds another subtraction line on the receipt
tape duplicating the coupon amount along with the coupon multiple
description from the Register Control File.
Key Sequence for Double Coupon Exception Key
1. Press the Double Coupon Key
The Register displays XCPN.
2. Key-enter or scan the store or manufacturer’s coupon
ScanMaster adds a subtraction line equaling the face amount of the
coupon preventing the automatic multiplier scenario as defined in the
Register Control File.
ENTER/REPEAT/YES Key
The ENTER/REPEAT/YES key is a multiple function key that
determines which function is currently active.
Enter
The ENTER key accepts all preceding keystrokes as input for a given
POS workstation function.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-27
Repeat
The Repeat function can be activated through the Register Control File.
If the Repeat function is available, you can press the
ENTER/REPEAT/YES key to repeat or duplicate the entry of the
previous line item scanned or keyed, and the system accepts an
additional line item sold. The system does not permit the Repeat
function on coupons or items that have been defined in the item file as
split price items or enforced quantity items.
Yes
The ENTER/REPEAT/YES key is also the “Yes” response when the
transaction presents you with a “Yes” or “No” option. Pressing the
ENTER/REPEAT/YES key provides a “Yes” response.
FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION Key
The FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION key is used to reverse the current
status of an item to food stamp exempt.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
The FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION key must be pressed prior to entering
or scanning an item. It only affects the current item being entered. The
FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION key must be pressed each time the
function is needed. If the FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION key is pressed
by accident, you can press it again to toggle the exception on and off.
When the FOOD STAMP EXCEPTION key is pressed, the operator
screen displays "XFS."
Key Sequence for the FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION Key
1. Press the FOOD STAMP EXEMPTION key."XFS" displays on the
operator screen.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
2. Key-enter or scan the item.
9-28
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER Key
The GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER key is a multiple function
key. You can sell gift certificates or money orders alone or within a
transaction through the POS workstation. The system may attach a fee
for the sale of a money order if designated in the Register Control File.
You can also use the GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER key as the
GIFT CERTIFICATE tender key at total time. See the Tender Type
section for more information on Gift Certificate tender.
Key Sequence for Gift Certificate/Money Order Key
1. Enter the amount of the gift certificate or the money order.
2. Press the GIFT CERTIFICATE/MONEY ORDER key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”:
“1 - Money Order”
“2 - Gift Certificate”
3. Enter the number of the selection.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Money Order #”
Note: If you are entering a gift certificate, the screen prompts "ENTER
GIFT CERTIFICATE NUMBER".
4. Enter the number.
5. Press ENTER.
Note: If designated in the Register Control File, the printer can
validate the back of a gift certificate at the time of sale and at tender
time. When validating a gift certificate, the operator screen prompts:
"INSERT GIFT CERT." Insert the gift certificate in the printer. The
operator screen then prompts: "PRESS CLEAR" for validation printing
to take place.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-29
GIFT CERTIFICATE / MONEY ORDER (DynaKey™)
Use the GIFT/MONEY key when selling gift certificates or money
orders. You can perform this function any time during a sale by
pressing the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key (Down Arrow key)
and selecting Gift Certificate or Money order.
Key Sequence for Gift Certificate
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Suspend Transaction”
“6. Gift/Money”
“7. Charge Payment”
2. Press 6 for Gift/Money
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection”
“1 = Money Order”
“2 = Gift Certificate”
3. Press 2 for Gift Certificate.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Gift Certificate Amount”
4. Enter the gift certificate amount and press ENTER
Example: 2500 = $25.
5. The system prompts for the gift certificate number:
“Enter Gift Certificate #”
6. Enter the gift certificate number and press ENTER.
7. If “Gift Certificate Sold Validation” is enabled in the Register
Control File, the system will prompt for a gift certificate to validate.
9-30
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
8. Insert the gift certificate and press CLEAR to continue.
9. Once validation is complete, the system prompts you to remove the
gift certificate.
10. The gift certificate sale is finished and you can continue the
transaction or total at this time.
Key Sequence for Money Order
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Suspend Transaction”
“6. Gift/Money”
“7. Charge Payment”
2. Press 6 for Gift/Money
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection”
“1 = Money Order”
“2 = Gift Certificate”
3. Press 1 for Money Order.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Money Order Amount”
4. Enter the money order amount and press ENTER
Example: 2500 = $25.
5. The system prompts for the money order number:
“Enter Money Order #”
6. Enter the money order number and press ENTER.
7. The money order sale is complete and you can continue the
transaction or total at this time.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-31
MANUFACTURER COUPON Key
The system has the capability to enter a dollar amount of a
manufacturer coupon when scanning or when a UPC number is not
available.
Key Sequence for MANUFACTURER COUPON Key
1. Enter a dollar amount.
2. Press the Mfg. Coupon key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Department”
3. Press the Department Key
MEDIA SWAP Key
You can use the MEDIA SWAP key to perform a tender correction after
you have completed the customer transaction.
Note: Since a media swap directly affects the accounting files, it is
extremely important that the procedure reflects changes against the
proper file on the back office PC. If the system is configured for
Operator Accountability in the Back Office Control File, you can enter
the media swap at any POS workstation, but you must be signed on the
POS workstation to perform the swap. If the system is configured for
Accountability by Lane in the Back Office Control File, you must
perform the procedure at the POS workstation where you initially
entered the incorrect media.
You can only perform the Media Swap function at the beginning of a
new transaction by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key
(Down Arrow key). The system prints a receipt displaying all the
information about the media swap.
9-32
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Key Sequence for Media Swap
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Retrieve Transaction”
“2. Paidout”
“3. Coupon Paidout”
“4. Cash Check”
“5. Media Swap”
2. Press 5 for Media Swap
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount To Swap”
3. Enter the amount to swap and press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount to Swap From:”
“Swap $$.$$”
“1 = Cash”
“2 = Food Stamp”
“3 = Check”
“4 = WIC”
“5 = Gift Cert.”
“6 = Mfg. Cpn.”
“7 = MasterCard”
“8 = VISA”
“9 = Discover”
“10 = Debit Card”
“11 = Store Cpn”
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-33
4. Enter the number to swap from and press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount to Swap To:”
“Swap $$.$$”
“From <Tender>“
“1 = Cash”
“2 = Food Stamp”
“3 = Check”
“4 = WIC”
“5 = Gift Cert.”
“6 = Mfg. Cpn.”
“7 = MasterCard”
“8 = VISA”
“9 = Discover”
“10 = Debit Card”
“11 = Store Cpn”
5. Enter the number to swap to and press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Swap $$.$$”
“From <Tender> To <Tender>“
“(Are You Sure? Y/N)”
6. Press the ENTER/REPEAT/YES key for correct, or press
CLEAR/NO key for incorrect.
If you select NO, the screen reverts back to the beginning of media
swap to re-enter again.
9-34
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION Key (Down Arrow Key)
The MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key (Down Arrow Key) performs
several different functions. They are:
•
Suspend/Retrieve
•
Paid Out
•
Coupon Paid Out
•
Check Cashing
•
Media Swap
•
Gift/Money (on DynaKey)
•
Charge Payment (on DynaKey)
Note: In order to use these functions on a POS workstation they must
be activated in the Register Control File, and you must have the
appropriate security level designation.
When you press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (Down Arrow) at the
beginning of a transaction, the operator screen lists all of the above
functions except Suspend. You can only access Suspend during sales
mode. Additionally, while in sales mode, the MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION key acts as the DOWN ARROW key when you are
viewing a flip chart. If you press the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
key (Down Arrow Key) after pressing the UP ARROW key, it functions
as the DOWN ARROW key in a line item void mode.
On the 56 and 64 key keyboard, you can make separate keys under the
Miscellaneous Function key. (Up and down arrow keys, Suspend,
Retrieve, Paidout, Coupon Paidout, gift certificate and money order.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-35
OPEN DEPARTMENT Key
You must use the OPEN DEPARTMENT # key if the system’s
department file exceeds more than the allowed fifteen keys on the
keyboard. The OPEN DEPARTMENT # key displays a numerical
listing of all available departments in the department file. The operator
screen displays the department number and description. You may
need to use the PAGE UP (REPORTS MENU) and PAGE DOWN
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS) keys to scroll through the whole
department list.
Key Sequence for Open Department Key.
1. Enter the dollar amount.
2. Press the OPEN DEPT. # key.
3. Press the Department Key (or enter the department number and
press the ENTER key to accept).
9-36
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
OVERRIDE Key
You can use the OVERRIDE key to adjust the price of an item scanned
or key-entered when the correct sales price is different from the price
defined in the Item file.
The system permits up to four user-defined reason codes for each
override function. The override reason codes are defined in the
Register Control File on the Back Office PC. By tracking overrides with
reason codes, the system can provide reports by operator of all the
overrides performed.
You must press the OVERRIDE key immediately after entering the
item, otherwise you must perform a void, then re-enter the item and
press the OVERRIDE key. A window listing the acceptable reason
codes displays on the screen for an operator or a manager to select the
appropriate reason. The system accumulates this information on the
Back Office PC, and it is available in report form. The override price
reason code report shows all overrides performed by each operator
and details the UPC number, item description, old price, new price,
and reason selected.
Key Sequence for the Override Key
1. Key-enter or scan the item.
2. Press OVERRIDE.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
If reason codes are in use, continue to step 3. If they are not in use,
continue to step 4.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Reason Code:”
“1. Price Marked Incorrect”
“2. Damaged Merchandise”
“3. Disc Merchandise”
“4. Sale Price Not in Reg.”
3. Enter the reason code number and press ENTER.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-37
Note: The above reason codes are defined on the Back Office PC. See
Chapter Eight, “Personalization - Reason Codes.”
The operator screen displays:
“New Price?”
4. Enter the new price and press ENTER. The item is entered in the
transaction as the new price. Remember this override function only
affects this one line item.
9-38
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
PAIDOUT Key
The PAIDOUT key tracks cash removed from the POS workstation
outside a transaction. You can only perform the Paidout function at
the beginning of a new sale by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION key (Down Arrow key). As you enter each cash value at
the keypad, the screen displays a running total. After you enter the last
item, press the TOTAL key. The cash drawer opens, allowing payment
and the printing of a receipt to show that you have removed the total
amount from the till. This function can have a paidout flip chat listing
all available paidout accounts.
Key Sequence for Paidout
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Retrieve Transaction”
“2. Paidout”
“3. Coupon Paidout”
“4. Cash Check”
“5. Media Swap”
2. Enter 2 for Paidout.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Paidout Amount:”
“Total Paidout $$.$$”
“Press Total When Done”
Note: If paidout flip chart is active, the operator enters the amount
and selects the paidout account from the flip chart list.
3. Enter the amount and press ENTER. The operator can continue to
enter additional paidout amounts until finished with all paidouts.
If the paidout flip chart is active, only one paidout amount can be
performed per transaction.
4. Press TOTAL.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-39
PRICE INQUIRY Key
You can use the PRICE INQUIRY key to look up an item or verify the
price of an item in the Item file.
You can perform a price inquiry prior to or during a transaction. When
you press the PRICE INQUIRY key, the operator screen displays
"INQ." in the corner of the screen. Then when you key-enter or scan
the item, the operator screen flashes INQ. with the UPC number,
product description, and price. Price Inquiry does not add the item to
the transaction. You can re-scan the item or press the
ENTER/REPEAT/YES key (only on unit items or items without
quantity enforcements) to add the item to the transaction.
Key Sequence for the Price Inquiry Key
1. Press PRICE INQUIRY.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Item/Amount”
“Inq.”
2. Key-enter or scan the item.
The operator screen displays.
“Enter Item/Amount”
“Inq. ############”
“Description $$.$$”
“Inq.”
3. Press CLEAR to cancel the inquiry or rescan the item to ring in the
price.
9-40
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
REFUND Key
The REFUND key credits a customer for a purchase. You can give a
refund as part of a transaction or as a transaction by itself.
Depending on the configuration, the system checks refunds against the
following limits and controls in the Register Control File:
•
Line Item Refund Limit: Maximum dollar amount per line item
allowed.
•
Total Refund Limit: Maximum dollar amount per transaction.
•
Management Override Security: Requires management approval
on all refunds.
•
Refund Reason Code Tracking: This tracking is performed on the
Back Office PC. See Chapter Eight, “Personalization - Reason
Codes.” This feature requires selection of up to four user defined
reasons for each refund, with the ability to track in report form.
The Back Office PC generates a report listing of all refunds
performed by operator, UPC number or department, quantity,
price, and reason code.
Key Sequence for Refund Key
1. Press REFUND.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
2. Key-enter or scan the item being refunded.
If Refund/Return codes are set in the Register Control File, select a
reason to continue.
3. Continue the transaction or press TOTAL to complete transaction.
If you must refund more than one item, you must go through the
refund keying sequence for each item unless the Refund Mode is
enabled through the Register Control File. Refund Mode effects the
entire transaction. The customer receipt and the journal tapes indicate
the amount of the item refund, as well as any tax amounts returned.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-41
If Refund Mode Enable is set to “Yes” in the Register Control File,
when you press REFUND, all items in the transaction are refunded
until you press REFUND again or the order is finalized.
If you give a refund within the transaction, it displays as a credit
toward the final total due. If the refund is the only item within the
transaction, you must return the money or issue a credit on the
customer's charge. The exact amount of the refund, (the cost of the
item plus any applicable tax), is the only valid tender amount that you
can enter at the POS workstation. Cash, charge, and food stamps are
the only tender types allowed on refunds.
9-42
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
REPORT MENU Key
The REPORT MENU key (Up Arrow key on DynaKey POS
workstations) consists of various reports and system functions. In
order to access any of the following functions, the operator display on
the POS workstation must indicate "Closed." The functions listed
below are accessed through the Report Menu. Information on these
functions are detailed later in this chapter.
•
Cashier Report
•
Register Report
•
Utilities:
•
Update Register
•
Offline Cashier Report
•
Non-Resettable Totals
•
Set Date
•
Set Time
•
Change to Online Mode
•
Change to Offline Mode
•
Display Available Memory
•
Display Error Log
•
Change Register Number
•
Enable Payment Systems
•
Disable Payment Systems
•
Clear Error Log
•
Shutdown Register - ****Exit Application****
•
Conversion Rate
•
End of Day
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, the REPORT MENU key is
the UP ARROW, located below the numeric keypad.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-43
RETURN Key
The RETURN key allows a previously scanned or key-entered item to
be returned within the same transaction.
Depending on the configuration, the system checks returns against the
following limits and controls in the Register Control File:
•
Management Override Security: Requires management approval
on all returns.
•
Refund Reason Code Tracking: This tracking is performed on the
Back Office PC. See Chapter Eight, “Personalization - Reason
Codes.” This feature requires selection of up to four user defined
reasons for each return or refund, with the ability to track in report
form. The Back Office PC generates a report listing of all returns
and refunds performed by operator, UPC number or department,
quantity, price, and reason code.
Key Sequence for Return Key
1. Press Return.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
2. Key-enter or scan the item being return.
If Refund codes are set in the Register Control File, select a reason
to continue.
3. Continue the transaction or press TOTAL to complete transaction.
9-44
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
SCALE/TARE Key
The SCALE/TARE key permits entry of the price per pound on a
weighed item sold to a specific department, and works in conjunction
with the scale or scanner-scale. It is used when weighed items do not
have a scannable code or key entry code. The item sold must be on the
scale before pressing the appropriate department key. If the item is not
on the scale when the price and department are entered, or the scale is
in motion, a "SCALE ERROR" message displays.
A Tare is the weight of a container or wrapper that must be deducted
from the gross item weight in order to obtain the net weight of the item
sold. Tare codes can be manually entered or the system can
automatically tag tare codes through the item record in the item file.
There are ninety-eight (98) available tare codes in the tare code table.
In order for items to have a manual tare prompt at the POS
workstation, the UPC number must have a tare code of ninety-nine (99)
in the item file or have a manual tare activated. (Refer to Back Office
PC - Personalization.) If the item number has a tare code other than
ninety-nine, the appropriate tare code value is automatically entered at
the POS workstation.
Key Sequence for the Scale/Tare Key
1. Place the item on the scale.
2. Press SCALE/TARE.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Price/Pound & Dept.”
3. Enter the price per pound and press the corresponding department
key. If manual tare is active, continue to step 4.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Tare Code”
4. Enter the Tare Code number.
5. Press ENTER.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-45
SCAN VOID Key
The SCAN VOID key permits voiding an item from the transaction by
re-scanning the item. You can void a line item within a transaction at
any time during sales mode. Items voided off the transaction are
marked with a "V" status code on the customer and journal receipt and
the operator screen.
Note: Voids performed during the sale can be excluded from the
receipt if the delayed receipt function is implemented. See the Register
Control File for more information.
Reason Codes may be attached to the Void function. The reason code
permits the store to produce a report on voids by each operator. For
this function to be available, Reason Codes must be defined and active
in the Register Control File (see Chapter Eight, “Personalization Reason Codes”). The system can have up to four (4) reason codes
defined.
Other Void function controls configured through the Register Control
File are:
• Manager Security.
• Maximum dollar amount per line item void.
• Maximum total dollar void amount per transaction.
• Void Validation.
If the defined control limitations are exceeded, management
intervention is required.
Key Sequence for the Scan Void Key
1. Press the Scan Void key.
2. Scan the item to void. If reason codes are active, continue to step 3.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Reason Code”
Some examples of reason codes are “Price Incorrect,” “Double
Scan,” or “Customer Doesn’t Want.”
3. Enter the number of the reason code.
4. Press ENTER.
9-46
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
SIGN ON/OFF Key
The SIGN ON/OFF key permits you to open and close the POS
workstation. When signing-on or off, each operator enters an unique
three (3) digit operator ID number and a three (3) digit security
number. The operator ID number is assigned through the Employee
File on the Back Office PC. The security number is selected by the
operator. This security number may be changed daily. However, once
an operator signs on the system with a security number, that number
must remain with the operator until the operator is settled.
When signing-on or off, the POS workstation prints the message "***
SIGN ON ***" (or ***SIGN OFF***) on the customer and journal receipt
and a transaction header line. This line contains the store number, POS
workstation number, transaction number, date, time, and operator
number. During sign-on/off, a Till Accountability receipt may print if
activated in the Register Control File. The Till Accountability receipt
shows the total of all media in the operator’s till. During sign-off, a
Loan and Pickup receipt may print if activated in the Register Control
File. The Loan and Pickup receipt shows all the loans and pickups for
this operator. Be sure to tear off this receipt before starting a customer
transaction.
A manager can sign an operator off a POS workstation without
knowing the operator’s security number. If an operator is currently
signed on to a POS workstation, and for some reason is not able to
personally sign off, the manager can accomplish this by the following
sign-off keying sequence and entering his or her manager ID number.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-47
Only one operator can sign on to a POS workstation at a time. If an
operator had an unsuccessful sign-off and a new operator tries to sign
on to the POS workstation, the operator screen displays: "ANOTHER
OPERATOR LOGGED ON." If an operator signs on to a POS
workstation and without signing-off tries to sign on to another POS
workstation, the screen displays: "OPERATOR LOGGED ON REG ##.”
You can only sign off a POS workstation at the start of a new sale. The
operator screen must be at the prompt "ENTER ITEM/AMOUNT" or if
the Frequent Shopper Program is active the operator screen must be at
"ENTER FREQUENT SHOPPER #." If the SIGN-ON/OFF key is
pressed during a transaction, the POS workstation automatically goes
into Idle Mode. If the One Step Signon feature is enabled in the
Register Control File, the operator screen prompts for the operator’s
logon ID/Security Number at the same time.
Key Sequence for Sign On/Off Key
1. Press SIGN ON/OFF.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Logon ID”
2. Enter operator's three (3) digit operator ID number.
Note: If you are signing off, the screen prompt displays the message,
"ENTER LOGOFF ID."
3. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Security #”
4. Enter three (3) digit security number.
5. Press ENTER.
9-48
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
SIGN ON/OFF Key (Idle Mode)
Idle Mode locks the POS workstation keyboard to prevent any input at
the POS workstation except signing back on. Idle mode clears the
operator screen of all data and displays the message, "IDLE MODE."
You can manually force the POS workstation into Idle Mode or the
POS workstation can automatically go into Idle Mode based on the
number of seconds specified in the Register Control File. To come out
of Idle mode, unlock the POS workstation keyboard. It is necessary for
the original operator to enter the operator ID number and security
numbers. The POS workstation then returns to the function in use
prior to Idle Mode. If the One Step Signon feature is enabled in the
Register Control File, the operator screen prompts for the operator’s
logon ID/Security Number at the same time.
Key Sequence for Sign On/Off (Idle Mode)
1. Press SIGN ON/OFF key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Logoff ID”
2. Press ENTER.
*Entering the Logoff ID signs off the POS workstation.
Coming Out of Idle Mode:
1. At the operator screen displaying 'IDLE MODE,” enter Operator's
three (3) digit ID Number.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Enter the three digit (3) Security Number.
4. Press Enter.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-49
STATUS Key (on DynaKey)
The STATUS key accesses several different functions. They are:
•
Price Inquire Key
•
Price Override Key
•
Return Key
•
Refund Key
•
Food Stamp Exempt Key
•
Tax Exemption Keys
•
Discount Keys
•
Cancel Transaction Key
•
Account Number Key
•
Receipt Print
Note: In order to use these functions on a POS workstation they must
be activated in the Register Control File, and you must have the
appropriate security level designation. Information on these functions
is listed separately in this chapter.
9-50
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
STORE COUPON Key
The system has the capability to enter a dollar amount of a store
coupon when scanning or when a UPC number is not available.
Key Sequence for STORE COUPON Key
1. Enter a dollar amount.
2. Press the Store Coupon key.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Department”
3. Press the Department Key
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-51
SUSPEND/RETRIEVE Key
There are situations in an every day store environment in which
exceptions to the expected flow of a transaction occur. Occasionally,
there may be a need to suspend a sale and then retrieve it at a later
time. A suspended transaction is an incomplete sale that you force
into suspension. This could happen when:
•
A sale is being transferred to another POS workstation.
•
A customer needs another item.
•
The customer has forgotten tender and returns later to complete the
transaction.
•
A phone or FAX order has been processed and awaits a customer
pickup.
The system has the ability to have up to 99 transactions suspended
globally on the entire system. Suspended transactions are held in the
suspend file on the File Server PC.
Note: Suspended transactions generate a receipt containing a barcode
that can be later scanned to automatically retrieve the transaction.
Transactions remain on the system until you retrieve the transaction
and complete it as a normal transaction, you cancel the transaction, or
it is deleted from the Back Office PC. Any operator can retrieve a
suspended transaction from any POS workstation. The operator who
retrieves the transaction and completes the transaction is responsible
for the transaction.
The suspend file is a shared file, which means that only one operator at
a time can access it. Therefore, you may see the message, "Suspend
Process Busy....Retry." If this happens, you should try again. If the
message persists, notify management (refer to the Back Office manual
section on system services) so that corrective action can take place.
Note: The system permits the cashier to suspend one sale in “Offline
Mode.”
9-52
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Suspending a Transaction
You can only suspend a transaction during sales mode. If you press
the TOTAL key before you suspend a sale, you can press the CLEAR
key to return to sales mode. Upon returning to the sales mode, press
the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key (Down Arrow key) and select
Suspend Transaction. When the system suspends the sale, the POS
workstation is ready for a new sale. As sales are suspended, all POS
workstation operator screens show a vertical message along the right
side of the screen, indicating the total number of suspended sales
pending. When you suspend a transaction, the customer receipt prints
“SUSPENDED TRANSACTION #”, the transaction total including tax
along and a scannable transaction barcode.
Note: A transaction can only be suspended prior to accepting any
tender type. If you have entered tender in the system, you cannot
suspend the transaction. You must complete the transaction.
Key Sequence for Suspending a Transaction
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Suspend Transaction”
3. Enter 1 for SUSPEND TRANSACTION. The transaction is
suspended.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-53
Retrieving a Transaction
You can only retrieve a transaction at the beginning of a new
transaction by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key
(Down Arrow key). After you select retrieve the transaction, the
operator screen displays a listing of all suspended transactions by
transaction number, date, time, and total due. Select the desired
transaction by the line number (up to 99 line numbers). If the current
screen does not show the transaction, use the arrow key to page to the
next screen until you find the required transaction number.
Note: You may also scan the suspended transaction receipt to
automatically retrieve the transaction.
When you retrieve the selected transaction, the screen displays the
items within the sale. At this point, you can add items, complete the
order, or cancel the transaction. The system prints a second customer
receipt, showing the retrieved transaction #, and any new line item
entries. The retrieved transaction does not reprint any information
from the previous processing. The system credits all accounting totals
for the transaction to the operator retrieving and completing the sale.
Key Sequence for Retrieving a Transaction
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Retrieve Transaction”
“2. Paidout”
“3. Coupon Paidout”
“4. Cash Check”
“5. Media Swap”
2. Enter 1 for Retrieve Transaction.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Sale Selection:”
3. Enter the line number of transaction to be retrieved.
4. Press ENTER. The transaction is retrieved.
5. Complete the transaction.
9-54
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
TAX EXCEPTION Key
The TAX EXCEPTION key is used to reverse the current status of an
item or department or to tax exempt an entire transaction.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
The TAX EXCEPTION key must be pressed prior to entering or
scanning an item. It only affects the current item being entered. The
TAX EXCEPTION key must be pressed each time the function is
needed. If the TAX EXCEPTION key is pressed by accident, you can
press it again to toggle the exception on and off. When the TAX
EXCEPTION key is pressed, the operator screen displays "X1." The
resulting tax status on the item displays on the operator display and is
printed on the receipt. There can be up to three (3) tax tables in use on
the system, so there can also be up to three (3) tax exception keys in use
which may display "X1, X2 or X3."
Pressing the TAX EXCEPTION key after the TOTAL key makes the
entire transaction tax exempt. If CLEAR is pressed to return to the sale,
the TAX EXCEPTION key is also cleared.
Key Sequence for the Tax Exception Key
1. Press the TAX EXCEPTION key.
"X1" displays on the operator screen.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is activated by first
pressing the STATUS key.
2. Key-enter or scan the item.
Making an Entire Transaction Tax Exempt
1. Enter the items and press TOTAL.
2. Press TAX EXCEPTION.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-55
TOTAL/NO SALE Key
The TOTAL/NO SALE key can perform two functions. If the
TOTAL/NO SALE KEY is pressed at the beginning of a new sale, it
acts as a no sale function. If the TOTAL/NO SALE key is pressed after
items are entered, it totals the entire transaction and proceeds to
transaction tender functions.
Total Key
The TOTAL key adds up all items entered in the transaction and
calculates the food stamp total and tax. The screen prompts for an
amount and tender type. Pressing the TOTAL key puts the transaction
into tender time. Tender time is the completion of a transaction and
acceptance of tender from the customer. See the Tender section for
information on the completion of a transaction. If the TOTAL key was
pressed but a tender was not entered, additional items may be added
to the transaction by pressing CLEAR to return to the sale.
No Sale Key
If the NO SALE key is pressed prior to starting a new transaction, the
screen prompts, "ENTER OPERATOR ID AND SECURITY #." The
operator ID and security number is verified against the operator who is
signed on to the POS workstation. Only the operator active on the POS
workstation can perform a no sale on the POS workstation. A receipt is
printed on the customer and journal tapes showing the ***NO SALE***
and transaction header line. The Back Office PC tracks how many no
sales were performed by each operator.
9-56
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
VOID/ERROR CORRECT Key
The VOID/ERROR CORRECT key voids an item from the transaction.
You can void a line item within a transaction at any time during sales
mode. If the last item entered is incorrect and needs to be removed
from the transaction, you can press the VOID/ERROR CORRECT key
to remove the item (error correction). Removing the last item off the
transaction immediately following the entry is called an Error
Correction.
If any other item within the transaction needs to be removed, press the
UP ARROW, (REPORTS MENU key) or DOWN ARROW,
(MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION key) to select the item and then press
the VOID key to remove that item. Items voided off the transaction are
marked with a "V" status code on the customer and journal receipt and
the operator screen.
Note: Voids performed during the sale can be excluded from the
receipt if the delayed receipt function is implemented. See the Register
Control File for more information.
Reason Codes may be attached to the Void function. The reason code
permits the store to produce a report on voids by each operator. For
this function to be available, Reason Codes must be defined and active
in the Register Control File (see Chapter Eight, “Personalization Reason Codes”). The system can have up to four (4) reason codes
defined.
Other Void function controls configured through the Register Control
File are:
•
Manager Security.
•
Maximum dollar amount per line item void.
•
Maximum total dollar void amount per transaction.
•
Void Validation.
If the defined control limitations are exceeded, management
intervention is required.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-57
Key Sequence for the Void/Error Correct Key
Error-Correcting an Item:
1. Key-enter or scan the item.
2. Press the VOID/ERROR CORRECT key.
Voiding an Item:
1. Key-enter or scan the item.
2. Use the PAGE UP/DOWN key to select the item to be voided.
3. Press the VOID key. If reason codes are active, continue to step 4.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Reason Code”
Some examples of reason codes are “Price Incorrect,” “Double
Scan,” or “Customer Doesn’t Want.”
4. Enter the number of the reason code.
5. Press ENTER.
Note: Press the CANCEL key to void the entire transaction.
9-58
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Tender Keys
The system has the following Tender Keys:
•
Cash Key
•
Charge Key
•
Check Key
•
EBT Key
•
Food Stamp Key
•
Foreign Currency Key (Optional)
•
Gift Certificate Key
•
WIC Key
*The CHECK, CHARGE and FOOD STAMP keys have submenus from
which to select. Submenu options are available depending on settings
configured in the Media Configurator.
Restrictions and controls may be placed on each tender type, such as
when the cash drawer opens when using a specific tender type or
restrictions on the type of tender permitted. These restrictions are
specified in the Media Configurator on the Back Office PC.
To tender an order, press the TOTAL key. The operator screen then
displays "ENTER AMOUNT/TENDER AMOUNT DUE." Enter the
amount from the customer and press a tender key. When split
tendering an order, a cashier can return to the first sale to void or add
items and begin tendering over again. This is an option set in the
Media Configurator.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-59
Once tender is accepted, you cannot return to the sales mode. More
than one tender type can be used within a transaction. In order to split
tender an order, enter the amount from the customer and press the
appropriate tender key. Repeat this process with each tender type,
until the transaction balance due is zero. When the total payment due
is satisfied, the cash drawer opens, and the operator screen displays
change due. The POS workstation returns to a new sale after the cash
drawer has been closed. There are no limitations on the number of
split tenders allowed per transaction.
If the wrong tender key is pressed by accident, and the transaction was
completed, the Media Swap option can be used to keep the cashier’s till
and accountability report accurate. This is an option set in the Register
Control File.
Note: If Food Stamps are accepted as tender in a transaction, they
must be the first tender type entered. Food Stamps forgive tax on the
items that are both taxable and food stamp eligible. The system
requires the subtraction of food stamp credit before calculating the
sales tax. If any other tender type is entered first, food stamps are not
allowed as a valid tender in the current transaction.
The CLEAR key returns you to the sales mode as long as tender has not
been entered. If a wrong amount is keyed in before pressing a tender
key, CLEAR may be pressed to clear the amount being displayed.
If the sale requires a refund to the customer, the operator screen
displays, "ENTER AMOUNT/TENDER REFUND DUE." When a
refund is due, the exact amount of the refund must be entered followed
by either the CASH, CHARGE, or FOOD STAMP tender key.
9-60
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
CASH Key
The CASH key is another tender key on the system.
Note: If a food stamp total has been requested, and you enter a dollar
amount and press the CASH key (or any other tender), the screen
prompts "Are you sure Y/N?" This is a precaution since the Food
Stamp Total was requested. The system assumes that payment in Food
Stamps is entered. Food Stamps must be the first type of tender
entered when tendering a transaction.
Key Sequence for the Cash Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The cashier screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
3. Enter the amount from the customer.
4. Press CASH. The transaction is completed, the change due
displays, and the drawer opens if the balance due is zero.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-61
CHARGE Key
The CHARGE key is another tender key on the system. There are three
charge selections activated by pressing the CHARGE key. They are:
• Store Charge
• Bank Charge
• Debit Card
These charge types must be turned on in the Media Configurator
before they are active.
Store Charge
This is the store's own charge card. The back office PC tracks store
charge accounting total information only (if the Store Charge option is
enabled in the Media Configurator). If this option is disabled, the
STORE CHARGE key is a tender key with no tracking or checking of
information.
Bank Charge
The system accepts VISA, American Express, Discover, and
MasterCard. The system tracks accounting total information only.
This function is applied to the customer’s credit card balance through
an electronic banking network.
If you select Bank Charge, the system may prompt you to enter an
Account #. The Disable Bank Charge Account Capture is an option set
in the Media Configurator. If this option is disabled, the screen
displays the charge options.
Either a stand-alone payment system or stand-beside payment system
must be enabled in the Media Configurator.
Debit Card
The system accepts bank debit cards, such as ATM, CIRRUS, MAC,
PLUS, or MONEYNET. The system tracks accounting total
information only. This function debits the customer’s checking account
through the electronic banking network. Either a stand-alone payment
system or stand-beside payment system must be enabled in the Media
Configurator.
9-62
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Note: A stand-alone system is an electronic payment system the store
has installed but is not connected or interfaced to the POS workstation.
A stand-beside system is a third party electronic payment system that
interfaces to the POS workstation.
Current interfaces include:
•
WTS Payment System
•
TDG Payment System
•
S4/Manta Payment System
•
Atomic Payment System
•
S4/Atomic Payment System
•
Concord Payment System
•
APT Payment System
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-63
IN-STORE CHARGE Key
A charge payment credits a customer’s in-store charge account if instore charge is enabled in the Back Office Control File.
On 56 and 64 key keyboards, the Charge key doubles as the Charge
Payment Key in sale mode and as a Charge Key at tender time.
Key Sequence for IN-STORE CHARGE Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The cashier screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
3. Key enter the amount of the charge.
4. Press the CHARGE key.
The operator screen displays:
“Select Charge Type”
“1 = Store Charge”
“2 = Bank Charge”
“3 = Debit Card”
5. The operator screen displays
“Enter Account”
6. Enter the account number.
7. Press ENTER.
Note: Depending on the settings in the Register Control File, the
operator screen may prompt “Accept Charge Transaction Y/N?” and
may display the account number, name and new balance and customer
name at the end of the sale. It may also print a customer signature slip.
9-64
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Key Sequence for the Charge Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
3. Enter the amount from the customer.
4. Press CHARGE.
The operator screen displays:
“Select Charge Type”
“1 = Store Charge”
“2 = Bank Charge”
“3 = Debit Card”
5. Enter the number of charge selection.
6. Press ENTER.
The operator screen could display one of two messages:
“Enter Account #”
OR
“Select Charge Type”
“MasterCard”
“Visa”
“American Express”
“Discover”
7. Enter the account number or swipe the card, if available.
If the account number is manually key-entered, press ENTER after
entering the number.
If Store charge or Debit card is selected, continue to step 11.
If Bank charge is selected, continue to step 9.
The operator screen displays:
“Exp. Date (MMYY)”
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-65
8. Enter the expiration date of the customer’s card.
9. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Charge Approved (Yes/No)?”
“Charge Type $.$$”
If the charge is approved, the transaction is completed. If the charge is
denied, the operator screen returns to the first tender screen to permit
tendering another way.
Depending on the Media Configurator settings, the operator screen
may prompt, “Charge Approved Y/N?” or “Insert Slip” for validation.
9-66
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
CHARGE PAYMENT (DynaKey™)
Use the CHARGE PAYMENT key when a customer wants to apply a
payment against an in-store charge account. You can perform this
function any time during a sale by pressing the MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION key (Down Arrow key) and selecting Charge Payment.
Key Sequence for Charge Payment
1. Press MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the DOWN
ARROW key, located below the numeric keypad.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Selection:”
“1. Suspend Transaction”
“6. Gift/Money”
“7. Charge Payment”
2. Press 7 for Charge Payment
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Payment Amount”
3. Enter the charge payment amount and press ENTER
Example: 2500 = $25.
4. The system prompts for the charge account number:
“Enter Account #”
5. Enter the in-store charge account number and press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Accept Charge Payment Y/N?”
6. Select Yes to accept the in-store charge payment.
7. The in-store charge payment is complete.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-67
Performing an Account Balance Inquiry (DynaKey™)
You can obtain an account balance inquiry for an in-store charge
without performing a sale or at any time during a sale. Follow the
steps below to inquire on an account balance for an in-store charge.
Key Sequence for Performing an Account Balance Inquiry
1. Select the STATUS key .
The STATUS operator screen displays.
Note: Since this key is configurable, so your menu may differ. The
below menu is used for an example.
“1 = Cancel Transaction
“2 = Price Override”
“3 = Return”
“4 = Price Inquire”
“5 = FS Exempt”
“6 = Sales Tax 1 Excp”
2. Press 4 Price Inquire and then press the DOWN ARROW, located
below the numeric keyboard.
The operator screen displays:
“1 = Retrieve Transaction”
“2 = Paidout”
“3 = Coupon Paidout”
“4 = Cash Check”
“5 = Media Swap”
“6 = Gift/Money”
“7 = Charge Payment”
3. Press 7 Charge Payment.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Acct. #”
4. Enter the account number and press ENTER.
The screen lists the customer name, account number and current instore account balance.
9-68
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
CHECK Key
The CHECK key is another tender key on the system. There are three
types of check selections to select from. They are:
•
Personal Check
•
Payroll/Government Check
•
Electronic Check
These check selections must be turned on at the Media Configurator
before they are active.
The CHECK key or Operator limits may have the following controls
configured in the Media Configurator. These controls may require
manager interaction when limits are reached.
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum check amount to be accepted by an operator.
Maximum amount of a check over the total amount.
Maximum number of checks per day and per week.
Maximum amount of checks per day and per week.
Active Negative or Positive check file.
Negative or Positive Check File
The system may have either a Negative Check File or a Positive Check
File active at the POS workstation. If either file is active, you are
prompted to enter the customer’s account number when tendering by
check. If the Negative Check File is active and the account number
entered is in the file, the message, "MANAGER NEEDED CODE #,"
displays on the operator screen. A manager is needed at the POS
workstation at this point. Depending on the code number, the
manager can either accept the check or deny the check. If the Positive
Check File is active and the account number entered is accepted, the
check is accepted without manager intervention. However, if the
account number entered is in the file as a problem, the message,
"MANAGER NEEDED CODE #," displays on the operator screen. A
manager is needed at the POS workstation at this point. Depending on
the code number, the manager can either accept the check or deny the
check. There can be up to nine codes.
Note: For more information on the Negative or Positive Check File,
refer to Chapter Five, “Maintaining Customer Data.”
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-69
Check Limits
If any of the check limits set in the Media Configurator are reached, the
operator screen prompts for a manager. A manager's approval is
needed for an operator to continue with the transaction if check limits
are exceeded. If the manager declines to approve the check, the screen
returns to the first tender screen to permit another tendering method.
Key Sequence for Check Limits
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
“Total Due: $.$$”
3. Enter the amount from the customer.
4. Press CHECK.
The operator screen displays:
“Check Type Selection”
“1 = Paper”
“2 = Payroll/Gov’t”
5. Enter the number of the check selection.
6. Press ENTER. If the Negative or the Positive Check File is active,
continue to step 7. If they are not active continue to step 9.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Account #”
7. Enter the customer’s account number.
8. Press ENTER.
The message, "INSERT BLANK CHECK FOR WRITING YES OR
NO", displays on the operator screen.
9. Select “Yes” to write the check and “No” to simply validate the
check. Insert the check into the document printer to either print or
validate depending on your selection.
9-70
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Note: Prompts may vary depending on settings selected in the Media
Configurator.
If any of the check limits are exceeded or if the Negative or the Positive
check File is active and the account number entered has a problem, one
of the following error messages may display when tendering by check:
•
* Account not on File Override (yes/no)?
•
* Daily check qty limit exceeded Override (yes/no)?
•
* Daily check amt. limit exceeded Override (yes/no)?
•
* Manager needed code #
•
* Need authorization. Enter Manager ID
Manager approval is required if one of these messages displays on the
operator screen.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-71
EBT Key
The Electronics Benefit Transfer key is another tender key on the
system. The EBT key permits tendering via Electronic Benefits
Transfer.
Key Sequence for the EBT Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
3. Enter the amount of EBT funds to tender.
4. Press CHARGE.
The operator screen displays:
“Select Charge Type”
“1 = Store Charge”
“2 = Bank Charge”
“4 = EBT”
5. Enter the number of EBT selection.
6. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter EBT #”
7. Enter the account number or swipe the card, if available.
If the account number is manually key-entered, press ENTER after
entering the number.
If the transfer is approved, the transaction is completed. If the transfer
is denied, the operator screen returns to the first tender screen to
permit tendering another way.
9-72
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
FOOD STAMP Key
The FOOD STAMP key is another tender key on the system. The total
dollar amount of food stamp-eligible items in the transaction make up
the food stamp total.
Food Stamp tender must be the first tender accepted if tendering by
food stamps. If another tender type is entered first, food stamps are
not allowed.
To display the food stamp total at tender time, press the FOOD STAMP
key once. The Food Stamp total displays and prints on the customer
receipt. To tender a transaction with food stamps, enter the amount
and press the FOOD STAMP key a second time. If the food stamp total
was requested and the operator tenders by an other tender type, the
message, "ARE YOU SURE Y/N?," displays on the operator screen.
This feature eliminates entering the wrong tender type by accident.
Only whole dollar amounts are accepted (except if Electronic Food
Stamps are used). If the food stamps tendered exceed the food stamp
total, the amount less than a whole dollar is given as change or applied
against the remaining balance greater than one dollar. After the
operator enters the food stamp amount, the remaining balance due
displays. Other tender types can now be used.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-73
FOREIGN CURRENCY Key
The Foreign Currency key is another tender key on the system.
ScanMaster will automatically convert the foreign currency to the
native currency based on the current Conversion Rate.
Key Sequence for the Foreign Currency Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The cashier screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
3. Enter the amount of foreign currency from the customer.
4. Press the Foreign Currency key. The native currency conversion is
completed, the change due displays, and the drawer opens if the
balance due is zero.
Note: The foreign currency key will be labeled as set up on the
Register Control File. ScanMaster also supports partial payment in
foreign currency if there is additional payment due after the conversion
to native currency is made.
Key Sequence for the Food Stamp Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
“Total Due: $.$$”
3. Press FOOD STAMP to display food stamp total.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
“FS Subtotal”
“$.$$”
“Total Due: $.$$”
4. Enter the amount of food stamps from the customer. The amount
must be a whole dollar amount.
5. Press FOOD STAMP. The new total due displays.
9-74
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
GIFT CERTIFICATE Key
During tender time, the GIFT CERTIFICATE key becomes a tender key.
During sales mode, this key is used to sell gift certificates. When
tendering by gift certificate, if the face amount of the gift certificate is
less than the balance due, the screen prompts for an additional tender
amount. If the gift certificate is greater than the balance due amount,
individual store policy dictates the procedure to issue change or issue
a new Gift Certificate on the remaining balance due.
Key Sequence for the Gift Certificate Key
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
“Total Due: $.$$”
3. Enter the full amount of the Gift Certificate.
4. Press GIFT CERTIFICATE.
Note: Depending on the Media Configurator settings, the POS
workstation may validate the gift certificate.
If there is a balance due after the gift certificate tender, complete the
transaction with another tender type until the balance due is zero. If
there is change due, follow the store policy on issuing change.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-75
WIC Key
WIC, (Women, Infants, and Children), is a state-funded subsidy
program that permits pregnant women or mothers of babies and small
children to purchase specific nutritional items at no cost. They are
issued dated coupons or vouchers that list items by type and quantity
that are valid only on specified items.
If a customer is tendering by WIC, all items that qualify for the WIC
program must be entered as a separate transaction from other items
being purchased. After the operator verifies that the WIC coupon item
has been purchased, the dollar amount of the total due (never enter the
face value of the WIC check) can be entered followed by the WIC key.
Change to the customer is NEVER permitted on a WIC transaction.
Key Sequence for WIC
1. Key-enter or scan the items.
2. Press TOTAL.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Amount/Tender”
“Total Due: $.$$”
3. Press the WIC key to display a WIC total.
Note: This WIC total is a total of all items that are exempt from
tax.
4. Enter the total due amount as shown on the operator screen.
5. Press the WIC key.
If validating is configured in the Register Control File, the message,
"INSERT SLIP," displays on the operator display. Insert the WIC
Check into the document printer to validate the back of the store's
copy of the WIC Check.
9-76
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Report Menu Key
The REPORT MENU key (Up Arrow key on DynaKey POS
workstations) consists of various reports and system functions. In
order to access any of the following functions, the operator display on
the POS workstation must indicate "Closed." The functions listed
below described in detail on the following pages.
•
Cashier Report
•
Register Report
•
Utilities:
•
Update Register
•
Offline Cashier Report
•
Non-Resettable Totals
•
Set Date
•
Set Time
•
Change to Online Mode
•
Change to Offline Mode
•
Display Available Memory
•
Display Error Log
•
Change Register Number
•
Enable Payment Systems
•
Disable Payment Systems
•
Clear Error Log
•
Shutdown Register - ****Exit Application****
•
Conversion Rate
•
End of Day
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, the REPORT MENU key is
the UP ARROW, located below the numeric keypad.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-77
Cashier Report
The Cashier Report function prints a requested report for an individual
cashier. You can request the Cashier Report from any POS
workstation, provided the POS workstation is online with the File
Server PC, and you have active totals on the File Server PC. The
Cashier Report, also known as an X-report, lists system-wide cashier
totals by all tender and function types, as well as voids, cancels, no
sales, and customer counts. These totals are from the time a cashier
signs on to the POS workstation, (at any or all POS workstations), up to
the time the operator requests the report, provided the cashier has not
been delayed or settled during the sign-on period. If a delay or settle
has occurred, the totals reflect the period of time from after the delay or
settle, up to the report request.
Key Sequence for Cashier Report
1. Press REPORT MENU.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the UP ARROW,
located below the numeric keypad.
2. Press 1 for Cashier Report.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Cashier ID”
3. Enter the three digit operator ID number for the cashier to report.
4. Press ENTER.
The Cashier Report prints for the requested cashier. If the cashier
number is invalid, or the ID number does not currently have totals
on the File Server PC, the operator screen displays "CASHIER
INACTIVE." Press CLEAR to clear the error message and retry the
operator number again. You can request this report as often as
needed without affecting the File Server PC cashier totals.
9-78
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Figure 9-9: Sample Cashier Report
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-79
Register Report
You can request the Register Report in either online or offline mode.
When you select the Register Report, the system compiles and prints a
consolidated X-report of all operator totals for this POS workstation.
The report reflects all totals accumulated on a particular POS
workstation, from the last end-of-day processing through the time of
the report request.
If the store is running in offline mode and it is time to perform an "Endof-Day," it is necessary to request this report at each POS workstation
and then manually add all totals together for a store grand total. In
addition, if individual operator totals are needed, it is necessary to run
the Off-line Operator Report (see the “Utilities” section) at each POS
workstation, then manually add all the totals together for the operator
grand total.
Key Sequence for Register Report
1. Press REPORT MENU.
Note: On DynaKey POS workstations, this key is the UP ARROW,
located below the numeric keypad.
2. Press 2 for Register Report.
9-80
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Figure 9-10: Sample Register Report
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-81
Utilities
You can perform multiple functions through the Utilities options.
There are two sets of function screens available through Utilities. Their
functions are listed below.
•
•
First screen:
•
Update Register
•
Off-line Operator Report
•
Non-Resettable Totals
•
Set Date
•
Set Time
•
Change to Online Mode
•
Change to Off-line Mode
•
Additional functions
Second screen: (if 0 - Additional Functions is selected)
•
Display Available Memory
•
Display Error Log
•
Change Register Number
•
Enable Payment System
•
Disable Payment System
•
Clear Error Log
•
Shut Down Register
To access these functions, press REPORT MENU, then the press
UTILITIES.
9-82
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
UTILITIES - Update Register
Each POS workstation has a hard disk that contains all the files needed
to operate the application in both online and offline modes. If changes
are made to any files on the File Server PC or Back Office PC, it is
necessary to send these changes down to the POS workstation to
ensure that the data on the POS workstation hard drive is current. The
POS workstation can receive updates either during the nightly End-ofDay Procedure or when you select the Update Register function. When
you select Update Register, the POS workstation reloads new copies of
all offline data files, as well as any files that have been changed on the
PCs since the last update. The POS workstation must be online to
perform this function. When the POS workstation is updated, all files
become current copies of those on the File Server and Back Office PCs.
Note: The system can automatically update register files each time an
End-of-Day procedure is done if the Copy System Files at the End of
Day field is enabled in the Back Office Control File. This procedure
would include all system files, plus any files that have been changed
since the last download.
Key Sequence for Utilities - Update Register
1. Press 1 for Update Register.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? Y/N”
“Update Register Software”
2. Press the YES key to update the POS workstation or press the NO
key to cancel the update of the POS workstation.
The Update Register time varies based on the copying of offline files
and the number of update files that are copied.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-83
UTILITIES - Off-line Cashier Report
The Off-line Cashier Report produces a report for each cashier that
operated this POS workstation. You can only select this report if the
POS workstation or store is in offline mode. If the store is running in
offline mode and operator reports are needed, you must select this
option at each POS workstation. The system prints an individual
report for each cashier who operated the POS workstation during the
day. If, however, a specific cashier has operated on more than one POS
workstation, you must manually add the totals from all POS
workstations that they might have used, in order to get the store-wide
totals for that operator. Only those totals accumulated during offline
operation are shown. If the POS workstation is not used in offline
mode, and you request this report, the system prints the message,
"Report Currently Empty.”
Key Sequence for Off-line Cashier Report
1. Press 2 for Off-line Cashier Report. A report for each cashier that
operated the POS workstation prints. This report is similar to the
Cashier Report.
UTILITIES - Non-Resettable Totals
The Non-Resettable Totals report shows the POS workstation's
opening and closing totals and the difference. The system calculates
the opening and closing totals after the End-of-Day Procedure. You
cannot adjust non-resettable totals. They roll over to zero when the
figure goes to ten trillion. This option is available in online and offline
modes.
Key Sequence for Non-Resettable Totals
1. Press 3 for Non-Resettable Totals.
The following information prints to a receipt:
“Non-Reset Register ## Report”
“Store ####05/24/99 12:24”
“Opening Total $.$$”
“Closing Total $.$$”
“Difference $.$$”
9-84
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
The Opening/Closing totals are calculated by all Positive sales + all
Taxes + gross Money Order + Gift Certificates, minus Refunds, minus
Discounts, minus net Money Order (without the fee), minus Store
Coupon, minus Store Double Coupon, minus Manufacture Double
Coupon.
For detailed instructions, see Chapter 10, “Accounting Procedures.”
UTILITIES - Set Date
The Set Date function permits you to change the date on the POS
workstation. Changing a POS workstation’s date only affects that POS
workstation. This option is available in either online or offline modes.
Key Sequence for Set Date
1. Press 4 for Set Date.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Date (MMDDYYYY)”
“Current Date 12/16/1999”
2. Enter the current date in the format of MMDDYYYY.
3. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Press Clear to Continue”
“Current Date 12/16/1999”
4. Press CLEAR to exit when finished. By pressing CLEAR several
times, the system exits one menu at a time until the "CLOSED"
prompt displays on the POS workstation.
Note: After changing the date on the POS workstation, the POS
workstation must be rebooted for the new date to take effect.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-85
UTILITIES - Set Time
The Set Time function permits the time on the POS workstation to be
changed. Changing a POS workstation’s time only affects the POS
workstation it was changed on. This option is available in either online
or offline modes.
Key Sequence for Set Time
1. Enter 5 for Set Time.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter Time (HMMSS)”
“Current Time 12:25”
2. Enter the current time in the format of HHMMSS.
3. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Press Clear to Continue”
“Current Time 12:25”
4. Press CLEAR to exit when finished. By pressing CLEAR several
times, the system exits one menu at a time until the "CLOSED"
prompt displays on the POS workstation.
Note: After changing the time on the POS workstation, the POS
workstation must be rebooted for the new time to take effect.
9-86
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
UTILITIES - Change to Online Mode
The Change to Online Mode function changes the POS workstation
from operating offline (stand alone) to operating online
(communicating to File Server PC).
A POS workstation is considered offline when it is not communicating
with the File Server PC. The operator screen displays "OFF-LINE" at
the bottom of the screen.
There are several reasons a POS workstation may be offline. The
workstation is manually selected to run offline, the File Server PC is
down, communications are broken, or there is a POS workstation
cabling problem. When the POS workstation is offline and the problem
is resolved, this option must be selected to return the POS workstation
to online mode. When the POS workstation is returned to online
mode, all the information that was entered during offline mode is
transferred down to the File Server PC (as long as option #4 - END OF
DAY was not performed on the POS workstation).
If a request is made to return to online mode, and the POS workstation
is not able to communicate with the File Server PC, it automatically
remains in offline mode.
Key Sequence for Change to Online Mode
1. Enter 6 for Change to Online Mode.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? (Y/N)”
“Switch to Online Mode”
2. Press the YES key to switch to online or press the NO key to return
to menu selections.
If you select “Yes,” the POS workstation reboots and goes to online
mode. When the operator screen displays "CLOSED," the POS
workstation is ready for operation.
If the POS workstation remains offline, this indicates that a
communication problem still exists with the File Server PC
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-87
UTILITIES - Change to Off-line Mode
The Change to Off-line Mode function changes the POS workstation
from operating online (communicating to File Server PC) to operating
offline (stand-alone).
If a POS workstation loses communications with the File Server PC, the
POS workstation is not able to perform an item price lookup or any
other function of the transaction. The POS workstation may take ten to
fifteen seconds before responding to keystrokes.
Depending on the problem, error messages display on the operator's
screen informing you of the problem. Should this happen, select 9 Change to Off-line Mode to force the POS workstation into offline
mode. The POS workstation reboots and reloads the application for
offline mode. When running in offline mode, you are not required to
enter a three digit security number. Once the POS workstation is in
offline mode, all transaction functions are available, and the "OFFLINE" message no longer displays on the operator’s display. There
may be situations where you are unable to "Close" the POS workstation
and select this option. If this should happen, power off the POS
workstation then power back on. The POS workstation reboots to
offline mode automatically if it cannot communicate to the File Server
PC or may reboot and stay online if the problem is resolved.
This selection may be chosen any time during the day, even if there is
not a problem. The store may want to remove the POS workstation for
a sidewalk sale or preparing to have the File Server PC serviced. The
POS workstation in offline mode has the same capabilities as online
mode (excluding any hard disk limitations). When the POS
workstation is returned to online mode, all information entered during
the offline mode is sent to the File Server PC.
Note: Depending on the problem with the system, this selection may
not be accessible, such as in a case where the POS workstation exits the
application. If the POS workstation exits the application, the only
option is to power off the POS workstation, then power back on. Refer
to the section on System Recovery Procedures for more information.
9-88
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Key Sequence for Change to Off-line Mode
1. Enter 9 to Change to Off-line Mode.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? (Y/N)”
“Switch to Off-line Mode”
2. Press the YES key to switch to offline or press the NO key to return
to menu selections.
If “Yes” is selected, the POS workstation reboots and goes to offline
mode. When the operator screen displays "CLOSED," the POS
workstation is ready for operation. The message, "offline," displays
on the bottom of the operator display when the POS workstation is
offline.
UTILITIES - Display Available Memory
The Display Available Memory function is located on the second page
of the Utilities menu. The only time it is necessary to display this
information is when directed by support personnel. This option is
available in both online and offline modes.
Key Sequence for Display Available Memory
1. Enter 0 for Additional Functions.
2. Enter 1 for Display Available Memory.
The operator screen displays:
“Available Memory”
“String: ##### Bytes”
“Stack: ##### Bytes”
“Press Clear to Return to Menu”
3. Press CLEAR when finished.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-89
UTILITIES - Display Error Log
The Display Error Log function is located on the second page of the
Utilities menu. It displays or prints any software errors that occurred
on this POS workstation. If there is no error log, the POS workstation
displays "ERROR LOG EMPTY." It is used to assist support people in
isolating a problem at the POS workstation.
Select “Yes” to print the error log and “No” to view it online.
Key Sequence for Display Error Log
1. Enter 0 for Additional Functions.
2. Enter 2 for Display Error Log.
The operator screen displays:
“Do You Wish to Print Error Log?”
3. Press YES to print and display the error log or press NO to display
the error log.
The error log displays or prints the date and time the error
occurred, the affected filename, and the file status. Press CLEAR to
return to the menu. If the error log is empty, the following message
displays: “Error Log Empty.”
9-90
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
UTILITIES - Change Register Number
The Change Register Number function changes the identifying
address/number of a POS workstation. This function should only be
performed if a POS workstation is physically moved from one lane to
another, or if a new POS workstation is added to an existing site. This
function is primarily for use by installation personnel.
Warning: This function should not be performed by unauthorized
personnel or by untrained support people. Changing the register
number to either an existing number on the LAN or a number that
does not exist on the LAN may create major balancing problems or
cause the register not to function properly.
When changing a POS workstation address, the operator screen
prompts for the new address/lane number (01 - 99) and verification of
the lane number supplied. The POS workstation is automatically
reconfigured and reboots.
Do not use an existing lane number when changing a POS
workstation's number. The File Server PC only recognizes one unique
POS workstation address per system. If the same address is
duplicated, the second POS workstation using the duplicate number is
not recognized.
Key Sequence for Change Register Number
1. Enter 0 for Additional Functions.
2. Enter 3 for Change Register Number.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter New Lane (01-99)”
3. Enter the new lane number (must be two digits).
4. Press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Is Register ## Correct?”
5. Press the YES key if the new number is correct or press the NO key
if incorrect to permit for re-entry of a number.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-91
UTILITIES - Enable Payment Systems
The Enable Payment Systems function is located on the second page of
the Utilities menu. It permits you to enable the payment systems at the
POS workstation without making a change in the Register Control File
on the PC then performing an update at the POS workstation. This
function enables payment systems during the day without a delay.
Enabling payment systems temporarily affects the POS workstation
until the next POS workstation update or until the End-of-Day
procedure takes place.
Key Sequence for Enable Payment Systems
1. Enter 0 for Additional Functions.
2. Enter 4 for Enable Payment Systems.
The operator screen displays:
“Press Clear to Continue”
“Payment Systems Enabled”
3. Press CLEAR to continue.
UTILITIES - Disable Payment Systems
The Disable Payment Systems function is located on the second page of
the Utilities menu. It permits you to disable the payment systems at
the POS workstation without making a change in the Register Control
File on the PC then performing an update at the POS workstation. This
function disables payment systems during the day without a delay.
Disabling payment systems temporarily affects the POS workstation
until the next POS workstation update or until the End-of-Day
procedure takes place.
Key Sequence for Disable Payment Systems
1. Enter 0 for Additional Functions.
2. Enter 5 for Disable Payment Systems
The operator screen displays:
“Press Clear to Continue”
“Payment Systems Disabled”
3. Press CLEAR to continue.
9-92
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
UTILITIES - Clear Error Log
The Clear Error Log function is located on the second page of the
Utilities menu. It clears any existing LOG FILES (option #2) from the
system. This function is primarily used by support personnel. Upon
displaying the error log, the support person instructs the store to clear
this file. This option is available in both online and offline modes.
Key Sequence for Clear Error Log
1. Enter 9 for Clear Error Log.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? (Y/N)”
“Clear Error Log”
2. Press the YES key to clear the error log or press the NO key to
cancel.
UTILITIES - Shutdown Register
The Shutdown Register function is located on the second page of the
Utilities menu. It closes all open files on the POS workstation and exits
the POS workstation application to DOS. This function is always
performed before turning the POS workstation off to ensure all files are
properly closed. At the DOS prompt, only authorized personnel
should proceed with DOS functions. This option is available in either
online or offline modes.
Key Sequence for Shutdown Register
1. Enter 0 for Shutdown Register.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? (Y/N)”
“Shutdown Register”
2. Press the YES key to exit the POS workstation application or press
the NO key to cancel.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-93
Conversion Rate
The Conversion Rate Function permits the POS Workstation to change
the foreign currency exchange rate for stores that accept foreign
currency media as a form of payment. Only one foreign currency is
supported on the ScanMaster system at a time. The Conversion Rate is
used to calculate the face value of a foreign currency based on the
exchange rate at the time of tendering. ScanMaster also supports
partial payment foreign currency tendering.
Key Sequence for Changing the Conversion Rate
1. Enter 4 for Conversion Rate procedure.
The operator screen displays:
“Manager ID”
2. Key in the Manager ID and press ENTER.
The operator screen displays:
“Enter New Rate (XXXX.XXXXX)”
“Current Rate: X.XX”
3. Key in the new rate using all 9 fields (using zeros to fill) and press
ENTER.
The operator screen shows the new rate and displays:
“Enter-Accept Clear-Abort”
4. Press ENTER.
9-94
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
End-of-Day
The End of Day function clears a POS workstation's totals and resets
everything back to zero to begin a new accounting day. If the POS
workstation is online, End-of-Day clears all totals and initiates a POS
workstation update on all offline files and any files that have been
changed on the PCs since the last POS workstation update.
Note: If the POS workstation is running in online mode, it is not
necessary to perform an End-of-Day Procedure at the POS workstation.
The Back Office PC’s DAY END PROCEDURE automatically clears all
POS workstation totals, updates all POS workstation software, and
processes all TLOG movement for the day.
If the POS workstation is running in offline mode, the End-of-Day
procedure may be initiated at the POS workstation. However, this
selection resets all totals and deletes the TLOGS on this POS
workstation. Before running the End of Day procedure, make sure all
available POS workstation reports are run before making this selection.
If the whole store is in offline mode and you want to reset the entire
store for a new day, the store must run reports and make this selection
at each POS workstation. Not running the End-of-Day at the POS
workstation results in carrying the information over to the next day.
Warning: Make sure POS workstation reports are run before
selecting End of Day in the offline mode. If reports are not run prior
to selecting this option, information is cleared and no reports are
available for the day.
Key Sequence for End of Day
1. Enter 9 for End of Day procedure.
The operator screen displays:
“Are You Sure? (Y/N)”
2. Press the YES key to run the end of day procedure or press the NO
key to cancel.
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
9-95
Training Mode
The POS workstation has the ability to operate in Training Mode.
When running in Training Mode, the POS workstation has full
capabilities as in sales mode with the exception of recording and
writing of totals and the opening of the cash drawer. The message,
"TRAINING MODE," displays on the operator screen, and the receipt
prints "TRAINING MODE" at the top and bottom of the receipt.
To place the POS workstation into training mode:
1. At the "CLOSE" prompt, key the number 999 and press ENTER.
The POS workstation prompts for a "MANAGER ID NUMBER."
2. Enter the manager ID number and press ENTER
9-96
Chapter 9: Performing POS Operations
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in
the Back Office
The purpose of this chapter is to enable you to perform back office
accounting tasks. It includes pickups, loans, cashier settlement,
delayed cashiers, office reconciliation, deposits, and end-of-day
procedures.
The Office Procedures option is the ninth option on the ScanMaster
Main Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-O) to access the Office
Procedure Menu.
Figure 10-1: Office Procedures Menu
10-2
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Office Procedures
The ScanMaster Office Procedures Menu contains the options below.
•
Pickups and Loans
•
Cashier Settlements
•
Delay Cashiers
•
Office Reconciliation
•
Deposits
•
ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
•
Adjust Settled Cashiers
•
Active Cashier List
•
Media Flash Report
•
Office Receipts
Note: Although the End-of-Day procedure has its own button option
off the ScanMaster Main Menu, it is performed after completing the
office procedures listed in this chapter. End-of-Day is documented
near the end of this chapter.
Pickups and Loans: A Cashier Pickup is when the office picks up
media from a cashier’s till. A Cashier Loan is when the office transfers
or loans cash or food stamps to a cashier’s till.
Cashier Settlements: This feature reconciles a cashier’s till. When
settling a cashier’s till, the media amounts are transferred to the office.
A cashier can only settle once a shift.
Delay Cashiers: This option is generally used for cashiers working up
to or after the back office is closed for the day. ScanMaster processes
information associated with those cashiers during End-of-Day, but
postpones settlement until morning.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
10-3
Office Reconciliation: This option settles the office. The Office Media
comes from all cashiers that were settled and the beginning Office
Balance (beginning safe). When finalizing the office, the media entered
transfers to Make Deposit.
Deposit: This option records deposits made during the day and the
Final deposits. The final deposit can compose of exactly the Drawer
Total to balance the store to zero or made to reflect what is actually
deposited and left for the store’s beginning balance.
Adjust Settled Cashiers: This option lets office personnel make
adjustments to cashier tills that are already settled. This procedure
must be performed before End-of-Day.
Active Cashier List: This option displays cashiers that are signed on to
a register or signed off but not settled.
Media Flash Report: This option provides an up-to-the-minute flash
report on media accumulated by the store. This report is available for
settled cashiers, delayed cashiers, and the office balance.
Office Adjustments: This option keeps track of all money going into
and out of the office safe. In addition, it also provides for adjustments
to the beginning safe. This feature makes the store financially
accountable for all media once it is accumulated and calculated.
10-4
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Lane Accountability
ScanMaster enables stores to account for totals by cashier or by lane. If
the lane accountability question in the Register and the Back Office
Control File is set to yes, the Office Procedures Menu changes to reflect
lane accountability.
Menu options change from:
Cashier Accountability
Lane Accountability
Cashier Settlements
Lane Settlements
Delay Cashiers
Delay Lanes
Adjust Settled Cashiers
Adjust Settled Lanes
Note: If lane accountability is enabled, GRCPRSRG.BTR and
GRCDPTRG.BTR must be created in \Grocery\Files directories on all
PCs and POS workstations. A blank copy of these files must also
reside in the \Grocery\Files\Blank directory.
Media Counts
The Media Counts feature enables stores to track the specific number of
media when performing office accounting procedures.
This feature can be utilized when performing pickups, loans,
settlements, office reconciliation, deposits and adjusting settled
cashiers.
Activating the Media Counts Feature
Before you can used the Media Counts feature, the media counts
questions in the Register Control File, Back Office Control File and
Media Configurator must be enabled. Those questions are:
Use Media Counts (Register Control File)
Settle Media Counts (Back Office Control File)
Allow Pickup Counts (Media Configurator)
Answer Yes to all three questions to activate the Media Counts feature.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
10-5
Using the Media Counts Feature
The Media Counts feature enables stores to track the exact number of
media and amounts accepted by each cashier/lane. It is available for
pickups and loans, cashier settlements, office reconciliation, deposits
and adjusting settled cashiers. Media counts are reflected on cashier
reports, as well as detailed audit trail reports.
To enter a media count into one of these screens, you must first select
the desired media field by clicking on that field. Once you have
selected the desired media, enter the number of media followed by a
forward slash and the total dollar amount for those media.
Example 1: If one check, totaling $55, is picked up from a cashier’s
drawer, you would input: 1/55.00.
If you input an incorrect amount and need to make a correction, you
must enter a negative media count followed by a forward slash and a
negative amount to return to a zero balance for that media count. Once
the incorrect amount is removed, you can then input the correct total.
Example 2: If you input 5/200.00, but the amount is $210, you must
enter -5/-200.00 and press Enter to return to a zero balance for that
media count.
10-6
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Pickups and Loans
The Pickups and Loans option is the first option on the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-P) to access
the ScanMaster Office Procedures screen.
Pickups involve the transfer of cash or other media from the cashier’s
till to the store safe. Loans involve the transfer of cash or food stamps
from the store safe to the cashier’s till. These functions are available
after Final Deposits for the previous day have been made. Pickups and
Loans can be done at any time during a cashier’s shift up to the point of
settlement.
Figure 10-2: Pickups & Loans Screen
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
10-7
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Pickups and Loans
screen.
Cashier #: Enter the cashier’s three digit ID number.
Available Cashiers: Found at the left of the screen, this list box
displays all available cashiers.
Action: Type of action desired. Click on the Pickup or the Loan radio
button to access the type of action desired.
Enter Pickup/Loan Amount: Enter the pickup/loan amount here.
Pickup/Loan: This field displays the actual amount being loaned or
picked up.
In Drawer: The In Drawer Total is the current amount in the cashier’s
till.
New Total: This field is calculated using the pickup amount and the
drawer total. The difference between the two is the over or short
amount for that cashier’s shift.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates.
10-8
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster Pickups and Loans
screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the cashier
pickup.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to automatically accept the
drawer total as the cashier pickup total. This option is available only
when the “Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back Office
Control File.
PRINT SCREEN: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a
worksheet copy of the matrix.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
10-9
Performing Cashier Pickups
Cashier pickups involve the transfer of cash or other media from the
cashier’s till to the store safe. After a pickup is made, the cashier’s
financial responsibility is decreased by the amount of the pickup.
Funds in the store safe are increased by the amount of the pickup.
1. Upon activating the ScanMaster Cashier Pickups & Loans screen,
select the Pickup option from the Action list box in the lower left
corner of the screen.
2. Select the cashier receiving the pickup. If the cashier is active on
the system, the pickup media matrix displays the current media
totals for that cashier. The matrix lists the pickup amount, the
drawer total, the over/short amount, and the item count.
If the cashier is inactive, the following message appears: “You
have chosen a pickup on a cashier that is not
active. Do you really want to do a loan instead.”
3. Upon selecting the desired cashier, select the type of media
involved in the pickup by clicking on the desired media matrix
field.
4. Enter the pickup amount for the selected media.
5. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 for each desired media or click on AUTO (only if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts listed
in the In Drawer fields.
7. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Note: An on-screen help box is located in the bottom right corner of
this screen. Information about the various screen fields is displayed.
10-10 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Performing Cashier Loans
Loans involve the transfer of cash or food stamps from the store safe to
the cashier’s till. After a loan is made, the cashier’s financial
responsibility is increased by the amount of the loan. Funds in the
store safe are decreased by the amount of the loan.
1. Upon activating the ScanMaster Cashier Pickups & Loans screen,
select the Loan option from the Action list box in the lower left
corner of the screen.
2. Select the desired cashier receiving the loan. The loan media matrix
displays the current media totals for that cashier. The matrix lists
the loan amount, the drawer total, the new total, and the item
count.
3. Upon selecting the desired cashier, select the type of media
involved in the loan by clicking on the desired media matrix field.
4. Enter the loan amount.
5. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 for each desired media.
7. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Note: An on-screen help box is located in the bottom right corner of
this screen. Information about the various screen fields is displayed.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-11
Cashier Settlements
The Cashier Settlements option is the second option on the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access
the ScanMaster Cashier Settlements Screen.
This option enables the back office to settle cashiers finished with their
shift. It details the cashier’s financial accountability for each media
type in the POS workstation drawer.
Figure 10-3: Cashier Settlements Screen
10-12 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Cashier Settlements Screen.
Cashier #: Enter the cashier’s three digit ID number.
Available Cashiers: Found at the left of the screen, this list box
displays all available cashiers.
Delayed Cashiers: Found at the left of the screen, this list box displays
all delayed cashiers.
Enter Pickup Amount: Enter the pickup amount here.
Pickup: This field is the actual amount of the settlement.
In Drawer: This field is the current amount in the cashier’s till.
Over/Short: This field reflects the difference between what was settled
and the actual drawer total.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Cashier Settlements screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the cashier
pickup.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to automatically accept the
drawer total as the cashier pickup total. This option is available only
when the “Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back Office
Control File.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-13
PRINT SCREEN: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a
worksheet copy of the matrix.
Performing Cashier Settlements
The Cashier Settlement option reconciles a cashier’s till when that
cashier’s shift is finished. A cashier can only have one till settle per
shift. When a cashier’s till is settled, the media is transferred from the
POS workstation to the office till (Office Safe).
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Cashier Settlement screen, click on
the cashier to be settled from the Available Cashiers list in the top
left corner of the screen.
Only cashiers not signed on to the POS workstation and who have
logged or unsettled transactions are listed. A list of Delayed
Cashiers who have not settled from the previous day also appears.
The Cashier Settlement media matrix displays the current media
totals for the cashier selected. The matrix lists the pickup amount,
the drawer total, the over/short amount, and the item count.
2. Upon selecting the desired cashier, select the type of media
involved in the settlement by clicking on the desired media matrix
field.
3. Enter the pickup amount.
4. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 for each desired media or click on AUTO (only if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts in
the In Drawer fields.
6. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Note: An on-screen help box is located in the bottom right corner of
this screen. Information about the various screen fields is displayed.
10-14 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Delay Cashiers
The Delay Cashiers option is the third option on the ScanMaster Office
Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to access the
ScanMaster Delay Cashiers screen.
The Delay Cashiers option is generally used for cashiers who work up
to or after the back office is closed for the day. ScanMaster processes
information associated with those cashiers during End-of-Day, but
postpones settlement until morning.
Figure 10-4: Delay Cashiers Screen
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-15
Field Descriptions
Below are field definitions for the ScanMaster Delay Cashier screen.
Employee Number: Three (3) digit employee number.
Employee Name: Thirty-eight (38) character alpha field. This field lists
the employee’s first and last name.
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster Delay Cashiers screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
DELAY SELECTED CASHIERS: Click on this button (or press Alt-D)
to delay cashiers selected from the Available Cashiers list.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Delay Cashiers screen.
Delaying Cashiers
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Delay Cashiers screen, click on the
cashiers to be delayed from the Available Cashiers list. Only
cashiers not signed on to the POS workstation and who have
logged or unsettled transactions are listed.
2. Click on the DELAY SELECTED CASHIERS button to delay
cashiers selected from the Available Cashiers list.
10-16 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Office Reconciliation
Office Reconciliation is the fourth option on the ScanMaster Office
Procedures Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-O) to
access the ScanMaster Office Reconciliation screen.
Office Reconciliation settles the office. The office media comes from all
cashiers that were settled and the beginning office balance (beginning
safe). When finalizing the office, the media entered transfers to make
deposit.
Figure 10-5: Office Reconciliation Screen
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-17
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Office Reconciliation Screen.
Enter Actual Amounts Here: Enter the actual media amounts in this
field once the desired media type is selected.
Actual: This field shows the amount being reconciled.
In Safe: This field displays the actual In Safe Amount.
Over/Short: This field reflects the difference between the Actual and
the Office Total.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates
Button Options
Below are button options for the Office Reconciliation Screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the media
reconciliation.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to automatically accept the
drawer total for which the office is responsible. This option is available
only when the “Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back
Office Control File.
PRINT SCREEN: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a
worksheet copy of the matrix.
10-18 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Performing Office Reconciliation
Reconcile Office displays all media in the office till such as cash,
checks, or food stamps. The media in the office till accumulates from
cashier settlement and pickups, plus any receipts (for example, rebate
checks) minus any paidouts (for example, vendor paidouts). When the
office till is reconciled, all media are transferred over to the Make
Deposit section. The office till is reconciled once a day, preferably in
the morning following the End of Day Procedure. The store cannot
begin a new day until the office is reconciled from the day before.
However, cashiers can sign on to their POS workstations and start their
shift even though the office has not been reconciled. No cashier
pickups or loans can be performed until the office is reconciled.
1. To reconcile the office safe, click on Office Reconciliation Report.
2. Select the type of media involved in the pickup by clicking on the
desired media matrix field.
3. Enter the amount of the various media to pick up.
4. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 for each desired media or click on AUTO (only if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts listed
in the In Safe field.
6. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Note: An on-screen help box is located in the bottom right corner of
this screen. Information about the various screen fields is displayed.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-19
Deposits
The Deposits option is the fifth option on the ScanMaster Office
Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the
ScanMaster Mid-Day/Final Deposit screen. The Deposits option keeps
track of all mid-day and final deposits made during the day. The store
office is relieved of financial accountability once an amount is
deposited.
Figure 10-6: Mid-Day/Final Deposits Screen
10-20 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Mid-Day/Final Deposits Screen.
Deposit To: Click on the desired radio button to select the account for
the mid-day/final deposit.
Enter Deposit Amount For: Enter the amount of deposit for the
selected media.
Deposit: This column displays the deposit amount for each media.
In Drawer: This column displays the total amount available to deposit.
Remainder: This column displays the remaining amount (if any) after a
deposit is made.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Mid-Day/Final Deposits Screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the cashier
pickup.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to automatically accept the
In-Drawer amounts as the deposit amounts. This option is available
only when the “Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back
Office Control File.
PRINT SCREEN: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a copy
of the matrix.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-21
Initiating Deposits
Deposits accumulate totals from loans, pickups, and settlements
throughout the day. The Deposits option permits deposits to be made
up to three different accounts. This provides the ability for a more
detailed breakdown of deposited amounts.
There are two types of deposits: mid-day and final deposits.
•
Mid-day deposits are performed prior to End-of-Day
processing. This type of deposit relieves the office of financial
accountability for amounts taken from the store prior to End-ofDay. Totals are accounted for on the ScanMaster Reconciliation
Report.
•
The final deposit is the store’s last deposit for that day. It
closes out the office’s financial record for that day. There can
only be one final deposit, which must follow the finalized office
reconciliation. When the office is reconciled, that amount is
available to deposit to the store’s account. When the final
deposit is made, the office till (Office Safe) reverts to zero or the
predetermined amount.
You can perform one of these functions in the Make Deposits Screen:
•
To balance the office till to zero, enter the exact amount in the
Count field as is in the Drawer Total Field.
•
To have a beginning office till, enter the amount of deposit. The
remaining undeposited amount of media becomes the
beginning office till (beginning safe).
Once the final deposit is made, the system compiles information for the
preceding day. This procedure finalizes the previous day so a new one
can begin. The Back Office Printer prints a hard copy of all deposits
made.
10-22 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Performing A Deposit
1. When performing a mid-day deposit, click on the desired account
number radio button.
2. Select the type of media involved by clicking on the desired media
matrix field.
3. Enter the deposit amount for that media.
4. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 for each desired media or click on AUTO (if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts listed
in the In Drawer fields.
6. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Note: An on-screen help box is located in the bottom right corner of
this screen. Information about the various screen fields is displayed.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-23
ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
The ScanMaster Reconciliation Report is the sixth option on Office
Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to access the
ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
The ScanMaster Reconciliation Report is a high-level overview that
displays all pertinent accounting information for store balancing. It
provides a report of the store’s financial activity, including sales figures
and the office safe balance for the previous day and weeks.
Figure 10-7: ScanMaster Reconciliation Report Screen
10-24 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
screen.
Week Ending: This field displays the last day of the week selected for
the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report. The available weeks are
accessed by clicking on the down arrow next to this field. Select the
desired week from the list box by clicking on that week.
Enter Amount: This field is active only on accounts that can be edited.
Enter the amount of the selected Paidout or Receipt account and press
ENTER. That amount is added to the totals.
Account Name: This field displays the various account names on the
Reconciliation Report. There are three standard headings: Paidouts
(deposits, or outgoing store funds); Receipts (all incoming funds); and
Memos (other trackable items). Customized account names under
these headings are created under the Personalization Menu - SRR
Editor option.
Days of the Week: This column displays the days of week that
comprise the Reconciliation Report.
Week to Date Totals: This column displays the week-to-date totals for
the various Paidout, Receipt of Memo accounts.
Account Numbers: Optional. This field is available for General Ledger
account numbers.
ST: This field is located in the row headers at the far left of the
spreadsheet. ST indicates the row is a subtotal field.
GT: This field is located in the row header at the far left of the
spreadsheet. GT indicates the row is a grand total field.
N: This field is located in the row header at the far left of the
spreadsheet. N indicates “No Action” and is used for Memo accounts
only. .
+: This field is located in the row header at the far left of the
spreadsheet. The + field adds amounts to the column and row totals.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-25
-: This field is located in the row header at the far left of the
spreadsheet. The - field subtracts amounts to the column and row
totals.
Note: Editable fields in the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report screen
are displayed in white while uneditable fields are displayed in gray.
Editable fields that affect the current safe total appear in yellow. Before
determining which fields these are, ScanMaster looks at both the last
End of Day date and whether the Office Reconciliation and Final
Deposits have been performed.
Button Options
Below are the button options for the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the ScanMaster
Reconciliation Report.
EXPORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to export this
spreadsheet to the Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet programs
compatible with the .XLS file extension.
UNHIDE / HIDE: Click on this button to unhide or hide the various
totalizers that make up the Paidouts, Receipts and Memo reconciliation
headings. Report entries can only be made to Sub Total fields when
the hidden totalizers that make up the Sub Total heading are
unhidden.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report.
% PRINT SCALE: Click on the up and down buttons to increase or
decrease the print scale setting. The ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
will be enlarged or reduced accordingly when printed.
10-26 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Using the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
This spreadsheet provides a report of a store’s financial activity for
specific days or weeks. You have access to one week on the screen and
as many stored weeks as defined in the Back Office Control File.
The ScanMaster Reconciliation Report is comprised of three main
headings:
•
Paidouts
•
Receipts
•
Memos
You can customize this report using the System Personalization
Menu’s SRR Editor program.
This report is generated through the End-of-Day procedure and
provides individual and weekly-to-date totals of store accountability.
At the end of the week, totals are saved and archived, and the system
automatically begins a report for the new week.
Paidouts
The paidouts heading details all store deposits and any amount paid
out from the store safe. It gives a detailed breakdown of different
media, such as Master Card, Visa, or Discover for each day of the
selected week.
Example: Paying $25 for a bundle of newspapers.
Receipts
The receipts heading details all incoming funds to the store safe. All
receipts generated at the POS workstation, such as for department sales
or gift certificates, are automatically pulled into the ScanMaster
Reconciliation Report during the End-of-Day procedure.
Memos
The memos heading details “other” trackable items that are not
considered paidouts or receipts. Memo accounts could include the
beginning/ending safe totals, the daily customer count, or taxable
sales.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-27
Accessing the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report
From the ScanMaster Reconciliation Report screen, double click on the
desired cell (the account name row and the week day column) to edit
that cell’s amount. Type in the new amount in the Entry Amount field
at the top of the screen and press ENTER. The amount for that account
is entered and calculated for both daily and weekly totals.
10-28 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Adjust Settled Cashiers
Adjust Settled Cashier is the seventh option on Office Procedures
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-A) to access the ScanMaster
Adjust Settled Cashiers screen.
Adjust Settled Cashiers lets office personnel make adjustments to
cashier tills that are already settled.
Figure 10-8: Cashier Adjustments Screen
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-29
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the ScanMaster Cashier Adjustments
screen.
Cashier #: Enter the cashier’s three-digit ID number.
Available Cashiers: Found at the left of the screen, this list box
displays all available cashiers.
Enter Pickup Amount: Enter the pickup amount here.
Pickup: This field displays the actual amount being picked up.
In Drawer: The In Drawer Total is the current amount in the cashier’s
till.
Over/Short: This field is calculated using the pickup amount and the
drawer total. The difference between the two is the over or short
amount for that cashier’s shift.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Cashier Adjustments Screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the cashier
pickup.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to automatically accept the
drawer total as the cashier pickup total. This option is available only
when the “Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back Office
Control File.
PRINT SCREEN: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a
worksheet copy of the matrix.
10-30 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Adjusting Settled Cashiers
This feature is used to adjust a cashier’s till that has already been
settled. If a settled cashier’s over/under amount has been clarified (for
example, a missing check was found), the cashier settlement record can
be adjusted to reflect the new amount.
1. Upon accessing the ScanMaster Cashier Adjustments screen, select
the cashier whose settlement you wish to adjust by clicking on that
cashier in the Available Cashiers list box.
2. Select the type of media involved by clicking on the desired media
matrix field.
3. Enter the pickup amount.
4. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 for each desired media or click on AUTO (if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts listed
in the In Drawer fields.
6. When all fields are completed, click on the ACCEPT button to
finalize.
Note: All adjustments must be made prior to End-of-Day. Once Endof-Day is complete, all cashier settlements are final. Adjustments
cannot be made between the time Office Reconciliation takes place and
when the final deposit is made.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-31
Active Cashier List
Active Cashier List is the eighth option on the ScanMaster Office
Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-L) to access the
ScanMaster Check Active Cashiers screen.
Active Cashier displays all cashiers active on the ScanMaster System.
This screen tells if cashiers are active on a POS workstation, if they are
not settled, or if they are delayed.
Figure 10-9: Check Active Cashiers
10-32 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Checking Active Cashiers
The Active Cashier screen displays cashiers active on the system,
delayed cashiers, and cashiers that are signed off the system but not
settled.
If a cashier is active, the system indicates on which POS workstation
the cashier is active. If the cashier is delayed, the system indicates that
cashier is delayed. When a cashier is signed off, but not settled, the
system marks that cashier as “NZ” to indicate that the cashier is not
settled.
Before running the End of Day Procedure, view the Active Cashier
screen to view the status of the cashiers. All cashiers must be settled or
delayed in order to be included in the store’s daily totals.
Note: The Active Cashier List option is also available on the
ScanMaster Employee Maintenance Menu.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-33
End of Day Procedure
The Day End Procedure is option ten on the Main Menu. The Day End
Procedure should only be done at the End of the Day. Below is the
order in which a store completes an End-of-Day.
1. Settle of Cashiers
2. Check Active Cashiers
3. Run Day End Procedure
Cashiers that are settled or delayed are included in the Day End
Procedure.
Check Active Cashier displays any unsettled or delayed cashiers
remaining on the system. All cashiers must be delayed or settled to be
included in the store’s End-of-Day totals.
To perform the Day End Procedure:
After you select the End of Day Procedure, the screen displays the
Active Checker List to validate checker status. Click Exit (or press AltX). The screen displays ”START DAY END PROCEDURE. ARE YOU
SURE” Click Yes (or Press Alt-Y) to begin the Day End Procedure. (If
you enter N for No, the screen returns to the Main Menu.)
During the Day End Procedure the following actions take place:
•
The back office PC copies certain system Files to the Server PC
for the register’s hard disk.
•
The POS workstation’s Day End clears the totals, downloads
any remaining files to the Server, and receives any system
updates from the Server. (The POS Workstation’s Day End is
performed when the workstation is closed.)
•
The system consolidates TLOG and file archivals.
•
The system processes and compiles reports.
•
The system processes movement information.
10-34 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
During the Day End, if you press the F1 ABORT key, the system aborts
the process it is performing and continues to the next process. The
information on the aborted process does not appear in the reports
generated by the Day End Procedure.
Each POS workstation prints a receipt displaying “End of Day
Successful, Offline Files Copy Successful, Register
Software Update.” This receipt also prints all the filenames that
were copied to the POS workstation.
If a POS workstation was unable to complete Day End, a warning
message appears on the Back office PC’s Main Menu, “END OF DAY
PENDING ON REGISTER #” The system also displays the number of
the POS workstation affected. To correct this problem:
1. Go to the POS workstation and make sure it is closed. (“Closed”
appears on the screen and the banner message is scrolling.)
When closed, the POS workstation looks at the server every fifteen
seconds to see if the server has a Day End flag for the workstation.
2. If the workstation is closed, but no Day End takes place after about
fifteen seconds, manually perform a Day End at the workstation
under Utilities.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-35
Media Flash Report
The Media Flash Report option is the ninth option on the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to
access the ScanMaster Media Flash Report screen. This feature enables
the user to accumulate an up-to-the-minute flash report on media used
by the store. Three types of report selection criteria are available:
settled cashiers, delayed cashiers, and office balance.
Figure 10-10: Media Flash Report Screen
10-36 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Field Descriptions
Below are the field descriptions for the Media Flash Report Screen.
Settled Cashiers: Click on this check box to select a media flash report
for all settled cashiers. An “X” in the check box indicates this report
has been selected. This report lists all settled cashiers, the various
media accumulated and the dollar amounts for that media.
Delayed Cashiers: Click on this check box to select a media flash
report for all delayed cashiers. An “X” in the check box indicates this
report has been selected. This report lists all delayed cashiers, the
various media accumulated, and the dollar amounts for that media.
Office Balance: Click on this check box to select a media flash report
for the office balance. An “X” in the check box indicates this report has
been selected. This report lists the current media and dollar amounts
in the office safe.
Active Cashiers: Click on this check box to select a media flash report
for the active cashiers. An “X” in the check box indicates this report
has been selected. This report lists all active cashiers, the various media
accumulated and the dollar amounts for that media.
Note: All three boxes can be selected or in any combination. (An
option may be grayed out if no cashiers exist with that status).
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Media Flash Report Screen.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu screen.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to prepare a media
flash report for the desired Report Selection Criteria.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort compiling a
media flash report for the desired Report Selection Criteria.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Media Flash Report.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-37
Printing Media Flash Reports
From the ScanMaster Media Flash Report screen, select the desired
type of media flash report by clicking on the report type check box. An
“X” indicates the report has been selected. Upon selecting the desired
media flash report type, click on the PREPARE button (or press Alt-P)
to compile the report. An on-line copy of the report displays. Use the
horizontal and vertical scroll bars to scroll up and down within the
report. Click on the PRINT button for a hard copy of this report.
Figure 10-11: Sample Media Flash Report (Office Balance)
10-38 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Report Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Media Flash Report.
Media Flash Report Type: This report is available for Unsettled and
Active Cashiers, Delayed Cashiers, and Office Balance.
ID #: Three (3) digit employee number.
Cashier Name: The employee’s first name.
Register: Two (2) digit POS workstation number.
Pick-Up Needed: Three (3) character field. Asterisks display in this
field when a cashier is in need of a pick-up.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates.
Individual Cashier Totals: This column displays individual media
totals for each cashier.
Grand Total: This column displays the grand total for each media for
all cashiers.
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-39
Office Adjustments
The Office Adjustments option is the tenth option on the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to
access the ScanMaster Office Adjustments screen. The Office
Adjustments option keeps track of all media coming into the store and
accumulates to the store safe. This feature makes the store financially
accountable for the media once it is accumulated and calculated.
This option may be performed anytime during the day.
Figure 10-12: Office Adjustments Screen
10-40 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the Office Adjustments Screen.
Money Going Out: Click on this radio button to record money going
out of the office safe.
Money Coming In: Click on this radio button to record money coming
into the office safe.
Adjust Beginning Safe: Click on this radio button to make
adjustments to the beginning safe balance.
Enter Adjustments For: Enter the adjustment amount for the selected
media.
Adjust: This column displays the adjustment amount for each media.
In Safe: This column displays the total amount currently in the safe.
New Total: This column displays the remaining amount (if any) after
an adjustment is made.
Count: This column displays the number of adjustments made for the
selected media.
Available media: These are the available methods of payment. They
are cash, foreign currency, checks, WIC, ACH, Debit Card, food
stamps, EFS, Master Card, Visa, Discover, American Express (Amex),
Store Charge, Independence, Vendor Coupons, Store Coupons, and
Gift Certificates
Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office 10-41
Button Options
Below are the button options for the Office Adjustments Screen.
ACCEPT: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to accept the office
adjustment.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Office Procedures Menu.
ABORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to abort any changes.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the matrix.
AUTO: Click on this button (or press Alt-U) to balance all amounts for
which the office is responsible. This option is available only when the
“Use Auto Pickup” option is turned on in the Back Office Control File.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a copy of the
matrix.
10-42 Chapter 10: Performing Accounting Procedures in the Back Office
Performing An Office Adjustment
1. When performing an office adjustment, select the type of media
involved by double clicking on the desired media matrix field.
2. Enter the adjustment amount.
3. Press ENTER after typing in the amount.
4. Repeat steps 2 & 3 for each desired media or click on AUTO (only if
enabled in the Back Office Control File) to accept the amounts listed
in the In Safe fields.
5. When all media are entered, click on ACCEPT to finalize.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System
Reports
The Reports Menus is the seventh option on the ScanMaster Main
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-R) to access the ScanMaster
Reports Menu screen.
The Reports Menu consists of seven submenus.
•
Financial Reports Menu
•
Item File Reports
•
Electronic Coupons
•
Delete Electronic Coupons
•
APT Coupons Report (future enhancement)
•
Print End of Day Reports
•
EJ (Electronic Journal) By Transaction
•
EJ by Cashier
11-2
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-1: Reports Menu Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Financial Reports Menu
The Financial Reports Menu is the first option on the Reports Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the Financial Reports
Menu screen. There are ten options.
Figure 11-2: Financial Reports Menu Screen
11-3
11-4
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Department Flash Report
Department Flash Report is the first option on the Financial Reports
Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-F) to access the
Department Flash Report Screen.
This report provides up-to-the-minute department sales for the current
day’s business. It provides separate department totals, group totals,
other department totals, as well as corresponding percentage of the
overall store totals.
The Department Flash Report can be run any time during the day and
as often as needed.
Figure 11-3: Department Flash Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
11-5
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Department Flash Report are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Department Flash Report.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of the
ScanMaster Department Flash Report.
Printing a Department Flash Report
The Department Flash Report is automatically processed when the
Department Flash Report button is selected. The system processes all
available cashier TLOGs and displays them on the operator display. A
hard copy of this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Figure 11-4: Sample Department Flash Report
11-6
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Below are report field descriptions for the Department Flash Report.
Group: A collection of departments.
Department #/Name: This field displays the department number and
its name.
Department Total: This field displays the total sales amount for that
department.
Group Total: This field displays the total sales amount for that group.
Memo Department Total: This field displays the total sales for all
memo departments.
Grand Total: This field displays the grand total of all groups,
departments and memo departments.
Sales $: This field displays the total sales dollar amount for that
department.
Dept. %: This field displays the department percentage compared to
the total group sales.
Group %: This field displays the group percentage compared to the
store’s sales totals.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Enhanced Department Report
Enhanced Department Report is the second option on the Financial
Reports Menu screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-E) to access
the ScanMaster Expanded Department Report. This report provides
detailed department information regarding sales, returns/refunds,
voids, coupons and discounts.
Figure 11-5: Expanded Department Report Screen
11-7
11-8
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Expanded Department Report
screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of the
ScanMaster Expanded Department Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Expanded Department Report.
Figure 11-6: Sample Expanded Department Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
11-9
Report Field Descriptions
Group: This field displays the descriptor for the selected group. For
example Group 0, Group 1.
Dept: This field displays the department number and name. For
example, 02 Grocery, 03 Taxable Grocery.
Group Total: This field displays the total amount of sales for a specific
group. It includes all departments in that group.
Sales Total: This field displays the total sales of all departments other
than “other income” departments.
Other Income: This field displays the total sales of all “other income”
departments.
Grand Total: This field displays the grand total of all sales.
Sales Dollars: This field displays the sales totals for any given group or
department.
Returns Dollars: This field displays the total dollar amount of all
returns for any given group or department.
Refunds Dollars: This field displays the total dollar amount of all
refunds for any given group or department.
Voids Dollars: This field displays the total dollar amount of all voids
for any given group or department.
Store Coupons: This field displays the dollar amount of store coupons
for that department.
Double Vendor Coupons: This field displays the dollar amount of the
doubled portion of the double vendor coupon.
Double Store Coupons: This field displays the dollar amount of the
doubled portion of the double store coupon.
Discount One, Two, Three, Four, and Five: These fields display the
dollar amount of the discounts for a group or department.
11-10 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Department Historical Report
Department Historical Report is the third option on the Financial
Reports Menu Screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to access
the ScanMaster Department Historical Report Screen.
Department Reports can be viewed online or printed to paper from this
option. Among the report options available are: daily department
reports; week-to-date department reports; and period-to-date
department reports.
Figure 11-7: Department Historical Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-11
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Department Historical Report screen
are:
DAILY: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to compile a Daily
Department Report for the previous day.
WEEKLY: Click on this button (or press Alt-W) to compile a Week-toDate Department Report.
PERIOD-TO-DATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to compile a
Period-to-Date Department Report.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Department Historical Report.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of this
report.
Printing a Daily Department Report
Upon selecting the DAILY button, the system prompts for a report
date. Enter the date (MMDDYY format) from which you want to
compile totals and press ENTER. If none is entered, the system
defaults to the current day. Department totals for the selected day are
automatically compiled and displayed online. A hard copy of this
report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Printing a Week-to-Date Department Report
Upon selecting the WEEK-TO-DATE button, the system automatically
processes the daily totals with the current weekly totals and displays
them online. Daily totals for that week are displayed by date, with the
Week-to-date totals displayed in the far right column. A hard copy of
this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
11-12 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Printing a Period-to-Date Department Report
Upon selecting the PERIOD-TO-DATE button, the system
automatically processes period-to-date department totals and displays
them online. Period-to-Date ranges are user-defined. A hard copy of
this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Figure 11-8: Sample Department Historical Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-13
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Department Historical Report
are:
Department Total: This field displays the total (daily, weekly or
period) sales amount for that department.
Memo Department Total: This field displays the total (daily, weekly or
period) sales for all memo departments.
Grand Total: This field displays the grand total (daily, weekly or
period) of all groups, departments and memo departments.
Sales $: This field displays the total sales dollar amount for that
department.
Dept. %: This field displays the department percentage compared to
the total group sales.
Group %: This field displays the group percentage compared to the
store’s sales totals.
11-14 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Department Activity Report
The Department Activity Report is the fourth option on the
ScanMaster I Financial Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press
Alt-C) to access the Department Activity Report.
A blank screen initially displays. Select the desired type of Department
Activity Report by clicking on either the Daily or Period-To-Date
button. A date or range of dates field then displays. Enter the date(s)
and press ENTER to access a Daily or Period-To-Date Department
Activity Report.
Figure 11-9: Department Activity Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-15
Button Options
Below are button options for the ScanMaster Department Activity
Report:
DAILY: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to compile a Daily
Department Activity Report.
PERIOD-TO-DATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to compile a
Period-to-date Department Activity Report.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the
ScanMaster Financial Reports Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Department Activity Report.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of this
report.
Printing a Daily Department Activity Report
Upon selecting the DAILY button, the system prompts for a report
date. Enter the date (MMDDYY format) from which you want to
compile totals and press ENTER. If no date is entered, the system
defaults to the current day. Department totals for the selected day are
automatically compiled and displayed on the screen. A hard copy of
this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Printing a Period-to-Date Department Activity Report
Upon selecting the PERIOD-TO-DATE button, the system
automatically processes period-to-date department totals and displays
them on the screen. Period-to-Date ranges are user-defined. A hard
copy of this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
11-16 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-10: Sample Daily Department Activity Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-17
Report Field Descriptions
Below are report field descriptions for the Department Activity Report.
Group: This field displays the numeric descriptor for the selected
group. For example Group 0, Group 1.
Dept: This field displays the department number and name. For
example, 01 Non Food, 02 Grocery, 03 Taxable Grocery.
Sales $: This field displays the total sales dollar amount for that
department.
Item Count: This field displays the total number of items sold through
that department.
Customer Count: This field displays the total number of customers
purchasing items from that department.
Dept Total: This field displays the total sales amount for all
departments.
Memo Dept Total: This field displays the total sales for all memo
departments (departments totals not included in total sales, for
example lottery tickets and stamps).
Less Total Time Discounts: This field displays the total amount of
discounts for the day or period-to-date.
Grand Total: This field displays the grand total in sales dollars for all
departments. The grand total is calculated by adding the department
and memo department totals and subtracting the total time discounts.
11-18 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Hourly Activity Report
Hourly Activity Report is the fifth option on the Financial Reports
Menu Screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-H) to access the
ScanMaster Flash Activity Report.
Hourly productivity reports are compiled using this option. These
reports are useful for front end labor scheduling.
Figure 11-11: Flash Activity Report Screen
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Flash Activity Report are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit this report and return
to the Financial Reports Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the ScanMaster
Flash Activity Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Flash Activity Report.
Printing the Hourly Activity Report
The Hourly Activity Report for the preceding day’s business is
automatically processed when the HOURLY ACTIVITY button is
selected. The report initially displays online, but a hard copy is
available by selecting the PRINT button.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-19
Figure 11-12: Sample Flash Activity Report
11-20 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Flash Activity Report are:
Hours: This field displays the time of sales, based on one hour
intervals.
Net Sales for Period: This field displays the net sales for the period,
based on one hour intervals.
Number of Customers: This field displays the total number of
customers for that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Number of Items Sold: This field displays the total number of items
sold during that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Active # of Terminals: This field displays the total number of active
POS workstations for that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Elapsed Term Time: This field displays the average idle time for each
active POS workstation during that time period, based on one hour
intervals.
Active # of Operators: This field displays the total number of active
POS workstation operators for that time period, based on one hour
intervals.
Average Sales / Term Hour: This field displays the average sales per
POS workstation for that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Average Sale / Customer: This field displays the average sales totals
per customer for that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Average No. Items / Customer: This field displays the average number
of items per customer for that time period, based on one hour intervals.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-21
Consolidated TLOG Reports
Consolidated TLOG Reports is the sixth option on the Financial
Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the
ScanMaster Consolidated TLOG Reports Screen.
The Consolidate TLOG File is created during End of Day procedures.
End of Day must be run first before the Consolidated TLOG Report is
run. Cashier information for the previous day is displayed.
The following reports are available through the Consolidated TLOG
Report option. They are:
•
No Sale Report
•
Non-Scans Report
•
Returns Report
•
Override Report
•
Negative Sales Report
•
Canceled Sales Report
•
Voids
•
Error Correct
These reports are available for individual cashiers or for a range of
cashiers.
Note: All consolidated TLOG reports are executed using the same
operator procedures.
11-22 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-13: Consolidated TLOG Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-23
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Consolidated TLOG Report screen are
displayed below. They are available for each Consolidated TLOG
Report Type.
Individual Cashier: Click on this radio button to compile a
Consolidate TLOG Report for a specific cashier. Then Choose the
Cashier from the Cashier Number window.
Cashier Range: Click on this radio button to compile a Consolidated
TLOG Report for a specific range cashiers.
Start: Three (3) digit numeric field. Displays only when the Register
Range radio button is selected. Enter the starting POS workstation
number for the report.
End: Three (3) digit numeric field. Displays only when the Register
Range radio button is selected. Enter the ending POS workstation
number for the report.
Report Type: Click on the down arrow to access a list box of
Consolidated TLOG Report Types: No Sale Report, Non-Scans Report,
Returns Report, Overrides Report, Negative Sales Report, Canceled
Sales Report, and Voids Report.
Date: Click on the down arrow to access a list box of possible reporting
dates.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
EXECUTE: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to compile the
ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report.
11-24 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Printing Consolidate TLOG Reports
Upon accessing the ScanMaster Consolidated TLOG Report screen,
select the desired selection criteria (individual or range of cashiers)
followed by the desired report type by clicking on that report in the
Report Type list box.
Individual Cashiers: If individual cashiers are selected, the system
automatically displays a list of available cashiers. Click the desired
cashier. At the Report Type field, a list of available report types is
displayed by clicking on the down arrow. Click the desired report type.
At the Date field, a list of available dates is displayed by clicking the
down arrow. Click the desired date. To process the report, click on the
DISPLAY button. The system searches all TLOGs and displays
information on the operator screen. A hard copy of this report is
available by selecting the PRINT button.
Cashier Range: If a range of cashiers is selected, type in the beginning
and ending cashier numbers in the cashier range fields, pressing
ENTER after selection. At the Report Type field, a list of available
report types is displayed by clicking on the down arrow. Click the
desired report type. At the Date field, a list of available dates is
displayed by clicking the down arrow. Click the desired date. To
process the report, click on the DISPLAY button. The system searches
all TLOGs and displays information on the operator screen. A hard
copy of this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Note: The message “No Action Found” displays if there is no
information available for the desired report.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-25
No Sale Report
This option provides a report of all No-Sales performed by cashiers.
This report details the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number,
transaction number, date and time of no-sale.
Figure 11-14: Sample No Sale Report
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the No Sales Report are:
Cashier ID: Three (3) digit employee number.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which no sale took
place.
Date: The date when the no sale took place.
Time: The time when the no sale took place.
Non-Scans Report
This option provides a report of all PLU items key-entered by the
cashier, not scanned. Three- and four-digit velocity codes are not
reported as key-entered UPCs.
This report details the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number, the
key-entered UPC number, the UPC descriptor, the quantity sold, the
corresponding department, the price, the transaction type (normal sale
or return), the transaction number and the transaction time.
11-26 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-15: Sample Non-Scans Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-27
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Non-Scans Report are:
UPC: This field represents the item’s Universal Product Code (UPC) or
European Article Number (EAN).
Descriptor: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Qty: This field displays the number of non-scanned items.
Department: This field displays the department number of the nonscanned item
Price: This is the price of the non-scanned item.
Transaction Type: This indicates the type of transaction. Types
include: sale, return, or refund.
Transaction #: The transaction number where the non-scans took place.
Time: The time when the non-scans took place.
11-28 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Returns Report
This option provides a report of all returns by cashier. This report
details the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number, the UPC or
department for the return, the UPC descriptor, the quantity, price,
return reason, who the return was authorized by (N/A means security
clearance was not needed), transaction number and return time.
Figure 11-16: Sample Returns Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-29
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Returns Report are:
UPC: This represents the item’s Universal Product Code (UPC) or
European Article Number (EAN).
Descriptor: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Qty: This field displays the number of return items.
Price: This is the price of the returned item.
Reason For Return: The return reason code entered at the POS
workstation.
Authorized By: The first name of the manager who authorized the
return.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which the return
took place.
Time: The time when the return took place.
11-30 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Override Report
This option provides a report of all overrides performed by cashiers.
This report displays the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number, the
UPC number and descriptor, quantity, old price, new price, override
reason, manager who authorized the override (N/A means security
clearance was not needed), the transaction number and override time.
Figure 11-17: Sample Override Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-31
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Overrides Report are:
UPC: This represents the item’s Universal Product Code (UPC) or
European Article Number (EAN).
Descriptor: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Qty: This field displays the number of overrides.
Old Price: This is the scanned price from the item.
New Price: This is the price key entered at the POS workstation.
Reason For Override: The override reason code entered at the POS
workstation.
Authorized By: The first name of the manager who authorized the
override.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which the
override took place.
Time: The time when the override took place.
11-32 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Negative Sales Report
The Negative Sales Report shows any negative sales action for the
desired reporting period. This report is also known as the AUD Action
(Audit These Actions) report.
This report details the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number, the
negative sale transaction number, and the dollar amount of the
negative sale. The report also calculates a total for all negative sales
per cashier.
Figure 11-18: Sample Negative Sales Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-33
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Negative Sales Report are:
Cashier #: Three (3) digit numeric employee number.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which the
negative sale took place.
Time: The time when the negative sale took place.
Canceled Sales Report
The Canceled Sales Report shows any canceled sales action for the
desired reporting period.
This report details the cashier’s name and three-digit ID number, POS
workstation number, transaction number, authorizing manager’s name
and three-digit ID number, and the transaction date and time.
Figure 11-19: Sample Canceled Sales Report
11-34 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Canceled Sales Report are:
Cashier ID: Three (3) digit employee number.
Reg #: This is the POS workstation on which the canceled sale took
place.
Trans: The transaction number of the sale in which the canceled sale
took place.
Mgr: Three (3) digit employee number and the first name of the
manager who authorized the return.
Date: The date when the canceled sale took place.
Time: The time when the canceled sale took place.
Voids Report
The Voids Report provides a report of all Voids performed by cashiers.
This report details the cashier’s name, date and time of void, and the
manager number (if applicable).
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-35
Figure 11-20: Sample Voids Report
11-36 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Voids Report are:
UPC: This represents the item’s Universal Product Code (UPC) or
European Article Number (EAN).
Descriptor: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Qty: This field displays the number of void items.
Price: This is the price of the voided item.
Reason For Void: The void reason code entered at the POS
workstation.
Authorized By: The first name of the manager who authorized the
void.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which the void
took place.
Time: The time when the void took place.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-37
Error Correct Report
The Error Correct Report provides a report of all corrected errors
performed by cashiers.
This report details the cashier’s name, date and time of error correct,
and the manager number (if applicable).
Figure 11-21: Sample Error Correct Report
11-38 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Error Correct Report are:
UPC: This represents the item’s Universal Product Code (UPC) or
European Article Number (EAN).
Descriptor: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Amt: This field displays the split quantity/split price or unit price for
the error correct.
Reas/Mgr: The reason code and manager code (if applicable) for the
authorized correction.
Transaction #: The transaction number of the sale in which the error
correction took place.
Date: The date when the error correction took place.
Time: The time when the error correction took place.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-39
Media Swap Report
The Media Swap Report provides a report of all corrected media
tendered as performed by the cashier using the Media Swap function.
This report details the cashier’s name, original media, new media,
amount transaction number and the manager identification number
and reason code (if applicable).
Figure 11-22: Sample Media Swap Report
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Media Swap Report are:
Cashier Name: The name of the cashier performing the Media Swap.
Original Media: This media type as originally tendered (i.e. the
“transferred from” media).
New Media: This corrected media type (i.e. the “transferred to”
media).
Amt: The amount swapped in dollars.
Transaction: The transaction number assigned to the Media Swap.
Original Transaction: The transaction number in which the Original
Media was tendered (if applicable).
Original Approval: The original EFT approval code (if applicable).
Mgr ID: The manager ID of the authorized Media Swap (if applicable).
Reason: The reason code of the authorized Media Swap (if applicable).
11-40 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Summary Audit Trail Reports
Summary Audit Trail Reports is the seventh option on the Financial
Reports Menu Screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-U) to access
the ScanMaster Cashier Audit Report.
These reports are used to view today’s or yesterday’s audit information
by store or by cashier. It provides a quick reference summary of
store/cashier audit information.
Figure 11-23: Cashier Audit Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-41
Cashier Audit Report Options
There are two button options available from this screen. They are:
•
View Report For Store
•
View Report For Cashier
Users have the ability to select those options for two audit periods:
Today’s or Yesterday’s.
11-42 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
View Report For Office
View Report for Store is the first option on the Cashier Audit Report
screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-S) to access the Audit Trail
Report for office.
Figure 11-24: Sample Audit Trail Report for Office
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-43
The Audit Trail Report for Office report provides today’s or
yesterday’s audit information by store. It summarizes activity for Safe
Adjustments, Mid-day Deposits, Office Reconciliation, Office Recon
Adjustments, and Final Deposits.
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Audit Trail Report for Office are:
Safe Adjustments: This field displays any adjustments to the safe
balance. (Media type and amount.)
Mid-day Deposits: This field displays any mid-day deposits. (Media
type and amount.)
Office Reconciliation: This field displays the office balance for that
day. This includes media types and their corresponding amounts.
Office Recon Adjustments: This field displays any adjustments made
to the office reconciliation. This includes media types and their
corresponding amounts.
Final Deposits: This field displays the store’s final deposit. (Media
type and amount).
Button Options
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Financial
Reports Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the Audit Trail
Report for Office report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Audit Trail Report for Office.
11-44 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
View Report for Cashier
View Report for Cashier is the second option on the ScanMaster
Cashier Audit Report screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to
access the Audit Trail Report for Cashier.
The Audit Trail Report for Cashier provides today’s or yesterday’s
audit information by cashier. It summarizes the cashier activity for a
specific cashier.
Figure 11-25: Sample Audit Trail Report for Cashier
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-45
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Cashier Audit Report screen are:
Cashier Number: The cashier’s three-digit ID number.
Cashier Name: The cashier’s first name.
Pickup Summary: This field displays how many pickups were made
for a specific a cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Settle Summary: This field displays how many settles were made for a
specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Loan Summary: This field displays how many loans were made to a
specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Adjustment Summary: This field displays how many settlements were
adjusted for a specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Delay Summary: This field displays how many delayed settlements
were made for a specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Cashier Audit Report screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Financial
Reports Menu.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print the Audit Trail
Report for Cashier report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Audit Trail Report for Cashier.
Printing an Audit Trail Cashier Report
From the ScanMaster Cashier Audit Report screen, select the desired
cashier from the cashier list. The system automatically processes an
audit trail report for that cashier and displays it online. This report
details that cashier’s pickups and loans, as well as media types and
amounts. A hard copy of this report is available by selecting the PRINT
button.
11-46 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Detail Audit Trail Reports
Detail Audit Trail Reports is the eighth option on the Financial Reports
Menu Screen. Click on that button (or press Alt-U) to access the
ScanMaster Detail Audit Trail Report.
These reports are used to provide a detailed view of today’s or
yesterday’s store/cashier audit information.
Figure 11-26: Detail Audit Trail Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-47
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Detailed Audit Report screen are:
TODAY’S AUDIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-T) to view audit
trail information for the current day (up to initiating the report).
YESTERDAY’S AUDIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-Y) to view
complete audit trail information for the previous day.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Financial
Reports Menu.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Audit Trail Report for Cashier.
EXIT TO LOGIN: Click on this button (or press Alt-G) to exit the
system and return to the system logon screen.
11-48 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-27: Sample Detail Audit Trail Report
Note: The above screen is a representative sample of the Detail Audit
Trail Report screen. The actual report is too large to fit in the manual.
However, it is a compilation of the following reports: Office
Reconciliation, Mid-day and Final Deposits, Pickups and Loans,
Settlements, Office Adjustments, Adjust Settled Cashiers. See
individual report samples for field descriptions.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-49
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Detailed Audit Report screen are:
Cashier Number: The cashier’s three-digit ID number.
Cashier Name: The cashier’s first name.
Pickup Summary: This field displays how many pickups were made
for a specific a cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Settle Summary: This field displays how many settles were made for a
specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Loan Summary: This field displays how many loans were made to a
specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Adjustment Summary: This field displays how many settlements were
adjusted for a specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
Delay Summary: This field displays how many delayed settlements
were made for a specific cashier and the dollar amount by media type.
11-50 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Cashier Report
The Cashier Report is the ninth option on the ScanMaster Financial
Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the
ScanMaster Cashier Report Screen.
This report prints individual cashier/consolidated cashier totals based
on sales from cashiers that are settled. It is compiled by the Day End
Procedure and is usually run first thing in the morning after the office
is reconciled and final deposit is made. It can be printed during the
day as often as needed.
Figure 11-28: Cashier Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-51
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Cashier Report Screen are:
Cashier #: This field displays the cashier’s three-digit employee
number.
Total Net Sales: This field displays the total net sales accumulated by
the cashier (sales by department plus sales tax).
Total Pickups: This field displays the total dollar amount of pickups
performed for that cashier.
Total Loans: This field displays the total dollar amount of all loans
made to that cashier.
Total All Checks: This field displays the total dollar amount of all
check type media accumulated by that cashier.
Store Coup Double: This field displays the total value of the doubled
portion of the store coupons accepted.
Vendor Coup Double: This field displays the total value of the
doubled portion of the vendor coupons accepted.
Received on Account: This field displays the total amount of all instore charge payments accepted by that cashier.
Refunds: This field displays the total amount of refunds issued by that
cashier.
Voids/EC: This field displays the total value of all voids and error
corrects for that cashier.
Discount 1 & 2: This field displays the total value of discounts one and
two accepted by that cashier.
Fr Shp Dsc: This field displays the total value of frequent shopper
discounts accepted by that cashier.
Discount 4 & 5: This field displays the total value of discounts four and
five accepted by that cashier.
Tot Discounts: This field displays the grand total of all discount
amounts for that cashier.
11-52 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Sales (Tax 1, 2, & 3): This field displays the value of the taxable dollar
amount for each of the individual sales tax rates.
Tax 1, 2, & 3: This field displays the amount of the tax collected.
Sales Tax Collected: This field displays the total value of all sales tax
collected.
Gift Certificates Sold: This field displays the number of gift certificates
sold by that cashier and the total dollar amount.
Money Orders Sold: This field displays the number of money orders
sold by that cashier and the total dollar amount.
Paid Outs: The field displays the total dollar amount of paidouts
performed by that cashier.
Cancels: This field displays the total number and dollar amount of all
canceled sales made at the POS workstation by that cashier.
Number of No Sales: This field displays the total number and dollar
amount of all no-sales made at the POS workstation by that cashier.
Electronic Coupons: This field displays the total number and dollar
amount of electronic coupons generated at the POS workstation by that
cashier.
Media Totals: This field displays a snapshot of the cashier’s financial
accountability.
Cash Media: This field displays the total dollar amount (in cash) in the
POS workstation at the end of a cashier’s shift.
Check Media: This field displays the total dollar amount (in checks) in
the POS workstation at the end of a cashier’s shift.
Food Stamp Media: This field displays the total dollar amount (in food
stamps) in the POS workstation at the end of a cashier’s shift.
Charge Media: This field displays the total dollar amount (in charge
media) in the POS workstation at the end of a cashier’s shift.
Coupon Media: This field displays the total dollar amount (in coupon
media) in the POS workstation at the end of a cashier’s shift.
Totals: This field displays the grand total of all media.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-53
Actual Totals: This field displays the actual amount picked up for that
cashier.
Drawer Totals: This field displays the expected total for that cashier
based on the sales tendered.
Over/Short: This field displays the difference between the actual
amount and the drawer total.
Productivity Statistics: These fields list the store averages and totals.
Number of customers: This field displays the number of customers
served by the cashier.
Items per customer: This field displays the average number of items
per customer for a specific cashier. This amount is calculated by: item
count divided by the number of customers.
Item count: This field displays the total number of sold items whether
key-entered, scanned, or entered to open departments. Coupons do not
add toward the item count.
Example: An entry of 10 @ UPC1, 1 @ UPC2 and line 2 is
subsequently voided, produces an item count of 10.
Key entry count: This field displays the number of times UPCs were
key-entered instead of scanned.
Open Dept count: This field displays the number of times open
department entries were made at a register.
Scan entry count: This field displays the total number of scans for a
cashier during a shift.
Ring count: This field displays the total number of UPC and coupon
line items, whether they are key-entered, scanned or entered into open
departments. Ring counts are not affected by voids, refunds/returns
and error corrects.
Example: An entry of 10 @ UPC1, 1 @ UPC2 and line 2 is
subsequently voided, produces a ring count of 2.
Active time: This field displays the total amount of time a cashier was
logged on the POS workstation (from the first signon to the last
signoff).
11-54 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Customer time: This field displays the total time (for all sales) from the
first item scanned to the final tender.
Ringing time: This field displays the total time (for all sales) from the
first item rung to the last item rung
Tender time: This field displays that cashier’s total time (for all sales)
from the last item scanned to the final tender.
Idle time: This field displays that cashier’s total time (for all sales) from
the last tender on a sale to the beginning of the next transaction.
Time per sale: This field displays the total time per sale for that
cashier. It is calculated by dividing the customer time by the number
of transactions.
Customers per hour: This field displays the total number of customer
per hour for that cashier. It is calculated by dividing the number of
customers by the active time.
Items per hour: This field displays the total number of items per hour
for that cashier. It is calculated by dividing the number of items by the
active time.
Sales $ per hour: This field displays the total number of sales dollars
per hour. It is calculated by dividing the dollar amount of sales by the
active time.
Entries per minute: This field displays the total number of entries per
minute (scans per minute) for that cashier. It is calculated by dividing
the ring count total by the ringing time.
Average sale amount: This field displays the average sales amount for
that cashier. It is calculated by dividing the total dollar volume of sales
by the number of transactions.
Cashier Sales By Department: This section provides a department
sales analysis for cashiers.
Group: This field displays the descriptor for the selected group. For
example Group 0, Group 1.
Dept: This field displays the department number and name. For
example, 02 Grocery, 03 Taxable Grocery.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-55
Group Total: This field displays the total amount of sales for a specific
group. It includes all departments in that group for that cashier.
Sales Total: This field displays the total sales of all departments other
than “other income” departments for that cashier.
Other Income Total: This field displays the total sales of all “other
income” departments for that cashier.
Unclassified Discounts: This field displays the total dollar amount of
discounts taken at total time for that cashier.
Grand Total: This field displays the grand total of all sales for that
cashier.
Button Options
Button options for the Cashier Report Screen are:
ALL CASHIERS: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to report on all
cashiers and store totals.
PRINTER: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to generate a printed
report (default).
EXPORT TO ASCII: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to create an
ASCII file of the report. (This file will be named CASHIER.RPT and
reside in the \GROCERY directory).
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to compile the
ScanMaster Cashier Report.
FLASH: Click on this button (or press Alt-F) to toggle the display list
between Available Cashiers for a Flash Report and Available Cashiers
from Last End of Day.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Cashier Report.
11-56 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Additional Cashier Report Fields
Several fields have been added to the Cashier Report and Store Totals
Report. These fields were added to provide stores with more detail for
balancing. They are:
Net Sales: This field displays the grand total after discount.
Mfg Electronic Coupons: This field displays the total quantity and
dollar amount of manufacturer electronic coupons.
Store Electronic Coupons: This field displays the total quantity and
dollar amount of store electronic coupons.
Additional Store Totals Report Fields
Additional Store Totals Report fields are:
Beginning Safe: This field displays the store’s beginning safe amount.
Total Deposits: This field displays the store’s total deposits for the day.
Mfg Electronic Coupons: This field displays the total quantity and
dollar amount of manufacturer electronic coupons.
Store Electronic Coupons: This field displays the total quantity and
dollar amount of store electronic coupons.
Mid-Day Deposits: This report field displays the money deposited to
the bank from the store safe before the End-of-Day and after the
previous day’s final deposit.
Gain / Loss FC: This report field displays the foreign currency gain or
loss based on changes in the foreign currency exchange rate during
that day.
Money In: This report field displays any incoming cash included in the
Back Office safe through miscellaneous office adjustments. This field is
often used in conjunction with Money Out. For example, a store clerk
may remove $100 from the office safe to go to the bank for change.
This is known as “Money Out.” When the change is returned to the
office safe, this is known as “Money In.” The office adjustments
application (SMWORCPT.EXE) permits store personnel to change the
current safe.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-57
Money Out: This report field displays any outgoing cash pulled from
the back office safe. This field is often used in conjunction with Money
In. For example, a store clerk may remove $100 from the office safe to
go to the bank for change. This is known as “Money Out.” When the
change is returned to the office safe, this is known as “Money In.” The
office adjustments application (SMWORCPT.EXE) permits store
personnel to change the current safe.
SRR Paidouts: This report field details store expenses paid out from
the back office safe. For example, the manager may take money out of
the till to pay the window cleaner or the newspaper delivery person.
There are three ways to do a paidout: at the register without an account
number; at the register with an account number; and at the back office
with an account number. The first two types of paidouts are tracked
on the cashier report. The last method is tracked on the store totals
report.
SRR Receipts: This report field details cash taken into the back office
safe. For example, these totals include changes from NSF checks, pay
phones, soft drink machines, etc. There are three ways to do an SRR
receipt: at the register without an account number; at the register with
an account number; and at the back office with an account number.
The first two types of receipts are tracked on the cashier report. The
last method is tracked on the store totals report.
11-58 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Cashier Reports
Use the following formulas to calculate Cashier Totals. The formulas
are detailed in different scenarios because calculations vary depending
on how Back Office Control File options are set.
Scenario 1
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-59
Scenario 2
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Double Mfg Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-60 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 3
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Double Mfg Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-61
Scenario 4
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Double Mfg Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-62 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 5
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Double Mfg Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-63
Scenario 6
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-64 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 7
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-65
Scenario 8
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Taxes
+ Loans
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-66 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Store Totals Reports
Use the following base equation for balancing Store Totals reports:
+ Beginning Safe
+ Grand Total After Discount
+ Total Tax
+ Rec’d Acct (received on account)
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ SRR Receipts (handkeyed receipts)
+ Money In (money coming in)
+ Drawer total for Store Coupon (if Add Store Coupon to Sales option
is set to No)
+/- Gain/Loss FC (foreign currency)
+/- Net Cashier O/S (over/short)
- Store Electronic Coupons (if Add Store Coupon to Sales option is set
to Yes)
- Double Store Coupons (if Add Dbl Store Coup to Sales option is set
to Yes)
- Double Vendor Coupons (if Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales option
is set Yes)
- MFG Electronic Coupons (Always subtract since you are starting
with NET sales and manufacturer coupons are always treated as a
tender.)
- Paidouts (through registers)
- SRR Paidouts (handkeyed)
- MidDay Deposits
- Money Out (money going out)
-------------------------------------------= SAFE TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-67
Use the following formulas to calculate Store Totals. The formulas are
detailed in different scenarios because calculations vary depending on
how Back Office Control File options are set.
Scenario 1
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-68 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 2
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Dbl Coupons
– Vendor Dbl Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-69
Scenario 3
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Vendor Dbl Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-70 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 4
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Vendor Dbl Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-71
Scenario 5
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total Store Coupons
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Dbl. Coupons
– Vendor Dbl Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-72 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 6
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Dbl. Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-73
Scenario 7
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Drawer Total for Store Coupons
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Dbl. Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
11-74 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 8
Use the following equation when the Back Office Control Files are set
as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Grand Total After Discount
+ Beginning Safe
+ Taxes
+ Received on Account
+ Money Orders Sold
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Receipts from handkeyed SRR Fields
+ Money Coming In
+/- Cashier Over / Short
+/- Foreign Currency Gain or Loss
– Paid Outs
– Mfg. Electronic Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Mid-day Deposits
– Paidouts from handkeyed SRR Fields
– Money Going Out
--------------------------------------------= DRAWER TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-75
Printing the Cashier Report
From the ScanMaster Cashier Report screen, click the desired cashiers
(or ALL CASHIERS), store totals, output format(s) and click the
PREPARE button to compile an online copy of this report. The system
automatically compiles the cashier report and displays it to the screen
(unless the only output format chosen was EXPORT TO ASCII). Click
the PRINT button to generate a hard copy of the report. The report
contains all cashier reports and a store totals report.
The Cashier Report consists of: Individual Media Totals (Cashier Settle
information), Cashier Sales by Department, Total Net Sales, Total
Pickups, Total Loans, Total of all Checks (Checks and WIC Checks
total), Refunds, Voids/Error Corrects, Discounts, Sales Tax (Dollar
Amount Taxable), Tax # (Tax collected), Sales Tax Collected (Total of
all Taxes Collected), Gift Certificates Sold, Money Orders Sold, PaidOuts, Cancels, Number of Sales, Number of Customers, Items per
Customer (average of Item Count and Customer Count), Item Count,
Key Entry Count (Key entry to Departments), Scan Entry Count (UPC,
Store Code Scans/Entries), Ring Count (Key Entry and Scan Entry
added together), Active Time (time of cashier Sign on to Sign off),
Customer Time (beginning of first scan to tender completion), Ringing
Time (beginning of first scan to Total Key is depressed), Tender Time
(time from the Total Key Depressed to Tender Completion), Idle Time,
Time Per Sale (add Ringing Time and Tender Time together),
Customers Per Hour (average of Number of Customers into Active
Time), Items Per Hour (average Item Count into Active Time), Sale
Dollar Amount Per Hour (average of Net Sales into Active Time),
Entries Per Minute (average Ring Count into Active Time).
11-76 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Figure 11-29: Cashier \ Store Total Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-77
Lane Productivity Report
Lane Productivity Report is the tenth option on the ScanMaster Reports
Menu. Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to access the ScanMaster
Lane Productivity Report screen.
Lane Productivity enables the operator to VIEW or PRINT the lane
productivity totals.
Figure 11-30: Lane Productivity Screen
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report are:
Number of customers: This field displays the number of customers
served by the lane.
Items per customer: This field displays the average number of items
per customer for a specific lane. This amount is calculated by: item
count divided by the number of customers.
Item count: This field displays the total number of items key-entered,
scanned or entered to open departments.
11-78 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Key entry count: This field displays the number of times UPCs were
key-entered instead of scanned.
Open Dept count: This field displays the number of times open
department entries were made for the lane.
Scan entry count: This field displays the total number of scans for the
lane.
Ring count: This field displays the lane’s total number of key entries,
open department entries and scans (from all sales) from when the first
item is entered to when the last item is entered.
Active time: This field displays the total amount of time a lane was
logged on the POS workstation (from the first signon to the last
signoff).
Customer time: This field displays the total time (for all sales) from the
first item scanned to the final tender.
Ringing time: This field displays the total time (for all sales) from the
first item rung to the last item rung
Tender time: This field displays that lane’s total time (for all sales)
from the last item scanned to the final tender.
Idle time: This field displays that lane’s total time (for all sales) from
the last tender on a sale to the beginning of the next transaction.
Time per sale: This field displays the total time per sale for that lane. It
is calculated by dividing the customer time by the number of
transactions.
Customers per hour: This field displays the total number of customers
per hour for that lane. It is calculated by dividing the number of
customers by the active time.
Items per hour: This field displays the total number of items per hour
for that lane. It is calculated by dividing the number of items by the
active time.
Sales $ per hour: This field displays the total number of sales dollars
per hour. It is calculated by dividing the dollar amount of sales by the
active time.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-79
Entries per minute: This field displays the total number of entries per
minute (scans per minute) for that lane. It is calculated by dividing the
ring count total by the ringing time.
Average sale amount: This field displays the average sales amount for
that lane. It is calculated by dividing the total dollar volume of sales by
the number of transactions.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
SELECT ALL: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to include all lanes
when preparing the ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to compile the
ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report.
11-80 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Producing a Lane Productivity Report
From the ScanMaster Lane Productivity Report screen, click the
desired lanes (or SELECT ALL) and click the PREPARE button to
compile an online copy of this report. A hard copy of this report can be
printed by clicking on the PRINT button.
Figure 11-31: Lane Productivity Report
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-81
Non-Resettable Totals Report
Non-Resettable Totals Report is the eleventh option on the ScanMaster
Reports Menu. Click on this button (or press Alt-N) to access the
ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report screen.
Non-Resettable Totals enables the operator to VIEW or PRINT the
opening and closing non-resettable totals for each POS workstation.
Figure 11-32: Non-Resettable Totals Screen
11-82 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report are:
Individual Register: Click on this radio button to compile a NonResettable Totals Report for a specific POS workstation number.
Register Range: Click on this radio button to compile a Non-Resettable
Totals Report for a specific range of POS workstations.
Individual: Two (2) digit numeric field. Valid only when the
Individual Register radio button is selected. Enter the number of the
POS workstation for which you want to compile Non-Resettable Totals.
Start: Two (2) digit numeric field. Valid only when the Register Range
radio button is selected. Enter the starting POS workstation number
for the report.
End: Two (2) digit numeric field. Valid only when the Register Range
radio button is selected. Enter the ending POS workstation number for
the report.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
EXECUTE: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to compile the
ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-83
Producing a Non-Resettable Totals Report
From the ScanMaster Non-Resettable Totals Report screen, select the
desired report options (Individual POS workstation or range of POS
workstations) and click on the EXECUTE button to compile an online
copy of this report. A hard copy of this report can be printed by
clicking the PRINT button.
Figure 11-33: Sample Non-Resettable Totals Report
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Non-Resettable Totals Report are:
Register #: This field displays the register number.
Opening Total: This field displays the non-resettable totals from the
prior business day.
Closing Total: This field displays the non-resettable totals for the
current business day after End-of-Day is run.
Difference: This field displays the total sales activity for the current
business day.
11-84 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Non-Resettable Totals Calculations
Use the following base equation for balancing non-resettable totals.
+ Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
- Paid-Outs
- Store Coupons (if Add Store Coupon to Sales option is set to Yes)
- Store Electronic Coupons (if Add Store Coupon to Sales option is set
to Yes)
- Double Store Coupons (if Add Dbl Store Coup to Sales option is set
to Yes)
- Double Vendor Coupons (if Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales option
is set Yes)
-------------------------------------------= NON-RESETABLE TOTALS
Use the following formulas to calculate Non-Resettable Totals. The
formulas are detailed in different scenarios because calculations vary
depending on how Back Office Control File options are set.
Scenario 1
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
-----------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-85
Scenario 2
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Store Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Dbl Vendor Coupons
-----------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Scenario 3
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Dbl Mfg Coupons
-----------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
11-86 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 4
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Store Coupons
– Dbl Store Coupons
-----------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Scenario 5
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Dbl Vendor Coupons
------------------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-87
Scenario 6
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Dbl Store Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
– Store Coupons
------------------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Scenario 7
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
------------------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
11-88 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Scenario 8
Use the following equation to calculate non-resettable totals when the
Back Office Control Files are set as shown below.
Add Dbl Vendor Coupon to Sales (NO)
Add Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Add Dbl Store Coupon to Sales (YES)
Total Net Sales
+ Gift Certificates Sold
+ Money Orders Sold
– Paidouts
– Store Coupons
– Store Electronic Coupons
------------------------------------------= NON-RESETTABLE TOTALS
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-89
Electronic Coupon By Department Report
Electronic Coupon by Department Report is the twelfth option on the
ScanMaster Reports Menu. Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to
access the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon by Department Report
screen.
Electronic Coupon by Department enables the operator to VIEW or
PRINT the totals.
Figure 11-34: Electronic Coupon by Department Screen
11-90 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon by
Department Report are:
Sales $: This field displays the total sales dollar amount by Department
or Group.
Store Count: This field displays the total quantity of store electronic
coupons redeemed by Department or Group.
Elec. Coupon Amount: This field displays the total dollar amount of
store electronic coupons redeemed by Department or Group.
Mfg. Count: This field displays the total quantity of manufacturer
electronic coupons redeemed by Department or Group.
Elec. Coupon Amount: This field displays the dollar amount of store
electronic coupons by Department or Group.
Button Options
Button options for the Electronic Coupon by Department Report are:
DAILY: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to compile a Daily
Electronic Coupon by Department Report.
PERIOD-TO-DATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to compile a
Period-to-date Electronic Coupon by Department Report.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the Electronic
Coupon by Department Screen.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon by Department Report.
PRINT: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to print a hard copy of this
report.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-91
Printing a Daily Electronic Coupon by Department Report
Upon selecting the DAILY button, the system prompts for a report
date. Enter the date (MMDDYY format) from which you want to
compile totals and press ENTER. If no date is entered, the system
defaults to the current day. Department totals for the selected day are
automatically compiled and displayed on the screen. A hard copy of
this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Printing a Period-to-Date Daily Electronic Coupon by Department
Report
Upon selecting the PERIOD-TO-DATE button, the system
automatically processes period-to-date department totals and displays
them on the screen. Period-to-Date ranges are user-defined. A hard
copy of this report is available by selecting the PRINT button.
Figure 11-35: Electronic Coupon by Department Report
11-92 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Item File Reports
Item File Reports is the second option on the ScanMaster Reports
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-I) to access the ScanMaster
PLU Reports Menu. There are four options on the ScanMaster PLU
Reports Menu screen. They are:
•
PLU File Report
•
PLU Movement Report
•
AD Movement Report
•
Clear Item Movement Report
Figure 11-36: PLU Reports Menu Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-93
PLU File Report
The PLU File Report is the first option on the ScanMaster PLU Reports
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-P) to access the ScanMaster
Predefined PLU Report screen.
This option enables the user to view or print the PLU file using a wide
variety of selection criteria.
Figure 11-37: Predefined PLU Report Screen
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster UPC Report are:
UPC Code: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired UPC codes for the report.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric. Enter the starting and ending
range of desired departments for the report.
11-94 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Subdepartment: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired subdepartments for the report.
Item Type: Enter the starting and ending range of desired item types
for the report. Defined Item Types are: 0 = Unit; 1 = Split; 2 = Scale; 4 =
Coupon; and 9 = Linked.
Report Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired report codes for the report.
Commodity: Eight (8) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired commodity codes for the report.
Mix & Match: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired mix & match numbers for the report.
Coupon Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired coupon codes for the report.
Price Range: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
price range for the report. The system automatically places the decimal
point.
Ad Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending ad
level for this report.
Adj Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
adjective price level for this report.
Bottle Link: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
bottle link range for the report.
Max Records: This field enables the user to set a predetermined limit to
the total number of records processed.
Sort By: Click on this list box to select the desired sorting method
(UPC, Department, Sub Department, Item Type, etc.)
Configuration File Name: Enter the path and file name of the report
specifications you want to save. By saving these specifications to a file,
you can use this report in the future without having to enter the
specifications a second time.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-95
Include Zero Movers: Click on this check box to include items with no
movement. An “X” in the box means the item is selected. If the box is
left blank, the report only processes items with movement.
Speed Settings: These fields are used to eliminate UPCs that do not
meet the search criteria. Click on the radio button to select the
preferred Zero Mover option for the search. There are three Zero
Mover options: red button = No Zero Movers; Yellow = Include Zero
Movers; and Green = Zero Movers Only.
Speed Index: This field is used to eliminate UPCs from the report that
do not meet search criteria. The speed index is: 1 = UPC Code; 2 =
Department; 3 = Subdepartment; 4 = Item Type; 5 = Mix & Match; 6 =
Report Code; 7 = Ad Level; 8 = Coupon Code; 9 = Commodity.
Example: The operator desires a PLU report based on Coupon Code
06. All fields are left at default except the Coupon Code field, which is
set at Start = 06, End = 06. Click on the Speed Index and select the
Coupon Code option. Then click on the CREATE button. The system
automatically searches PLUs that have a coupon code for the desired
range of 06, reducing the number of PLU records the system searches.
Configuration File Name: Enter the path and file name of the report
specifications you want to save. By saving these specifications to a file,
you can use this report in the future without having to enter the
specifications a second time.
Destination: Printer or Screen. Click on the radio button of the
location where the operator wants the desired information to go.
Note: You can still print the report if you decide to view it online first.
Simply click on the printer icon at the bottom of the screen and the
report is sent to the printer.
11-96 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster UPC Report are:
CREATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to process the PLU
report based on the search criteria entered in the data fields.
LOAD: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to load PLU Report
settings saved previously. Click on the desired file and press the OK
button or double click on the desired file to load those settings. Once
the settings are loaded, click on CREATE to process the report.
DEFAULT: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to set all fields to the
default settings (start = all zeros, end = all 9s.).
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the PLU Reports
Menu.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save specific report
criteria to a file for future use. After completing the desired data fields,
select the directory where you want to save the file, and give the file a
name. Files saved using this option are given an .IFG extension (for
example, sample.ifg). Click on the OK button to save the file name.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about PLU File Reports.
Producing PLU File Reports
The PLU File Report generates a report of Items in the Item File. The
report contents can be restricted by UPC Code, Department,
Subdepartment, Item Type, Report Code, Commodity, Mix & Match,
Coupon Code, Price, Ad Level, Adjective Level and Bottle Link ranges.
Press the ENTER or TAB keys to advance from field to field. Upon
completing all data fields, the user has the ability to view the report
online or print a hard copy report.
The user can also save specific field definitions for commonly used
reports. Simply click on the SAVE button after completing the desired
data fields, select the directory where you want to save the file, and
give the file a name. Save files can then be accessed at a later date by
calling up that file.
To recall a saved configuration, click on the LOAD button, select the
desired saved file and click on the OK button. Then click on CREATE.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-97
Figure 11-38: Sample PLU Report
11-98 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Below are field descriptions for the PLU File Report:
Date Printed: This field displays the date the report was printed.
UPC Range: This field displays the range of UPC numbers from which
the report was generated.
Commodity Range: This field displays the range of commodity codes
from which the report was generated.
Department Range: This field displays the range of departments from
which the report was generated.
Report Code Range: This field displays the range of report codes from
which this report was generated.
UPC: This field displays the UPC number of an item in the report.
Description: This field displays the UPC description of an item in the
report.
Dept: This field displays the department to which the item is assigned.
Subd: This field displays the subdepartment to which the item is
assigned.
Type: This field displays the item’s attributes (for example, split, unit,
coupon).
Fs: This field displays the food stamp status of the item. F = Food
Stamps, N = No.
Tax: This field displays the tax status of the item. T = Taxable, N = no.
Disc: This field displays the discount status of the item. D = Discount,
N = No.
WIC: This field displays the WIC status of an item. W = WIC, N = No.
Vv: This field displays the Visual Verify status of the item. V = Verify,
N = No.
Rst: This field displays the restricted sales status of the item. R =
Restrict, N = No.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-99
Freq: This field displays the frequent shopper status of the item. Fx1,
Fx2, or Fx3 = Frequent Shopper (single, double, or triple), N = No.
Enf: This field displays the enforce status of the item. E = Enforce, I =
Inhibit, or N = No.
Ecoup: This field displays the electric coupon status of an item. E =
Electric Coupon, N = No.
AdL: This field displays the Ad Level status of an item. 0-9 = Ad Level
Status, N = No.
Price: This field displays the price of the item.
Split Price: This field displays the split price of the item.
Lmt Qty/Price: This field lists the limited quantity and price of an item.
For example, 2/69 = Two items for 69 cents. The third item is regular
price.
Case Qty/Cost: This field displays the quantity of items in a case and
the cost of the case.
Coup Cd: This field displays the item’s coupon code.
Mm: This field lists the Mix & Match number (000-999).
Bl: This field lists the bottle link number (00-99).
Rc: This field lists the report code number for the item (00-99).
Commodity: This field lists the eight-digit commodity code number for
that UPC.
Updated: This field lists the date the item was last update.
11-100 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
PLU Movement Report
The PLU Movement Report is the second option on the PLU Reports
Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-M) to access the ScanMaster
Movement Report.
This option enables the user to view or print PLU movement using
three different periods.
•
Week to Date
•
Period to Date
•
Since Last Price Change
Figure 11-39: PLU Movement Report Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-101
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Movement Report screen are:
UPC Code: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired UPC codes for the report.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired departments for the report.
Subdepartment: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired subdepartments for the report.
Item Type: Enter the starting and ending range of desired item types
for the report. Defined Item Types are: 0 = Unit; 1 = Split; 2 = Scale; 4
= Coupon; and 9 = Linked.
Report Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired report codes for the report.
Commodity: Eight (8) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired commodity codes for the report.
Mix & Match: Three (3) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired mix & match numbers for the report.
Coupon Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of desired coupon codes for the report.
Price Range: Six (6) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
price range for the report. The system automatically places the decimal
point.
Ad Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending ad
level range for this report.
Adj Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
adjective price level for this report.
Bottle Link: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
bottle link range for the report.
Max Records: This field enables the user to set a predetermined limit to
the total number of records processed.
11-102 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Sort By: Click on this list box to select the desired sorting method
(UPC, Department, Sub Department, Item Type, etc.)
High/Low: Click on the down arrow to access pull-down list of sort
order options: High or Low. If High is selected, the report is sorted in
descending order (from highest to lowest). If Low is selected, the
report is sorted in ascending order (from lowest to highest).
Clear Up to this Date (MMDDYY): To access this field, select the Clear
Movement checkbox. Enter a date in the Clear Up to this Date field. All
items with price changes up to that date are cleared from the
movement.
Clear Movement: Click on this check box to clear item movement
during report processing. An “X” in the box means clear movement is
selected. If the box is left blank, the report will display item
movement, and not purge it from the system.
Movement Period: Click on this list box to select the desired reporting
movement (Period to Date, Week to Date, and Since Last Price
Change). The movement period selection is also valid with the Clear
Movement option.
Configuration File Name: Enter the path and file name of the report
specifications you want to save. By saving these specifications to a file,
you can use this report in the future without having to enter the
specifications a second time.
Include Zero Movers: Click on this check box to include items with no
movement. An “X” in the box means the item is selected. If the box is
left blank, the report only processes items with movement.
Speed Settings: These fields are used to eliminate UPCs that do not
meet the search criteria. Click on the radio button to select the
preferred Zero Mover option for the search. There are three Zero
Mover options: red button = No Zero Movers; Yellow = Include Zero
Movers; and Green = Zero Movers Only.
Speed Index: This field is used to eliminate UPCs from the report that
do not meet search criteria. The speed index is: 1 = UPC Code; 2 =
Department; 3 = Subdepartment; 4 = Item Type; 5 = Mix & Match; 6 =
Report Code; 7 = Ad Level; 8 = Coupon Code; 9 = Commodity.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-103
The operator desires a PLU report based on Coupon Code 06. All
fields are left at default except the Coupon Code field, which is set at
Start = 06, End = 06. Click on the Speed Index and select the Coupon
Code option. Then click on the CREATE button. The system
automatically searches PLUs that have a coupon code for the desired
range of 06, reducing the number of PLU records the system searches.
Note: You can still print the report if you decide to view it online first.
Simply click on the printer icon at the bottom of the screen and the
report is sent to the printer.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Movement Report screen are:
CREATE: Click on this button (or press Alt-C) to process the PLU
report based on the search criteria entered in the data fields.
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the PLU Reports
Menu.
LOAD: Click on this button (or press Alt-L) to load PLU Report
settings saved previously. Click on the desired file and press the OK
button or double click on the desired file to load those settings. Once
the settings are loaded, click on CREATE to process the report.
SAVE: Click on this button (or press Alt-S) to save specific report
criteria to a file for future use. After completing the desired data fields,
select the directory where you want to save the file, and give the file a
name. Files saved using this option are given an .IFG extension (for
example, sample.ifg). Click on the OK button to save the file name.
DEFAULT: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to set all fields to the
default settings (start = all zeros, end = all 9s.).
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about PLU Movement Reports.
11-104 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Producing ScanMaster Movement Reports
The PLU Movement Report generates a report of item movement in the
Item File. The report contents can be restricted by UPC Code,
Department, Subdepartment, Item Type, Report Code, Commodity,
Mix & Match, Coupon Code, Price, Ad Level, Adjective Price Level and
Bottle Link ranges. Press the ENTER or TAB keys to advance from
field to field. Upon completing all data fields, the user has the ability
to view the report online or print a hard copy report.
The user can also save specific field definitions for commonly used
reports. Simply click on the SAVE button after completing the desired
data fields, select the directory where you want to save the file, and
give the file a name. Save files can then be accessed at a later date by
calling up that file.
Week-to-Date Movement
Week-to-Date Movement totals are cleared at the users discretion. The
Week-to-Date Movement totals are accumulated on a daily basis
during Movement Processing. The Week-to-Date totals, when cleared,
clears the PLU Report Movement information and in Direct
Maintenance clears the Total Qty/Rev. field.
Period-to-Date Movement
Period-to-Date Movement totals are cleared at the users discretion.
The Period-to-Date totals are accumulated on a daily basis during
Movement Processing. The Period-to-Date totals, when cleared, clears
the PLU Report Movement information.
Since Last Price Change Movement
Since Last Price Change Movement totals clears the entire Item Files @
Current Price Field in direct Maintenance and the PLU Report
information. An individual Item’s @ Current Price Change is
automatically cleared and reset when a price change is done in Direct
Maintenance or through Batch Processing. Since Last Price Change is
an option to Clear the Entire File rather than individual Items.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-105
Figure 11-40: Sample Movement Report
11-106 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the movement reports are:
UPC: This represents the item’s universal product code.
Description: This field displays the descriptor assigned to the UPC.
Type: This displays the item type (for example, split, unit or scale)
Department: Two (2) digit field. This field displays the department
assigned to that item.
Commodity: This field displays the commodity code assigned to that
item.
Price: This field displays the price of the item.
Avg Price: This field displays the average retail price for an item. It is
calculated by dividing sales dollar amount by the movement quantity.
Qty: This field displays the quantity of the item sold.
Revenue: This field displays the total sales dollars for that item.
Cost: This field displays the total cost of the items sold. It is calculated
by multiplying the sales quantity and the item cost.
Margin: The gross profit of an item sold. The following equation
describes how the margin is found.
(UnitPrice − UnitCost) x 100
UnitPrice
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-107
Ad Movement Report
The Ad Movement Report is the third option on the Reports Menu.
Click on that button (or press Alt-D) to access the ScanMaster Ad
Movement Report screen.
This option permits the user to track PLU movement on a specific
product(s) through various ad levels (Item File Field). Up to nine
different ad levels can be used.
Figure 11-41: Ad Movement Report Screen
11-108 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Field Descriptions
Field definitions and button options for the ScanMaster Ad Movement
Report screen are:
Ad Level Control: Up to nine different ad levels can be defined.
Clear Ad Levels: Select this option to remove all ad level boxes from
the report.
Set All Ad Levels: Select this option to include all ad levels for the
report.
Clear Ad Movement: Select this option to clear the selected ad level
movement.
Show Zero Movers: Select this option to include zero movement items.
Sort by Department: Select this option to sort the report by department
number, in ascending order.
Sort by UPC: Select this option to sort the report by UPC number, in
ascending order.
Sort by Ad Level: Select this option to sort the report by ad level, in
ascending order.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Ad Movement Report screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the PLU Reports
Menu.
DISPLAY: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to display an ad level
report online.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Ad Movement Report screen.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-109
Utilizing Ad Movement Reports
Ad Levels are attached to specific products through the
ScanMaster Item Maintenance screen.
They are primarily used to isolate performance on specific products or
track movement on products at different price levels.
For example, the ad movement report can be used to track movement
of an item on different days of the week. To do this, the store simply
assigns the product a different ad level for each day of the week. At
the end of the week a report can be compiled to detail the item’s
movement for each day.
Another example of how to use the ad level feature involves selling the
same product at various prices. Stores can track movement by setting
different ad levels on the product at different prices. A report can be
compiled and the movement information can be used to set the best
price for the product.
Producing Ad Movement Reports
From the ScanMaster Ad Movement Report screen, the user can select
the desired ad levels from which to generate reports.
•
Click on specific ad levels to get specific ad level reports.
•
Click on the SELECT ALL AD LEVELS check box to select ad
levels 1-9.
•
Click on the CLEAR AD LEVELS check box to remove all ad
level flags.
•
Select CLEAR AD MOVEMENT to clear the selected ad level
movement.
•
Select SHOW ZERO MOVERS to include zero movement items.
• Click the desired SORT ORDER radio button.
Click on the DISPLAY button to generate the report and display it
online. Click on EXIT to abort changes and return to the ScanMaster
PLU Reports Menu.
Note: A hard copy of this report is available after the DISPLAY button
is pressed. Simply click on the PRINT button and a hard copy is
printed.
11-110 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Clear Item Movement
The Clear Item Movement button is the fourth button on the PLU
Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-C) to access the Clear
Item Movement screen.
This option permits the user to clear item movement from the system.
It automatically shifts movement clearance to the background, freeing
up the active window for other tasks.
Figure 11-42: Clear Item Movement Screen
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-111
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Clear Item Movement screen are:
UPC: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
range of UPC movement items to be cleared from the system.
Department: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of departments from which movement items are to be
cleared.
Report Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of report codes from which movement items are to be
cleared.
Ad Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending ad
level range from which movement items are to be cleared.
Adj Level: One (1) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and ending
adjective price level range from which movement items are to be
cleared.
Commodity Code: Two (2) digit numeric field. Enter the starting and
ending range of commodity codes from which movement items are to
be cleared.
Clear Without Regard to Date of Last Maintenance: Click on this
radio button to clear all item movement (on all items) from the system
even on items maintained prior to the last maintenance date.
Clear Only The Items Where the Price was Changed Prior To:
MMDDYY format. ScanMaster will only clear movement on items that
received a price change prior to the date specified.
Clear Only The Items Where the Date Last Sold Was Prior To:
MMDDYY format. ScanMaster will only clear movement on items that
were last sold prior to the date specified.
11-112 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Select Reset Options: The ScanMaster Clear Movement screen has four
options. They are:
•
Clear Daily: Click on this check box to reset the daily
movement field. An “X” in the box means this field has been
selected.
•
Clear Week to Date: Click on this check box to reset only the
week to date movement field. An “X” in the box means this
field has been selected.
•
Clear Period to Date: Click on this check box to reset the
period to date field. An “X” in the box means this field has
been selected.
•
Clear Since Last Price Change: Click on this check box to reset
the movement since last price change field. An “X” in the box
means this field has been selected.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Clear Movement screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
PLU Reports Menu.
CLEAR IN BACKGROUND: Click on this button (or press Alt-B) to
process clear movement report in the background. This automatically
shifts movement clearance to the background, freeing up the active
window for other tasks.
CLEAR IN FOREGROUND: Click on this button (or press Alt-F) to
process the clear movement report in the active window (foreground).
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the Clear Movement screen.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-113
Processing Clear Movement Reports
From the ScanMaster Clear Movement screen, the user inputs the
desired search criteria to clear item movement from the system. Enter
the desired UPC numbers, department numbers, report codes and
commodity codes. Then select the clear movement options: clear all,
clear week to date, clear since last price change, and clear period to
date. Click on the CLEAR IN BACKGROUND button to process the
clear movement report in the background. Click on the CLEAR IN
FOREGROUND button to process in the active window.
Note: Clear Item Movement is a maintenance option. An actual
report is not produced through this feature.
11-114 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Electronic Coupon Reports
Electronic Coupon Reports in the third option on the ScanMaster
Reports Menu. Click on this button (or press ALT - E) to access the
ScanMaster Electronic Coupons report. This option enables the user to
view or print electronic coupon reports based on user-defined search
criteria.
Figure 11-43: Electronic Coupon Report
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Report screen
are:
Report Type: This field displays the Report Type. There are seven
Report Type options: All, UPC, Mix & Match, Department, Total Sale,
Report Code and Bundle Code. Click on the down arrow to select the
Report Type.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-115
Report Scope: This field displays the Report Scope. There are two
Report Scope options: Current and Period. Click on the down arrow to
select the Report Scope.
Sort By: This field displays the sort selection. There are eight Sort By
options: Report Type, Description, Vendor Number, Commodity Code,
Department, Discount Type, Start Date and End Date. Click on the
down arrow to select the sort field.
Points: Check this box to clear current and period point totals when the
report is generated.
Bonus: Check this box to clear current and period bonus totals when
the report is generated.
Movement: Check this box to clear electronic movement quantity and
amounts when the report is generated.
UPC: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. Enter the desired UPC number
range for the electronic coupons to include in the report.
Vendor #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. Enter the desired vendor
number range of items to include in the report.
Commodity Code: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. Enter the desired
commodity code range of items to include in the report.
Coupon Start: MMDDYY Format. Enter the date range of the
electronic coupon’s start date to include in the report.
Coupon End: MMDDYY Format. Enter the date range of the
electronic coupon’s end date to include in the report.
Coupon Active Date: MMDDYY Format. Enter the active date range
of the electronic coupons to include in the report.
Minimum Purchase: Enter the minimum transaction purchase range
(in dollars) to include in the report.
Department Total: Enter the department totals range (in dollars) to
include in the report.
Redemption Value: Enter the redemption amount (in dollars) of the
electronic coupons to include in the report.
11-116 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Sort Department: Click the down arrows to select the sort department
range to include in the report.
Freq. Shop Level: Click the down arrows to select the Frequent
Shopper Level range to include in the report.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Report screen
are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
REPORT: Click on this button (or press Alt-R) to compile an electronic
coupon report for the selected parameters.
RESET: Click on this button (or press Alt-E) to reset the parameters to
their default settings.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Report screen.
Creating Electronic Coupon Reports
From the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Report screen, select the
desired Report Type (All, UPC, Mix & Match, Department, Total Sale,
Report Code or Bundle Code), report scope (Current or Period to Date)
and Sort Report By selection (Report Type, Description, Vendor
Number, Commodity Code, Department, Discount Type, Start Date or
End Date). Select the clearing options (Points/Bonus/Movement).
Then enter the From and To parameters for UPC number, Vendor
Number, Commodity Code, Coupon Start, Coupon End, Coupon
Active Date, Minimum Purchase, Department Total, Redemption
Value, Sort Department and Frequent Shopper Level. Upon selecting
all report parameters, click on the REPORT button to compile the
report with the selected parameters. Click on EXIT to exit to return to
the ScanMaster Reports Menu.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-117
Figure 11-44: Sample Electronic Coupon Report
11-118 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Electronic Coupon Report are:
Report On: This field displays how the report was sorted (UPC,
Department, Vendor, Start Date, Commodity, or End Date).
UPC or Mix & Match: This field displays the UPC or Mix & Match
code for the Electronic Coupon.
Description: This field displays the description listed on the electronic
coupon.
SD: This field displays the sort department from which the electronic
coupon is deducted.
Vendor: This field displays the vendor number of the product’s
supplier.
Commodity: This field displays the commodity code for this product.
T: This field displays the discount type assigned to this electronic
coupon. There are two types: dollars ($) or percent (%).
Start: This field displays the start date for the electronic coupon.
End: This field displays the end date for the electronic coupon.
Qty: This field displays the number of electronic coupons presented by
customers.
Amount: This field displays the amount (dollar or percent depending
on the discount type) of the electronic coupon.
Points: This field displays the amount of frequent shopper points for
the electronic coupon.
Bonus: This field displays the amount of frequent shopper bonus
points for the electronic coupon.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-119
Delete Electronic Coupons
Delete Electronic Coupons in the fourth option on the ScanMaster
Reports Menu. Click on this button (or press ALT - D) to access the
ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Delete screen. This option enables the
user to delete electronic coupon reports based on user-defined search
criteria.
Figure 11-45: Electronic Delete Screen
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Delete screen
are:
Delete UPC Base Coupons: Click this radio button to delete UPC
based electronic coupons.
Delete Mix & Match Based Coupons: Click this radio button to delete
Mix & Match based electronic coupons.
11-120 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
UPC: Twenty (20) digit numeric field. This field displays the range of
UPC numbers of the electronic coupons to be deleted.
Vendor #: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This field displays the
range of vendor numbers of the electronic coupons to be deleted.
Commodity: Twelve (12) digit numeric field. This field displays the
range of commodity code numbers of the electronic coupons to be
deleted.
First / Last Starting Date: MMDDYY format. This field displays the
range of starting dates of the electronic coupons to be deleted.
First / Last Ending Date: MMDDYY format. This field displays the
range of ending dates of the electronic coupons to be deleted.
Starting /Ending Level: MMDDYY format. This field displays the
range of frequent shopper levels to be deleted.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Delete screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
DELETE: Click on this button (or press Alt-D) to delete all electronic
coupons report for the selected parameters.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Delete screen.
Deleting Electronic Coupons
From the ScanMaster Electronic Coupon Delete screen, enter the From
and To parameters for UPC number, Vendor Number, Commodity
Code, Starting Date, Ending Date and Frequent Shopper Level. Then
click on DELETE to delete electronic coupons within the selected
parameters.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-121
Print End-of-Day Reports
Print End-of-Day Reports in the sixth option on the ScanMaster
Reports Menu. Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to access the
ScanMaster Print End-of-Day report.
This option enables the operator to produce a hard copy of all reports
needed for store balancing.
Producing End-of-Day Reports
When this option is selected, the system automatically processes all
pre-defined reports selected by the user. This report is mainly used for
store balancing.
11-122 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
EJ By Transaction
Electronic Journal Reports is the seventh option on the ScanMaster
Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-J) to access the
ScanMaster Electronic Journal Report (By Transaction) screen.
This option enables the user to select specific electronic journal
transactions by transaction number. Electronic Journal files contain
detailed data of all transactions processed at POS workstations
throughout the day.
Figure 11-46: Electronic Journal Reports Screen (By Transaction)
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-123
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Report (By
Transaction) screen are:
Available Dates: This field lists the date on which electronic journal
information is available. Click on the desired date.
Transaction Ranges: This field lists the range of starting and ending
transaction numbers available for the selected date. Click on the
desired range.
Beginning Transaction Number: Enter the starting transaction
number.
Ending Transaction Number: Enter the ending transaction number.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Report (By
Transaction) screen are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to process the report
based on user-defined search criteria entered in data fields.
Note: The PRINT button becomes available once the report is
processed.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports (By Transaction)
screen.
11-124 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Producing Electronic Journal Reports
From the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports screen, select the
desired date from the list of available dates in the Date field. Click on
the desired range of transactions for the report. If desired, alter the
Beginning and Ending Transaction Numbers. Press ENTER to advance
the operator to the next field. Click on the PREPARE button once the
desired search criteria is entered. The system processes the report and
prints it to the screen. The horizontal and vertical scroll bars enable the
operator to move around in the electronic journal report. The PRINT
button is now available. Press PRINT to print a hard copy of the
Electronic Journal Report.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-125
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Electronic Journal Report (By Transaction)
are:
Transaction #: This field displays the receipt number for any given
transaction. The first two digits of this eight-digit field identify the
lane number. The remaining digits are the transaction number.
Cashier #: This field displays the cashier’s three-digit employee
number.
UPC: This field identifies a specific product. Each product has an
unique UPC number.
Description: This field provides a description of the UPC item sold.
Qty: This field displays the quantity or weight of items scanned during
the transaction.
Price: This field displays the total price for the quantity of items sold
during the transaction.
Status: This field displays the status of the item (food stamp or taxable
status). FS = Food Stamps; T1, T2, or T3 = Tax Status.
Action: This field displays whether the items were scanned or key
entered.
Unit Type: This field displays specific information about the item’s
attributes. For example, this field could show if the item is a scale item,
a store coupon, a split item.
Sub Total (Without tax): This field displays the total of the sale
without tax.
Tax 1, 2, & 3: This field displays the amount of the tax collected.
Subtotal (With Tax): This field displays the total of the sale with tax.
Payment Type: This field displays the method of payment for the
transaction.
Item Count: This field displays the total number of items in the sale.
Transaction Started At: This field displays when the first item was
scanned or key-entered into the system.
11-126 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Transaction Finished At: This field displays the time of final tender.
Total Transaction Time: This field displays the difference between the
transaction start and finish times.
Idle Time Between Sales: This field displays the time since the end of
the previous sale to the beginning of the current sale.
Total Ringing Time: This field displays the total amount of time it took
to ring a transaction.
Total Tender Time: This field displays the total amount of time it took
to tender a transaction.
Effective Scan Rate: This field displays the number of scanned entries
per minute for a transaction.
Scanned Entries: This field displays the number of items scanned for a
specific transaction.
Keyed Entries: This field displays the number of items key-entered for
a specific transaction.
Open Department Entries: This field displays the number of open
department entries for a specific transaction.
Note: Electronic Journal Report includes the cashier’s opening
(signon) and closing (signoff) media fields with amounts.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-127
EJ By Cashier
Electronic Journal Reports (By Cashier) is the eighth option on the
ScanMaster Reports Menu. Click on that button (or press Alt-J) to
access the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports (By Cashier) screen.
This option enables the user to select specific electronic journal
transactions by cashier. Electronic Journal files contain detailed data of
all transactions processed at POS workstations throughout the day.
Figure 11-47: Electronic Journal Reports Screen (By Cashier)
11-128 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Report (By
Cashier) screen are:
Available Dates: This field lists the date on which electronic journal
information is available. Click on the desired date.
Transaction Ranges: This field lists the range of starting and ending
transaction numbers available for the selected date. Click on the
desired range.
Available Cashiers: This field lists the available cashiers on which
electronic journal is available. Click on the desired cashier.
Beginning Transaction Number: Enter the starting transaction
number.
Ending Transaction Number: Enter the ending transaction number.
Button Options
Button options for the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports screen
are:
EXIT: Click on this button (or press Alt-X) to exit to the ScanMaster
Reports Menu.
PREPARE: Click on this button (or press Alt-P) to process the report
based on user-defined search criteria entered in data fields.
Note: The PRINT button becomes available once the report is
processed.
ABOUT: Click on this button (or press Alt-A) for software information
about the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports screen.
Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports 11-129
Producing Electronic Journal Reports
From the ScanMaster Electronic Journal Reports screen, select the
desired date from the list of available dates in the Date field. Click on
the desired cashiers and range of transactions for the report. If desired,
alter the Beginning and Ending Transaction Numbers. Press ENTER to
advance the operator to the next field. Click on the PREPARE button
once the desired search criteria is entered. The system processes the
report and prints it to the screen. The horizontal and vertical scroll bars
enable the operator to move around in the electronic journal report.
The PRINT button is now available. Press PRINT to print a hard copy
of the Electronic Journal Report.
Report Field Descriptions
Field descriptions for the Electronic Journal Report are:
Transaction #: This field displays the receipt number for any given
transaction. The first two digits of this eight-digit field identify the
lane number. The remaining digits are the transaction number.
Cashier #: This field displays the cashier’s three-digit employee
number.
UPC: This field identifies a specific product. Each product has an
unique UPC number.
Description: This field provides a description of the UPC item sold.
Qty: This field displays the quantity or weight of items scanned during
the transaction.
Price: This field displays the total price for the quantity of items sold
during the transaction.
Status: This field displays the status of the item (food stamp or taxable
status). FS = Food Stamps; T1, T2, or T3 = Tax Status.
Action: This field displays whether the items were scanned or key
entered.
Unit Type: This field displays specific information about the item’s
attributes. For example, this field could show if the item is a scale item,
a store coupon, a split item.
11-130 Chapter 11: Producing and Interpreting System Reports
Sub Total (Without tax): This field displays the total of the sale
without tax.
Tax 1, 2, & 3: This field displays the amount of the tax collected.
Subtotal (With Tax): This field displays the total of the sale with tax.
Payment Type: This field displays the method of payment for the
transaction.
Item Count: This field displays the total number of items in the sale.
Transaction Started At: This field displays when the first item was
scanned or key-entered into the system.
Transaction Finished At: This field displays the time of final tender.
Total Transaction Time: This field displays the difference between the
transaction start and finish times.
Idle Time Between Sales: This field displays the time since the end of
the previous sale to the beginning of the current sale.
Total Ringing Time: This field displays the total amount of time it took
to ring a transaction.
Total Tender Time: This field displays the total amount of time it took
to tender a transaction.
Effective Scan Rate: This field displays the number of scanned entries
per minute for a transaction.
Scanned Entries: This field displays the number of items scanned for a
specific transaction.
Keyed Entries: This field displays the number of items key-entered for
a specific transaction.
Open Department Entries: This field displays the number of open
department entries for a specific transaction.
Note: Electronic Journal Report includes the cashier’s opening
(signon) and closing (signoff) media fields with amounts.
Appendix A:
Personalization Survey and Setup
Guide
Since each customer using the ScanMaster System has different needs,
it was developed with flexibility in mind. Therefore, many userdefined selections were built into the system to help customers meet
their needs.
Most of these user-defined features are found under the System
Personalization Menu. Selecting the various options in each of these
files helps users customize their system.
Customer Survey
Prior to installing the ScanMaster System, a customer survey is
conducted to determine that customer’s specific needs. This survey
deals with the system’s various control files. Through it, a proper
configuration for that customer is established.
In the event a customer’s needs change over the years, system
personalization options can change to meet those needs.
A-2
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Set-Up Preparation
When installing the ScanMaster System, consider the following data
when customizing your system.
Item File
•
Item File
•
Mix & Match Maintenance
•
Flip Chart Maintenance
•
Promotion/Coupon Editor
•
Bottle Link Editor
•
Report Codes
•
Tare Table
•
Variable Tare Table
•
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
•
Bundle File Maintenance
•
Adjective Price Maintenance
Employee File
•
Employee File
•
Enhanced Security
Department File
•
Department File
•
Subdepartment File
•
Department Restriction Table
•
Group Descriptors
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Customer File
•
Negative Check File
•
Customer File
•
Check / Charge Reason Codes
•
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix
Personalization
•
Register Control File
•
Back Office Control File
•
Banner File
•
Reason Codes
•
Tax Table
•
Keyboard Configurator
•
Media Configurator
•
Foreign Currency Rate Editor
•
Tax Code Editor
•
SRR Editor
•
Communication Parameters
•
Customer CRT Promo Editor
A-3
A-4
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Customer Data Sheet
Customer Information
Customer Name:
Customer Address:
Phone:
Fax:
Modem:
Installation Information
Install Date:
Training Dates / Hours:
Live Support Dates / Hours:
Live Date:
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Store Information
Please list the appropriate store personnel to contact.
Name
Comments / Requirements
Job Title / Responsibility
Phone
A-5
A-6
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Item File
The Item File can be manually entered, host provided or possibly
derived from an existing system converted into ScanMaster format.
Figure A-1: ScanMaster Item File Menu Screen
Who and when to provide TEST file:__________________________
Who and when to provide LIVE file: __________________________
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
A-7
Mix & Match Maintenance
This feature lists all the Mix & Match records on the system and
enables the user to perform maintenance on those records. There are
nine hundred and ninety-nine (999) Mix & Match records available.
The purpose of the Mix & Match file is to permit scanning of different
UPCs with the same price to be associated together for split price or
limited quantity price breaks (such as Kool-Aid or Jell-O). The Mix &
Match file permits a descriptor to be associated with the Mix & Match
record.
The Mix & Match pop-up window displays in the item file when the
Mix & Match field is accessed. A Mix & Match record may also be
created in Direct Item Maintenance.
Figure A-2: Mix and Match Record Maintenance
A-8
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Flip Chart Maintenance
This feature builds the Preset Menus that display store code numbers
at the POS workstation. There are two ScanMaster Flip Chart
Maintenance screens. The first screen displays a list of available
departments. The second screen enables the user to assign look-up
codes to the selected department.
From the Flip Chart Maintenance screen, you can select the desired
department on which you want to perform flip chart maintenance.
Simply click on the desired department and the ScanMaster Flip Chart
Maintenance edit screen displays.
Figure A-3: Flip Chart Maintenance Screen (List)
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
A-9
Promotion / Coupon Editor
Through Promotion/Coupon Editor, you can create or edit coupons (or
promotional advertisements) that print at the end of the customer’s
receipt if the transaction meets the system criteria.
Promotion/Coupons can print by random winner, frequent shopper,
over/under total sale, over/under department sale, and by a link to a
UPC. There can be up to 9999 promotion/coupons created on the
system.
Figure A-4: Promotion/Coupon Editor Screen
A-10 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Bottle Link Editor
This feature permits the user to link a bottle deposit amount to an item
and to different departments. There can be up to ninety-nine (99)
bottle links created on the system. The bottle link table can be viewed
from the Direct Item Maintenance screen. It is found in the lower left
corner above the button options.
Figure A-5: Bottle Link Maintenance
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-11
Report Codes
The report code table associates a descriptor to a report code number.
There are ninety-nine report codes available through Item
Maintenance. Report codes can be used to group items into specific
categories for reporting purposes. For example, all products from
Company A can be grouped under a specific report code.
Figure A-6: Reason Code Maintenance Screen
A-12 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Tare Table
This feature permits you to assign up to 99 associated weight values to
specific tare items. Tare items are products that must be weighed to
determine their price. The tare value is the weight of the package the
product is placed in. Tare codes 1 through 79 are reserved for Fixed
Tare Codes, where the weight of the package is consistent regardless of
the amount of product purchased. Tare codes 80-98 are reserved for
Variable Tare Codes, where the weight of the package varies with the
amount of product purchased. An item with a tare code of 99 prompts
the cashier to manually enter a tare code.
Figure A-7: Fixed Tare Table Maintenance
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-13
Variable Tare Tables
If this feature is enabled, the system will support multiple package
weights per individual product.
Figure A-8: Variable Tare Table
A-14 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Electronic Coupon Maintenance
This feature enables stores to generate electronic promotions and
provide electronic discounts and frequent shopper benefits.
Figure A-9: Electronic Coupon Maintenance Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-15
Bundle File Maintenance
This feature enables stores to organize a group of items together in a
“bundle” for sale or promotional purposes. Customers get free or
discounted item if all items included the bundle are purchased. Up to
99 bundles can be created in ScanMaster. As many as five and as few
as two items or groupings can be included in the bundle.
Figure A-10: ScanMaster Bundle Maintenance Screen
A-16 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Adjective Price Maintenance
Adjective Pricing and Adjective Price Maintenance features are used to
configure multiple level pricing for a single UPC. Through adjective
price maintenance, stores can use a single UPC to create layers of
pricing for an individual product.
There are two ways to configure Adjective pricing. They are:
•
By Level
•
By Quantity
Figure A-11: Adjective Pricing By Level
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-17
Employee File
Employee File options enable you to add, edit, delete, or view the store
employee file, as well as monitor cashier activity and force logoff of a
cashier. It explains each field associated with employee maintenance,
as well as how to generate and interpret a list of all employees and a
list of active employees.
Employee Name
Employee
Number
Security
Level
Birth
Date
Employee
Password
A-18 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Enhanced Security
Enhanced Security limits employee access to menu options on the
ScanMaster System.
Security is available for each menu item. Main Menu and submenu
options are listed below. Use the Enhanced Security worksheet to
identify security levels for your employees.
Item Maintenance Menu: Direct Item Maintenance; Create/Edit
Batches; Activate Batches; Delete Batches; Print Batches; Mass Attribute
Batches; Convert PLU Report to Batch; Mix & Match Maintenance; Flip
Chart Maintenance; and Miscellaneous Maintenance.
Employee Maintenance: Employee Maintenance; Active
Employee/Lane List; Cashier Monitoring; Force Cashier Logoff;
Enhanced Security; and Active Cashier Status Editor.
Department/Subdepartment Maintenance: Department Maintenance;
Subdepartment Maintenance; Department Restriction Matrix; and
Group Descriptor Maintenance.
Customer Maintenance: Negative Check File Maintenance; Negative
Check Report; Customer File Maintenance; Check/Charge Reason
Codes; Clear Customer Totals; Customer Report; Frequent Shopper
Discount Matrix; and Level Code Maintenance.
System Personalization: Register Control File; Back Office Control
File; Banner File; Reason Code Maintenance; Tax Table Maintenance;
Keyboard Configurator; Media Configurator; Foreign Currency Rate
Editor; Tax Code Editor; SRR Editor; Communication Parameters; and
Customer CRT Promo Editor.
Communications Menu: Call Host; Send PLU File to Host; Get
Electronic Coupon File; Send Coupon Submission; and Kronos
Communication..
Reports Menu: Financial Report Menu; Item File Reports; Electronic
Coupon Reports; Delete Electronic Coupons; Print End-of-Day Reports;
Electronic Journal by Transaction; and Electronic Journal by Cashier..
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-19
Office Procedures: Pickups and Loans; Cashier Settlement; Delay
Cashiers; Office Reconciliation; Deposits; ScanMaster Reconciliation
Report; Adjust Settled Cashiers; Active Cashiers List; Media Flash
Report; and Office Adjustments.
System Services: View Security Log; View/Delete Suspend/Lock
Files; Label Printing; Third Party Menu; Electronic Journal Backup;
System Backup; and View/Print Error Logs.
Miscellaneous Maintenance: Promotion/Coupon Editor; Bottle Link
Editor; Report Code Editor; Tare Table Maintenance; Variable Tare
Maintenance; Electronic Coupon Maintenance; Bundle Code
Maintenance; and Adjective Price Maintenance.
Accounts Receivable Menu: Post A/R Payments; Post A/R Finance
Charges; A/R Month-End Close; A/R Statement Printing; A/R Aging
Report; and A/R Activity Report.
Financial Reports Menu: Department Flash Report; Enhanced
Department Report; Department Historical Report; Department
Activity Report; Hourly Activity Report; Consolidated TLOG Reports;
Summary Audit Trail Reports; Detail Audit Trail Reports; Cashier
Report; Lane Productivity Report; and Non-Resettable Totals Report.
Item File Reports Menu: PLU File Reports; PLU Movement Reports;
Ad Movement Reports; and Clear Item Movement.
Special Menu Access: Keyboard Configurator; User-Defined Menu;
Third Party Menu; and End-of-Day Procedures.
A-20 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Enhanced Security Worksheet
Cashier
Name:
ITEM MAINTENANCE MENU
Direct Item Maint.
Print Batches
Flip Chart Maint.
Create/Edit Batches
Mass Attribute Batches
Misc. Maint
Menu
Activate Batches
Convert PLU Report To Batch
reserved
Delete Batches
Mix & Match Maint.
reserved
EMPLOYEE MAINTENANCE
Employee Maint.
Force Cashier Logoff
reserved
Active Cashier List
Enhanced Security
reserved
Employee List
Active Cashier Status Editor
reserved
Cashier Monitoring
reserved
reserved
DEPARTMENT/SUBDEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE
Dept. Maintenance
reserved
reserved
Subdept. Maint.
reserved
reserved
Dept. Restriction Matrix
reserved
reserved
Group Desc. Maint.
reserved
reserved
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-21
CUSTOMER MAINTENANCE
Neg. Check File Maint.
Clear Cust. Totals
P.C. Expt/Impt
Negative Check Report
Customer Reports
Level Code
Maint
Customer File Maint.
Freq. Shpr. Disc.
Matrix
reserved
Check/Chg. Reason Codes
Accounts Rec. Menu
reserved
SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION
Register Control File
Tax Table Maint.
SRR Editor
Back Office Control File
Keyboard Configurator
Comm. Params
Banner File
Media Configurator
CRT Promo Edit
Reason Code Maint.
Tax Code Editor
Foreign Curr.
Edit
Electronic Coupon Reports
EJ by Transaction
reserved
Delete Electronic Coupons
EJ by Cashier
reserved
APT Coupon Report
reserved
reserved
Print End of Day Reports
reserved
reserved
REPORTS MENU
OFFICE PROCEDURES
Pickups and Loans
Deposits
Media Flash Report
Cashier Settlement
ScanMaster Recon. Report
Office Adjustments
Delay Cashiers
Adjust Settled Cashiers
reserved
Office Reconciliation
Active Cashiers List
reserved
A-22 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
SYSTEM SERVICES
View Security Log
System Back Up
reserved
View/Del. Susp/Lock Files
View/Print Error Logs
reserved
Label Printing
reserved
reserved
Electronic Journal Back Up
reserved
reserved
MISCELLANEOUS MAINTENANCE
Promotion/Coupon Editor
Variable Tare Maintenance
Adj. Price Maint.
Bottle Link Editor
Elec. Coupon Maintenance
reserved
Report Code Editor
APT Coupon Maintenance
reserved
Tare Table Maintenance
Bundle Maintenance
reserved
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE MENU
Post A/R Payments
A/R Aging Report
reserved
Post A/R Finance Charges
A/R Activity Report
reserved
A/R Month End Close
reserved
reserved
A/R Statement Printing
reserved
reserved
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-23
FINANCIAL REPORTS MENU
Department Flash Report
Sum. Audit Trail Reports
Det. Audit Trail
Rpt.
Dept. Historical Report
Cashier Report
Dept. Activity Rpt.
Hourly Activity Report
Enhanced Dept. Report
Lane Prod. Rpt.
Consolidated TLOG Report
Non-Resettable Totals
E.C. by Dept Rpt.
ITEM FILE REPORTS MENU
PLU File Reports
reserved
reserved
PLU Movement Reports
reserved
reserved
Ad Movement Reports
reserved
reserved
Clear Item Movement
reserved
reserved
SPECIAL MENU ACCESS
reserved
Communication Menu
reserved
User Defined Menu
reserved
reserved
Third Party Menu
reserved
reserved
End of Day Procedures
reserved
reserved
View SRR
Edit Imported Totalizers
reserved
Print SRR
Reserved
reserved
Export SRR
reserved
reserved
Edit Handkeyed Totalizers
(500)
reserved
reserved
SRR SECURITY
A-24 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Department File
Through Department Maintenance, you can add, edit, or delete
departments and set associated parameters for those departments.
There can be up to 99 departments on the ScanMaster System.
Figure A-12: Department Maintenance Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-25
Subdepartment Maintenance
Through Department Maintenance, you can add, edit, or delete
subdepartments and set associated parameters for those
subdepartments. There can be up to 999 subdepartments on the
ScanMaster System.
Figure A-13: Subdepartment Maintenance Screen
A-26 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Department Restriction Matrix
This feature enables restrictions to be placed on specific departments,
cashiers and customers. It can be used to restrict the cashier from
selling items if the cashier is under age or it can be used to restrict the
sale of certain items to customers under a certain age. There can be up
to 99 department restrictions on the ScanMaster system.
Figure A-14: Subdepartment Maintenance Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-27
Group Descriptors
This feature enables the creation of group link headings for system
reports. You can create group descriptions, memo descriptions or
both.
Figure A-15: Subdepartment Maintenance Screen
A-28 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Customer File
The Customer File enables the user to create and maintain the negative
or positive check file, the frequent shopper file, and the customer
charge file. This chapter also discusses how to perform reason code
maintenance, clear customer totals, and maintain accounts receivable
records.
Customer Maintenance enables the stores to create a user-defined
customer database. Through this option, a store can set limits, assign
charges and payments, establish store programs, and provide several
Accounts Receivable tracking and reporting programs.
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-29
Negative Check File Maintenance
The Negative Check File creates and maintains a file on customers who
have written bad checks to the store. This alerts the cashier about
customers with a negative check history and prompts for office
interaction. There can be up to 9 user-defined negative check reason
codes. The system default is 0 = Good Account. This code does not
require office interaction.
Figure A-16: Negative Check File Screen
A-30 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Customer File Maintenance
Customer File Maintenance enables you to track customer check
cashing, frequent shopper dollars and points, and in-store charges.
Customer information is entered into the ScanMaster customer
database from this screen.
Figure A-17: Customer File Maintenance Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-31
Check/Charge Reason Codes
You can assign up to nine reason codes each for negative checks,
positive checks, and in-store charges.
Check Reason Codes:
0
Good Account
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Charge Reason Codes:
1
30-60 Days
2
60-90 Days
3
90 Days Past Due
4
Over Limit
5
6
7
8
9
A-32 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix
The Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix permits the user to set up and
define the discount percentage given to frequent shoppers. This matrix
can be set up using frequent shopper dollars or points depending on
the frequent shopper program used by a particular store.
Figure A-18: Frequent Shopper Discount Matrix Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-33
Register Control File Survey
The Register Control File sets control parameters for each POS
workstation on the ScanMaster System.
You can utilize every Register Control File option or select only those
you need. Each POS workstation can have its own control file
parameters.
For detailed information on each field in the Register Control File,
please refer to Chapter 8: Personalization.
A-34 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Register Control File Options
Global/Store Settings
Store #:
Money Order Fee
Store Name
Store Location
Scale Weight in Kilograms
Use Local Item File Update
Enable UPC Linked Store Coupon
Devices Settings
Coin Changer 0=No 1=OCIA 2=Ser
Interface NCR OCIA Scan/Scale
Interface 7870 RS232 scan/scal
Interface 7870 RS232 Scanner
Interface 7880 RS232 scanner
Interface 7890 RS 232 scanner
Interface 960LS RS485 Scan/Scl
Interface 960 LS RS232 Scan/Scl
Interface Space RS 232 Scanner
Interface SP210 RS232 Scanner
Interface 4100 RS232 Scale
Interface Cyberdata 9 bit 7824
Interface ML2010 RS232 Scanner
Interface MS951 RS232 Scanner
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-35
Interface Orion RS232 scan/scl
Interface 960LS RS232 (ICL)
Interface 7835/36/37 Scanner
Enable MICR Reader Support
Enable Video Customer Display
Use 40 Column CID Mode
Beep Scanner On Not Found
Beep Scanner on Manual Item
Beep Scanner on Offline Sale
Beep Scanner on Item Intervent
EFT Settings
Enable APT Interface
Enable Electronic Payment Sys
Universal EFT Auth File Name
Universal EFT Str & Frwd File
Universal EFT Setlemnt File Nam
Electronic Paymt Term Attached
Press Clear After EFT Approval
Exp Year < 71 then Year > 1999
Enable EFT Settlement Capture
EFT Authorization Timeout Secs
Enable EFT Tender Reversal
Print EBT Decline Slip
Configurable Term Amt Verify
A-36 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Disable EFT Logging
Disable Bank Charge Verify
Disable Debit Card Verify
Disable EBT Cash Card Verify
Receipt Settings
Receipt Header Line 1
Receipt Header Line 2
Receipt Header Line 3
Print Cashier Name On Receipt
Item Detail on Journal Printer
Print To Date Frq Shp Totals
To Date Frq Shp Totals Desc
Store CPN Multiple Description
Mfg CPN Multiple Description
Disable Wide Receipt Printing
Disable Wide Validation Print
Disable Wide Debit Slip Print
Enable 7156 Delayed Receipt
Remove Voids from Delayed Rcpt
Print Elec Coupons After Items
Disable Itemized EC on Receipt
Enable Receipt History Capture
Print Dual Delayed Receipts
Disable Cust Name On Receipt
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-37
Disable Cust Name on Sig Slip
Disable Frq Shp # on Receipt
Disable Acct# Print on Receipt
Disable Acct# Print on Sig Slip
Print 2nd Payment Slip for Cust
Disable Prt of IRI CPN Receipt
Disable Chrg Info on Sig Slip
Enable “You Saved” On Receipt
“You Saved” With Store Coupon
“You Saved” With Str Cpn Mult
“You Saved” With Mfg Coupon
“You Saved” With Mfg Cpn Mult
“You Saved” With Str Elec Cpn
“You Saved” With Mfg Elec Cpn
“You Saved” With Key Discount
“You Saved” With Frq Discount
“You Saved” With TPR
Double Wide Receipt Header 1
Double Wide Receipt Header 2
Double Wide Receipt Header 3
Double Wide Receipt Trailer
Double High Mfg & Store Coupon
Double High Coupon Multiple
Double High Mfg & Store EC Cpn
Double High Discount
Double High Subtotal Info
A-38 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Double High Transaction Total
Double High Tenders
Double High Change
Double High You Saved
Double High Return & Refund
Tax Settings
Enable Tax 1
Enable Tax 2
Enable Tax 3
Tax1 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table)
Tax2 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table)
Tax3 Rate ##.####% (0 = Table)
Tax 1 Receipt Description
Tax 2 Receipt Description
Tax 3 Receipt Description
Tax Exempt 1 Forgives All Tax
Use Tax3 Total for Memo Total
Tax3 Memo Total Description
Coupons Settings
Store CPN Multiplier (0 = None)
Mfg CPN Multiplier (0 = None)
Automate Store CPN Multiplier
Automate Mfg CPN Multiplier
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-39
Store CPN Max Amt. To Multiply
Mfg CPN Max Amt. To Multiply
Store CPN Max Result Amount
Mfg CPN Max Result Amount
Store CPN Multiplier2 (0 = None)
Mfg CPN Multiplier2 (0 = None)
Store CPN Max Amt. to Multiply2
Mfg CPN Max Amt. to Multiply2
Store CPN Max Result Amount2
Mfg CPN Max Result Amount2
Price LALO on Store Coupons
Price HALO on Store Coupons
Price LALO on Mfg Coupons
Price HALO on Mfg Coupons
Store CPN Forgives Tax
Store CPN Disc. Forgives Tax
Mfg CPN Forgives Tax
Mfg CPN Disc. Forgives Tax
Check CPN Against Dept. Sales
Scan Cpn Desc (0=dept 1=item)
Check Scan Mfg Cpn in Itm File
Enable Family Code Cpn Check
Disable Scan Mfg Coupons
Allow Scan Mfg Cpn > Itm Price
Enforce Dept Entry on Mfg CPN
A-40 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Discounts Settings
Enable Non Frq Shp Surcharge
Surcharge Percentage ##.##%
Surcharge Description
Disc 1 (1=Item 2=Sale 3=Both)
Disc 2 (1=Item 2=Sale 3=Both)
Disc 4 (1=Item 2=Sale 3=Both)
Disc 5 (1=Item 2=Sale 3=Both)
Disc 1 Fixed % (0=variable %)
Disc 2 Fixed % (0=variable %)
Disc 4 Fixed % (0=variable %)
Disc 5 Fixed % (0=variable %)
Discount 1 Description
Discount 2 Description
Discount 4 Description
Discount 5 Description
Discount 1 Maximum Limit
Discount 2 Maximum Limit
Discount 4 Maximum Limit
Discount 5 Maximum Limit
Verify NSC4 Acct # on Disc 1
Verify NSC4 Acct # on Disc 2
Verify NSC4 Acct # on Disc 4
Verify NSC4 Acct # on Disc 5
Exclude Dsc 1 if Cpn Applied
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-41
Exclude Dsc 2 if Cpn Applied
Exclude Dsc 4 if Cpn Applied
Exclude Dsc 5 if Cpn Applied
Exclude Dsc 1 If Item on Sale
Exclude Dsc 2 If Item on Sale
Exclude Dsc 4 If Item on Sale
Exclude Dsc 5 If Item on Sale
Auto Apply Dsc1 at End of Sale
Auto Apply Dsc2 at End of Sale
Auto Apply Dsc4 at End of Sale
Auto Apply Dsc5 at End of Sale
Total Disc 1 Set During Sale
Total Disc 2 Set During Sale
Total Disc 4 Set During Sale
Total Disc 5 Set During Sale
Minimum Item Count for Disc 1
Minimum Item Count for Disc 2
Minimum Item Count for Disc 4
Minimum Item Count for Disc 5
Minimum Purchase Amt for Disc1
Minimum Purchase Amt for Disc2
Minimum Purchase Amt for Disc4
Minimum Purchase Amt for Disc5
A-42 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Promotions Settings
Enable Enhanced Electronic Cpn
Enable Enhanced Frq Shp Prgm
Frequent Shopper Program Desc.
Electronic Shopper Program Desc.
Prmpt for Frq Sh # at New Sale
Prompt for Freq Shp # at Total
Print Frequent Shopper Msg.
Print Non Freq. Shopper Msg.
Use Item Price Based Points
Use Item/EC Pnts & Bonus Pnts
Item Price Based Points Desc
Points Description
Bonus Points Description
Combine Price Pts & Itm/EC Pts
Combine Points & Bonus Points
Points Format (0=Amt 1=Number)
Frq Shp Level Set In Cust File
Frq Shp Level Match in EC File
Max # of cpns to Prt up to 19
Under Total Sale Amount
Under Total Sale Coupon #
Over Total Sale Amount
Over Total Sale Coupon #
Over Freq. Shopper $$ Amount
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-43
Over Freq. Shopper Coupon #
Freq. Shopper Rollover Amount
Random Winner Probability
Maximum # of Random Winners
Random Winner Coupon #
Frq Shp Stat Set by Chk Verify
Frq Shp Stat Set by ACH Verify
Frq Shp Stat Set by Store Chrg
Minimum Purchase for Elec Cpns
Min Purch Not Reducd by StrCpn
Min Purch Not Reducd by StrDbl
Min Purch Not Reducd by MfgCpn
Min Purch Not Reducd by MfgDbl
Enable Dynamic Customer Build
Dynamic Customer Default Level
Default CID Promotion Number
Display Customer Comment Info
EAN Cust # Trim 0=Right 1=Left
Enable Unvrsl Mrktng Interface
Enable Unvrsl Credit Insertion
Special Promo Description
Special Promo Accum Begin Date
Special Promo Accum Begin Time
Special Promo Accum End Date
Special Promo Accum End Time
Add FS Dollrs to Special Promo
A-44 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Add Points to Special Promo
Add Bonus Pts to Special Promo
UPC Type 4 Cust Num Support
Voids/Refunds Settings
Line Item Void Limit
Total Void Limit
Line Item Refund Limit
Total Refund Limit
Enable Refund Mode Operation
Enable Error Correct Validatn
Enable Void Validation
Enable Refund Validation
Items Settings
Use Manual Tare Entry
Use Auto Not Found Batching
Dept/Plu Status (0=Plu 1=Dept)
Enable Dept # Key Flip Chart
Enable Sales Restriction Table
Cust Age (0=Date 1=Id 2=Both)
Copy Item File at Reg. Update
Disable Halo/Lalo Check on UPC
Enable Variable Tare
Birthdate Display Age Verify
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-45
Enable Department Validation
Flag Sale Itms on Receipt w/ $
Bottle Deposit Description
Reprompt same Item Vis Verify
Allow Manual Weight Entry
Use Var Weight 5 Digit Price
Media Settings
Cash Pickup Warning Amount
Cash Pickup Compulse Amount
FS Pickup Warning Amount
FS Pickup Compulse Amount
FC Pickup Warning Amount
FC Pickup Compulse Amount
Check File (1=Neg 2=Pos 0=none)
Use Paper Check
Use Payroll Check
Use Electronic Check
Payroll Check Max Amount (Mgr)
Payroll Check Overtender (Mgr)
Payroll Check Max Overtender
Use Enhanced Split Qty Calc.
Maximum # Checks / Day
Maximum # Checks / Week
Maximum # Checks / Week
A-46 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Maximum Amount Checks / Day
Maximum Amount Checks / Week
Disable Store Charge Verify
Automatic Check Pay to Field
Use Frq Shp # for Check Verify
Disble Bank Chrg Acct Capture
Enable WIC Sale Mode
Capture Max Wic Check Amount
Check Wic Begin & End Dates
WIC Tender Forgives Tax
Open Drawer Before Chk Validtn
Alarm if Drawer Remains Open
Enable Gift Cert Sold Validatn
Drawer Alarm Delay in Seconds
Use Routing # for Neg Check
Sign On/Off Settings
Print Accountability Receipt
Print Pickup & Loan Receipt
Disable Drawer Open Signon/off
Signoff From Idle in Seconds
One Step Entry for Signon/off
Disable Signon/off Security #
Check Cashier Active Status
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-47
Security Settings
Minimum Security Level for Mgr
No Security if Manager Cashier
Prevent Manager Self-Override
Security On Cancel
Security On Override
Security On Refund
Security On Error Correct
Security On Void
Security On Discount 1
Security On Discount 2
Security On Discount 4
Security On Discount 5
Security On Suspend Sale
Security On Retrieve Sale
Security On Report Function
Security On Utilities
Security On Sale of Gift Cert.
Security On Sale of Money Ord.
Security On Misc. Functions
Security On Paidout
Security On Coupon Paidout
Security On Check Cashing
Security On Media Swap
Security On Rtrn to Item Entry
A-48 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Security On HALO/LALO Errors
Security On Nosale
Security On Tax Exemption
Security On Dynamic Cust Build
Disable Key Entry of Mgr Id
Rtrn to Itm Entry During Tendr
Allow Manager Override of ACH
Utilities Settings
Enable Gift Certificate Sales
Enable Money Order Sales
Enable Paidout Function
Enable Coupon Paidout
Enable Check Cashing Function
Enable Media Swap Function
Misc Settings
Idle mode timeout in seconds
Display Running FS Total
Use Override Reason Code Menu
Use Refund Reason Code Menu
Use Void Reason Code Menu
Disable UPC Repeat Key (ENTER)
Enable Shoppers Hotline
Use Local Scan Resource
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-49
End of Sale Delay in Seconds
Disp Cust Name at End of Sale
Screen Saver Timeout in Sec.
Screen Saver Message
Enable Paidout Acct Flip Chart
Enable Power Fail Recovery
Enable RX Item Interface
Background Screen Color 0-7
Disable Training Mode
Disable Validation in Training
Distribute Multi-Lane EOD Time
Enable Catalina Interface
Use Media Swap Reas. Code Menu
Enable CVC Interface
Financials Settings
Exclude Memo Totals frm Actvty
Enable Lane Accountability
Use Media Counts
Instore Charge Settings
Enable Instore Charge
Display Customer Charge Detail
Allow Charge Only if Balance 0
Amount Compulse on Charge Menu
A-50 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Min Charge Status for Mgr Auth
Print Customer History Msg.
Disable Charge Payment
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-51
Back Office Control File Survey
The Back Office Control File pertains to the set up of the Back Office
PC, the File Server PC, and additional workstation PCs. Back Office
workstations may be configured slightly different.
For detailed information on each field in the Back Office Control File,
please refer to the Chapter 8: Personalization in the ScanMaster User’s
Guide.
Back Office Control File Options
RAM Drive Designator
Store #
Store Name For Reports
Are Subdepartments Used
Force Freq. Shopper Bit On
Page Host Batches in UPC Order
# of Days of TLOG to Save
Days of Hist. Archives to Save
Weight in LBS (Y) (N) = KG
Sec. Level on Item Maint.
Sec. Level on Employee Mnt.
Sec. Level on Department Mnt.
Sec. Level on Personalization
Sec. Level on Communications
Sec. Level on Reporting
Sec. Level on Day End
Sec. Level on Office Proc.
Sec. Level on System Services
Money Order Fee
Use Store Spreadsheet
A-52 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
End Week on Day # (SUN=1)
ST Coup O/S Add Into Net O/S
MFG Coup O/S Add Into Net O/S
Use Enhanced Security
Accountability by Lane
GiftCert O/S add into net O/S:
Print Cashier Log Files
# of Decimal Places in Cost:
Turn On Accounts Receivable
Company Name
Company Address
Company City, State, Zip
Company Telephone Number
Use Real Time Item Movement
Registers do Local Item Update
Use Shrink Trax Interface
Use Normal Balancing Mode
Add Formfeed to End of Reports
Treat Cashier O/S as Memo
Treat Office O/S as Memo
Add DBL Vendor Coupon to Sales
Add Store Coupon to Sales
Add DBL Store Coup to Sales
Description for TAX1
Description for TAX2
Description for TAX3
Days Historical Data to Save
Weeks of SRR to Save
Use Auto Pickup Feature
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-53
Third Party DSD Installed
This PC Processes TLOGS
This PC Does End-Of-Day
Use Item Trail Feature
Use Coupon Linking Feature
Freq Shopper $$$ (N) or Pnts (Y)
Allow Item Delete w/ Movement
Commodity Code = Family Code
Print Charge Log Information
No Zero/Neg Balances AR Stmnt
No Printer Graphics AR Stmnt
Num of Deposit Accounts (1-3)
Calc SRR on Current Line
Settle Media Counts
Finance Charges Compounded
EJ Reports use Ehncd Elc Coup
Electronic Journal Installed
Hide NRT Totals from EJ Rpts
Enable Host Batch Separation
Logoff Windows after EOD
Point Description
Bonus Point Description
Freq. Shop. Level set Manually
Allow Mult Same ECPN-FRQSP Lvl
Default Elec. Coupon Dept.
Enable EJ Processor on this PC
Enable 7800 on this PC
Enable 2100 Interface
Lbl App 1=UG 2=General 0=Both
A-54 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Item Host Update Recs Dont Add
# of Days of EFT Log to Save
Show Suspended Sales at EOD
Run Elec. Coupon Fix at EOD
Create Daily Movement Files
Is EBO Installed
Do Not Include Cpns in Movement
Use Margin (Y) or Markup (N)
Allow Deletes in Batches
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-55
Banner File
The Banner File is the scrolling message on the customer display that
displays during idle time on the POS workstation. Customized
advertising or customer messages can be displayed through this
banner.
The Banner File consists of ten (10) lines of fifty-six (56) characters.
Figure A-19: Banner File Maintenance Screen
A-56 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Reason Code Maintenance
The Reason Code Maintenance screen is where you set up reasons for
Overrides, Refunds, Voids and Media Swaps that appear on the POS
workstations. The reason codes appear on the override, refund, void
and media swap report by cashier and by item.
Overrides: Overrides reasons permit you to change the price of a PLU
at the POS workstation. This price change only effects one line item,
not the price in the item file. You can define up to four override
reasons that display when a cashier performs an override.
Refunds: Refund reasons permit you to issue refunds based on the
reasons defined. You can define up to four refund reasons that display
when a cashier performs a refund.
Voids: Void reasons permit you to void a transaction based on the
reasons defined. You can define up to four void reasons that display
when a cashier performs a void.
Media Swaps: Media Swap reasons permit you to specify a reason for
correcting tender errors after a transaction is completed. You can
define up to for media swap reasons that display when a cashier
performs a media swap.
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-57
Reason Code Reasons
Overrides:
Refunds:
Voids:
Media
Swaps:
A-58 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Tax Table Maintenance
The ScanMaster system can have up to three tax tables. Tax Table
Maintenance enables you to configure Tax Tables 1-3 with exception
ranges.
The ScanMaster Tax Table is enabled from the Register Control File’s
“Tax Rate ##.####%(0=Table)” setting. If this feature is not enabled
(with a setting of 000000), the POS workstation will use a table to
calculate the tax. If a rate is entered, it will use the percent rate entered
in this Register Control File setting instead.
Figure A-20: Banner File Maintenance Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-59
Keyboard Configurator
The Keyboard Configurator enables you to customize the POS
workstation keyboard. You can assign department keys, and
function/tender keys for the POS workstation.
Keyboard Options
There are four different keyboard options. They are:
•
DynaKey Configurator
•
NCR 56 Key Configurator
•
NCR 64 Key Configurator
•
NCR 7445 (Falcon) Key Configurator
Each POS workstation on the system can be configured the same way
or each can be configured differently.
Figure A-21: DynaKey Keyboard Configurator
A-60 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Figure A-22: NCR 56 Key Configurator Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-61
Figure A-23: NCR 7445 (Falcon) Keyboard Configurator
A-62 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Media Configurator
This option enables you to customize the system media fields. There
are 22 media fields available to customize. Those fields and their
default settings are listed below.
Cash
The following configuration options are available for the Cash media.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Check
The following configuration options are available for the Check media.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-63
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N)
Off-line Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
A-64 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Foreign Currency
The following configuration options are available for Foreign Currency
Media.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Media Description
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-65
ACH (Electronic Check)
The following configuration options are available for the ACH
(Electronic Check) media.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Enable Check Writing (Y/N)
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
A-66 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N)
Off-line Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-67
Debit Card
The following configuration options are available for the Debit Card
media.
Enable This Media (Y/N)
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Allow Refund (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
A-68 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N)
Off-line Tender Limit
Capture Gen # On Manual Entry
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-69
Master Card, Visa, American Express & Discover
The following configuration options are available for the Master Card,
Visa, American Express & Discover Card media.
Master
Card
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL
2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Check Expiration Date
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Visa
American
Express
Discover
A-70 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N)
Off-line Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-71
In-store Charge
The following configuration options are available for the In-store
Charge media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Check Expiration Date:
Validate (Y/N):
Validation Description:
Validation Line 1:
Validation Line 2:
Validation Line 3:
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N):
Allow Manual Account Entry:
Enable Term Amt Verification:
A-72 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Gift Certificate
The following configuration options are available for the Gift
Certificate media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Allow Refund (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Validate (Y/N):
Validation Description:
Validation Line 1:
Validation Line 2:
Validation Line 3:
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-73
Food Stamps
The following configuration options are available for the Food Stamps
media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Allow Refund (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
A-74 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
WIC
The following configuration options are available for the WIC media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Allow Refund (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Validate (Y/N):
Validation Description:
Validation Line 1:
Validation Line 2:
Validation Line 3:
Enable Check Writing (Y/N):
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-75
Master Card, Visa, American Express & Discover Credit
The following configuration options are available for the Master Card,
Visa, American Express & Discover Card credit media.
Master
Card
Amount Compulse (Y/N)
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.)
Allow Over Tender (Y/N)
Manager Over Tender Limit
Max. Over Tender Limit
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL
2=IMD
Data Capture/Display Prompt
Data Capture Prompt Message
Validate (Y/N)
Validation Description
Validation Line 1
Validation Line 2
Validation Line 3
Print Signature Slip (Y/N)
Media Group Link (0-9)
Allow Pickup (Y/N)
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N)
Allow Loan (Y/N)
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N)
Visa
American
Express
Discover
A-76 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
PIN Entry Required (Y/N)
Maximum Cash Back Amount
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N)
Allow Manual Account Entry
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N)
Off-line Tender Limit
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale
Enable Term Amt Verification
In-store Chg Credit
The following configuration options are available for the In-Store
Charge Credit media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Use Neg/Pos Check (0-2):
Validate (Y/N):
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-77
Validation Description:
Validation Line 1:
Validation Line 2:
Validation Line 3:
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Add to Net Sales (Y/N):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Maximum Cash Back Amount:
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N):
Allow Manual Account Entry:
A-78 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Store Coupon
The following configuration options are available for the Store Coupon
media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
MFG Coupon
The following configuration options are available for the Mfg. Coupon
media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-79
Electronic Food Stamps
The following configuration options are available for the Electronic
Food Stamps media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Allow Refund (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N):
PIN Entry Required (Y/N):
Maximum Cash Back Amount:
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N):
Allow Manual Account Entry:
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N):
Off-line Tender Limit:
Capture Gen # On Manual Entry:
A-80 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale:
Enable Term Amt Verification:
Electronic Benefit Transfer
The following configuration options are available for the Electronic
Benefit Transfer media.
Enable This Media (Y/N):
Amount Compulse (Y/N):
Allow Refund (Y/N):
Max. Tender Amount (Mgr. Req.):
Allow Over Tender (Y/N):
Manager Over Tender Limit:
Max. Over Tender Limit:
Open Drawer 0=NO 1=FINAL 2=IMD:
Data Capture/Display Prompt:
Data Capture Prompt Message:
Print Signature Slip (Y/N):
Media Group Link (0-9):
Allow Pickup (Y/N):
Allow Pickup Counts (Y/N):
Allow Loan (Y/N):
Use Elec Payment Auth (Y/N):
PIN Entry Required (Y/N):
Maximum Cash Back Amount:
Signature Line on Slip (Y/N):
Allow Manual Account Entry:
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-81
Allow Off-line Approval (Y/N):
Off-line Tender Limit:
Capture Gen # On Manual Entry:
Capture Cash Back Amt At Term:
Term Cash Back Display Amt 1:
Term Cash Back Display Amt 2:
1-EFT Void 2-No Return to Sale:
Enable Term Amt Verification:
A-82 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Foreign Currency Rate Editor
The Foreign Currency Rate Editor permits stores to enter the foreign
currency exchange rate ScanMaster uses when calculating between the
face amount and native value.
Figure A-24: Foreign Currency Rate Editor
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-83
Tax Code Editor
The Tax Code Editor allows you to assign a letter to each tax table or
combination of tax tables. This letter is printed on the customer receipt
when that tax table or combination is used.
Figure A-25: Tax Code Editor Screen
A-84 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
SRR Editor
The SRR Editor enables you to develop a customized reconciliation
report that displays all pertinent accounting information for store
balancing under three headings (Paidouts, Receipts & Memos).
Paidouts: The paidouts heading details all store deposits, and
anything paid out from the store safe.
Receipts: The receipts heading details all incoming funds to the store
safe.
Memos: The memos heading details “other” trackable items that are
not considered paidouts or receipts.
Figure A-26: ScanMaster Reconciliation Report (SRR) Editor Screen
Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide A-85
Communication Parameters
This option provides interface parameters for stores using third-party
host communication software on their ScanMaster system. Configure
these parameters to enable your communications software to interface
with ScanMaster.
Comm Software Drive Designator
Comm Software Directory
Comm Software Upload Directory
Comm Software Download Dir.
Store Receive Batch Name
Store Send PLU File Name
Store/VSP Number
Save Store Report Codes
Save Store Departments
Set Discount 1 On
Set Discount 2 On
Save Subdepartment
Save Mix N Match
Save Store Mix N Match
Save Descriptors
Use Alternative Batching
Set Tax2 On if Tax 1 On
Max Number of Items Per Batch
Electronic Coupon File Name
A-86 Appendix A: Personalization Survey and Setup Guide
Communication CRT Promo Editor
This feature is used to set up promotional messages that display on the
customer CRT at each POS workstation.
Figure A-27: Customer CRT Promo Editor Screen
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement